is 
 

 GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 GROUNDED UPON THE DECISIONS « f*~**' 
 
 *4£ 
 
 9t f 
 
 THE FRENCH ACADEMY, 
 
 WHEREIN ALL THE NECESSARY 
 
 RULES, OBSERVATIONS, and EXAMPLES, 
 
 ARE 
 EXHIBITED IN A MANNER ENTIRELY Nfi*fc 
 
 BY JOHN PERELN. 
 
 Necessaria puefis, jucunda senibus. Quintil. 
 
 THE FIFTEENTH EDITION, 
 
 CAREFULLY REVISE!} 
 
 BY C. GROS. 
 
 EDITOR OF MR. PERRIES »Til r 
 
 A lo 
 

 \%\ z 
 
MILORD LYTTELTON. 
 
 MoNSEIGNEUR, 
 
 T^N d&liant cet ouvrage a votre Gran- 
 
 e 
 
 deur, je ne debuterai pas par le pan£- 
 gyrique de la noblesse de votrc iiaissance, et 
 de votre rang: la flatterie ayant 6puis6 
 toutes les nouvelles mani&res de louer les 
 Grands, la seule qui me reste pour celebrer 
 vos qualit^s personnelles, c'est d'oser les 
 passer sous silence. 
 
 Je laisse k votre Patrie la gloire d'ap- 
 plaudir l'homme d'Etat, le Conseiller prive 
 de Sa Majeste, l'ornement de la Society Roya- 
 le, le Lord qui soccupe a Tenrichir de mo- 
 numens plus durables que le marbre. Qu'il 
 ,me soit permis d'admirer THistorien, l'Au- 
 teur, 1'Homme de Lettres. Oui, Mon- 
 seigxfur, l'Angletene vous doit les recher- 
 ches historiques les plus curieitsas et les- plus 
 exactes. La force et la richesse de la langue 
 Angloise paroissent dans tous vos Merits: 
 Vous faites plus, Monseigxeur, vous l'em- 
 bellissez. 
 
 A 2 
 
iv BEDICATION. 
 
 Tous les talens litt&aires sont rehaassds 
 en voire Grandeur, par la protection 
 qu'elle accorde aux Sciences et aux Arts. 
 Le plus grand plaisir pour I'homme de Let* 
 tres, est d'encourager tout ce qui peut con- 
 tribuer a la litterature ; c'est le caractfcre 
 distinctif du grand homme; c'est le votre, 
 Monseigneur, qui ne recherchez pas les 
 louanges, et qui faites tout ce qu'il faut pour 
 les in Writer. 
 
 II ne m'auroit done pas ete facile de trou- 
 ver un autre M6c&ne atiasi cdlfebre par la su- 
 
 p£riorit6 reconnue de son esprit, pour lui 
 presenter cet ouvrage 3 comme a un Juge 
 6rlafr6 et judicieux, qui connoit toutes les 
 beautes reellcs de la langue Francoise, et 
 dont lapprobation entratne naturcllement 
 celle du public: mon ambition sera toujours 
 de nl6riter la v6trc, et d'etre avec le plus 
 profond respect, 
 
 monseigneur, 
 
 De Votre Grandeur, 
 Le tres-humblc et tres-obeissant Serviteur, 
 
 PERRIN. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 /"^_RAMMAR is universally allowed to be an object 
 ^-^ of extensive utility as the foundation of the Arts 
 and Sciences, and a key. to languages in general. An 
 excellent production of this kind was the first work of 
 the late French Academy, who spared no pains to 
 polish and improve their native language, and advance 
 it as near as possible to a state of purity and per- 
 fection. 
 
 I am not insensible, that several authors consider it 
 as an essential part of their prefaces to their respective 
 works, to represent their own performances in the 
 brightest colours, and treat those of others with the 
 greatest severity ; but I rather choose to give, on this 
 occasion, a short analytical account of the present un- 
 dertaking, and then humbly submit the whole to the 
 candid and impartial opinion of the Public. 
 
 Having divided my Grammar into four parts, after 
 a few preliminary observations, I begin the first with 
 the French simple sounds, to which are subjoined all 
 the sounds of the consonants ; and I am fully con- 
 vinced, that any pupil will acquire the genuine 
 French accent with more ease and expedition, by re- 
 peating those invariable sounds with the assistance of a 
 good master, than by the common tiresome rules of 
 pronunciation, which, being grounded on nothing but 
 arbitrary custom, are liable to all its changes and 
 alterations. 
 
 The sounds of the French language are followed 
 by an alphabetical list of many French adjectives, 
 each agreeing in gender and number with a di.f» 
 
 A 3 
 
vl PREFACE. 
 
 ferent substantive, to illustrate it's meaning. Another 
 collection of adjectives, with the manner of placing 
 them before or after their substantives, and their tftg- 
 nification in either case, is likewise exhibited, which 
 cannot fail of contributing towards the scholar's im- 
 provement. 
 
 The second part begins with a short analysis. of the 
 parts of speech, which will enable the pupil to form 
 an idea af the nature and construction of the Gram- 
 mars of other languages, as well as of that of the 
 Prench Tongue : and the two chapters, showing the 
 formation of the feminine gender o\ adjectives accord- 
 ing to the termination, and that of the plural number 
 of nouns, place these subjects in a new light, and are 
 adapted to the meanest capacities. 
 
 As the verb is one of the principal parts of speech, 
 it should always be considered as a primary object 
 in all grammatical works: yet all grammars are de- 
 fective in tthis point, though of the utmost import- 
 ance. In order to do it all the justice in my power, 
 I have fully conjugated, both in French and English, 
 six regular verbs ; and all those that are irregular, in an 
 alphabetical manner. These are followed by particular 
 observations upon defective verbs, and the manner of 
 conjugating them. 
 
 The third part contains the theory and practice of 
 the French language; the former comprehending the 
 rules of syntax, with many new observations, illus- 
 trated by proper examples ; and the latter giving sepa* 
 rate anddistinct exemplifications of the rules and ob- 
 servations of each part of speech, for the scholar's 
 improvement. 
 
 Precepts and practice, rules and examples, must go 
 hand in hand, to impart a thorough knowledge of 
 any tongue whatever. As to the French language, 
 the only way for the pupil to learn it to any valuable 
 purpose is, to lay a good foundation, by becoming 
 well acquainted with it's rules, and then to read pro- 
 per books, or converse with those who speak it in it> 
 
PREFACE. vii 
 
 purity ; but neither reading nor conversation will ever 
 enable him to speak or write it with propriety and 
 elegance, if he be wholly unacquainted with it's fun- 
 damental principles. 
 
 In the fourth part are exhibited the practical irre- 
 gularities of the French Tongue, alphabetically dis- 
 posed, with the appropriate uses of particular words 
 and phrases, warranted by the most approved au- 
 thors, and especially by the decisions of the French 
 Academy. It is needless to point out the great uti- 
 lity of these important articles to those who have 
 made a considerable progress in the language, since 
 they manifestly contain the most elegant and curious 
 of all the French idioms ; some of the rest are inter- 
 spersed among the rules and observations exempli- 
 fied in the third part of this work : and, to render 
 the present undertaking more beneficial, I have in 
 every part of it, and particularly in the conjugation 
 of the verbs, not only in the orthography, but in 
 other respects, had a due regard to the regulations of 
 the Academy. 
 
 Thus I have given a short account of my gram- 
 matical performance, which is far from being an easy 
 task. A Grammar for the use of schools consists of 
 such a variety of parts, and some of them so minute 
 and intricate, that it is a very difficult matter to 
 render it at once concise and comprehensive, and 
 adapt it to the meanest capacities. The subject, per- 
 haps may be deemed low and vulgar; but Virgil ob- 
 serves, that there is in tenui -labor; that such sub- 
 jects require pains and application. Quintilian also 
 assures, us, that such works plus habent operis quam 
 ostentationis ; that they are laborious, though not 
 splendid, productions. 
 
 General utility was the object I principally re- 
 garded in the execution of my design. I have 
 omitted no necessary rules or observations; those 
 that I have inserted are just, and illustrated by pro- 
 ber examples j while, at the same time, I have had 
 
viii PREFACE. 
 
 brevity in view, as far as it could be pursued without 
 obscurity and confusion. But, though I have taken 
 all the care in my power to render the follpwing 
 sheets correct, I make no doubt, that unavoidable 
 errors have escaped my utmost attention; for my 
 own experience confirms the truth of what Mr. Pope 
 asserts in the following words : 
 
 <l Whoever thinks a faultless piece to see, 
 
 " Thinks what ne'er was, nor is, nor e'er skall be." 
 
 However, if, upon a candid and impartial exami- 
 nation, the present should be found a well-conducted 
 undertaking, I am not without hopes, that my invo- 
 luntary errors will be favoured with the reader's in- 
 dulgence; which Horace represents as a reasonable 
 practice, in these lines : 
 
 Verum uli plura ntienh , non ego panels 
 
 Offendar maculis, quas ant incuria fndit, 
 Aut humana pa rum cavit natura* 
 
 N. B. In this edition the less essential rules are 
 printed in a smaller type than the more important, that 
 the Scholar may perceive what he o*ught chiefly to con- 
 sider and learn, leaving the minuter observations to a 
 farther inquiry ; the Definitions have been somewhat 
 altered, in order to attain greater perspicuity : and the 
 Practical Examples have been numbered, so as to refer 
 to the Rules, and to the Author's Book of Exercises, 
 both of which are numbered in like manner. 
 
CONTENTS* 
 
 Preliminary observations 
 PART I. 
 
 FAGE 
 1 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 €f Pronunciation - - » » 3 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 jTi&* $<?#;&& */*/& Consonants 5 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 ^ Alphabetical List of many of the Trench Adjee- 
 ject'wes, each Agreeing in Gender and Number with 
 a different Subttanti<ve y to illustrate it's Meaning J 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 jj List of Adjectives, with the Manner of their be* 
 ing placed before or after their Substantives y and 
 their Signification in either case - - 23 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 Of the marks and Points used in writing French 26 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of Accents made use of in writing French - - 27 
 
 A Vocabulary } French and English - - 3 r 
 
 Familiar and easy Dialogues for young Beginners 3.7 
 
 PART II. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 A short Analysis of the Parts of Speech • . ' JI 
 
 CHAP II. 
 
 Of Genders - - . $6 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Formation of the Feminine Gender of Ad- 
 jectiiiii - • - - - - 60 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PACF 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 Of the Formation of Plural Nouns - 6 1 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 The Dtdension of Nouns - -> W 62 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of Pronouns - ~- 66 
 
 Sect. I. Of Personal Pronouns - - ib. 
 
 Sect. II. Of Possessive Pronouns - - 68 
 
 Sect. III. Of Demonstrative Pronouns - 69 
 
 Sect. IV. Of Relative Pronouns » - 70 
 
 Sect. V. Of Interrogative Pronouns -• - ib. 
 
 Sect. VI, Of Indefinite Pronouns »• - 71 
 
 CHAP. VU. 
 
 Of Verhs -- - - - 72 
 
 preliminary Observations - • - ib. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verhs - - 73 
 
 Conjugation of the Regular Verbs - - 77 
 Termination of the Primitive Tenses of the regular 
 
 Verbs - - . ib. 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs, alphabetically 88 
 Particular Observations upon some Verbs y chiefly de- 
 fective y and their Manner of being conjugated and 
 
 used y in Alphabetical Order - - - 1 4 2 
 
 PART III. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Theory joined to Practice - - • 147 
 
 Rules and Observations upon the Articles - lb. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon the Articles exemplified 
 
 for the Scholar's Practice » - .151 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Rules avd Observations upon Norms - - 1 59 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Nouns exemplified for 
 
 the Scholar's Practice. - * . l6l 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Pronouns «■ • 166 
 
CONTENTS. ^ 
 
 CHAP, IV. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon the Degrees of Com- 
 parison m ' 
 
 The Degrees of Comparison exemplified for the Scholar's 
 Practice 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Sect. I. Personal Pronouns - m j^fi 
 
 Personal Pronouns exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice ... „ I7I 
 
 Sect. II. Possessive Pronouns - „ -176 
 
 Possessive Pronouns exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice . . j * g 
 
 S^atTYl. Demonstrative Pronouns — _ jg 2 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice _ .» jg,. 
 
 Sect, IV. Relative Pronouns - . .. jgg 
 
 Relative Pronouns exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice _» ^ 2 gg 
 
 Sect. V. Interrogative Pronouns . m iqi 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice . , lqz 
 
 Sect, VI. Indefinite or Indeterminate Pronouns i q4t 
 
 Indeterminate Pronouns exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice . m 1QQ 
 
 Se CT. VII. The Supplying Pronouns ]e, en,-y 2 Qg 
 
 Supplying Pronouns exemplified for the 
 Scholar's Practice 
 
 209 
 216 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Verbs * 
 
 Sect. I. The VseofTnses I I 
 
 The Tenses of Verbs exemplified for the 
 Scholar 1 1 Practice 
 SECT. II. 73* <7„ of the Subjective Mood * "l 
 
 72* Subjunctive Mood exemplified for the 
 
 Scholar's Practice n „. 
 
 SECT. III. 7& Government of Verbs . 
 
 The Government of Verbs exemplified for 
 
 22 2 
 
 224 
 
 - //fc Scholar's Practice 
 
 240 
 2 43 
 
xu 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP, VI. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs 
 Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs ex- 
 amplified for the Scholar's Practice 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Rules and Observations Upon the Participles 
 Sect. I, The Active or Present Participle 
 Sect. II. The Passive or Past Participle 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Participles 
 exemplified far the Scholar's Practice 
 
 exemplified 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Adverbs 
 Rules and Observations tipou Adverl 
 for the Scholar's Practice 
 
 CHAP IX. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Prepositions 
 Remarks upon some Prepositions - 
 Further Remark upons the Prepositions a and de 
 Rules and Observations upon Prepositions exemplified 
 for the Scholar's Practice - 
 
 CHAP. X; 
 
 Observations upon the Conjunctions si and que 
 The Conjunctions que exemplified for the Scholar's 
 Practice - 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 Practical Irregularities of the French Tongue alpha- 
 beticallj disposed, vjith the appropriate Uses of 
 particular Words and Phrases, warranted by the 
 most approved Authors, and especially by the Deci- 
 lions of the Fr r NCH Ac a d B M y 
 
 249 
 252 
 
 ib. 
 
 259 
 
 260 
 
 265 
 
 267 
 
 276 
 276 
 281 
 
 28: 
 
 293 
 294 
 
 ?99 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 jO RAM MAR is. a- collection of observations, to which 
 ^-* the manner of speaking or writing, used in a Ian- 
 gage, may be reduced. 
 
 This definition explains the natu r e of Grammar in ge- 
 neral, and agrees both with the dead and living languages. 
 However, to have a clear and exact idea of the Fre.-ch 
 Grammar, we may define it in the following manner : 
 
 The French Grammar is a collection of observations 
 drawn from approved custom, to which the manner of 
 speaking or writing French may be reduced. 
 
 Firsr, The French Grammar is a collection of oh nervations ', 
 established only by accident or fancy, independent- of 
 reason, like fashion in dress. For a language is. no- 
 thing more than the manner wherein a certain number of 
 men have insensibly agreed to express their thoughts to 
 each other. 
 
 Secondly, Drawn from approved Custom, which is the 
 actual manner ef, speaking or writing used by the majority 
 of persons eminent for wit and learning. 
 
 Thirdly, To these observations the. manner of speaking rr 
 nvrifitfg French may be reduced: for, as we convey" 
 ideas not only by speech, but likewise by writing, so the 
 manner of speaking or writing French is to be reduced to 
 observations drawn from approved custom. 
 
 Pronunciation is the manner of expressing by speech 
 the several sounds of a language, agreeably to the most 
 approved custom. 
 
 B 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, 
 P, Q> K S, T, U, V, X, Y, Z. 
 
 a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, p, q, r, 
 s, t, u, v, x, y, z. 
 
 THE VOWELS, 
 
 As they are pronounced in spelling, 
 
 a, e, i, o, u. 
 
 ANOTHER SCALE. 
 
 a, e, e, e, i, o, u, ou. 
 
 The scale of vowels or simple sounds may be in- 
 creased ; for there are in French several other simple 
 sounds, which are commonly represented by two letters, 
 as by eu in beureuxy peureux* 
 
 THE CONSONANTS, 
 b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, 
 
 V, X, z. 
 
 The above characters may be pronounced according to 
 the English way, by annexing to them any vowel either 
 before or after. 
 5 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of Pronunciation. 
 
 FN order to give a just and exact idea of the pronunci- 
 -*- ation of a language, it is principally necessary to dis- 
 tinguish, as clearly a^ possible, all the different sounds 
 used in the language, without any regard to the letters 
 made use of to express those sounds ; because a language, 
 as French, English, &c, may express different sounds 
 by the same characters, and the same sounds by different 
 characters. 
 
 The seventeen French simple Sounds, with the English JFords 
 in nvhich the same rounds are found* 
 
 I. 
 
 a short, sounded 
 
 as a in 
 
 hoi 
 
 2. 
 
 a long. 
 
 a 
 
 all 
 
 ** 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 battery 
 
 4- 
 
 e acute y 
 
 a 
 
 paper 
 
 5- 
 
 e grave. 
 
 e 
 
 mat 
 
 6. 
 
 e circumflex, 
 
 e 
 
 there 
 
 7- 
 
 i short or long. 
 
 i 
 
 big 
 
 8. 
 
 O short. 
 
 
 
 pot 
 
 9- 
 
 long. 
 
 
 
 bone 
 
 10. 
 
 u short or long, 
 
 no similar sound 
 
 i i. 
 
 eu short. 
 
 u 
 
 tub 
 
 12. 
 
 eu longy 
 
 no similar sound 
 
 13. 
 
 ou short or longy 
 
 
 
 who 
 
 14. 
 
 an "J 
 
 
 
 *5- 
 
 16. 
 
 onf 
 
 no exact similar 
 
 *7- 
 
 uoj 
 
 
 
 * 2 
 
^ A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 In the above table of the French Sounds, there «re six 
 that -cannot be exactly represented, and therefore muse be 
 heard from the master. Nevertheless, an idea' may be 
 given of their pronunciation, by the following observa- 
 tions. 
 
 To pronounce the tenth sound u, pronounce first e y as in 
 English ; and then, without the least change in the position 
 of your organs, but simply closing the lips a little, you 
 articulate the sound ». 
 
 The twelfth sound eu long, is pronounced by the same 
 motion of the organs as the French u y only not closing so 
 much the lips. 
 
 The four last sounds, which are called the nasal vowels, 
 have this peculiarity, that the n is not heard at all ; other- 
 wise they should be sounded, en as en in the English word 
 encore; in as en y in entire; on as on y in bond; and- un as 
 tifti in bunch. 
 
 Several of these simple sounds may be combined toge- 
 ther, and form in one syllable, a compound sound, called a 
 diphthong. 
 
 The seventh sound i coalescing with the first, the fourth, 
 the fifth, the .eighth, the tenth, the eleventh, the thir- 
 teenth, the fourteenth, the fifteenth and the sixteenth, forms 
 the diphthongs ia y ie y ie y io } iu y ieu y iou y ian y ien and ion, as 
 •in fiacre , hackney-coach; amitie y friendship; biere y beer; 
 <violon y violin ; re liu re , binding; 7tiieux y better; chiourme y 
 galley's crew; <viande y meat ; chre!kn y christian; and 
 passion y passion. 
 
 The seventh soand a coalescing with the second, the 
 fifth, and the fifteenth, forms the diphthongs oc* y ci*, 
 and oin y as boete y box ; <voisin y neighbour ; and besoin y 
 want. 
 
 The tenth sound u coalescing, with the first, the fourth, 
 the fifth, the seventh, the eighth, the eleventh, the twelfth, 
 the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the sixteenth, forms the 
 diphthongs ua y ue y ue, ui % uo y ueu short, u:u long, uan y xiu y 
 and uon y as nuage y cloud ; denue y stript ; menuet s minuet ; 
 huisson y bush; impetuosite y impetuosity; Iuiur y glimmering; 
 
 * In these two diphthongs, e and i lofe their natural sound, to 
 « that of a long, and i that of <? srave. 
 
 2 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, f 
 
 majesteuXj majestical * nuance y shade ; Juin> June ; and 
 
 tious tuonSy we kill. 
 
 The thirteenth sound qu coalescing with the first, thz 
 fourth, the fifth, the seventh, the eleventh, the twelfth, the 
 fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the sixteenth, forms the diph- 
 thongs otta. ov-e, one, uni, oueu, short, oueu long, ciuh:. oniric 
 and Quon, as rohage> wheelwork ; dejoue frustrated ; fouetter y 
 to whip ; ca?nbouis, coom ; boueur^ dustman ; noueux> knotty ; 
 §ouange y praise j babcitin y baboon, and noti s joucns^ we play. 
 
 N. B. The greatest part of the seventeen simple ■ French sounds 
 may be represented by a coalition of other letters* fer Which S-: 
 Practise ©f t&z French PkdNimeiAf 14& 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 t Sounds of the Consonants, 
 
 Sounds. 
 
 J3 has-. I b, bouquet^ a ntsegay 
 
 C, 3 k, coffre, a trunk 
 
 s, cierge, a wax. candle 
 
 g, second, second 
 Cfw z sh, (English) chocolat, chtm 
 
 colate 
 
 k, echo, echo 
 P, 2 d, donner, to give 
 
 t, que verW-il ? what does 
 he sell? 
 F 2 2 f, vif, quick, 
 
 v, neu^ homines, nine men 
 
 * 3 
 
A 8RAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Sounds. 
 
 Gr, 
 
 3 
 
 g> 
 
 gazon, /#r/* 
 
 
 
 j» 
 
 geant, a giant 
 
 
 
 kj 
 
 bourg, a borough 
 
 Gn, liquid, 
 
 
 
 dignite, dignity 
 
 not liquid, 
 
 
 
 stagnation, stagnation 
 
 H, pronounced, 
 
 
 
 heros, a hero 
 
 not pronounced, 
 
 
 
 heroine, a he rein e 
 
 L, liquid 
 
 
 
 fille, a girl 
 
 not liquid, 
 
 
 
 fil, thread 
 
 M, 
 
 2 
 
 m, 
 
 mon, my 
 
 
 
 «i 
 
 non, a name 
 
 N, nasal, 
 
 
 
 chien, a dog 
 
 not nasal, 
 
 
 
 bien aise, 'very glad 
 
 P, 
 
 I 
 
 
 precepreur, a preceptor 
 
 Q, followed by «, 
 
 
 k, 
 
 quatre, four 
 
 R, 
 
 I 
 
 
 miroir, a looking glass 
 
 s, 
 
 2 
 
 s, 
 
 sage, wise 
 
 
 
 z> 
 
 rose, a rose 
 
 T, 
 
 2 
 
 t, 
 
 a m i t i e , friendship . 
 
 
 
 s> 
 
 patience, patience 
 
 v, 
 
 I 
 
 
 vertu, 'virtue 
 
 X, 
 
 4 
 
 ks 
 
 , sexe, sex 
 
 gz,exemple, an example 
 
 ss, soixante, sixty 
 
 z, dixieme, the tenth, 
 
 dix, ten, followed by 
 
 nj&wetm 
 
 All these sounds are exemplified by more wo»ds ranged 
 in their respective classes, in my Practice of the 
 French Pronunciation alphabetically exhi- 
 bited, where you may find words in which such letters 
 axe either pronounced^ or not pronounced. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 An Alphabetical List of many of the French Adjec- 
 tives, each agreeing in Gender and Number with a 
 different Substantive to illustrate its meaning. 
 
 Cbs. Those adjectives marked 
 placed before their Substantives. 
 
 thus \ are generally 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gend< 
 
 A BJECTE, 
 -*-*- abominable, 
 
 F 
 M 
 
 academique, 
 
 M 
 
 acariatre, 
 
 F 
 
 admirable^ 
 
 adverse, 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 affable, 
 
 F 
 
 affaire, 
 
 M 
 
 affectees, 
 
 F 
 
 affirmatif, 
 
 M 
 
 agee, 
 
 agreable, 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 agreste, 
 
 aigrelette, 
 
 aimable, 
 
 M 
 F 
 F 
 
 aise, 
 
 M 
 
 aliment aire, 
 
 F 
 
 alizes, 
 
 M 
 
 alphabetique, 
 altier, 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 ambigM'e, 
 
 F 
 
 ambirieux, 
 
 M 
 
 amere, 
 
 F 
 
 amortissable, 
 
 F 
 
 amoureuse, 
 
 F 
 
 amphibologique, 
 
 F 
 
 anatomique, 
 
 F 
 
 rof 
 
 Substantives* 
 
 condition, an abject condition 
 crime, an abominable crime 
 exercice, an academical exercise 
 humenr, a petulant temper 
 invention, a wenderful invention 
 partie, an adverse party 
 demoiselle, an affable lady 
 homme, a busy man 
 manures, affected manners 
 ton, a positive tone 
 veuve, an elder ly widow 
 surprise, an agreeable surprize 
 fruit, wild fruit 
 sauce, a sourish sauce 
 fille, a lovely girl 
 ouvrage, an easy work 
 pension, an alimony 
 vents, trade.winds 
 liste, alphabetical list 
 homme, a prond man 
 parole, an ambiguous word 
 projet, an ambitious project 
 boissoa, a bitter drink 
 rente, a redeemable re?it 
 fille, an amorous girl 
 expression, an a?nbiguous expres- 
 sion 
 dissection, an anatomical dissection 
 b 4 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Adjectives, 
 
 Gender 
 
 $ ancien, 
 
 M 
 
 Anglicane, 
 
 F 
 
 animates, 
 
 F 
 
 annuelle, 
 
 F 
 
 anodins, 
 
 M 
 
 anonyme, 
 
 M 
 
 anseatique, 
 
 F 
 
 antique, 
 
 M 
 
 appetissante, 
 
 F 
 
 apre^ 
 
 M 
 
 aquilin, 
 
 M 
 
 arbitral re, 
 
 M 
 
 argentine, 
 
 F 
 
 ardent^ 
 
 M 
 
 argilleuse, 
 
 F 
 
 aro.matique, 
 
 F 
 
 atrabilaire, 
 
 M 
 
 artificieux, 
 
 M 
 
 Attique, 
 
 M 
 
 ayantageux, 
 
 M 
 
 aveugle, 
 
 M 
 
 auriculaire, 
 
 M 
 
 austere, 
 
 F 
 
 authentique, 
 
 F 
 
 auxiliaire, 
 
 M 
 
 Bachique, 
 
 F 
 
 badine, 
 
 F 
 
 bai, 
 
 M 
 
 barbare, • 
 
 F 
 
 basse, 
 
 , F 
 
 % bean, 
 
 M 
 
 begue, 
 
 M 
 
 belli queuse, 
 
 F 
 
 bienseante, 
 
 F 
 
 bilieux, 
 
 M 
 
 bissextile, 
 
 F 
 
 bitumineuse, 
 
 F 
 
 of Substantives. 
 
 ami, an ancient friend 
 eglise, the church of Engla 
 facultes, the sensitive faculties 
 pension, a yearly pension 
 remedes, anodyne remedies 
 livre, an anonymous book 
 ville, a hanse town 
 chateau, an antique castU 
 viande, savoury meat 
 fruit, harsh fruit 
 nez, an aquiline nose 
 pouvoir, art arbitrary power 
 voix, a clear voice 
 charbon, a burning 
 terre, clayey ground 
 herbe, an aromatic kerb 
 temperament, an an 
 
 melancholy temper*. 
 detour, an artful evasion 
 sel, pslite genteel raillery 
 peste, an advantageous post 
 cheval, a blind horse 
 terrioin, an ear. witness 
 mine, an austere mien 
 loi, an authentic law 
 verbe, an auxiliary verb 
 
 char.s^n, a drinking song 
 humeur, a wanton humwt 
 cheval, a bay horse 
 action, a barbarous action 
 chambre, a ground . 
 tapis, a fine c- 
 enfant, a Stammering child 
 nation, a warlike nation 
 parole, a decent *ub 
 temperament., a bih 
 
 , the lea} 
 maiiere, bituminous mat 
 
FRENCH' TONGUE. 
 
 9 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 bizaarre, 
 
 blanche, 
 
 bleu> 
 
 blonds, 
 
 boiteux, 
 
 J.bon, 
 
 borgne, 
 
 bossn, 
 
 botanique,. 
 
 bourbeux, 
 
 bourru, 
 
 brave, 
 
 brill ant, 
 
 brulant, 
 
 brune, 
 
 brute, 
 
 bruyante, 
 
 burlesque, 
 
 Calamiteux, 
 
 calleuse, 
 
 calomnieux, 
 
 candi, 
 
 capable, 
 
 capricieuse} 
 
 captieux, 
 
 casuelle, 
 
 categorique, 
 
 catholique, 
 
 cavalieres, 
 
 caverneuse, 
 
 caustique, 
 
 celebre, 
 
 celeste, 
 
 ehatouilleux^ 
 
 chaud, 
 
 chaude, 
 
 chauve, 
 
 % chere, 
 
 cher, 
 
 cf 
 
 Substantives. 
 
 Gender 
 
 M esprit, a whimsical mind 
 
 F chemise, a clean shirt 
 
 M ruban, a blue ribbon 
 
 M cheveuXj light hair 
 
 M coeval, a lame horse 
 
 M vin, gifcd koine 
 
 F femm^j a o?ie- eyed 'woman 
 
 M homine, a crookhacked man 
 
 M iardin.5 a botaincal garden 
 
 M passage, a ?nuddy passage 
 
 M air, a morose countenance 
 
 M soldat,tf bravs scldier 
 
 M esprit, shining hvit 
 
 M soleii, a burning sun 
 
 F colli eur, a brown colour 
 
 F pierre, an urihewed stone 
 
 F compagnie, a noisy company 
 
 F poesie, burlesaue poetry 
 
 M temps, a calamitous time 
 
 F peau, a callous skin 
 
 M rapport, a slanderous report 
 
 M sucre, sugar- candy 
 
 ]VJ rnaitre, an able master 
 
 F femme, a capricious wo?nan 
 
 M discours, a captious discourse 
 
 F entreprise, a casual undertaking- 
 
 F r eponse, a categorical answer 
 
 F" egiise, the catholic church 
 
 F manieres, blunt manners 
 
 F montagne, a hollow mountain 
 
 M emplatre, an escharotic plaster 
 
 M auteur, a celebrated author 
 
 M~ bleu, sky-blue 
 
 M homme. a ticklish man 
 
 . M temps, hot weather 
 
 F main, a warm hand 
 
 F tete, a bold he dd 
 
 F sceur, dear sister 
 
 M chapeau, a dear hat 
 » 5 
 
lo 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gender 
 
 chimerique, 
 
 M 
 
 chirurgicale, 
 
 F 
 
 circonspecte, 
 
 F 
 
 circulaire, 
 
 F 
 
 clair, 
 
 M 
 
 colossale. 
 
 F 
 
 combustible, 
 
 F 
 
 commode, 
 
 F 
 
 commun, 
 
 M 
 
 compacte, . 
 
 M 
 
 complet, 
 
 M 
 
 confuse, 
 
 F 
 
 conjecturale, 
 
 F 
 
 conjugate, 
 
 F 
 
 conscientieux, 
 
 M 
 
 considerable, 
 
 M 
 
 constant, 
 
 M 
 
 contagieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 comptanr, 
 
 M 
 
 continuel, 
 
 M 
 
 contraire, 
 
 F 
 
 contradictoire, 
 
 F 
 
 convenable, 
 
 M 
 
 cordiale, 
 
 F 
 
 corporelle, 
 
 F 
 
 correct, 
 
 M 
 
 cruel, 
 
 M 
 
 curieux, 
 
 M 
 
 Dangereux, 
 
 M 
 
 decent, 
 
 M 
 
 decisive, 
 
 F 
 
 delicate, 
 
 F 
 
 delicieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 demonstrative, 
 
 F 
 
 deraisornable, 
 
 F 
 
 J drrniere, 
 
 F 
 
 desagreable, 
 
 F 
 
 desastreux, 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 of Substantives. 
 
 projet, a chimerical project 
 operation, a surgical operation 
 COnduite, wary behaviour 
 let t re, a circular letter 
 jour, a clear day 
 statue, a colossal statue 
 matiere, combustible matter 
 maison, a convenient house 
 prix, a common price 
 corps, a compact body 
 traite, a complete treatise 
 idee, a confused idea. 
 connoissance, conjectural knowledge 
 fidelite, conjugal fidelity 
 negociant, a conscientious merchant 
 bien, a considerable estate 
 ami, a constant friend 
 maladie, a contagious disorder 
 argent, ready money 
 bruit, a continual noise 
 resolution, a contrary resolution 
 nouvelle, contradictory nevus 
 logement, a convenient lodging 
 liqueur, a cordial liquor 
 punition, corporal punishment 
 ouvrage, a correct vuork 
 tourment, a cruel torment 
 tableau, a curious picture 
 
 passage, a dangerous passage 
 habiilement, a decent dress 
 sentence, decisive sentence 
 viande, dainty ?nc at 
 poire, a delicious pear 
 preuve, a demonstrative proof 
 demande, an unreasonable request 
 place, the last place 
 conversation, disagreeable convert 
 sat ion 
 M jour, an ill-fated day 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 n 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gen<! 
 
 desavantageuse, 
 
 F 
 
 deshonnete, 
 
 F 
 
 desirable, 
 
 M 
 
 despotique, 
 
 M 
 
 devote, 
 
 F 
 
 diffamatoire, 
 
 M 
 
 difficile, 
 
 F 
 
 X digne, 
 
 M 
 
 diligent, 
 
 M 
 
 discret, 
 
 M 
 
 disgracieux, 
 
 M 
 
 dispendieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 distinctive, 
 
 F 
 
 docte, 
 
 M 
 
 dogma tiq ue, 
 
 M 
 
 dominicale, 
 
 F 
 
 doulou reuse, 
 
 F 
 
 douce, 
 
 F 
 
 droite, 
 
 F 
 
 dure, 
 
 F 
 
 durable, 
 
 F 
 
 Ecclesiastique, 
 
 F 
 
 econome, 
 
 M 
 
 effeccif, 
 
 M 
 
 efficace, . 
 
 M 
 
 efficients, 
 
 E 1 
 
 effrovable,. 
 
 M 
 
 elastique, 
 
 
 elegant, 
 
 
 emblem atiqire, 
 
 F 
 
 emollient, 
 
 M 
 
 emphyteotique, 
 
 M 
 
 empirique, 
 
 M 
 
 energique, 
 
 F 
 
 enfantin, 
 
 M 
 
 enigmatique, 
 
 F 
 
 emiere, 
 
 F 
 
 r of Substantives. 
 
 situation, a disadvantageous situa- 
 tion 
 parole, an immodest word 
 bien, a desirable blessing 
 pouvoir, despotic power 
 fern me, a devout woman 
 libelle, a defamatory libel 
 langue, a difficult tongue 
 magistrat, a worthy magistrate 
 ecolier, a diligent scholar 
 
 ami, a discreet friend 
 etat, a disagreeable situation 
 guerre, an expensive war 
 marque, a distinctive mark 
 professeur, a learned professor 
 style, a dogmatical style 
 oraison, the Lord's prayer 
 condition,- a grievous condition 
 odeur, a sweet smdling odour 
 main, the right hand 
 pier re, a hard stone 
 prospe ri te, lasting prosperity 
 
 dignite, ait ecclesiastical dignity 
 
 man, a saving his band 
 
 heritage, a real estate 
 
 moyen, an efficacious mean 
 
 cause, an efficient cause 
 
 incendie, a dreadful fire 
 
 corps, an elastic body 
 
 . .. mpliment, an elegant compliment 
 
 **e, an embh?natical figure 
 le'j an e?nollient medicine 
 a long lease 
 mea c i i a qua ck doctor 
 demand' , an . verge tical petition 
 discours, a childish discourse 
 proposition, an enigmatical proper 
 
 sition 
 semaine, a whole weeL 
 
 B 6 
 
12 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 envieux, 
 
 epais, 
 
 epidemique, r 
 
 epineux, 
 
 episcopal, 
 
 epique, ■ 
 
 epistolaire, 
 
 exclusif, 
 
 expeditif, 
 
 expert, 
 
 expressif, 
 
 ex q ins, 
 
 exterieure, 
 
 extraordinaire, 
 
 Fabuleuse, 
 
 facile, 
 
 Fantastique, 
 
 ferineuse) 
 
 fastidieuse, 
 
 fatal, 
 
 favorable, 
 
 favori, 
 
 t fausse, 
 
 ferrne, 
 
 feroce, 
 
 fertile, 
 
 fidele, 
 
 fier, 
 
 figuratif, 
 
 fixe, 
 
 flasquesj 
 
 flatteur, 
 
 J Foible, 
 
 i'ortuity 
 
 frais, 
 
 X franc, 
 
 Fr^ncoise, 
 
 frauduleux, 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF Tg£ 
 
 Gender 
 
 M 
 M 
 F 
 M 
 M 
 M 
 M. 
 M 
 M 
 
 'M 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 F 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 M 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 of Substantives. 
 
 artisan, an envious tradesman 
 
 nuage, a thick cloud 
 
 rnaladie, an epidemical disorder 
 
 proces, ah intricate lawsuit 
 
 palais, a bishsp's palace 
 
 pocme, an epic poem 
 
 style, epistolary style 
 
 dixit, an exclusive right 
 
 cornrnis, an expeditious clerk x 
 
 medecin, an able physician 
 
 mot, an expressive word 
 
 meVs, a dainty dish 
 
 par tie, the exterior part 
 
 e tenement, an extraordinary event 
 
 difference, a very great drffe\ 
 
 histoire, a fabulous story 
 ;ue, an easy language 
 P r j e t , <? fantastical p rf'ect ' 
 dartre, *z <7/j.£/# tetter 
 societe, 41 fastidious society 
 moment, an\unh ment 
 
 occasion, afavourab 
 pi a i sir, a dauing pleas 
 nciivelle, 
 ' p:i : Ifir 
 
 ' province, province 
 
 arnan t, a fait hful lover 
 homme, a haughty ma?i 
 sens, a figurative sense 
 prix, a set price 
 joucs, fiabby cheeks 
 cou r ti san, a favu h ing conn 
 sante, /// health 
 cas, a mere chance 
 air, cool air 
 a r hit re, freewill 
 mode, a FrencS fashion 
 commerce, a fraudulent fra 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gende 
 
 friandj 
 
 M 
 
 froid, 
 
 M 
 
 fruo-aJe, 
 frivole, 
 
 F 
 M 
 
 fruitier, 
 
 M 
 
 funebre. 
 
 , F 
 
 funeste, 
 
 F 
 
 Ga!antes, 
 
 F 
 
 gauche, 
 
 F 
 
 genereux, 
 
 M 
 
 geographique, 
 
 F 
 
 geometrique > 
 
 F 
 
 glorieuse, 
 Gothique, 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 
 gracjeax, 
 
 M 
 
 Lmaticale,, 
 
 F 
 
 ,gras, 
 
 M 
 M 
 
 grave, 
 
 gremi, 
 % g™s, 
 
 F 
 M 
 M 
 
 grotesques^ 
 gueable, 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 guerrier, 
 
 M 
 
 gutturale, 
 
 F 
 
 % HabKe, 
 
 M 
 
 habkueji 
 
 M 
 
 rdi, 
 
 M 
 
 haissahle. 
 
 M 
 
 bardie, 
 
 F 
 
 harmoniease, 
 
 F 
 
 t ha 'J re, 
 heroi'que, 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 honorinque, 
 hurrride, 
 
 M 
 
 hypocrite. 
 
 F 
 
 •of Substantives, 
 
 pat 6, • a dainty pye 
 temps, cold weather 
 vie, a frugal life 
 conte, a frivolous story 
 arbre, a fruit tree 
 oraison, a funeral sermon 
 aventure, a fatal adventure 
 
 manieres, genteel manners 
 
 main, the left hand 
 
 ma it re, a generous ?naster 
 
 carte, a map 
 
 demonstration, a geometrical demon* 
 
 si ration 
 entreprise, a glorious undertaking 
 lettre, black letter 
 compliment, a handsome compliment 
 regie, a grammatical rule 
 verger, a large orchard 
 . jambon, a fat ham . 
 demarche, a grave gait 
 epi, a full ear of '.com 
 pa que t, 'a large bundle 
 tig-.: res, grotesque figures 
 riviere, .a for dalle river. 
 peuple, a warlike people 
 lettre, a guttural letter 
 
 ouvrier, .an able workman 
 
 vice, an habitual vice 
 
 yeuXj fierce eyes 
 
 objet, a hateful object 
 
 en t re prise, a bold undertaking 
 
 period-e, a harmonious period- ' 
 
 mpntagne, a high) mountain 
 
 action, a heroic action 
 
 titre, an honourable title 
 
 Jinge, vjet linen 
 
 Hiine^ a hypocritical mien ^ 
 
*4 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Illegitime, 
 
 illicite, 
 
 i [lustre, 
 
 imaginaire, 
 
 immemorial, 
 
 immoderee, 
 
 immodeste, 
 
 impardonnable, 
 
 imparfait, 
 
 impenetrable, 
 
 imprenable, 
 
 impraticable, 
 
 impropre, 
 
 imprudent, 
 
 impudente, 
 
 inaccessible, 
 
 incomparable, 
 
 inconstant, 
 
 incontestable, 
 
 incorrigible, 
 
 incroyable, 
 
 incurable, 
 
 indigent, 
 
 indigeste, 
 
 indisciplinable, 
 
 indispensable, 
 
 indubitable, 
 
 inepuisable, 
 
 inevitable, 
 
 iiiieodee, 
 
 infinie, 
 
 ingcnieuse, 
 
 inhabitable, 
 
 inhumaine, 
 
 inimitable, 
 
 imntelligible, 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Gender of Substantives. 
 
 imoj 
 
 ue, 
 
 M pouvoir, an illegal power 
 
 M contrat, an illegal contract 
 
 F famille, an illustrious family 
 
 M bonheur, imaginary happiness 
 
 M temps, time immemorial 
 
 F passion, an immoderate passion 
 
 F posture, an immodest posture 
 
 F faute, an unpardonable fault 
 
 M ouvrage, an imprfect vuork 
 
 M secret, an impenetrable secret 
 
 F ville, an impregnable city 
 
 M chemin, an impassable road 
 
 M terme, an improper term 
 
 M avis, an imprudent advice 
 
 F conversation, a shameful conversa- 
 tion 
 
 F montagne, an inaccessible mountain 
 
 F beaute, an incomparable beauty 
 
 M amour, inconstant love 
 
 F verite, an incontestable truth 
 
 M gar con, an incorrigible lad 
 
 F nouvelle, incredible nevus 
 
 F maladie, an incurable sickness 
 
 M auteur, an indigent author 
 
 M manger, indigestible victuals 
 
 M e'w'olier, an unruly scholar 
 
 M devoir, an indispensable duty 
 
 M succes, undoubted success 
 
 F source, an inexhaustible source 
 
 M naufrage, an unavoidable ship vc reck 
 
 F rente, a rent charge 
 
 F obligation, an infinite obligation 
 
 F invention, an ingenious invention 
 
 F maison, an uninhabitable house 
 
 "^ durete, inhuman rigour 
 
 M sculpteur, an inimitable carver 
 
 F proposition, an unintelligible prop*-* 
 sit ion 
 
 F action, a wicked action 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 Adjectives* 
 
 Gende 
 
 injurieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 inquiet, 
 
 M 
 
 insatiable, 
 
 M 
 
 iusolvable, 
 
 M 
 
 insoutenable, 
 
 F 
 
 in time, 
 
 M 
 
 intrinseque, 
 invalide, 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 invariable, 
 
 F 
 
 inventive, 
 
 F 
 
 invincible, 
 
 M 
 
 inviolable, 
 
 M 
 
 inutile, 
 
 M 
 
 irrevocable, 
 
 M 
 
 isabelle, 
 
 M 
 
 t Jeune, 
 + jolie, 
 
 F 
 F 
 
 jo) euse, 
 
 Judaique, 
 
 judiciaire, 
 
 F 
 F 
 F 
 
 judicieux, 
 juridique, 
 juste, 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 justificative, 
 
 F 
 
 i 
 Labcrieux, 
 
 M 
 
 Jabourable 
 
 F 
 
 laconique, 
 t laide, 
 
 M 
 F 
 
 lamentable, 
 
 M 
 
 langoureuse, 
 languissante, 
 large, 
 lascif, - 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 
 M 
 
 lent, 
 
 M 
 
 licentieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 licite, 
 
 F 
 
 ' of Substantives. 
 
 parole, an injurious expression 
 esprit, an unquiet mind 
 appetit, an un satiable appetite 
 debiteur, an insolvent debtor 
 opinion, an unwarrantable opinion 
 ami, an intimate friend 
 qualite, an intrinsic quality 
 convention, an invalid agreement 
 ami tie, an unchangeable friendship 
 imagination, an inventive imagina- 
 
 Hon 
 courage, an invincible courage 
 attachement, a?z inviolable attach- 
 
 ?nent 
 travail, a useless labour 
 arret, an irrevocable decree 
 cheval, a yellovu dun horse 
 
 beaute, a young beauty 
 demoiselle, a handsome lady 
 fille, a merry girl 
 coutume, a Jfe<wish custom 
 astrologie, judicial astrology 
 phiiosophe, a judicious philosopher 
 conviction, a legal conviction 
 jugement, a just judgment 
 piece, a voucher 
 
 jardinier, a laborious gardener 
 
 terre, arable land 
 
 style, a laconic style 
 
 figure, an ugly J ace 
 
 cri, a lamentable shriek 
 
 situation, a languishing situation 
 
 sante, vueak health 
 
 rue, a broad street 
 
 desir, a lascivious desire 
 
 pas, a sloiv step 
 
 conduite, a licentious co?iduct 
 
 vente, a lavoful sale 
 
i6 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gendi 
 
 limitrophe, 
 
 M 
 
 liquide, 
 
 F 
 
 litterale, 
 
 F 
 
 litigieux, 
 
 M 
 
 Jivide, 
 
 M 
 
 t l<mg> 
 
 M 
 
 lourd, 
 
 M 
 
 lucratif, 
 
 
 • re, 
 
 Ivl 
 
 lyrique, 
 
 F 
 
 '?ue, 
 
 M 
 
 jue, 
 
 F 
 
 majestueux, 
 
 M 
 
 maigre, 
 
 M 
 
 ule, 
 
 F 
 
 maiencontieux, 
 
 M 
 
 majingre, 
 
 M 
 
 malicieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 ma 1 pro ores, 
 
 F 
 
 malsaine, 
 
 F 
 
 manifeste, 
 
 F 
 
 march a nde, 
 
 F 
 
 roarecageux, 
 
 M 
 
 marin,. 
 
 M 
 
 maritimes, 
 
 F 
 
 mart! ale, 
 
 F 
 
 massif, 
 
 M 
 
 materielJe, 
 
 F 
 
 maternelle, 
 
 jr 
 
 ma trice, 
 
 •F 
 
 J mauvaise, 
 
 F 
 
 mechanique, 
 
 M 
 
 J mechamc, 
 
 F 
 
 medieinale, 
 
 F 
 
 melancholique, 
 
 i 
 
 meh 
 
 F 
 
 memorable, 
 
 M 
 
 mesqui 
 
 R 
 
 methoaicue, 
 
 M 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 tr of Sr;!rtantives. 
 
 pays, a neighbouring country 
 medecine, liquid ph, sic 
 traduction, a literal t ran slat ie?i 
 droit, a disputable right 
 tevnt, a livid complexion 
 di scours, a long discourse 
 pa que t, a heavy burde?i 
 metier, a lucrative ttr.de 
 spectacle, a 'mournful spectacle 
 poesie, lyric poetry 
 
 art, magic art 
 v e r . u , n agn e tie il virtue 
 porr, a majestic carriage 
 iiiOUton, Uaii mutton 
 1 e 1 1 r e, a capital letter 
 moment, an ominous ?noment 
 cheval, a sickly horse ^ 
 
 fern me, a malicious woman 
 manchettes, dirty ruffles 
 saison, an unhealthy season 
 verite, manifest truth 
 vil'e, a trading town 
 terrain, marshy ground 
 mon-stre, a suimonster 
 puissances, mariti/ne^pewers- 
 intrepidite, warlike intrepidity 
 or, solid gold 
 
 substance, a material substance 
 tendresse, a motherly tenderness 
 eglise, the mother church 
 excuse, a had excuse 
 arr, a mechanical art 
 creature, a wicked creature 
 potion, a medicinal draught 
 humeur, a melancholy humour 
 
 :, a meiodhms voice 
 evenemeat, a nUmorable event 
 ecQi ess 
 
 discours, a methodical dicourse 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 l l 
 
 Adjectives. . 
 
 Genet 
 
 militaire, 
 
 F 
 
 minerale, 
 
 F 
 
 mobiliaire, 
 
 M 
 
 modeste, 
 
 F 
 
 modique, 
 
 M 
 
 moelleux, 
 
 M 
 
 momentane, 
 
 M 
 
 monotone, 
 
 F 
 
 montagneux, 
 
 M 
 
 j morne, 
 
 M 
 
 mortelle, . 
 
 F 
 
 municipal, 
 
 M 
 
 municipale, 
 
 F 
 
 mur, 
 
 M 
 
 musical, 
 
 M 
 
 mutuel, 
 
 M 
 
 jique^ 
 
 M 
 
 Natal, 
 
 M 
 
 nature], 
 
 M 
 
 naval, 
 
 M 
 
 navigable, 
 
 F 
 
 nebuleux, 
 
 M 
 
 neigeux, 
 
 
 nec^ssaire, 
 
 F 
 
 net, 
 
 M 
 
 neuve,, 
 
 F 
 
 noire, 
 
 F 
 
 nonchalant. 
 
 M 
 
 notoire, 
 
 M 
 
 f nouveile, 
 
 F 
 
 1 nu, 
 
 M 
 
 pblique, 
 
 F 
 
 obscene. 
 
 F 
 
 cbstructif, 
 
 M 
 
 occult 
 
 F 
 
 ire, 
 
 M 
 
 int^| 
 
 F 
 
 Substantives. 
 academie, a military academy 
 eau, a ?n'meral vjater 
 bien, a personal estate 
 filie, a made $t girl 
 prix, a moderate price 
 drap, a soft substantial cloth. 
 plaisir, a momentary pleasure 
 voix, a monotonous 'voice 
 pays, a hilly country 
 silence, sullen silence 
 fie v re, ' a mortal fever 
 droit, com?non law 
 ville, a corporation to<vm 
 raisin, ripe grapes * 
 
 air, a musical tune 
 
 n al love 
 dictionnaire, a mythological diction* 
 
 ary . • 
 
 air, native mr 
 
 penchant, a natural inclination 
 
 combat, a sea fight 
 
 riviere, a navigable river 
 
 I temps, ■J'&SJ \ weather 
 r snovy J 
 
 condition, a necessary condition 
 
 verre, a clean glass 
 
 perruque, a nevj voig 
 
 calotte, black breeches 
 
 domes tique, a careless servant 
 
 vol, a notorious robbery 
 
 .mode, a ne*w fashion 
 
 pieds, barefoot 
 
 li gne, an oblique line 
 peinture, an obscene picture 
 remede, an astringent medicine 
 qualite, a hidden quality 
 temoin, an eyewitness 
 fleur, an odoriferous fltoxjer 
 
18 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gende 
 
 r of Substantives. 
 
 odicuse, 
 
 F 
 
 comparalson, an odious comparison 
 
 oisif, 
 
 M 
 
 ecolier, an idle scholar 
 
 Olympiques, 
 
 M 
 
 jeux, the Olympic games 
 
 Olympien, 
 
 M 
 
 Jupiter, Olympic Jove 
 
 onereuse, 
 
 F 
 
 charge, a burdensome employment 
 
 opiniatre, 
 
 M 
 
 horame, an obstinate man 
 
 opulente, 
 
 F 
 
 viile, a rich city 
 
 orageux, 
 
 M 
 
 vent j a stormy -wind 
 
 ergueilleux, 
 
 M 
 
 mepris, proud contempt 
 
 origineJ, 
 
 M 
 
 pechtj, original sin 
 
 outrageux, 
 
 M 
 
 soupcon, an offensive suspicion 
 
 Paienne, 
 
 F" 
 
 religion, the Pagan religion 
 
 pair, 
 
 M 
 
 nombre, an even number 
 
 pale, 
 
 M 
 
 v i sa ge, a paU face 
 
 pacifique, 
 
 M 
 
 roi, a peaceable king 
 
 panique, 
 
 F 
 
 terreur, a panic fear 
 
 pardonnable, 
 
 F 
 
 meprise, a pardonable mist ak$ 
 
 paresseuse, 
 
 F 
 
 servante, an idle maid 
 
 particulier, 
 
 M 
 
 soin, particular care 
 
 patentes, 
 
 F 
 
 lettres, letters patent 
 
 pater nel, 
 
 M 
 
 devoir, fatherly duty 
 
 pathetique, 
 
 M 
 
 ton, a pathetic tone 
 
 patrimonial, 
 
 M 
 
 bien, a patrimonial estate 
 
 pattu, 
 
 M 
 
 pigeon, a rough-footed pigeon 
 
 pedantes, 
 
 F 
 
 manieres, pedantic manners 
 
 penale, 
 
 F 
 
 loij a penal la e w 
 
 penates, 
 
 M 
 
 dieux, household goods 
 
 pendable, 
 
 M 
 
 cas, a hanging matter 
 
 penible, 
 
 M 
 
 ouvrage, a toilsome vcork 
 
 perceptible, 
 
 F 
 
 faussete, an evident untruth 
 
 peremptoire, 
 
 M 
 
 argument, a peremptory proof 
 
 pernicieux, 
 
 M 
 
 jeu, a pernicious game 
 
 perpetuel, 
 
 M 
 
 tourment, a perpetual torment 
 
 personnelle, 
 
 F 
 
 faute, a personal fault 
 
 pertinente, 
 
 F 
 
 replique, a pertinent reply 
 
 pesant, 
 
 M 
 
 paquet, a heavy bun.de 
 
 t P etit > 
 
 M 
 
 mouchoir, a small handkerchief 
 
 philosophale, 
 
 F 
 
 p ie r re , the ph do sop he r's stone 
 
 philosophiquc, 
 
 F 
 
 question, a philosophical question 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 »9 
 
 -Adjectives* 
 
 GenJe 
 
 pleine, 
 
 F 
 
 poetique, 
 
 M 
 
 pointilleux, 
 
 M 
 
 p®issonneux, 
 
 M 
 
 polie, 
 
 F 
 
 polyglot te, 
 
 F 
 
 pompeux, 
 
 M 
 
 ponctuel, 
 
 M 
 
 poreux, 
 
 M 
 
 post h ume, 
 
 M 
 
 poudreux, 
 
 M 
 
 poussif, 
 
 M 
 
 prealable, 
 
 F 
 
 precieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 precis, 
 
 M 
 
 precoces, 
 
 M 
 
 pre. fixe, 
 
 F 
 
 preliminairej 
 
 F 
 
 premature, 
 
 M 
 
 presomptueuse, 
 
 F 
 
 principale, 
 
 F 
 
 probable, 
 
 M 
 
 pioblematique, 
 
 F 
 
 prochain, 
 
 M 
 
 prodigieux, 
 
 M 
 
 profond, 
 
 M 
 
 prolixe, 
 
 M 
 
 j prompte, 
 
 F 
 
 public, 
 
 M 
 
 pueril, 
 
 M 
 
 Quadrangulaire, 
 
 F 
 
 querelleuse, 
 
 F 
 
 quotidier,, 
 
 M 
 
 Raboter.se, 
 
 F 
 
 raisonnable, 
 
 F 
 
 rapide, 
 
 M 
 
 • of Substantives. 
 
 bouteille, a full bottle 
 style, a poetical style 
 critique, a captious critic 
 etang, a fish-pond <wdl stored 
 nation, a polite nation 
 Bible, a polyglot Bible 
 equipage, a pompous equipage 
 homme, a punctual man 
 bois, porous <wood 
 ou v r a ge, a posthumous wo rk 
 souliers, dusty shoes 
 cheval, a broken. winded horse 
 convention, a previous agree ement 
 pier re, a precious sttne 
 jour, a determinate day 
 fruits, early fruit 
 heure, a fixed hour 
 observation, a preliminary observer. 
 
 tion 
 esprit, an untimely <wit 
 jeunesse, presumptuous youth 
 etude, the chief study 
 sentiment, a probable opinion 
 proposition, a problematical froposU 
 
 tion 
 printemps, next spring 
 colosse, a prodigious coUssus 
 fosse, a deep ditch 
 di scours, a prolix discourse 
 col ere, sudden anger 
 affront, a public affront 
 amusement, childish amusement 
 
 place, a square piece 
 femme, a quarrelsome ivife 
 pain, daily bread 
 
 planche, a rough flank 
 demande, a reasonable demand 
 cours, a rapid stream 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gender 
 
 rare, 
 
 M 
 
 ,rebelle, 
 
 M 
 
 recente, 
 
 F 
 
 reciproque, 
 
 F 
 
 recreative, 
 
 F 
 
 redoutable, , 
 
 F 
 
 reelle, 
 
 F 
 
 re forme, 
 
 M 
 
 regulier, 
 
 M 
 
 remarquable, 
 
 F 
 
 reprehensible, 
 
 M 
 
 respectueuse, 
 
 F 
 
 riche, 
 
 F 
 
 ridicule, 
 
 M • 
 
 u reusej 
 
 F 
 
 royal, 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 ronx, 
 
 
 rubicond, 
 
 M 
 
 rude, 
 
 M 
 
 ruineuse, 
 
 3~ 
 
 rustique, 
 
 F 
 
 armeusc* 
 
 F 
 
 sage, 
 
 F 
 
 sain, 
 
 M 
 
 Salique, 
 
 F 
 
 sanguinaire, 
 
 M 
 
 satirique, 
 
 M 
 
 savant, 
 
 M 
 
 sauvage, 
 
 M 
 
 scabreuse, 
 
 F 
 
 sec, 
 
 M 
 
 scientifique, 
 
 F 
 
 scorbutique, 
 
 F 
 
 
 * M 
 
 scditieux, 
 
 M 
 
 iempheroclle, 
 
 F 
 
 of Substantives, 
 
 oiseau, an uncommon bird 
 S u jet, a rebellious subject 
 plaie, a recent luound 
 flu elite, reciprocal fidelity 
 lecture, an entertaining lecture 
 mort, a dreadful death > 
 
 per te, a real I -si 
 ofHcier, a half -pay officer 
 plan, a regular plan 
 enseigne, a remarkable sign 
 procede, a blamable proceeding 
 reponse, a respectjul answer 
 robe, a rich goim 
 habillernent, a ridiculous drat 
 ■j$ punhhmtnt 
 ii palace 
 
 visage, a ruddy face 
 hiver, a hard winter 
 depense, a ruinous exbenct 
 vie, country life 
 
 terre, sandy ground 
 
 conduite, prudent conduct 
 
 fruit, sound fruit 
 
 loi, the Salic faw 
 
 conquerant, a blood-thirsty con* 
 
 qui r or 
 trait, a satirical stroke 
 ouvragc, a Lav 
 canard, a e wii 
 entreprise, a 
 
 linge, dry lift 
 
 preface, - preface 
 
 rdi rf 
 art, a sex 
 ecrit, a set 
 vieillc, an old 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 21 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Gender 
 
 -sericuse, | 
 
 F 
 
 severe, 
 
 M 
 
 si mil aire, 
 
 M 
 
 sincere, 
 
 M 
 
 sinistre, 
 
 M 
 
 soignetix, 
 
 M 
 
 sclide, 
 
 M 
 
 solitaire, 
 
 F 
 
 solvable, 
 
 M ' 
 
 sombre, 
 
 F 
 
 soluble, 
 
 M 
 
 somptueux, 
 
 M 
 
 t sot, 
 
 M 
 
 spacieux, 
 
 M 
 
 specieux, 
 
 M 
 
 spirit ueuss, 
 
 F 
 
 splendide, 
 
 M 
 
 sterile, 
 
 M 
 
 stoiique, 
 
 F 
 
 studieux, 
 
 M 
 
 suave, 
 
 F 
 
 sublime, 
 
 M 
 
 subreptice, 
 
 F 
 
 succincte, 
 
 F 
 
 .suffisant, 
 
 M 
 
 superbe, 
 
 M 
 
 supertitieuse, 
 
 F 
 
 surnaturel, 
 
 M 
 
 suspect, 
 
 M 
 
 Tacite, 
 
 M 
 
 tardifs, 
 
 M 
 
 temeraire,, 
 
 M 
 
 tendre, 
 
 M 
 
 terrible, 
 
 F 
 
 tiede, 
 
 M 
 
 timide, 
 
 M 
 
 tolerable, 
 
 M 
 
 tortueux, 
 
 M 
 
 touffue, 
 
 F 
 
 of Substantives. 
 
 reprimande, a serious reprimand 
 ton, a severe tone 
 son, a similar sou?id 
 ami, a si?icere friend 
 presage, an unlucky omen 
 jardinier, a careful gardener 
 fondement, a solid foundation 
 vie, a retired life 
 debiteur, a solvent debtor 
 matinee, a gloomy morning 
 probleme, a soluble problem 
 repas, a sumptuous meal 
 marche, a silly bargain 
 jardin, a spacious garden 
 
 pretexte, a specious pretext 
 liqueur, a spirituous liquor 
 
 repa s , a 4p lendid repast 
 
 arbre, a barren tree 
 
 insensibilite, stoical insensibility , 
 
 ecolier, a studious scholar 
 
 odeur, a siveet smell 
 
 style, a sublime style 
 
 dispense, a surreptitious dispensa- 
 tion 
 
 analyse, a short analysis 
 
 temoignage, a sufficient testimony' 
 
 batiment, a magnificent building 
 
 pratique, a superstitious practice 
 
 signe, a supernatural sign 
 
 dessein, a suspicious design 
 
 consentement, a tacit consent 
 raisins, late grapes * 
 
 combat, a rash combat 
 pculet, a tender chicken 
 epouvante, a terrible fright 
 the, lukewarm tea 
 lievre, a fearful hare 
 mal, a tolerable evil 
 ruisseau, a winding rivulet 
 haie, a bushy hedge 
 
22 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Adjectives 
 
 triennal, 
 
 triompha!, 
 
 J triste, 
 
 tumultueuse, 
 
 turbulente, 
 
 Turque, 
 
 tyrannique, 
 
 Ulrerieur, 
 
 unanime, 
 
 uni forme, 
 
 unique, 
 
 wniverselle, 
 
 urgente, 
 
 Utile, 
 
 Vague, 
 
 vaillant, 
 
 vaine, 
 
 valide, 
 
 variable, 
 
 £ vaste, 
 
 venimeux, 
 
 vert, 
 
 vereuse, 
 
 veridique, 
 
 venue use, 
 
 viagere, 
 
 victorieuse, 
 
 v ide, 
 
 + vieux, 
 
 vigoureuse, 
 
 visible, 
 
 vocale, 
 
 volage, 
 
 volontaire, 
 
 vraie, 
 
 vulgaire, 
 
 Gender of 
 
 M 
 M 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 
 F 
 M 
 
 Substantives. 
 
 bail, a lease for three years 
 arc, a triumphal arch 
 souvenir, a sad remembrance 
 compagnie, a tumultuous company 
 republique, a turbulent republic 
 religion, the Turkish religion 
 pou v oir, ty rannical power 
 
 M examen, a farther examination 
 
 M consentement, a unanimous co?uent 
 
 M rapport, a uniform report 
 
 M fils, an only son 
 
 F connoissance, universal knowledge 
 
 F necessite, a pressing necessity 
 
 F decouverte, a useful discovery 
 
 F signification, a vague signification 
 
 M general, a valiant general 
 
 F pensee, a vain thought 
 
 M contra t, a valid contract 
 
 M temps, variable weather 
 
 F prairie, a large meadow 
 
 M reptile, a venomous reptile 
 
 M tapis, a green carpet 
 
 F pom me, a maggoty apple 
 
 M gazetier, an honest newswriter 
 
 F fern me, a virtuous woman 
 
 F pension, an annuity 
 
 F armee, a victorious army 
 
 M pot, an empty pet 
 
 M pont, an old bridge 
 
 F defense, a vigorous defence 
 
 F eclipse, a visible eclipse 
 
 F musique, vocal music 
 
 F jeunesse, fickle youth 
 
 M meurtre, a wilful murder 
 
 F nouvelle, true news 
 
 F opinion, a vulgar opinion 
 
 Zele, 
 
 M predicateur, 6 zealous preacher 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 n 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 A List of Aijectwes, ivith the Manner of their beivg 
 ffdced before or after their Substantively and their 
 Signification in either Case. 
 
 FUSTE prix, a reasonable homme juste, a just man. 
 
 "USTE prix, a reasonable 
 rate. 
 
 juste defence, a just defence. 
 
 a bas prix, at a low rate, 
 
 le bas ventre, the louver part 
 of the belly. 
 
 une mure deliberation, a ma. 
 ture deliberation. 
 
 maigre chere, poor fare. 
 
 vive douleur, a sharp pain. 
 
 bon homme, a ma?t who 
 means no harm, or a sim- 
 ple man. 
 
 pauvre homme, a sorry fel- 
 low. 
 
 grand homme, a great man. 
 
 certaine nouvelle, a certain 
 piece of news. 
 
 sage-femme, a midwife. 
 
 grosse femme, a large woman. 
 
 galant homme, a complete 
 gentleman. 
 
 le grand monde, the great 
 iv o rid. 
 
 pl ai sa n t homme, an imperti- 
 nent fellow. 
 
 vLlain homme, a disagree** 
 able man. 
 
 furieux animal, a large crea- 
 ture. 
 
 mort-bois, wood of no value. 
 
 action juste, a just action. 
 action basse, a mean action. 
 les Pays -bas *, the Loiv coun- 
 tries. 
 du fruit mur, ripe fruit. 
 
 viande maigre, lean meat. 
 esprit vif, a lively wit. 
 homme bon, a good-natured 
 man. 
 
 homme pauvre, a poor man. 
 
 homme grand, a tall man. 
 
 nouvelle certaine, true or au- 
 thentic intelligence. 
 
 femme sage, a prudent woman. 
 
 femme grosse, a woman with 
 child. 
 
 homme gallant, a man fond 
 of the ladies. 
 
 air grand, a noble mien. 
 
 homme plaisant, a pleasant 
 man. 
 
 homme vilain, a niggardly 
 fellow. 
 
 animal furieux, a fierce crea- 
 ture. 
 
 bois mort, dead trees. 
 
 * In other cases, speaking of coutries, the adjective goes before, 
 as, le bas Languedoc, la basse Normandie, la basse Saxe, la haute 
 Ssxs, la basse Auuiche, le £jjllhin, le haul Hhin, &c. 
 
*4 A GRAMMAR OF Ti 
 
 morte-eau, the water at the eau rnorte, standing water, 
 
 hot torn of the sea. 
 en droiteligne, straight along, ligne droite, a straight line, 
 
 franc coquin, a ifery rogue* ho mine franc, an honest 
 
 downright man, % 
 
 franc- sale, an allowance of arbre franc, an ungrafted or 
 
 salt. real tree. 
 
 franche verite, naked truth. marchandise franche, free 
 
 merchandise. 
 
 franc- til lac, the lower deck. bourgeois franc, a free citi- 
 zen. 
 
 basse-cour, an inner yard. voix basse A a low 'voice. 
 
 basse-fosse, a dungeon. riviere basse, a shallow river* 
 
 le bas bord, the larboard faire main basse, to put all 
 
 side of a ship. to the sword. 
 
 les basses voiles, the courses cceur bas, a base mind. 
 
 or lower sails. 
 
 le bas peuple, the mob. avoir la'vue basse, to be 
 
 shortsighted. 
 
 les basses cartes, the low esprit bas, a mean wit. 
 
 cards. 
 
 clier ami, dear friend. habit cher, a dear suit. 
 
 clairs deniers, clear or spare du linon clair, clear lawn. 
 
 money . 
 
 un doux zephir, a gentle un billet doux, a Irve letter. 
 
 gale. 
 
 dure-mere, the dura ?nater. viande dure, tough meat. 
 
 faux frais, extraordinary ex-- cheval faux, a sf::;,:b!i>rg?, 
 
 pences. horse. 
 
 fin nmois, a sly cunning diamant fin, a right dia> 
 
 fll)W. 
 
 fol espoir, a folish hope. peintre fou, a mnd 
 
 fol amour, Cupid. poete fou, a mad'pobt\ 
 
 le riant bout, the upper end. h chamore haute, i 
 
 house. 
 menss plaisirs, pocket money, jambes menues, small si, 
 
 legs. 
 molle condescendanee, a dull vie molle, an ean 
 co?npliance. 
 
 eouleurs, the green visage pale, a. 
 sickness. 
 rouge bord, a bumper. des yeux rouges, iUodshot 
 
 tJtS. 
 
rouge-gorge, a robin, red- 
 breast. 
 
 rase campagne, an open fie?d. 
 saine doctrine, sound doctrine. 
 
 la saine raison, sound reason. 
 
 de vains efforts, vain endea- 
 vours. 
 foible raison, a weak reason. 
 vaine gloire, vain glory. 
 
 double biS re, strong beer. 
 
 un vif ressentiment, a lively 
 
 remembrance, 
 vive douleur, a smart pain. 
 vif-argent, quicksilver. 
 de vive voix, by voordof mouth. 
 ferme resolution, a firm re- 
 solution. 
 dc vastes desseins, great de* 
 
 signs. 
 vieille mode, an old fashion. 
 la verte jeunesse, youthful 
 
 days. 
 une verte reponse, a sharp 
 
 answer. 
 une verte reprimande, a 
 
 sharp reprimand. 
 un vert galant, a brisk gal. 
 
 lant. 
 apre combat, a cruel combat. 
 la tendre jeunesse, tender 
 
 youth. 
 maigre repas, pitiful cheer* 
 maigre auteur, a pitiful author. 
 froide mine, a cold look. 
 ample pouvoir, full power* 
 
 a plus forte raison, how much 
 more. 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. % ; 
 
 couleur rouge, a r,-i colour. 
 
 velours ras, shorn velvet, 
 
 temps sain, healthy vuea^ 
 ther. 
 
 jugement sain, sound judg- 
 ment. 
 
 peine veine, unprofitable, 
 trouble. 
 
 l'age foible, infancy. 
 
 homme vain, a vain glofioul 
 man. 
 
 $cte double, duplicate pf a 
 writing. 
 
 dei yeux vifs, sparkling eyes. 
 
 eheval vif, a mettlesome horse. 
 couleur vive, a lively colour. 
 teint vif, a florid complexion. 
 muraille ferme, a firm wall. 
 
 uu esprit vaste, a great ge- 
 nius. 
 vin vieux, old wine. 
 bois vert, green wood. 
 
 fruit vert, unripe fruit. 
 
 pois verts, green pease. 
 
 une tete verte, a hare- 
 brained fellow. 
 un esprit apre, an austere man. 
 l'age tendre, tender age* 
 
 terroir maigre, a barren soil. 
 style maigre, a poor style. 
 viande froide, cold meat. 
 discours ample, a diffuse Jii- 
 
 course. 
 raison fortej a strong reasm. 
 
 C 
 
26 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 Of the Marks and Points used in writing French. 
 
 fpHE several marks used in writing French are the 
 -*- following. 
 
 A comms, une wirgule, (,) separates the least parts of a 
 sentence, and stops the reader's voice till he ean count 
 one* 
 
 A semicolon, un point et une virgi.Ie, (;) sep<'ir: 
 larger portions of a sentence. At this the reader must 
 aft op till he can count two. 
 
 A colon,, deux points, (:) marks the larger divisions, of 
 which a sentence is susceptible. At this the reader must 
 stop till he can count three. Semicolons and colons are 
 sometimes, but improperly, used promiscuously. 
 
 A period, or full point, un pointy (.) is used when the 
 sentence is" fully ended, and requires a pause till the reader 
 can count four. 
 
 A note of interrogation, ttn point d' interrogation, (?) is 
 fcsad in asking a question. 
 
 A note of admiration, un point d' admiration, (!) is used 
 when we admire, wish, or wonder : it serves also to ex- 
 press some violent passion. 
 
 An apostrophe une apostrophe, (') is set over the place 
 where some letter is left out ; as V amour, instead of le 
 amour, love *. 
 
 A hyphen, un tiret, ou un trait d' union, {•■) joins words 
 or syllables together ; as, par!a-t~il, did he speak ? parle- 
 i-elle, does she speak ? 
 
 A cedilla, une cedille, (c) is placed under c, when it is 
 pronounced like s, before a, 0, or u. 
 
 A parenthesis, une parenthese, ( ) includes something 
 not necessary to the sense, but brought in to explain or 
 illustrate it, and is very seldom used. 
 
 A diaeresis, une trema (") parts two vowels coming to- 
 
 * These two vowels, a, e, when the next word begins with « vowel 
 or An by not pronounced, are left out in French in the following 
 words. 
 
 Le, la, jc, mt, (e, :c f dt, ee, ne> iuc\ /', j\ m\ t y , *', d* , C*»J»\ I**' 
 
FRENCH TONGWE. 27 
 
 getheij and sgnifies their making two syllables, as Saul 
 etoit roi d' Israel, Saul was king of Israel. 
 
 It is likewise placed over e at the end of certain words 
 ending in gue, to express that they must be pronounced 
 gu y and not as in fatigue. Ex. aigue] the feminine of aigu, 
 sharp ; cigue y hemlock e 
 
 There are several other notes used by authors . and 
 printers; but it would be needless to trouble the learner 
 here with any. 
 
 Obs. I. Le, la, ce, suffer no elision before onze, onzleme, oui; neither 
 in the imperative mood, as, taisseos-Ie aller, let him go ; except when 
 -followed immediately by en ory, as, laisse&-Py aller, let him go thither, 
 
 Obs. IT. Si suffers an elision only before U or its. 
 
 Obs. III. Lrf, there, and qui, who, are never contracted. 
 
 Obs. IV. e in grande is contracted in some words beginning with 
 a consonant, as grand*mere 9 grandmother, a grand 1 peine, with mucii 
 ado, &c. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of Accents made use of in writing French. 
 
 A N accent is a note put over a vowd, at the end of a 
 ^-*' syllable or word, to denote it's sound, quantity, na- 
 ture, or signification. 
 
 An accent is either acute, aigu y (') ; grave, grave ( v ^ 
 or circumflex, circonflexe, ( A ). 
 
 The first is placed upon e y when it has a slender sound p. 
 as in ///, the summer; except in the words of the second 
 person plural, because in these, e is joined with z, as vous 
 aime% y ye love. 
 
 The second accent is sometimes put upon e, when it 
 has an open sound; as in saliere y saltcellar ; in some mo* 
 nosyllables, ending with an s, prh ; near, trh y very, &c. ; 
 f ?lso at the end of words of more than one syllable, as in 
 progress progress; apres, after, It is used in the last case, 
 when an s follows. 
 
 This accent is likewise used to distinguish articles, ad- 
 verbs, verbs, prepositions, and conjunctions, u* in the 
 following words : 
 
 a, has, a, at or ie* 
 
 la? the, , ' la, thtre. 
 
 C 2 
 
*8 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 <le la, of, or from the. 
 rics, tome, of % or from the. 
 tp> come cr.. 
 cm, or. 
 
 <le la, thence. 
 d£s que, at toon at. 
 •fa, hither. 
 oil, where. 
 
 N. B. Compounds follow the same rule, as, la-haut> 
 above ; la-bas y down there, below ; la-detsut, upon that ; 
 la-destous, under that, down there; de la % thence; par 
 la } that way ; celui-la, cetle-la, that. 
 
 This accent is never placed in the beginning or in the 
 middle of words, when an e is followed by a consonant, 
 with which it makes a syllable. 
 
 The third is placed commonly upon a long vowel, as 
 in age, age; fete, a feast; and particularly upon those 
 which were formerly spelt with an s, as in ah/me, an abyss; 
 hz notres, ours, &c. 
 
 In same monosyllables, as in mat. a mast. 
 
 At the end of some words ending with /, as in for it y a 
 forest. 
 
 In the third person singular of the preterite subjunctive, 
 as, au'il farlaty that he might speak ; to distinguish the 
 subjunctive from the indicative, il parlay he spoke. 
 
 Observe, that verbs of the first conjugation take a /, 
 beside the accent, in the conjunctive mood, and none in 
 the indicative : but all other verbs have a / in the indica- 
 tive and subjunctive moods, 
 
 Cardinal Num- 
 
 Numerical 
 
 Les Numbres 
 
 bers. 
 
 Letters. 
 
 Cardinaux. 
 
 I, one. 
 
 1. 
 
 un. 
 
 2, two. 
 
 11. 
 
 deux. 
 
 3, three. 
 
 III. 
 
 trois. 
 
 4, four. 
 
 IV.' 
 
 «quatre. 
 
 Sa L#*t. 
 
 v. 
 
 cinq. 
 
 4>, six. 
 
 VI. 
 
 six. 
 
 7, seven. 
 
 VII. 
 
 sept. 
 
 8, eight. 
 
 VIII. 
 
 huit. 
 
 9, nine. 
 
 IX. 
 
 neuf. 
 
 10, ten. 
 
 X. 
 
 dix. 
 
 li, eleven. 
 
 XI. 
 
 ouze. 
 
 12, t<wel*ve. 
 
 XII. 
 
 douze. 
 
 13, thirtten. 
 
 XIII. 
 
 treize. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 ** 
 
 14, fourteen. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 quatorze. 
 
 *fs fifteen* 
 
 XV. 
 
 quinze. 
 
 1 6, sixteen. 
 
 XVI. 
 
 seize. 
 
 17, seventeen* 
 
 XVII. 
 
 d ix- sept r 
 
 18, eighteen. 
 
 XVIII. 
 
 dix-huit. 
 
 19, nineteen* 
 
 XIX, 
 
 ditf-neuf. 
 
 20* twenty. 
 
 XX. 
 
 vingt. 
 
 21, twenty -one* 
 
 XXL 
 
 vingt-et-un. 
 
 22, twenty-two* 
 
 XXII. 
 
 vingt-deux. 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jusqu'd. 
 
 30, /A/r/y. 
 
 XXX. 
 
 trente. 
 
 31, thirty. one. 
 
 XXXI. 
 
 trente.et-uru 
 
 32, thirty- two. 
 
 XXXII. 
 
 trente-deux.. 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jusqu'd. 
 
 40 jfrf/j. 
 
 XL. 
 
 quarante. 
 
 41, forty. one. 
 
 XLI. 
 
 quarantc-et-tin. 
 
 $2 ? . forty- tw-7. < 
 
 XLII. 
 
 quaranie-d *a>>. 
 
 2nd so on 13* 
 
 
 ft&*M > a. 
 
 $0, fifty. 
 
 L. 
 
 ciuquante. 
 
 $h fifij-**?* 
 
 LIV 
 
 cinquante-et-un. 
 
 52.,. fifty- tw&*. 
 
 LII. 
 
 cinquante-deux. 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jusqu'd. 
 
 60, sixty* 
 
 tXi 
 
 soixante. 
 
 61, sixty -one. 
 
 LXI. 
 
 soixante-et-un. 
 
 6 2, sixty -two. 
 
 LXII. 
 
 soixante-deux. 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jutqx'd. 
 
 70, seventy* 
 
 LXX. 
 
 soixante-et.dix. 
 
 7 I, seventy-one* 
 
 LXXI. 
 
 soixante-et-onze. 
 
 72, seventy, two* 
 
 LXX II. 
 
 soixante-et-douze. 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jusqu'd. 
 
 8o, eighty^ 
 
 LXXX. 
 
 quatre-vingts. 
 
 81, eighty. one* 
 
 LXXXI. 
 
 quatre-vingt-un. 
 
 82, eighty ~tvjo*. 
 
 LXXXII. 
 
 quatre. vingt. deux, 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jusqu'd. 
 
 90, ninety. 
 
 XC. 
 
 quatre- vingt-dix, 
 
 *j r , ninety "One, 
 
 XCI. 
 
 quatre. vingt-onze. 
 
 92, ninety. two. 
 
 XCI-I. 
 
 quatre-vingt-douze \ 
 
 and so on to 
 
 
 jusqu'd. 
 
 J 00, g^ hundred. 
 
 C. 
 
 cent. 
 
 200, /<u>:3 hundred. 
 
 CC. 
 
 deux cents. 
 
 JQO, ?£/%« hundred. 
 
 ccc. 
 
 trois cents* 
 
 c 3 
 
30 
 
 400, four hundred. 
 500, five hundred. 
 600, six hundred, 
 7 CO, seven hundred, 
 
 800, eight hundred '. 
 
 900 , nine hundred. 
 
 1 000, one thousand. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 cccc. 
 
 D, or I3. 
 DC, or I3C. 
 DCC, or 
 
 I CC. 
 DCCC, or 
 
 l^CCC. 
 DCCCC, or 
 
 I3CCCC, 
 
 M, or CI D . 
 
 quatre cents. 
 cinq cents. 
 six cents. 
 sept cents. 
 
 huit cents. 
 
 neuf cents, 
 
 mille. 
 
 These numbers never vary their termination, except 
 vn y which makes une in the feminine ; cent, which makes 
 cents in the plural ; mille is written mil, when we write 
 the date of the year ; in this case cent does not vary ; 
 
 as, 
 
 1796, one thousand seven 
 hundred and nwetj^six. 
 
 MDCCXCVI, mil sept- 
 cent quatre- vingt. seize. 
 
 The words septante, ectante and nonante, are obsolete 5 buitante and 
 newvante have been made use of only by some calculators. The ad- 
 vantage of admitting these words, septante, huitante y newvante, which 
 preserve their roots, is obvious enough to those who have numbers to 
 put down in figures under the telling of another person. Six vingt. 
 (six score) was the common appellation for 120 in the last century, 
 but has been abandoned: quatre virgt (four score) will probably scon 
 experience the same fate. These false numerical appellations are in- 
 tirely rejected by mathematicians. 
 
 Ordinal Numbers. 
 1st, first. 
 2d, second. 
 3d, third. 
 4th. fourth* 
 5th, fifth. 
 6th, sixth. 
 
 7 th, seventh. 
 
 8 th, eighth. 
 
 9 th, ninth. 
 10th, tenth. 
 
 1 1 th, eleventh. 
 1 2th, tvjclfth. 
 13th, thirteenth. 
 
 Les Nombres Ordinaux. 
 
 1 e r . premier, M. premiere, F. 
 
 2 d . second, M. seconde, F. 
 
 3 e . troisieme, M. & F. 
 
 4«. quatrieme. 
 
 5 e . cinquieme. 
 
 6e. sixieme. 
 
 7 C . septieme. 
 
 8 e . huirieme* 
 
 9 C . neuvieme. 
 ]O e . dixieme. 
 1 ie. onzieme. 
 1 2 C . douzieme. 
 13°. treiziesie. 
 
FRENCH 
 
 •J -4 th, fourteenth-} 
 15th, fifteenth. 
 
 16 th, sixteenth; 
 
 17 th, seventeenth* ■ 
 I 8 th, eighteenth . 
 19th, nineteenth. 
 2oth, twentieth. 
 
 2. 1 s t, tuuenty -first* 
 2-2(1, tiventy ^second*. 
 
 and so otv&£, 
 
 TONGUE. 
 
 a* 
 
 I4 e . quatorzieme, 
 I5 e . quinzieme. 
 j6 e . seizieme. 
 1 7 C . dix-septieme a 
 iS e . dtx-huitieme* 
 19°. dix-neuvieme. 
 2c e . vingtieme. 
 2i & , vin.goet-unie.me. 
 22. c l vingt-deaxi&ne* 
 H avisi rfe suits* 
 
 i 
 
 Once, 
 
 thrice, or three times, 
 four Times, 
 
 une fois. 
 deux fois. 
 trois fois. 
 quatre fois* 
 
 First, or in the first place* premie rement, ou en premier 
 
 lieu, 
 second/)', or in the second secondementf ou en second 
 
 flace, lieu. 
 
 thirdly, or in the third place. troisiemement, ou en troisid- 
 
 me lieu, 
 fourthly, or in the fourth, quatriemement, ou en qua$» 
 place* trie me lieu.. 
 
 The Months of the Years, The Seasons of the Year, 
 
 January, Janvier. 
 February, Fevrier. 
 March, Mars. 
 April, Avril, 
 May. Mai. 
 June, Juin. 
 July, Juillet. 
 August, Aout. 
 September, Septembre. 
 October, Octobre. 
 November, Novembre. 
 December, Decembre. 
 
 The Spring, le printemps. 
 The Summer, Pete. 
 The Autumn, Pautomne, 
 The V/ inter, l'hiver. 
 
 The Days of the Week. 
 Monday, Lundi. 
 Tuesday, Mardi. 
 Wednesday, Mercredi. 
 Thursday, jeudi. 
 Friday, Vendredi. 
 Saturday, Samedi. 
 Sunday , Dimanche* 
 c. 4, 
 
jt A GRAIVfMAR OF THE 
 
 The Four Elements. Of Geography. 
 
 Fire, le feu. 
 
 Air, l'air. 
 Earth, la terre. 
 Watery l'eau. 
 
 The' Cardinal Pcints. 
 
 The east> \ 'orient, cu l'est. 
 The njucstf l'occidenf, ou 
 
 Tones t. 
 The north, je nord, ot* le 
 
 septentrion. 
 27* jwtf£ A !e raidi, «a k sud. 
 
 The Five Senses. 
 
 Sight, la vue. 
 Henri ftg y l'ouie. 
 Feeling, le toucher* 
 Taste, le gofit. 
 Smell, l'odorat. 
 
 The Four Divisions of 
 the World. 
 
 Turofe, I 1 Europe. 
 Asia } l'Asie. 
 Africa y TAfrique. 
 Ame*ka y I'Araerique. 
 
 Of the Moon. 
 
 The new moony nouvelle 
 
 lune« 
 The first quarter, premier 
 quarrier. 
 
 full :noon, pleinc lune. x 
 I. nt quarter, dernier 
 quartier. 
 
 Terms relating to the Land. 
 L 
 
 A continent, un Continent. 
 
 An hi and ', vme lie. 
 
 A peninsula, une presqu'ile. 
 
 An isthmus y un isthme. 
 
 A promontdrjy un promon- 
 
 toire. 
 A mountain, unc montagnc. 
 A coast, or shore, une cote, 
 
 II. 
 
 Terms relating to Water. 
 
 The Qceav, l'occan. 
 The gulf , un golfe. 
 A strait, un detroit. 
 A channel y un canal. 
 A lake, uniac. 
 A river, une riviere* 
 
 Of the Weather, 
 
 Heat, le chaud. 
 
 Coldy le froid. 
 
 Rain, la pluie. 
 
 DciVj la rosee. 
 
 Hail, J a grele. 
 
 Snonv, la neige. 
 
 Frost, la gelee. 
 
 Thaw, le dcgel. 
 
 A fog, or mist, un brouillard. 
 
 A storm, un orage. 
 
 A fash of lightning, un eclair. 
 
 Thunder, le fonnerre. 
 
 The rainbrr.v, l'arcen-cicl, 
 
 Th wW, le vent. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 53 
 
 The Ages of Men. The Periods of Time. 
 
 Birth , la naissance. 
 Childhood^ l'enfance. 
 Youth, la jeunesse. 
 Manhood, la virilite. 
 Old Age, la viei Hesse. 
 Death, la mort. 
 
 Arts and Sciences. 
 
 Divinity y la theologie. 
 
 Philosophy, la philosophic 
 
 Logic, la logique. 
 
 Natural philosophy, la phy- 
 sique. 
 
 Physic, la medecine. 
 
 Surgery , la chirurgie. 
 
 Z^-xi;,. le droit,. 
 
 Grammar, la grammaire. 
 
 Rhetoric, la rhetorique. 
 
 Poetry, la poesie. 
 
 Mathematics, les mathema- 
 tiques.. 
 
 Astronomy, Pastronomie. 
 
 Chronology, la chronologic- 
 
 Arithmetk, l'arith me tiqqe. 
 
 Geometry, la geometric 
 
 Geography, la geographic 
 
 Surveying, Parpen tagc 
 
 Architecture, Parchitecture. 
 
 Fortification, les fortifica- 
 tions. 
 
 Navigation, la. navigation. 
 
 Music, la musique. 
 
 Chemistry, la chimie. 
 
 Painting, la peinture. 
 
 Statuary, la sculpture. 
 
 Dancing, la danse. 
 
 Drawing) le dessin. 
 
 yfo instant, un instant. 
 
 /4 moment, un moment. 
 
 ^ minute, une minute. 
 
 -^ quarter of an hour, un 
 quart d'heure. 
 
 //^^ #* &?#r, une dernu 
 heurc 
 
 ^/// ter, une heure, . 
 
 -4 </<9', un jour. 
 
 37»<? morning, le matin. 
 
 Kw, midi. 
 
 Afternoon, Papres.midi, 
 
 T&<? evening, le soir. 
 
 Midnight, minuit. 
 
 ^4 fLt-wi, une semaine. 
 
 ^ month, un mois. 
 
 A year, un an. 
 
 if* tf^j un siecle. 
 
 Eternity, Teternite. 
 
 7^<? beginning, le commence- 
 ment. 
 
 27><? middle, le milieu. 
 
 7^ #>#</, la fin. 
 
 Parts of the Bodyv 
 
 77><? /W^/, la tete.. 
 The hair, ,les cheveux. 
 The face, le visage. 
 The forehead, le front. 
 The features, les traits. 
 The ryes, les yeux. 
 The eyebrows, les sourcils. 
 The eyelids, les paupieres. 
 T«i nese, lenez. 
 The nostrils, les narines.. 
 The cheeks,. les-joues. 
 27^ Ups,. les levres. . 
 27* w^, la Louche. 
 c 5 " . 
 
34 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The teeth, les dents. 
 The gums, les gencives. 
 The jaw , la. machoire. 
 The throat, le gosier. 
 The earSy les oreilles. 
 The chin, le men ton. 
 The ?ieck y le cou. 
 The shoulder:, les epaules. 
 The ar?ns, les bras. 
 The elbow, le coude. 
 The wrist, le pgignet. 
 The hand, la main. 
 The fingers, les doigts. 
 The thumb, le pouce. 
 The nails, les ongles. 
 The fist, le poing* 
 The knees, les genoux. 
 7$* /<?^jj les jambes. 
 The feet, les pieds. 
 27^ i^/j, les talons. 
 The hip j la hancke. 
 
 Wearing Apparel. 
 
 A coat, un habit. 
 A waistcoat, une veste. 
 The sleeves, les manches. 
 The buttons, les boutons, 
 7^<f button-holes, les kouton- 
 
 mere*. 
 The pockets, \z$ poches, 
 The fob, un g.ousset. 
 The linings la doublure. 
 A shirt, une chemise. 
 3^* riffles, les manche ttes. 
 j4 handkerchief, un mou- 
 
 choir. 
 Stockings, des has. 
 Carters, des jarretie res. 
 £Zw^ 3 des sou lie rs. 
 Buckles, clcs boucles. 
 ./f to, un chapcau, 
 
 A *vig, une perfuque. 
 
 Gloves, des gants. 
 
 yi w^, un manchon. 
 
 A comb, un peigne. 
 
 A sword, une epee. 
 
 Boots, des bottes. 
 
 yf rarg-, une bague. 
 
 A watch, une montre. 
 
 A snuff box, une tabatiere. 
 
 A purse, une bourse. 
 
 Spectacles, des lunettes. 
 
 A petticoat, une jupe. 
 
 ^ gown, une robe. 
 
 Linen, du linge. 
 
 .^« apron, un tablier. 
 
 A fan, un eventail. 
 
 Ear-rings y des boucles d'o- 
 
 reille. 
 A pin, une epingle. 
 ^ needle, une aiguille, 
 ^ pincushion y une pelote. 
 Sweet water, eau de sen* 
 
 teur. 
 Powder, de la poudre. 
 7)6^ powder-box, la boite a 
 
 poudre. 
 Ribands, des rubans. 
 Jewels, des bijoux. 
 Scissars, des ciseanx. 
 Pattens, des patins. 
 Cloth, du drap. 
 Z/j/, de la lisiere. 
 Muslin, de la mousseline* 
 Lawn, du linon. 
 Gauze, de la gaze. 
 Buckram j du bongran. 
 Dimity, du basin. 
 Velvet, du velours. 
 Camb/et, du camelot. 
 Druggett, du droguet. 
 Ratteen, de la raiine. 
 Lustring, du tafetas. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 35 
 
 Household Furniture. 
 
 A bed, un lit. 
 
 The curtains, les rideaux. 
 
 A- warming-pan, une bassi- 
 
 noire. 
 The bed -clothes, les couYer, 
 
 tures. 
 A pillow, un oreiller. 
 A mattress, un mate! as. 
 A strain-bed, une paillasse. 
 A feather-bed, un lit de 
 
 plumes. 
 The head of the bed, la. tete 
 
 du lit. 
 The tester, le ciel du lit. 
 The bed's feet, les pieds du 
 
 lit. 
 
 A house, une maisen. 
 
 Hangi?igs, la tapisserie. 
 
 A looking, glass , un miroir; - 
 
 A chair, une chaise. 
 
 A table, une table. 
 
 -4 carpet, un tapis. . 
 
 ^ table-cloth, une nappe. . 
 
 A plate, une assiette. 
 
 ytf napkin, une serviette^ 
 
 ^ £*#£, un couteau. 
 
 A fork,. une fouchette. 
 
 A spoon, une cuiller *v 
 
 A salt. cellar, une saliere. 
 
 A dish, un plat. 
 
 at. f une ecuelle. 
 ^3 basin, < -, 
 
 7 Lun bassm. 
 
 A towel, un essuie-mairw 
 
 ^ £<?///<?, une bouteille. 
 
 ^4 £/#**, un verre. 
 
 A^ corkscrew, un tire-bou* 
 
 chon. 
 
 JLcandle, une chandelle* 
 
 * r is. pronounced, and m 
 
 ^ candlestick, un chandelier, 
 ^ waxAght, une bougie. 
 77v snuffers, les mouchettes* 
 ^ rto/ <?/" drawers, une com. 
 
 mode. 
 A trunk, un cofrre. 
 ^ ^5A", une boite. . 
 ^ cradle, un berceau. 
 2Hfe fre,le feu. 
 T&<r chimney, la cheminee* 
 7#* hearth, le foyer. 
 7£<? bellows, le soufHet. 
 A grate, une grille. 
 ^ gridiron, un gril. 
 7$* tongs y les pincettes-., 
 7£<? fire-shovel, la pelle> . 
 The poker, \z fourgon. 
 7fe tfj&j, les ceridres. 
 The flames, la flamrae. 
 77?<f smoke, la fumee. 
 7!fe wo/, la suie. 
 Matches, des allumettes,. 
 Tinder, la meche. 
 ^/ tinder-box, une boite L 
 
 fusil. 
 y4 jft/?/, une pierre a fusil. 
 7&^ j/^/, le fusil., Je briquet* 
 A kettle, un cbaudron, 
 ^4 ^/, un pot* 
 A pot -lid, un couvercle, 
 ^ flesh-hook, un- crochet. 
 A tre*vet., un trepied. 
 y^ skimmer, une ecumoire* 
 A frying-pan, une poele. 
 v£ pudding.pan y une^ tour- 
 
 tiere. 
 ^ j/5;/, une broche, 
 A jack) un tournebroche* 
 ^ broom, un balai. 
 ^4 rubber, un torchon, 
 
 ore properly spelt, cuU!he>- 
 
 0-6 
 
36 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 A dripping-pan, u \t leche- 
 frite. 
 
 A thaflng-dish, un rechaud. 
 
 A sieve, un i.amis. 
 
 A washing-tub^ une cuve. 
 
 Pincers , des ten a i lies. 
 
 A nail, un clou. 
 
 A hammer, un mflrteau. 
 
 A cullender, un couloir. 
 
 Herb SjPLANTs^and Fruit, 
 
 Turnips, dts navets. 
 Carres, des carrotes. 
 Red beets, des betteraves. 
 Radishes, des raves. 
 Spinage, de* epi nards . 
 Cabbages, des choux. 
 Cauliflowers, des choux- 
 
 fkurs. 
 Artichokes, des artichaux. 
 Asparagus, des asperges. 
 Lettuce, de la laitue. 
 Endive, de la chicoree. 
 Celery, du celeri. 
 Panky, du persil. 
 Rur slain, du pourpier. 
 Presses, du cresson. 
 Sorrel, de l'oseille. 
 Onions, des ognons, 
 Gtfrffri, de l'ail.' 
 ^ballots, des echalottes. 
 £-vi/, des porreaux. 
 Thyme, du thym. 
 Chervil, du cerfeuil, 
 fozgr, de la sauge. 
 Melons, des melons. 
 Cucumbers, des concombrcs, 
 Grurds, des citrouillcs. 
 Pumpkins, des courges. 
 Kettles, dm or ties. 
 A<rr#j de la fougcre# 
 
 Thistles, des chardons, 
 A flower, une fleur. 
 v4 //^/^, une tulippe. 
 A violet, une violette. 
 y4 ^i*<, un ceillet. 
 ^ r/civ gilliflower, une £ji- 
 rofiee. 
 
 ^ P°ppy> un P avot » 
 Wild poppy, du coquelicoU 
 //?//>■, du houx* 
 y^ /r^, un arbie. 
 «/? shruby un arbrisscau. 
 ^ wall-tree, un espalier. 
 Brambles, des ronces. 
 ^ //^r;/, une epine. 
 Apples, des pommes. 
 Pears, des poires. 
 Cherries, des cerises. 
 Plums, des prunes. 
 Almonds, des amandes. 
 Peaches, des peches. 
 //£*, des fig ties. 
 Chesnuts, des chataignes. 
 JValnuts, des noix. 
 Hazelnuts, des noisettes* - 
 Filberts, des avelines. 
 Oranges, des oranges. 
 Lemons, des citrons. 
 Grapes, du raisin. 
 Gooseberries, des groseilles. 
 Strawberries, des f^ises. 
 
 Of the Study and the 
 School* 
 
 Paper, du papier. 
 
 Blotting paper, du papier 
 
 brouillard. 
 Brown paper, du papier gris. 
 Gilt paper, du papier dore. 
 >4 y//;>r 0/* paper, une main 
 
 dc papier. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 37 
 
 A sheet of 'paper , une feuille 
 
 de papier. 
 A ream of pa per > une rame 
 
 de papier. 
 A book) une livre. 
 A page , une page. 
 A leafy un feuillet. 
 The margin , la marge. 
 The ink, Pencre. 
 The inkhorn, Pecritoire. 
 Cotton, du coton. 
 A petty une plume* 
 The niby le bee. 
 The slit, la fente. 
 A penknife, un canif. 
 Dust, de la poussiere. 
 Sandy du sable, 
 A pounce-boxy un poudrier. 
 A lesson, une lecon. 
 J Fax, de la cire. 
 Wafers, des pains a cacheter. 
 
 <^ seal, un cachet* 
 
 A pocket-book, des tablettes* 
 
 -^ r«/<rr, une regie, 
 
 A writing, une ecriture. 
 
 /f letter, une lettre. 
 
 A syllable, une sy llabe, 
 
 ^/ word, un met. 
 
 if* accent y un accent. 
 
 A phrase, un phrase. 
 
 yi sentence, une sentence. 
 
 ^ period, une periode. 
 
 y£ theme, un theme. 
 
 ^4 translation , une traduc- 
 
 Hon, 
 Verses, des vers. 
 Pm<?, de la prose. 
 i4 */.-*£, un pupicre. 
 Parchment, du parchemin. 
 Pasteboard, du-carton. 
 ^ i/e/, un pate. 
 A pencil y un crayon. 
 
 ' FAMILIAR AND EASY DIALOGUES 
 
 FOR YOUNG BEGINNERS. 
 
 QIR, jour most humble ser- 
 vant, 
 I have the henour to be yours, 
 
 I hope you are well ? 
 To pay my respects to you* 
 To obey you. 
 How are all at borne P 
 
 They are all well. 
 
 Ready to do you any service. 
 
 At your service. 
 
 And you, Madam, how do 
 
 you do P 
 Pretty well. Very well, 
 
 Monsieur, voire tres-hum- 
 
 ble serviteur. 
 J'ai Phonneur d'etre le 
 
 votre* 
 Votre sante est-elle bonne ? 
 A vous rendre mes devoirs. 
 A vous obeir. 
 Comment Se porte-t-on chez 
 
 vous ? 
 Tout le monde s'y porte bien. 
 Pret a vous rendre service. 
 A votre service. 
 Et vous, Madame, comment 
 
 vous portez-vous i 
 Passablement bien. Tres- 
 
 bien. 
 
Is all your family well ? 
 
 Perfectly Weil. 
 
 How is ysur mother P^—your 
 father — -year sister P 
 
 You do them much honour ; 
 they ure all in pood health, 
 
 I am <very glad to see ysu in 
 
 good health. 
 And I to see you. 
 I am infinitely obliged to 
 
 you. 
 I. humbly thank you, 
 
 I. am much indebted to you. 
 I gi'veyou a thousand thanks. 
 Madam , you jest ; I do but 
 
 my duty. 
 Now I think on it r how is 
 
 your brother P 
 Exceeding 'well. 
 I am 'very glad of it. 
 Dees he learn French P 
 Yes, Sir, and my sister like- 
 wise. 
 Does he go to school P 
 He goes to the Jlcademy, and 
 
 my sister is at a hoarding. 
 
 school. 
 I shall be 'very glad to see 
 
 the?n at the next holydays. 
 Sir, they will not be less glad 
 
 to see you . 
 
 Fnrewely present my best re- 
 spects to your father and 
 mother. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Tout le monde se porte-t-i: 
 bien chez vous ? 
 
 Parfaitement bien. 
 
 Comment se porte Madame 
 votre aiere ? — Monsieur 
 votre pere ? — Mademoi- 
 selle votre sceur ? 
 
 Vous leur faires bien de 
 Phonneur ; ils sont tous 
 en bonne saute. 
 
 Je suis bien charrne de vous- 
 voir en bonne sante. 
 
 Et moi pareillement. 
 
 Je vous suis infiniment 
 oblige. 
 
 Je vous semercie tres-hum- 
 blement. 
 
 Je vous suis bien redevable* 
 
 Je vous rends mille graces. 
 
 Madame, vous vous mcquez ; 
 je ne fais que mon devoir. 
 
 A propos, comment se porte. 
 Monsieur votre frere ? 
 
 Parfaitement bien, 
 
 J'en suis bien aise. 
 
 Apprend-il le Francois ? 
 
 Oui, Monsieur, et ma sceur 
 aussi. 
 
 Va-t.il a l'ecole ? 
 
 11 va a PAcademie, et ma 
 sceur est dans une pen- 
 sion. 
 
 Jc serai bien aise de les voir 
 aux vacancesprochaines. 
 
 Monsieur, ils ne seront pas 
 moins charmes de vous 
 voir. 
 
 Adieu, presentcz mes tres- 
 humbles respects a Mon- 
 sieur votre pete et a Ma- 
 dame votre mere. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 Tell them I will come and see 
 them some day or other \ 
 
 IVcll, good b'ye. 
 
 { 
 
 II. 
 
 39 
 
 Dites-leur que j'irai les voir 
 un de ces jours. 
 
 Ah ca, au plaisir. 
 
 Ak ea, a 1'honneur. 
 
 Sir, I am overjoyed to meet 
 
 you here. 
 Sir, you are very kind, 
 
 Ho-zu have you done since I 
 had the pleasure to see 
 you P 
 
 Very well ; thank God* 
 
 My mother is skk. 
 
 Is she P indeed I am very 
 
 sorry for it. 
 What is the matter with her P 
 She has the headach. 
 She has the footbath* 
 She has a fever. 
 She has not been out of doors 
 
 this fortnight. 
 I a;r, very serry I have not 
 
 time to see her to day. 
 
 What hinders you P 
 
 Indeed I cannot : I must go 
 to Islington. 
 
 She would he very glad to 
 see you. 
 
 To morrow, without fail, I 
 will do myself the honour, 
 
 I am very sorry to hear she 
 is ill 
 
 Do not jail to call to mor- 
 row. 
 
 No, no, I vjill not fail* 
 
 de- 
 
 Monsieur, je sols ravi 
 
 vous rencontrer ici. 
 Monsieur, vous avez bien de 
 
 la bonte. 
 Comment vous etes-vous 
 
 portedepuis que jen'ai em 
 
 le plaisir de vous voir ? 
 Toujours tres-bien ; Dieu 
 
 merci. 
 Ma mere est malade. 
 Elle est malade ! En verite 
 
 j'ei> suis tres-fache. 
 Qu'esuce qu'elle a ? 
 Elle a ma! a la tete. 
 Elle a mal aux. dents. 
 Elle a la fievre. 
 II j a quinze jours qu'elle 
 
 n'est sortie. 
 Je suis tres-fache de n'a- 
 
 voir pas le temps de la 
 
 voir aujourd'hui. 
 Qu'est-ce qui vous en em~ 
 
 peche ? 
 En verite, je ne puis : il 
 
 faut que j'ailie a Islington. 
 Elle seroit bien aise de vous 
 
 voir. 
 Demain, sans faute, j'aurai 
 
 cet honneur Ja. 
 Je suis tres-fache d'appren- 
 
 dre qu'elle se porte mal. 
 Ne manquez pas de venir 
 
 demain. 
 Non, non • je n'y manque- 
 pa i pas. 
 
4° 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 / rely on you. 
 
 Ycu may defend upon me. 
 
 Je cornpte sur vous, - 
 Vous pouvcz compter car 
 moi. 
 Farewell:. I will tell her so. Adieu ; je le hi! (lira*. 
 
 III. 
 
 Let us speak nothing but Ne pari on s que Francois ? 
 
 French, 
 Agreed ; it is the best means 
 
 of learning a language. 
 
 Well$ I ei us begin. 
 
 Do you speak French ? 
 
 J speak it a little. 
 
 French is a very useful l*tn- 
 
 It is noiv the universal lan- 
 
 guage. 
 The French language is very 
 
 difficult. 
 The English is still more so. 
 
 Are you very voell versed in 
 the French tongue ? 
 
 Not much ; 1 am beginning 
 to learn it. 
 
 Do you understand what you 
 read? 
 
 Better than I can speak. 
 
 1 do not vuonder at that: it 
 is alvjays easier to under- 
 stand a language y than to 
 speak it. 
 
 Who teaches you French? 
 
 Mr. A. 
 
 / know him ; he is a very 
 
 able man. 
 }Joiv many times a week does 
 
 he attend yen ? 
 
 J'y consens ; e'est le meil. 
 
 leur moyen d'apprendre 
 
 line langue. 
 He bien ; commencons. 
 Parlez-vous Francois ? 
 Je le parle un peu. 
 Le Francois est une langue 
 
 tres-utile. 
 C'cst aujourd'hui la langue 
 
 universelle.. 
 Le Francois est tres-din> 
 
 cile. 
 L'Anglois l'est encore da- 
 vantage. 
 Etez-vous bien savant dans 
 
 la langue Francoise ?. 
 Pas beaucoup; je ne fais que 
 
 de commenccr. 
 Comprenez-vous ce que vous 
 
 lisez ? 
 Mieux que je ne paile.. 
 Je ne nVen etonne pas : il 
 
 est toujours plus facile de 
 
 comprendre une langue 
 
 que de la parler, 
 Qui est-ce qui vous enseigne 
 
 leF 
 
 ran9ois 
 
 ? 
 
 C'est Monsieur A. 
 
 Je le connois ; c'cst un tres. 
 
 habile homme. 
 Combicn de lemons vous 
 
 donnc-t-il par scmaine ? 
 6 i 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 As often as I am at leisure. 
 
 4* 
 
 Almost every day. 
 
 Hqtjj long have you been 
 
 learning French? 
 Six months. 
 Indeed you have made a 
 
 great progress. 
 Sir, ycu encourage me to 
 
 make greater. 
 
 You must always speak 
 French. 
 
 I am afraid of making blun- 
 ders. 
 
 I should be laughed at. 
 
 O no ; do not be afraid of 
 being lauglxd at. 
 
 Aussi souvent que j'en ai le 
 temps. 
 
 Presque tous les jours. 
 
 Combien y a-t-il que vous 
 apprenez le Francois ? 
 
 Six mois. 
 
 En verite vous avez fait de 
 grands progres. 
 
 Monsieur, vous m'eficoura- 
 gez a en faire de plus 
 grands. 
 
 II faut tou jours parler Fran- 
 cois. 
 
 J'ai peur de faire des fautcs? 
 
 On se moqueroit de moi. 
 Point du tout ; ne craigner 
 pas qu'on se moque de 
 
 YOUS. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Where are you gourgP 
 
 I am going to the Park, to 
 
 churchy to the play, to 
 
 Greenwich, t$ Islington, 
 
 Vr. 
 Where do you come from ? 
 I come from the Park, from 
 
 church, from the play, 
 from Greenwich, from Is~ 
 
 Zing ton, &c. 
 Was the king at the play ? 
 Yet, and the queen too* 
 How do you like the English 
 
 language ? 
 The English tongue is very 
 
 difficult for Frenchmen to 
 
 learn. 
 Do you learn Latin f 
 I have been learning it these 
 
 tvjo years. 
 
 Ou aller-vous ? 
 
 Je vais au Pare, a l'eglise, £ 
 
 la comedie, a Greenwich, 
 
 a Islington, &c. 
 
 D'ou venez.vous ? 
 
 Je viens du Pare, de Peglise, 
 de la comedie, de Green- 
 wich, d'Islington, &c. 
 
 Le roi etoit.il a la comedie? 
 Oci, et la reine aussi. 
 Comment trouvez-vous la 
 
 langue Angloise ? 
 Je trouve que l'Angloii 
 
 est tres. difficile pour ies 
 
 Francois. 
 Apprenez. vous le Latin ? 
 II y a deux ans que je l*ap. 
 
 p rends. 
 
42 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 What doyen think of Latin ? 
 Sir.) I think that Latin is 
 mere difficult than French. 
 
 You are right* 
 
 What French authors do you 
 read ? 
 
 I read the Adventures of 
 Telemachus, the Age of 
 Lewis XlV y the History 
 cf Charles XII, king of 
 Sweden. 
 
 Do not you read sometimes 
 la Fontaine* s Fables? 
 
 Yes, Sir, my master told me 
 he was the best author for 
 fables. 
 
 What do you learn by heart? 
 
 I learn the article s, the pro- 
 nouns, the verbs, &c. 
 
 You pronounce the French very 
 well. 
 
 I take a great deal of pains* 
 
 Nothing is to be done without 
 pains* 
 
 Que pensez-vous du Latin? 
 Monsieur, je pense que le 
 
 Latin est plus difficile que 
 
 le Francois. 
 Vous avez raison. 
 Quelsauteurs Francois lisez- 
 
 vous ? 
 Je lis les A ventures de Te- 
 
 lemaque, le Siecle de 
 
 Louis XIV, PHistoire 
 
 de Charles XII, roi dc 
 
 Suede. 
 Ne lisez- vous pas quelquefois 
 
 les Fables de la Fontaine I 
 Oui, Monsieur, mon maitre 
 
 m'a dit que e'etoit lemeiU 
 
 leur auteur pour les fables, 
 Qu'apprenez-vous par cceur? 
 J'apprends les articles, les 
 
 pronoms, les verbes, &c. 
 Vo«s prononcez tres-bien le 
 
 Francois. 
 Je prends beaucoup de peine* 
 On n'a rien sans peine. 
 
 /; it true ? 
 Yes, it is true 
 Do you believe it ? 
 It is but too true. 
 Bdieve me on my word. 
 I would not tell yeu a lie 
 for all the gold in the 
 world. 
 Did you see it ? 
 Why did you not tell it mc ? 
 
 I can assure ysu* 
 I believe you* 
 
 Est-il vrai ? 
 
 Oui, il est vrai. 
 
 Le croyez-vous ? 
 
 II n'est que trop vrai. 
 
 Croyez-moi sur ma parole. - 
 
 Je ne voudrois pas vous dire 
 
 un mensonge pour tout Tor 
 
 du monde. 
 L'avez-vous vu ? 
 Pourquoi ne me l'avez-vous- 
 
 p*s dit ? 
 Je puis vous assurer, 
 Je vous crois. 
 
French tongue, 
 
 43 
 
 ou speak in earnest P 
 1 speak in earnest, 
 U elly be it so, 
 I will not oppose it , 
 That is not true. 
 You are mistaken. 
 Did you guess it ? 
 Who told it you ? 
 ■Somebody you know* 
 
 Are you certain of ft ? 
 
 You may be mistaken, 
 
 I do not believe I am mis- 
 taken. 
 
 There is no such thing. 
 
 Who doubts it ? 
 
 1 can never dcubt it. 
 
 There is no doubt of it, 
 
 I will lay any thing you 
 please. 
 
 I never lay any wager. 
 
 When did you see - him or 
 her? 
 
 When did you see them ? 
 
 I saw him last week. 
 
 I saw her last month. 
 
 I have not seen them. 
 
 What do you say f 
 
 I said nothing at all, 
 
 I heard it. 
 
 Do not believe such a story. 
 
 I do not believe it. 
 
 When did you hear it ? 
 
 To day y yesterday^ the day 
 befo re yesterday , 
 
 Will you tell it him ? 
 
 I shall never tell it him. 
 
 Do you choose to drink a dish 
 of tea f 
 
 Parlez-vous serieusement ? 
 Je parle serieusement. 
 He bien, a la bonne heure. 
 Je ne ra'y opposerai pas. 
 Cela n'est pas vrai. 
 Vous vous trompez. 
 L'avez-vous devine ? 
 Qui est.ce qui vous Pa dit ? 
 C'est quelqu'un que vous 
 
 connoissez. 
 Efes-vous sur de cela ? 
 Vous pouvez vous tromper. 
 Je ne crois pas que je me 
 
 trompe. 
 II n'y a rien de cela. 
 Qui est-ce qui en dowte ? 
 Je n'en douterai jamais. 
 II n'y a point de doute. 
 Je gagerai tout ce qu'il vous 
 
 plaira. 
 Je ne fais jamais de gageure, 
 Quand l'avez-vous vu, or 
 
 vue ? 
 Quand les avez-vous vus ? 
 Je le vis la semaine passee. 
 Je la vis le mois passe. 
 Je ne les ai pas vus. 
 Que dites-vous ? 
 Je n'ai rien dit du tout, 
 Je l'ai oui dire. 
 Ne croyez pas un tel conte, 
 Je ne le crois pas. 
 Quand l'avez-vous oui dire ? 
 Aujourd'hui, hier, avant- 
 
 hier. 
 Le lui direz-vous ? 
 Je ne le lui dirai jamais. 
 
 VI. 
 
 Souhaitez-vous prendre une 
 tasse de the ? 
 
4* 
 
 Sir, J am much obliged to you ; 
 I never drink any. 
 
 do you 
 
 drink 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Monsieuiy je vous suis trcs- 
 oblige : je n'en prends ja- 
 mais. 
 
 Quoi ! vous ne prenez ja- 
 mais de the ? 
 
 Vous aimez peut-ctre mieux 
 k cafe ? 
 
 Savez-vous quelque nou- 
 velle ? 
 
 Je n'en sais point qui soit 
 digne cje vous etre rap- 
 portee. 
 
 On ne parle de rien. 
 
 Quand I'attendez.vous? 
 
 L'vez-vous jamais connu ? 
 
 Tie le connois de reputation. 
 
 Vous en souvenez-vous ? 
 
 Non, Monsieur, je ne m'en 
 souyiens pas. 
 
 J'ai la memoire tres-mau- 
 vaise. 
 
 Vous oubliez aisement. 
 
 Voulez-vous faire un petit 
 tour de promenade ? ; 
 
 De tout moa cceur. 
 
 Ou irons-nous ? 
 
 AUonsau Pare ; nousj ver- 
 rons le roi. 
 
 A quelle heure peut-on le 
 voir ? 
 
 Vers midi. 
 
 Je serois bien aise de ie 
 voir. 
 
 C'es-t un tres-beau prince. 
 
 Je serai bien ai^e dc voir aus- 
 si la reinc : tout le monde 
 en dit du bien.. 
 
 Avez-vous jamais vu le 
 prince de Cialles ? 
 
 Cn dit que e'ei-t, un beau 
 jeune prince. 
 
 What! 
 
 tea? 
 You like coffee better^ per* 
 
 haps f 
 Do you know any news ? 
 
 I know cf nothing worth jour 
 while to hear* 
 
 There is no talk of any thing. 
 IV hen do you expect him ? 
 Didyou ever know him F 
 J know him by reputation . 
 Dojou remember it f* 
 No, Slr } I do not remember 
 
 it. 
 I have a very bad memory. 
 
 You forget easily. 
 
 Will you take a little walk ? 
 
 With all my heart. 
 
 Whither shall we go ? 
 
 Let us ga into the Park ; we 
 
 shall see the king there. 
 At what 0* clock is he to be 
 
 seen f 
 About t twelve o'clock. 
 I should be very glad to see 
 
 him. 
 lie is a very handsome man. 
 J shall be glad to see the queen 
 
 likewise : every body speaks 
 
 well of her. 
 Did you ever see tie prince of 
 
 Wales ? 
 They say he is a handsome 
 
 young prince. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 VII. 
 
 45 
 
 It is very fine weather. 
 
 Do you 'believe it vuill rain to 
 day? 
 
 I do not believe it will cease 
 raining all the day long. 
 
 The sky is very clear and se- 
 rene. 
 
 This is the best season rf the 
 year. 
 
 What season do you like best F 
 
 The summer is the most agree- 
 able of all the seasons. 
 
 It is sometimes very cold in the 
 spring. 
 
 I do not like vuinter at all. 
 
 Do you not go to the play ? 
 
 I am to go thither this even- 
 ing. 
 
 There is a new play. 
 
 There vuill be a great many 
 people. 
 
 I have a mind to go thither 
 likewise. 
 
 Do : I shall be very glad to 
 accompany you. 
 
 Stay a little ; I ivill be with 
 you in an instant. 
 
 Finish your business ; I vuill 
 stay for you. 
 
 Now, I am ready. 
 
 Let us go. 
 
 [1 fait tr£s-beau temps. 
 Croyez-vous qu'ii pleuve 
 
 aujourd'hui ? 
 Je ne crois pas que la pluie 
 
 cesse d'aujourd'hui. 
 Le ciel est tr£s-clair et tres- 
 
 *erein. 
 Nous sommes a present dans 
 
 la meilleure saison. 
 Quelle saison aimez-vous da- 
 vantage ? 
 L'ete est la plus agreable de 
 
 toutes les saisons. 
 II fait quelquefois tres-froid 
 
 au printeraps. 
 Je n'aime pas du tout l'hiver. 
 N'allez-vous pas a la come- 
 
 die? 
 Je dois y aller ce soir. 
 
 II y a une nouvelle piece. 
 II y aura an grand concours 
 
 de monde. 
 J*ai dessein d'y aller aussi. 
 
 Venez : je serai bien aise de 
 vous y accompagner. 
 
 Attendez un peu ; je suis a 
 vous dans 1 'instant. 
 
 Faites vos affaires ; je vous 
 attendrai. 
 
 A present, je suis pret. 
 
 Allons. 
 
 What o'clock is it t 
 What o'clock do you belt 
 
 it is ? 
 I believe it is not yet late* 
 
 VIII. 
 
 Quelle heure est-il ? 
 'icve Quelle heure croyez.vcus 
 qu'il soit ? 
 Je crois qu'il n'est pas en- 
 core tard. 
 
46 
 
 A. GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Guess. 
 
 Nine o'clock* 
 
 It is past ten o'clock. 
 
 It is a quarter after ten. 
 
 It is half an hour after ten. 
 
 It is three Quarters after ten. 
 
 Indeed> I did not think it was 
 
 so late. 
 Tune runs swiftly. 
 
 We 
 
 dull 
 
 v e are never dult in good 
 company. 
 
 Let us go and take a walk in 
 the garden. 
 
 With all my heart. 
 
 Have you any fine flowers in 
 your garden ? 
 
 Very, fine ones. 
 
 Will you give me leave to 
 gather some ? 
 
 You may gather as many as 
 you please. 
 
 Do you choose some pears y ap- 
 ples, cherries, &c. 
 
 I a?n not fond of fruit. 
 
 Let lis go home ; it is almost 
 
 dinner-time. 
 Are you hungry ? * 
 
 Have you a good appetite ? 
 I do not know whether I 
 
 shall be able to eat any 
 
 dinner ; I b reakfasted ve ry 
 
 heartily. 
 Eating creates an appetite. 
 
 Devinez. 
 
 Neuf heures. 
 II est dix heures passees. 
 II est dix heures et un quart. 
 II est dix heures ct demie. 
 II est onze heures moins un 
 
 quart. 
 En verite, je ne croyois pas 
 
 qu'il fut si tard. 
 Le temps s'ecoule avec ra- 
 pid ite. 
 On ne s'cnnuie jamais en 
 
 bonne compagnie. 
 Aliens faire un tour au jar- 
 din. 
 De tout mon cceur. 
 Avez-vous de belles fleurs 
 
 dans votre jardin ? 
 De fort belles. 
 Voulez.vous me denner la 
 
 permission d'eri eueillir ? 
 Veus en pouvez eueillir au- 
 
 tant qu'il vous plaira. 
 Souhaitez-vons des poires, 
 
 des pommes, des cerises, 
 
 Sec. 
 Je ne suis pas grand amateur 
 
 de fruit. 
 Allons au logis : il est bieru 
 
 tot temps de diner. 
 Avez-vous faim ? 
 Avez-vous bon appetit ? 
 Je ne sais pas si je pourrai 
 
 diner; j'ai tres-bien de- 
 
 jeune. 
 
 L'appetit vient en mangeant. 
 
 Let us sit-down to table. 
 Is dinner tUt'dy ? 
 
 Mettons.nous a tabic. 
 Le diner est-il prct { 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 47 
 
 The meat is upon the tabic. 
 Sir, you are ceremonious ; 
 fray do not make any cere. 
 
 many * 
 What do you choose to have? 
 What you please. 
 Hovj do you like the roast 
 
 meat ? 
 It is exceeding good, and very 
 
 tender. 
 Sir, if you be dry, call for 
 
 something to drink. 
 You do not eat. 
 I beg your pardon ; I eat 
 
 'very heartily. 
 This is all <we have. 
 There is no ?ieed of any thing 
 
 els-e. 
 I invited you to dinner, only 
 
 to enjoy your company. 
 
 What do you choose to drink ? 
 
 Sir y your health. 
 
 Madam, 1 harve the honour to 
 drink your health. 
 
 Shall I help you to a little lit 
 of this leg of mutton p 
 
 I am in 'finitely obliged to you ; 
 I have eaten enough. 
 
 No more. 
 
 What shall we do after din- 
 ner? 
 
 What the ladies phase. 
 
 On a servi. 
 
 Monsieur, vous faitesdes ce- 
 remonies ; de grace, n'en 
 faites point. 
 
 Que souhaitez- vous ? 
 
 Ce qu'ii vous plaira. 
 
 Comment trouvez-vous ce 
 roti ? 
 
 II est excellent, et tres-ten- 
 dre. 
 
 Monsieur, si vous avez soif, 
 demandez a boire. 
 
 Vous ne rhahgez pas.. 
 
 Je vous demande pardon ; je 
 mange «le bon appetit. 
 
 C'est tout ce que nous avons, 
 
 II ne taut rien de plus. 
 
 • Je ne vous ai invite a diner, 
 que pour jouir de votre 
 compagnie. 
 
 Que souhaitez -vous boire ? 
 
 Monsieur, a votre same. 
 
 Madame, j'ai l'honneur de 
 beire a votre sante. 
 
 Vous servirai-je un petit 
 mcrceau de gigot ? 
 
 Je vous suis infiniment 
 oblige ; j'ai assez mange. 
 
 Fas davantage. 
 
 Que ferons-nous apres di- 
 ner ? 
 
 Ce qu'il plaira a ces dames . 
 
 X. 
 
 We shall have a holy day to 
 
 morrow* 
 Shovj me your theme. 
 I will shcvj it to you after 
 
 breakfast, 
 
 8 
 
 Nons aurcns demain conge. 
 
 Montrez-moi votre theme. 
 Je vous le montr«erai apres 
 dejeuner. 
 
4.8 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Who took my inkstand? 
 
 Give me my penknife. 
 I did net see it. 
 Do not Hot your paper. 
 Who has any wafers ? 
 
 Here, I will give you some. 
 They make a great deal of 
 
 ?ioise there. 
 Sit down in your place, and 
 
 be quiet. 
 Indeed, I did not speak a 
 
 word. 
 Learn your lesson. 
 I knew it perfectly well. 
 Will you be pleased to make 
 
 me a pen ? 
 This is good for nothing. 
 Make your pens yourself 
 
 Why is your theme so ill 
 
 written. 
 Because the' paper sinks. 
 It is wet ; you must dry it by 
 
 the fire. 
 What is the French for . . . ? 
 How doyou say in French . . . ? 
 
 Why do you not shut the 
 
 door ? 
 I found it open. 
 Your stockings have holes in 
 
 them. 
 I will get them mended. 
 I did not observe it nvhen I 
 
 put them on. 
 Tie up your garters ; your 
 
 stockings are about your 
 
 keels. 
 Now come and say your Us- 
 
 son. 
 
 Qui est-ce qui a pris mon 
 
 ecritoire ? 
 Donnez-moi mon canif. 
 Je ne l'ai pas vu. 
 Ne faites point de pates. 
 Qui est-ce qui a des pains a 
 
 cacheter ? 
 Venez, je vous en donnerai. 
 On fait beaucoup de bruit 
 
 par-la. 
 Asseyez-vous a votre place, 
 
 et soyez tranquille. 
 En verite, je ne dis mot. 
 
 Apprenez votre lecon. 
 
 Jela sais parfaitement bien. 
 
 Vous plait.il de me tailler 
 une plume ? 
 
 Celle-ci ne vaut rien du tout. 
 
 Taillez ros plumes vous- 
 meme. 
 
 Pourquoi votre theme est-il 
 si mal ecrit ? 
 
 C'est que le papier boit. 
 
 II est humide ; il faut le faire 
 secher devant le feu. 
 
 Quel est le Francois de . . . ? 
 
 Comment dit.on en Fran- 
 cois . . . ? 
 
 Pourquoi ne fermez.vous pas 
 la porte ? 
 
 Je l'ai trouvee ouverte. 
 
 Vos bas sont troues. 
 
 Je les ferai raccommoder. 
 je n'y ai pas pris garde 
 
 quand je les ai mis. 
 Attachcz vos jarretieres ; 
 
 vos bas sont ravales. 
 
 A present, venez dire votre 
 lecon. 
 
-FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 49 
 
 / have but two words to 
 
 write. 
 Give me leave to go ou/ 9 
 
 Go, and come back imme~ 
 
 diately, 
 I have lost my pencil. 
 You lose every thing. 
 You do not take tare cf any 
 
 thing. 
 Somebody took it from me. 
 Look for it, 
 
 I have looked every where. 
 Lend me your book* 
 I want it myself. 
 D9 not push me; I cmnot 
 
 write. 
 Who shakes the table ? 
 I did not do it on purpost. 
 Weil 9 let us tee* 
 
 Je n'ai que deux mots £ 
 
 ecrire. 
 Donnez-moi permission de 
 
 sortir. 
 Allez, et revenez dans I'ins- 
 
 tant. 
 J' a 1 perdu men crayon. 
 Vous perdez rout. 
 Vous ne prenez garde i 
 
 rien. 
 Quelqu'un me 1'a pris, 
 Ghercfaez-Ie. 
 Je i'ai cherche partout, 
 Fretez-moi votre livra. 
 J'en ai besoin mowmeme. 
 Ne me poussez pas ; je ne 
 
 puis ecrire 
 Qui est-ce qui remue la table f 
 Je ne l'ai pas fair expres. 
 Ah ca, voyons. 
 
 XL 
 
 It h time to go to bed. 
 
 It grows late. 
 
 2 never go to bed so early. 
 
 At what q* clock do you rise P 
 
 I have no fixed hour. 
 
 You 7nay sit up as long as ycu 
 
 please ; for my party I am 
 
 going tQ bed. 
 I am used to go to . led be* 
 
 times. 
 Light a candle. 
 Where are my slippers ? 
 I am going to fetch them, 
 Snuff the candle. 
 Draw the curtails* 
 
 D 
 
 II est temps de' s'aller coa* 
 
 cher. 
 II se fait tard, 
 Je ne me ccuche jamais* de 
 
 si benre heure. 
 A quelle heure' vous levez. 
 
 vous ? 
 Je n'ai point d'heure fixe. 
 Vous pouvez vefller tant 
 
 qu'il vous plaira;-pour 
 
 moi, je vais me coucher. 
 J'ai coutume de me coucher 
 
 de bonne heure. 
 Allumez une chandelle. 
 Ou sont mes pantoufles ? 
 Je m'ich vais les querir* 
 Mouchez la chandelle, 
 Tirez les rideaux. 
 
5° 
 
 A GRAMAR OF THE 
 
 Do not fail to wake me. 
 
 I shall come sooner perhaps 
 
 than you choose. 
 No ; do net b* afraid* 
 Gentlemen and ladies, I nvish 
 
 you a good night. 
 Sir y or Madam, I wish you 
 
 a good night's rest. 
 
 Ne manquez pas de m'eveil- 
 
 ler. 
 Je T/iendrai, peut-etre, plus 
 
 tot que vous ne voudrez. 
 Non ; n'ayez pas peur. 
 Messieurs 'et Mesdames, je 
 
 vous souhaite le bon soir. 
 Monsieur, ou Madame, je 
 
 vous souhaite une bonne 
 
 nuit. 
 
 XII. 
 
 What / you are abed still? 
 
 Do you sleep ? 
 No ; I am awake, 
 lou awake me too early ; it 
 it 'very dark yet. 
 
 Your curtains are drawn; 
 you do not see the daylight* 
 
 }Iow did you sleep last night P 
 
 I did not sleep a wink all the 
 night long* 
 
 No matter ; J shall get up 
 presently. 
 
 J am going to bid the ser- 
 vant light a fire. 
 
 Bring me some 'water ; I must 
 iv ash ??y face* my mouth* 
 and my hands. 
 
 IV here are my shoes f 
 They are at th*\ d;cr. 
 Are they clean f 
 Give trie some silk stockings. 
 
 Som< bedy knocks at the door; 
 go and i'.e who it is. 
 
 Quo! ! vous etes encore an 
 
 lit? 
 Dormez-vous ? 
 Non ; je suis eveille. 
 Nous m'eveillez de trop 
 grand mi tin ; il ne fait 
 pas encore jour. 
 Vos rideaux sont tires; vous 
 ne voyez pas la clarte du 
 jour. 
 Comment avez-vous dcrrni 
 
 cette nuit ? 
 je n'ai pas fcrme l'ceil de 
 
 toute la nuit. 
 N'importe; je me leverai 
 
 dans rinstant. 
 Je m'en va:s dire au domes- 
 
 tique de faire du feu. 
 Apportez moi de l'eau ; il 
 faut que je me lave le vi- 
 sage, la bouche, et les 
 mains. 
 Ou sont mes souliers ? 
 lis sont a la pcrte. 
 Sont-ils nettoyes ? 
 Donrtez-moi mes has de so'e. 
 On frappe a la porte ; alLz 
 voir qui e'e^t. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 / am not ready to go out. 
 
 5« 
 
 Take care to keep a good fire 
 
 in the parlour. 
 Tell Mr. A. I am coming 
 
 douon immediately. 
 
 Sir, I am overjoyed to see 
 
 you in good health. 
 I am sorry ' to ba<ve made you 
 
 wait so long. 
 Not at ally you jest. 
 
 I et u: po and take a <zvatk. 
 
 Je ne suis pas encore prct a 
 
 sortir. 
 Ayez soin de faire bon feu 
 
 dans la salle. 
 Allez dire a Mr. A. cpe je 
 
 vais decendre dans Pins. 
 
 tant. 
 Monsieur, je suis ravi de 
 
 vous voir en bonne sante. 
 Je suis fache de vous avoir 
 
 fait attendre si long-temps. 
 Point du tout, vous vous 
 
 moquez. 
 Ailons faire un tour de pro- 
 
 menade 
 
 PART IF. 
 
 CHAP. I, 
 
 A short Analysis of the Parts if Speech, 
 
 HPHERE are, in the French language, ten sorts of 
 -*- word-s, or parts of Speech, namely, the Article, 
 the Substantive or Noun, the Adjective or Adnoun, 
 the Pronoun, the Verb, the Adverb, the Participle., 
 the Preposition, the Conjunction, and. the Inter- 
 jection. 
 
 J. The Article is a word prefixed to substantives to 
 point them out, and to -show how far the signification 
 extends ; as, the study of history is useful and agreeable ; 
 V elude de Vhistoire est utile et agreable : the nature of 
 man is unknown to man; la nature de Vhomme cat inconnue' 
 a I homm?z A bad man is ungrateful toward God and 
 toward men ; un mechant homme est ingrat enters Dieu et 
 enters les hommes : A prince is not always so happy as the 
 people believe : un prince n* est pas toujour s aussi hexreux que 
 ie Peuph croiu 
 
 D 2 
 
56 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Grammarians admit of two sorts of articles; 
 
 The definite (the) /?, m. la y f. Tor the sirgular ; les, 
 plural for both genders. 
 
 The indefinite {a or an) nn> m. une, f. for the singu- 
 lar, des instead of quelques, ptusieurs, for the plural. 
 
 The definite article, 1st. restrains the signification of a 
 general appellation; as Y etude de I'htstoire est utile et 
 agreable. La nature de Vhomme est inconnue it I' bom me. 
 
 2dly. Indicates the gender and number of substantives ; 
 and for this reason is used in French before a noun taken 
 ( in it's widest sense ; as Y etude orne V esprit ; study adorns 
 the mind : la nature a beaucoup d'observateurs, mais elle 
 a pen de confide ns ; nature has many observers, but 
 she has few confidants. Les prince* ne sont pas toujour* 
 aussi heureux que le peuple croit : princes are not always 
 so happy as the people believe : les exemples intruisent 
 plus que les preceptes ; examples instruct more than pre- 
 cepts. 
 
 Substaatives in French having no termination to distinguish suffi- 
 ciently the plural from the singular, it has been necessary to prefix a 
 particle, in order to denote the number of the things spoken of; and 
 the article, which, as we have shown, limits the general signification 
 »f nouns, is also adapted to point out their gender and number. 
 
 The indefinite article is used in a vague sense, and re- 
 strains the signification of a general appellation to one or 
 several objects in an indefinite or partitive sense ; as, uti 
 prince n'es pas ioujours aussi heureux que le peuple croit. Nous 
 *vayons quelquejbis des princes tres-malhcureux ; we sometimes 
 see princes very unhappy. Un bom me de genie est sujet, 
 comme un autre hotnme, a commettre des ernun et des fames • 
 a man of genius is subject, like another man, to commit 
 (some) errours and faults. 
 
 II. A Substantive, or noun, is a word which ex- 
 presses the name of any thing that exists, or that we con- 
 ceive to be existing; as, the earth, — a house, — man, — 
 Peter, — virtue,* — prudence. La terre, — une ?naison y — 
 Vhommty — Pierre i-i—vertu, — prudence. 
 
 To Substantives belong gender, numher, and case. 
 The Gender is either masculine or feminine ; as, le pere y 
 la mere ; le jardin y la maison There is no neuter in the 
 French language. 3 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, £3 
 
 The number is either singular of plural'. 
 
 The singular signifies one thing ; as, le fere, la mere ■.— 
 The plural more than one; as, let fires, les meres. 
 
 The case signifies die different states, or the different 
 ci re u instances of a noun. 
 
 A noun in a proposition is to be considered either as subject or ob- 
 ject, that is to say, as governing or governed. The governing case, 
 . called also the nontinaii've, expresses the subject of the verb, and is 
 placed in French, as it is in English; before the verb, except in asking 
 a question. <- 
 
 II J. An Ad-jectivs is a word added to 2 substantive* 
 to express It's quality; as, a diligent scholar, un tether. 
 diligent. In French the adjective is declinable, and 
 agrees in gender and number wiih the substantive, to 
 wliich it is joined or refers; as, un petit homme, nut pe- 
 tite femme ; a little man, a little woman. 
 
 The feminine Gf adj£*ives is formed by adding an e (called mute 
 or femin-ne) to the masculine gender 5 as, ft" petit homme, une petite 
 femme; but if the primitive masculine end with an e mute, then there 
 is no alteration, and the feminine is like the masculine y as, un champ 
 fertile, une terre fertile. See chap. Ill, page 60. 
 
 IV. The Pronoun supplies the place of a noun, and 
 prevents the unpleasant effect of a frequent repetition ; 
 as, j'ai 'vu vion frere, ll e'toit tres-malade ; instead of 
 mon frere ctoit tres-malade, I saw my brother, he was very 
 sick ; instead of my brother Was very sick. 
 
 Pronouns are of six kinds, viz. personal, possessive, 
 demonstrative, relative, interrogative, and improper or 
 indefinite. 
 
 The personal pronoun is used instead of the name of a 
 person ; as, je, tu, il, m. ; tile, f. ; for the singular ; nous, 
 n/ozts, ils, m. ; el les, f. ; for the plural. 
 
 The possessive pronouns mark possession ; they are of 
 two sorts, conjunctive and absolute. 
 
 The conjunctive pronouns are used only with substan- 
 tives ; as, moir 3 ma, mes ; ton, la, tcs ; son sa, ses ; uotre y 
 uos ; <zotre* <vos; leur, leurs. 
 
 The absolute' pronouns are used by themselves, their 
 substantives being understood, as, le mien, la mienre, les 
 miens, les ihiennes; le tien, ' la tienne ; les tiens, \t% iien~ 
 
 D 3 
 
54 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 nes ; le sien y la sienne ; les siens, les siennes ; le noirc y la notre > 
 les notres ; le voire, la voire, les votres ; le &#/-, la A*«r, 
 les leurs. 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns are used to particularise 
 persons or things, as if pointed at by the ringer. 
 , The relative pronouns r&fer to persons or things spoken 
 of in a former part of a sentence. 
 
 The interrogative pronouus are used in asking ques- 
 tions. 
 
 The indefinite pronouns are used in a vague sense ; as, 
 toht, qndque y chaque, See, 
 
 V. A Verb is a word which signifies to be or to do ; 
 as, Thomas est studieux, Thomas is studious ; Thomas emdie, 
 T h o ma s studh s . 
 
 The proper definition of the verb is, that it is a word which signi- 
 fies affirmation ; for its proper office is., to affirm some attribute .or" the sub- 
 ject (or ncminttive) of the proposition. But if we join its principal 
 accidents, it may thus be denned: a word which signifies affirmation 
 with the designation of the person, number, and time: winch definiticn 
 agrees properly with the verb substantive to le (etre). But, since men 
 have frequently united certain attributes to the affirmation, for the 
 sake of brevity, the verb (active or neuter) may be again defined 
 thus ; a word signifying the~ affirmation of s^me attribute, ivitb the desig- 
 nation ef person, number, and time. 
 
 Verbs are divided, fust into regular and irregular, per- 
 sonal and impersonal. 
 
 "When a verb follows the rule of its conjugation, it is 
 called regular; but if it deviate from ir, it is called irre- 
 gular. 
 
 Personal verbs are those which are conjugated, with the 
 personal pronouns, je, tu, i/ 3 elle, &c. 
 
 Impersonal verbs are those which a re % conjugated only in 
 the third person singular with the pronoun if, ir. 
 
 Secondly, verbs are divided into active, passive, neuter, 
 and pronominal. 
 
 The active verb marks the action of its subject, or no- 
 minative case ; and makes good sense with "the accusative 
 of it's object, or the thing on which it nets ; as, je mange 
 du pain, I eat bread; tu bois de la bjere s thou drihkest 
 beer ; il chante wie chanson y he sings a song. 
 
 The passive verb marks the passion or suffering of its 
 subject ; je suit aime\ I am loved ; tu ei /#*/> thou art 
 punished ; il est ba7ini } he is banished, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, $5 
 
 A neuter verb is a word denoting the action of It's sub- 
 ject or nominative, which action remains in the subject, 
 and does not with propriety admit an accusative alter' it - 9 
 as, Je dors, I sleep j il cdurt, he runs, 
 
 The pronominal verbs receive their name from being 
 conjugated with a double pronoun, as je me refens, I re- 
 pent. 
 
 There are also two auxiliary or helping verbs, &re s tor 
 be, and avoir, to have ; these are called auxiliary, from 
 their helping in the conjugation of other verbs. 
 
 Four things are to be distinguished in verbs ; the mood, 
 the tense, the number, and the person, 
 
 The mood expresses the different manner and uses made- 
 of a Verb positively, conditionally, or in an unspecified 
 manner. There are five moods, infinitive, indicative, con- 
 ditional, subjunctive, and imperative. 
 
 The infinitive is the root of the verb : it expresses the 
 aclioa or passion in an indefinite sense, without any parti- 
 cular circumstance of time, number, or person. 
 
 The indicative expresses the action ox passion in a di- 
 rect and positive manner, in. a time, present, past, or future. 
 We shall have a more precise idea of the indicative in com. 
 . paring it with the subjunctive mood. 
 
 The conditional expresses the action or passion with de- 
 pendence on a condition » 
 
 The subjunctive is a manner of expressing the action 
 or passion with a modified affirmation or negation, always 
 supposing another verb, which it follows, or to which it - 
 belongs, or some conjunction by which it is governed*. 
 
 * The differences between the indicative and the subjunctive are; 
 chiefly: I. The tenses of the subjunctive affirm or deny indirectly, al- 
 ways supposing another verb affirming or denying directly; as in this 
 phrase : I will have you do your duty, je veui que voits lassie z votre 
 devoir. Je veux is a direct affirmation, and independent of any other; 
 whereas que vous fassiez voire devoir is but an indirect affirmation, and 
 depending- on the first. 2. The tenses of the subjunctive are so depend- 
 ing on the words or conjunctions that are before them, that they pan- 
 not be separated from them without having an undetermined sentie, 
 consequently do not make a simple affirmation. So if from the fore- 
 going example you take awayjV vzux que, what follows, vousfa&sie* 
 <votre devoir, has no determined sense, and could not be put in the be- 
 ginning of a phrase : whereas the tenses of the indicative may be se- 
 parated, and make by themselves, without the help of the conjunction* 
 a clear, and determinate sense ; as, I believe we shall have some ram, £ J 
 
 » 4 
 
f« A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The imperative expresses the action or passion by com* 
 inands, prohibitions, desires, &c. 
 
 The future tense has sometimes the signification of the 
 Imperative mood, when it commands or forbids; as, thou 
 ?;hak love the Lord thy God, tu aimeras le Seignior ton 
 Dieu* 
 
 The- tenses express the period of time, in which an ac- 
 tion or passion is, was, or shall be. They are properly 
 three, the present, the past, the future. 
 
 Each tense has two numbers, singular and plural ; and 
 each number has three persons. 
 
 VI. AParticipib partakes something of the nature 
 ©f a verb, and something of an adjective. 
 
 Beside the quality or attribute, which is the property of the adjec- 
 tive, the participle expresses iinie, together v/ith a consideration of 
 acting, or being acted upon ; whence che particle present or active aud 
 tHe participle past 'Qrfassiwe, as, 
 
 Lei Bmmes craig-nant Dieu. Dieu craint/w Us hommeu 
 
 VII. An Adverb marks the difference and circum- 
 stance of an action or passion. 
 
 VIII. A Pbeposition is a w&rd placed before those 
 nouns and pronouns which it governs, or before some verb^ 
 in order to connect words one with another, and to show 
 the relation between them. 
 
 IX. A Conjunction serves to connect one word with 
 another, and sentences with sentences. 
 
 X. An Interjection expresses the emotions or pas* 
 sions of the soul, as joy, grief, admiration, &c. 
 
 The last four parts of speech are undeclinable. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of Genders. 
 
 HpO give rules for knowing the Gender .of Substan- 
 tives would be useless and puzzling. The best and 
 ersiest way i-s to iearn them in a dictionary. And, in- 
 
 ^t$e nous aurons de Li pfu'r; take away,/* axis %uc y what follows, 
 de Li hluie, has a deterauped b^nsr, and is u with* 
 
 Ell rord. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 57 
 
 deed, rules would be of no advantage to the learner.- 
 However, as some substantives are of the masculine gen- 
 der in one sense, and of the feminine in another, it wild 
 not be amiss to give a list of these. 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 un aigle, an eagle. 
 
 un aire, an eyry, or nest of a 
 bird of prey. 
 
 un a une, ah alder tree. 
 
 un barbe, a barb, (a horse.) 
 
 un Basque, a Basque, fa man 
 of Biscay.) 
 
 un coche, a stage coach* 
 
 un comet te, a cornet of a 
 troop of horse. 
 
 un couple, a married cou- 
 ple. 
 
 un cravate, a Croatian sol- 
 dier. 
 
 un delice, a pleasure , delight,- 
 
 un espace, a space, a dk~ 
 tance. 
 
 un enseigne, an ensign, (an 
 officer.) 
 
 un exemple, an example* 
 
 le fin d'une affaire, the main,. 
 
 or chief part of a business. 
 le foudre de Jupiter, Jupi-. 
 
 ter's thunderbolt. 
 un garde, one of the guards, 
 
 le grefFe, the rolls. 
 
 un guide, a guide. 
 
 un ii v re, a book. 
 
 le ,:ueule, gules (in heraU 
 
 dry.) 
 un iris, iris, (a plane.) 
 un lout re, a sort of hat* 
 
 les aigles Romaines, the Ro- 
 man eagles. 
 une aire, a threshing-floor* 
 
 une a une, an ell. 
 une barbe, a beard. 
 une basque, a skirt, 
 
 une coche, a soiv.- 
 
 une cornet te, a woman's 
 
 night cap. 
 une couple, a pair (two 
 
 things toge/her.) 
 une cravare, ( a cravat or 
 
 neckcloth. 
 des delices, delights. 
 une espace, a space used by 
 
 printers. 
 une enseigne, a sign. 
 
 une exemple, a copy for 
 
 writing. 
 la fin d'une affaire, the end 
 
 of a business. 
 la foudre, thunder. -. 
 
 une garde, a guard ; .also a 
 
 sick person's nurse. 
 une greffe, a graft of a tree. 
 une guide, a rein.- 
 une livre. a pound. 
 la gueule, the mouth of a 
 
 dog, cat, lion, &c. 
 une iris, Iris ) rainbow.. 
 une loutre« an otter / 
 
 d 5" 
 
5t A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
 
 un manoeuvre, a labourer. 
 
 un manche, a handle. 
 un me moire, a bill, a memo- 
 ' randum. 
 
 un mestre de camp, a colonel 
 of horse, 
 
 un mode, a mood, (a philo- 
 sophical term.) 
 un mole, a mole, a pier. 
 
 un moule, a mould. 
 
 un mousse, a cabin-boy. 
 
 un office, an office for busi- 
 ness. 
 
 le grand- oeuvre, the philoso- 
 pher's stone. 
 
 un page, a young page. 
 
 un paillasse, a clown. 
 
 un palme, a hand's breadth. 
 
 Paques, Easter Sunday, 
 un parallele, a comparison, 
 un pendule, a pendulum, 
 
 un periode, a period, a 
 
 course, degree. 
 person ne, no body, any body. 
 un pique, a spade, (at cards.) 
 un pivoine, a buljinch. 
 un poele, a stove, a pall. 
 un pi a ne, a plane - 1 ree, 
 le pontc, ponto (at cards.) 
 un po^.te, a post, an employ* 
 
 meut. 
 k pourpre, the purples, 
 3 
 
 la manoeuvre, the working 
 of a ship ; in the plur. the 
 rigging of a ship. 
 
 uue manche, a sleeve, 
 
 la memoire, memory. 
 
 la mestre de camp, the first 
 compa?iy of a regiment- of 
 horse. 
 
 une mode, a fashion, 
 
 une mole, a mole (formless 
 concretion of extravatated 
 blood.) 
 
 une moule, a muscle. 
 
 de la mousse, moss. 
 
 une office, a buttery. 
 
 une ceuvre de piete, a work 
 
 of piety. 
 une page, a page of a booh, 
 une paillasse, a straw-bed. 
 une palme, a branch of a 
 
 palm. tree. 
 La Paque, the Passover. 
 une parallele, a paral/d line* 
 une pendule, a pendulum - 
 
 clock. 
 une periode, a period (in 
 
 discourse.) 
 une personne, a person* 
 une pique, a pike. 
 une pivoine, a fiony. 
 une poele, a fry ing-pau, 
 une plane, a puine, 
 la ponte, laying of eggs, 
 la peste, the post, the pest 
 
 office. 
 la pourpre, the purple, (mark 
 
 of rGydtyy) 13c. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. & 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. 
 
 d'un beau pcurpre, of a fine de la pourpre Tyrienne, Ty* 
 
 purple colour* rian purple, 
 
 tin quadrille, quadrille (a une quadriile, quadrille , (a 
 
 game at cards,) troop of a horse far a tour~ 
 
 nament.) 
 
 un quatrierae, a fourth part, une quatriSme, a quarter or 
 
 sequence of four cards at 
 piquet. 
 
 le reclame, the sign to call la reclame, the catch-vuord* 
 
 back a haivk. 
 
 un satyre, a satyr, a heathen une satife, a satire (in poe~ 
 
 demigod, tr J'J 
 
 le soide, the balance of an la solde, soldier* $ pay * 
 
 account, 
 
 un somme, a sleepy a nap, une somme, a sum* 
 
 un souris, a smile. une souris, a mouse* 
 
 un triomphe, a triumph* une triomphe, a trump at 
 
 cards, 
 
 un trompette, a trumpeter, une trompette, a trumpet, 
 
 un tour, a turn, a trick. une tour, a tower,, 
 
 un teneur de livres, a book, la teneur d'un acte, the tenor 
 
 keeper, or contents of voriting. 
 
 un vase, a jar> a vessel, a la vase, mud. ooze. 
 
 vase. 
 
 un vigogne, a hat made cf de. la vigogne, vicuna, the 
 
 vicuna wool, vucol of :he Peruvian sheep, 
 
 tin vcile, a veil. une voile, a sail* 
 
 The following Substantives are 
 
 Rather Masculine. Rather Feminine, 
 
 amour, love. absinthe, wormwood. 
 
 • amours, cupids. amours, intrigues, 
 
 bronze, bronze. alcove, an alcove. 
 
 caque, a cag or barrel, 
 cioaque, a common se<tver } or epitase, the epitasis } or plot 
 link. of a play, 
 
 epitaphe, epitaph, 
 D 6 
 
6o A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Rather Masculine, Rather Feminine. 
 
 Comte, country. hymne *, a hymn. 
 
 duche, u duchy. enigme, a riddle. 
 
 episode, an episode. idyle, an idyl. 
 
 , . , t . 7 t . \ anagram me, an anapram* 
 
 epuhalame, an epiihalavmm. < * . ° . * 
 
 r * I epigramme, an epigram. 
 
 orgue, an organ. orgues f , organs. 9^ . 
 
 amulette, an a?nukt. pafallaxe, parallax* 
 
 sphinx, a sphinfe. theriaque, treacle.- 
 
 holocauste, a burnt sacrifice. horloge, a clock. 
 
 horoscope, a forosc&pe. equivoque, an equivocation* 
 
 • According to the French Academy, t^ls word is feminine 
 when, we speak of hymns in churches, otherwise it is masculine. 
 
 + This word is masculine in the singular, according to the Frznch 
 Academy. 
 
 . CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Formation of the Feminine Gender ef 
 Adjectives. 
 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 
 A DJECT1VES take an e mute for the formation of 
 Si>.. (fagix feminine; as^V aime, aimee ; ecrit, ecrite ; con- 
 stant, cQHttanie*. Adjectives ending with an e mute 
 
 EXCEPTIONS, 
 
 * Favori, faverlfe'\ benin, ' henigne; malin, mal\gne\ frais, frakbe i 
 fpais, epahse. 
 
 j. Grec, Grecque ; Tare, Turyue; public, pubiique; caduc, caduque. 
 
 2. Civil, cvllc; subtil, subtile, pueril, puerile. 
 
 3.. Vieux, vie'dle; anterieur, posterieur, citerieur, ulterieur, inte- 
 xleur, ezterieur, majeur/ mineur, supcrieur, inferieur, meilleur, follow 
 the general rule. 
 
 4. Ras, rase; clos, close. 
 
 5. Secret, secrete; complet, complete ; discret, discrete, inquict, />- 
 quit"', re plet, nj>leU \ devot, devote. 
 
 6. Jaioux, jahvsc; roux, rensse. 
 
 N. B. The Frinch Academy write first, cru, raw > nu, ntiked \ 
 vert, greeny and not cruel, nud, vertf. Secondly, benit, and beni. 
 hie sed, holy, both foiiow the general rule. Thirdly, tots, and not tort, 
 twhtedf wrung, Tr\is adjective makes in it's feminine both tone, and' 
 to'se ; for we say, une colonne tone, at la sole torse, and popularly we say? 
 une )»mlc Urti y une bcucbe (orte, une gutuk torie, 
 
TRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 S\ 
 
 have no Variation in their feminine, without exception ; as 5 
 admirable, m. admirable , f. ; aimable, m. amiable, f. 
 
 Other adjectives form their feminine according to their 
 termination, as in the following Concise Table. 
 
 4w Adjectives ending 
 
 form their Feminine, 
 
 iri^V 
 
 
 in 
 
 P* (if* 
 
 
 che. 
 
 A 
 
 
 ve. 
 
 g> 
 
 
 gUe# ^ 
 
 el, eilj oly uly 
 
 m 
 
 elle, erne, ille, olle, ullev 
 
 Oily 
 
 
 onne. 
 
 ie?ty 
 
 
 ienne. 
 
 e " r> } (3) 
 
 eux, J KJf 
 
 
 euse. 
 
 iiiy es, os> (4) 
 
 
 asse, esse, osse.- 
 
 4&t 
 
 ef, ot 9 
 
 
 oute. 
 
 
 ette, otte.- 
 
 eaiiy 
 
 
 elle. 
 
 OUy 
 
 
 olle. 
 
 GUX, ( 6) 
 
 
 ouce. 
 
 ClUXy 
 
 
 ausse. 
 
 CHAP. IV, 
 Of the Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 
 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 "l^TOUNS in general form their plural by adding an s 
 -*-^ to the singular ; as homme, hommes *. 
 
 Polysyllables ending in nt in the singular, form 
 their plural by changing the final / into s ; as, enfant, 
 enfans\ but monosyllables follow the general rule. 
 
 Nouns ending in s, x, or z, are alike in both numbers, 
 No-uns ending in ail, oral, change ail and al inro auxy 
 in the plural; as, travail, travaux ; cheval, che<vaux\. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 * Tout makes tout, 
 
 + Ail, aulx. 
 
 Balj cat-naval, heel, paf r regal, arui proper names ending in dt\ YMn- 
 ■wist these nouns, atUraxl, carnaxl, detail, e-ventail, mail, efrowvantaiL, gou- 
 "jtmdily portall, se'rril, follow the general rule. 
 
6* A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Nouns ending in au y eu y eau> /V.v, nnd ou, make their 
 plural by adding an x to their singular*. 
 
 N. B. CEil makes jeux ; a'ieul, dieux ; geiitiihomme, 
 getrtilshommes ; monsieur, messieurs; madame, ?nesdames ; 
 monseigneur, messeigneurs ; ciel, heaven, makes cieux+ 
 However, we say, des crels de lit, cesrers of beds; les 
 ciels d'un tableau, the sky of a picture ; des arcs-en-Qltl, 
 rainbows. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Declension of Nouns. 
 
 A S the nominative in nouns is like the accusative, the 
 ""- genitive is like the ablative ; we shall call the nomi*. 
 nanive the first case, the genitive the second case, and the 
 dative the j£yn£ ease. 
 
 Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and begin. 
 Ring with a consonant, are thus declined, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 ist. le livre, the book. 
 
 2d. du livre, of or from the booh 
 
 3d. au livre, to ihe book* 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Ies livres, the books. 
 
 des iivres, of or from the books. 
 
 aux Hvres, to the books. 
 
 Nouns substantive of the feminine gender, and begin* 
 fling with a consonant, are thus declined : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 ist. la table, the table. 
 
 ad. dek Cable, of ov fro the table. 
 
 3d. a la table, to the table. 
 
 * filar, trou, chu 9 couj matQu, ficw, 6&tfj fou, and &*/ £tfr«V, fcllovr 
 the general rule. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 65 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 les tables, the tables, 
 
 des tables, cf or from the tables, 
 
 aux tables, to the tables. 
 
 Nouns substantive of either gender, beginning with a 
 <VQ~ivel, or an h mute, are thus declined : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 I St. Phomme, the man, 
 
 2d. de Phomme, of ox from the man. 
 
 3d. Phomme, to the man. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 les hommes, the men, 
 
 des hommes, of ox from the men* 
 
 aux hommes, to the men. 
 
 Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and begin- 
 ning with a consonant, are thus deelined with the indefi* 
 nite article : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1 st. un miroir, a loeking-glast. 
 
 2d. d'un miroir, of ox from a looking-glass* 
 
 $d. a un miroir, to a looking-glass. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 des miroirs, looking-glasses. 
 
 de m-roirs, of ox from looking-glasses, 
 
 a des miroirs, to looking. glasses. 
 
 Nouns substantive of the masculine gender, and bee-fn- 
 ning with a vowel, ax an h mute, are thus declined : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1st. un accident, an accident. 
 2d. d'un accident, of ox from an accident* 
 . 3d. a un accident, to an accident* 
 
 PLURAL, 
 des accidens, accidents. 
 ePaccidens, of ox from accidents* 
 a des accidens, to accidents. 
 
64 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Nouns substantive of the /emmme gender, and begin- 
 ning \yith a consonant, thus : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 isf. une peine, a pain. 
 
 2d. d'un peine, of ot from a pain. 
 
 3d. a une peine, to a pain. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 des peines, pains. 
 de peines, of t,r from pains* 
 a des peines, io pains. 
 Nouns substantive beginning with a vowel, or a; 
 mute, and of the feminine gender, thus : 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 isf. une aiguille, a needle. 
 2d» d'une aiguiLe, of ox from a needle. 
 3d. & une aiguille, to a needle. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 des aiguilles, needles. 
 d * a i g u i 1 -I e s , of c r from needles. 
 a des aiguil.es, to needles. 
 But in the plural' number, when a noun substantive of 
 either gerder is preceded by an adjective beginning with a ' 
 consonant, it is thus dec-lined : 
 
 PLURAL. 
 1st, de malheuretrx accidens, unhappy accidents. 
 id. de maiheureux accidens,- of unhappy accidents. 
 3d. a malhcureux accidens, to unhappy accidents. 
 Before an adjective beginning; with a vcwcl y or an h mute, 
 thus : 
 
 1 s t . d * i n d ) g n e s a m i s , * nwo rt hy f iend t s . • 
 2d. d'indignes amis, ofoijfrom unworthy fn. 
 3d. a d'indignes amis, to unworthy frn 
 Proper names of men, women, cities^ villages, &C.j take 
 no articles before them ; but in the 2d and 3d cases they 
 take the prepositions de and a, thus : 
 - 1 st. Jean, Jfot 
 
 7. d . d e }c :\i y of or from Johrf* 
 3d. a Jean, to John, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 6j 
 
 When they begin with a <vo<wel 9 or an h mute, thus ; 
 
 ist. Alexandre, Alexander. 
 
 2d. d' Alexandre, of ox from Alexander. 
 
 3d. a Alexandre, to Alexander. 
 
 Observe : Some in English, expressed or understood 
 before a noun taken in a partitive sense, is expressed in 
 French by du y de la, de /', for the singular, and des for 
 the plural, or de for both genders and numbers, in the 
 following manner ; 
 
 When the word of the masculine gender begins with a 
 consonant i thus : 
 
 I St. du sel, some salt. 
 
 2d. de sel, of ox from seme salt. 
 
 3d. a du sel, to some salt. 
 
 When the word, either masculine or feminine, begins 
 with a wwel, or h mute, thus : 
 
 1st. de Pargenf, some money. 
 
 2d. d'argent, of or from some money* 
 
 3d. a de Pargent, to some monty. 
 
 1st. de Phuile, some oil. 
 
 2d. d'huile, of ox from some oil. 
 
 3d. a de l'-huile, to some oil. 
 
 When the noun is feminine, thus . 
 
 1st. de la salade, some sallad. 
 . 2d. de salade, of ox from some sallad. 
 3d. a de la salade, to sgme sallad. 
 
 Before an adjective of either gender or number, thus ;. 
 
 s 1 st. de bon pain, some good bread. 
 
 2d. de bon pain, of ox from some good bread. 
 3d. a de bon pain, to some good bread. 
 
66 A, GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of Pronouns. 
 
 THE construction of the pronouns being the most 
 difficult part of our language, I shall here, for the 
 sake of perspicuity, nearly follow the denomination which, 
 other grammarians have given them, though many of the 
 pronouns may be looked upon as adjectives. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Of Personal Pronouns. 
 
 These are of two kinds: conjunctive and disjunctive. «~ 
 The first generally prpcede the verb; the second commonly 
 follow the verb. The first takes no preposition before 
 them ; the second takes in their second case the preposition 
 de } and commonly in their third case the preposition a. 
 
 The Conjunctive Pronouns. 
 
 All nouns and pronouns, as we have hinted before, 
 have three cases : the first answering to the Nominative 
 and Accusative; the second to the Genitive and Ablative; 
 the third to the Dative. The three cases of the conjunc- 
 tive personal pronouns alone, and the three cases ot the 
 third person indeterminate, when they take no preposi- 
 tion before them, do not answer the three cases of other 
 nouns; therefore we shall call the first the Nominative 
 case, the second the Dative case, and the third the Accu- 
 sative case. 
 
 The first Person. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL* 
 
 Norn. Je, /. Nom. nous, <we. 
 
 Dat. me, to me. Dat. nous, to us, 
 
 Ace. me, me. Ace. nous, us. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 67 
 
 The Second Person. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
 
 Nom. tu, thou. Norn. vous r ycu, ye, 
 
 Dat. te, to thee. Dat. vous, to you. 
 
 Acc. te, thee. Ace. vocs, you. 
 
 The Third Person Masculine. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. il, he ot it. Norn. Us, they. 
 
 Dat. lui, to #£»*, or to it. Bar. fetrr, to them, 
 
 Acc. le, Z//i7 or it. Acc. les, ?&a?r. 
 
 The Third Person Feminine. ^ 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nom. e)k, she or it, Nom. cileSj they. 
 
 Dat. lui, to her cr fie it, Dat. leur, /a *&/». 
 
 Acc. la^ ^r or *"/. Acc. les, them. 
 
 The Third Person indeterminate. 
 
 Nom. on, one *, they, or people. 
 
 Dat. se, to one's self** to himself \ to herself, ts it sdj \ t3 
 
 themselves, or to one another. 
 Acc. se, one's self*, himself herself, itself themselves, one 
 
 another. 
 
 The third Person supplying and governed. 
 
 1st. !e, if, so. 
 
 2d. en, of him, cfher, of it, some, cf them, from the m, by them, 
 
 nviib them. 
 2d. y, to it, there^ therein, in it, in them, clout it, OX 
 
 them. 
 
 . The Du]unctiv£^xcriQuns. 
 The First Person, 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 i St. moi, /, me. 1st. nou~, ive, us. 
 
 2d. de moi, of or from me, 2d, de nous, of or from us, 
 
 3d. a moi, moi, to me. 3d. a nous, nous, to us, 
 
 * The use of one in this sensv aa ^ of z*e % s :e/f t is a vv-garism. 
 
68 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Second Person. 
 1st. toi, thou, thee, ist* vous, you, ye, 
 
 *d. de toi, of ox from thte. 2d. de vous, of or from y oft ^ 
 3d. a toi, toi, to thee. 3d. a vous, vous, to you. 
 
 The Third Person Masculine. 
 1st. lui, £;>?, £*5 or//. 1 St. eux, /^-, them. 
 
 2d. de \i\\> of or from hi?/?, or if. ad. d'eux, of or from them, 
 3d; a lui, lui, re £//w or //. 3d. a eux, leur, to them. 
 
 The Third Person Feminine. 
 1st. elle, she, her, or it. 1st. elles, //^j, /Z'f/w. 
 
 zd.d'ellej^/'or/r^^^r, ©r/V. 2d. de toi, of (\; from them, 
 3d. aeife, iui, to her or it. 3d. a elles, leur, to them,. 
 
 The Third Person indeterminate. 
 1st. SOI, himself, herself, or r/j*jj£ 
 2d. de soi, of or from himself, herself, or itself 
 3d. a soi, to himself or itself. 
 
 Note: Their compounds have the same cases as their 
 
 siinples ; as, 
 
 moi-meme, myself nous-memes, ourselves. 
 
 toi.meme, thyself* * [yourselves. 
 
 , . a ,r% "iv* vous-memes, < ' 7/ . 
 
 lu<-meme, himself. ' \ yourself. 
 
 elle-meme, A^fc eux-memes, V,^/^ 
 
 fioi-meme, Gne s self, elies-memes, J 
 
 SECTION II. 
 0/ Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns* 
 
 SING* PLUR. 
 
 MAS. FEM. 
 
 1st. mon, ma, mes, my. 
 
 2d. de mon, de ma, de hies, gf or from ry.] 
 
 3d. a mon, a ma, a mes, to my. 
 
 After the same manner are declined* 
 
 ton, ta, tcs, thy. 
 
 son, sa, ses, his or X*rj r7 ^ 
 
 notice, nos, <fur \ votre, vos, your \ leur, leurs, flfcw* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 69 
 
 Observe, first, the conjunctive pronouns come always 
 before a noun to which they are joined. 
 
 Observe, secondly, the following absolute possessive 
 pronouns, being used bj themselves, are declined with the 
 definite arucie, thus : 
 
 Of Absolute Pronouns. 
 
 SING 
 
 . 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 
 MAS 
 
 FEM. 
 
 MAS, 
 
 
 1st. Je mien, 
 zd. du mien, 
 3d au men, 
 
 la mienne, 
 de la m enrie, 
 
 a la mienne, 
 
 les miens. 1 
 des > F. > 
 
 ajx ; miennes. J 
 
 1 mme. 
 - of mine. 
 \ to mine* 
 
 After the same manner, are declined, 
 le tien, !a tienn es tiens, les tie-^es, thme. 
 Je sien, la sienne, J . . es sie .nes, bis others* 
 
 le noire, la \o re, {es no'"^ ours. 
 le v&tre, Ja -cr-re, les v6 res, jours. 
 le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs* 
 
 SECTION II. 
 Of Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 SING. SI V G. 
 
 MASC. FEM. 
 
 I St. ce, or cet , before a vowel, cette, this or that. 
 
 2d. de ce, or de cet. de certe, of ox fr;m this ok that % 
 
 3d. a ce, or a cet. a cette, to this or that. 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 1 st. ccs, ., these or those. 
 
 id. e'e ceij cf ox from these or /£^ # 
 
 3d. a ces, //? flfcfj* or those. 
 
 After the same manner is declined, 
 sing; plur. 
 
 M. celui, F. celle, *& M. ceux, F. celles, those, 
 
 N, B. The foregoing demonstrative pronouns are used 
 
70 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 speaking of persons or things. Qeti and cela are used 
 
 speaking of things only. 
 
 ist. ceci, this. cela, that. 
 
 ad. de ceci, of or from this, de cela, of ox from that. 
 
 3d. a ceci, to this. a cela, to that. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 Of Relative Pronouns. 
 Most Pronouns in French have a relative signification; 
 but those which are properly so called are the fellow ing ; 
 
 sing, and plur. 
 
 1st, qui, que, who, <whom, or which. 
 
 2d. de qui, or dont, of whim, or whose. 
 
 3d. a qui, to whom. 
 
 1st, quoi, qui, que, what. 
 
 2d. de quoi, or dont, #f what or which. 
 
 3d. a quoi, to what. 
 
 »ING. MASC. SING. FEM. 
 
 1 st. lequel, laquelle, which. 
 2d. duquel, de laquelle, of which. 
 3d. auquel, a laquelle, to which. 
 
 FLUR. MASC. PLUR. FEM. 
 
 1st. lesquels, ksquelles, which. 
 
 2d. desquels, desquelles, of which or whose. 
 
 3d. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Of Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 1st. qui, who, or whom. que, what. 
 
 2d. de qui, of ox from whom, de quoi, of ox from what. 
 
 3d. a qui, to whom. a quoi, to what. 
 
 After the same manner is declined. 
 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 M. quel F, quelle, M. quels, F. quelles, what, 
 
 This pronoun is always followed by a substantive. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 71 
 
 "SING, MASC. SING. FEM., 
 
 1st. lequel, laqueile, whiclr, 
 
 2d. duquel, de laqueile, of or from which, 
 
 3d. auqael, a laqueile, to which. 
 
 PLUR. MASC. PLUR. FEM. 
 
 1st. lesquels, lesquelles^ which. 
 
 2d. desquels, desquelles, of ox from which, 
 
 3d. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 Of Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 SING. PLUR. 
 
 masc. and fem. masg. and fem. 
 
 15 1. quelque. quelques, some, 
 
 l J. de quelque, de quelques, of or from some* 
 
 3d. a quelque. a quelques, to some. 
 
 After the same manner are declined, 
 
 quelqu'un, masc. sing. ; quelqiPune, fem. sing.; quelques- 
 
 uns, masc.pl.; quelques-unes, fem. pi. ; some y somebodj. 
 chaque, chacun, chacune, every, each. 
 quiconque, qui que ce soit, whoever. 
 pas un, aucun, nul, pe^onne, nobody. 
 rien, nothing ; piusieurs, many. 
 
 SING. MASC. SING. FEM. 
 
 1st. Pun Pautre. Tune Pautre, one another. 
 
 id. l'un de Pautre. Pune de Pautre, of one anoth-.r, 
 
 3d. Pun a Pautre. Pune a Pautre, to one another. 
 
 PLUR. MASC. PLUR. FEM. 
 
 ks uns les autres. les unes les autres, one another . 
 
 les uns des autres. les unes des autres, of one another. 
 
 Its uns aux autres. les unes aux autres, to one another, 
 
 SING. MASC. SING. FEM. 
 
 1st. Pun et Pautre. Pune et Pautre, both. 
 
 2d. de Pun et de Pautre. de Pune et de Pautre, of both , 
 
 yd. a Pun et a Pautre. a Pune et a Pautre, to -both. 
 
7 r 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 PLUR. MASC 
 
 les uns et les autres. 
 des uns et des autres, 
 aux uns et aux autres. 
 
 SING. MASC. 
 
 ist. Tun ou I'autre, 
 
 2d. de l'un ou d? I'autre. 
 
 3d. a Tun ou a I'autre. 
 
 PLUR. MASC. 
 
 les uns ou ies autres. 
 des uns. ou des autres. 
 aux uns ou aux autres. 
 
 PLUR. FEM. 
 
 les unes et les aut«es, both, 
 des unes et des autres, of both •. 
 aux unes et aux autres, to both. 
 
 SING. FEM. 
 
 Tune ou I'autre, either. 
 
 de l'une ou de I'autre, of either. 
 
 a Tune ou a I'autre, to either. 
 
 PLUR. FEM. 
 
 les unes ou les autres, either. 
 des unes ou des autres, oftither. 
 aux unesou aux autres, to either. 
 
 SING. MASC. SING. FEM. 
 
 ist. ni l'un ni 1* ititre. ni l'une m i'autre, neither. 
 
 2d. ni de l'un ni de i'autre. nide l'une ni de i'au're, fueith. 
 3d. ni a Tun ni a I'autre. ni & l'une ni a I'autre, to neither* 
 
 PLUR. MASC. 
 
 ni les uns ni les autres. 
 ni des uns ni des autres. 
 ni aux unsni aux autres. 
 
 PIUR. FEM. 
 
 ni les unes ni les autres, neither. 
 ni des unes ni des autres, ofneith. 
 ni aux unes ni aux autres, to nei 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF VERBS. 
 
 Preliminary Observations. 
 
 i # A LL personal verbs are conjugated with these pro- 
 -*-*• nouns, yV, tu, //, or elle y for the singular, and not/s, 
 wous, ihy or elles, for the plural. 
 
 2. All pronominal verbs are conjugated with these pro- 
 nouns, je me, tu te y il se y or elle se ; nous nous, *vous vcuSy ils se, 
 or elles se ; e y in ?ne y te y se y is omitted, and an apostrophe, 
 is put in it's place, when the following word begins with 
 a vowel. 
 
 3. All active verbs are conjugated in this manner when 
 the action returns upon the agent that produces it. It is 
 properly what is called a reflected verb. 
 
French tongue. 73 
 
 4. Reflected verbs, in a reciprocal sense, are used in 
 the plural only ; as, ils se contrarient, they contradict one 
 another. 
 
 5. All active verbs are conjugated in their compound 
 tenses by the help of the auxiliary avoir, as is likewise the 
 verb etre. 
 
 6. Reflective and reciprocal verbs are always conju- 
 gated in their compound tenses by the help of etre ; as are 
 also these following verbs, alter, ahorder, arriver, accourir, 
 deceder, \descendre, entrer, monter, mourir, naitre, partir, 
 retourner, sortir, tomber, <venir, and their derivatives, ex- 
 cept when used actively. 
 
 7. In all the verbs of the first conjugation, terminating 
 in ger, e is retained through all the tenses and moods 
 whenever g is to be followed by a or 0; as manger, to eat, 
 mangeant) eating ; nou: mangeons, we eat. 
 
 8. The compound regular and irregular verbs commonly 
 follow the conjugation of the simple, from which they are 
 derived^ 
 
 9. The termination of the tenses B, D, E, f see page 7%) 
 is the same in all v«rbs, both regular and irregular. 
 
 10. Custom requires, that an s should be added to the 
 second person of the imperative mood in verbs of the first 
 conjugation, when they are followed by the particles en 
 andj; as, disposes-en; penses-y ; *vas-j ; the latter takes 
 t y when it is followed by en ; as, -ua-t'e?i. 
 
 Conjugation 
 Of the auxiliary verb AVOIR, to have* 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Avdir, to have. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Ayant, hiving. | Eu, had. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 j'ai, / have,- 
 tu as, thou hasty 
 II * he has. 
 
 Nous avons, e we have, 
 vous avez, jou hn<oe% 
 ils + onr, they ha<vz. 
 
 * Oc tile, she, in the third person singular of all verbs. 
 
 •f 0/ §lks% for the feminine, in all verbs in the th'rd pe;soa plum. 
 
 E 
 
7* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 Imperfect. 
 
 J'avois, / had, 
 
 tu avois, thou hadst, 
 
 il avoir, he had. 
 
 Nous avians, <we had % 
 vous aviez, ym had, 
 ils avoient, they had. 
 
 J'eus, / hady 
 
 tu ens, thou hadst, 
 
 £1 eut, Z>* i?^/. 
 
 J'aurai, I shall or w/7/ 
 tu auras, thou shall 
 il aura, fo shall 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous eumes, aw had, 
 vous eufes, jo# £#</, 
 ils euient, they had. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Nous aurons, ii-e shall 
 vous aurez, you shall 
 ils auront, they shall 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 u 
 
 I 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 J'surois, / should* 
 ' t'u ,11 u Toh,-thou shouldst 
 il auroir, he should 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 ! Nous aur ions, *ve should*) . 
 us auriez, you should > £ 
 auroient, tkej should ) S 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Aye, have thou y 
 
 1 C ! N ° l 
 > ? j vou 
 
 J ^ ils c 
 
 qu'il ait, let him have, 
 qu'eile ait, let her ha+ve. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Ayons, let us have, 
 
 ayez, hasueytm, \_thcvi have. 
 
 qu'ils, or qu'elles aient, let 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 J 'aye, that I may 
 tu ayes, thou may est 
 il ajtj he may 
 que 
 
 J'eusse, that J insight \ 
 tu eus€e«j thm mightest 
 l\ ear, be might 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que PLURAL. 
 
 Nous ayons, v:e ??wy 
 vous ayez, y u may 
 iis aient, they ,.. 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous eussions twe might 
 VOUS I 
 
 ils eussent, they mh 
 
 i 
 
 * Or I could) iwu'tl, or might bjfct. 
 
 f 0r I bsd or ccv/d, wJmld or j£i?k/</ £j,r*. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 7J 
 
 H**, to have the compound tenses, you need onrf add, 
 after each person, the participle past, ex, for the French, 
 and had, for the English, through all the tenses and moods; 
 ■&bj'ai eu, I have had, and so on. 
 
 Conjugation 
 
 Of the auxiliary verb ETRE, to be* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD, 
 
 Etre, t7 be. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 P HE SENT, PAST. 
 
 Etant, being. j Ete, been. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 Nqiis somraes, we are? 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je suis, / am, 
 feu es, tkzu art, 
 il est, he is. 
 
 vous etes, you are t 
 iis sont, thej are. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous etions, we were, 
 j vous eriez, you were^ 
 ils etoienf, they were. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 I No us fumes, we were) 
 vous futes, you were, 
 ils furent, they were. 
 Future. 
 
 Nous serons, w? shall 1 
 vous serez, you shall >^° 
 il seront, they shall J 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
 
 J'etois, I was, 
 
 tu etois, thou watt, 
 
 i! etoit, he was. 
 
 Je fus, / was, 
 tu fus, thou wast, 
 il fut, he was. 
 
 Je serai, I s bill ox will 
 tu seras, thou shatt 
 il sera, he shall 
 
 H 
 
 Je serois, / should 
 tu serois, thou shouldst 
 \\ seroit, he should 
 
 1 1 Nous serions, we should 1 
 V^ vous seriez, you should >^ 
 j [ils seroientj they should J 
 
: 6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Sois, be thou, \ Soyons, let us be 3 
 
 qu'il soit, let him be % 1 soyez, be you, [them be. 
 
 ou'elle soit, let her be. \ qu'ils or qu'elies soient, let 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pr esent Tense* 
 que singular. que plural. 
 
 je sois, that I may 1 I Nous soy Ons, vje may 1 
 t u sois, thou may st > * J vous soyez, you may > C 
 
 1 1 soit, he may J | il soient, they may J 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je fusse, that I might I Nous fussions, voe might 1 
 
 tu fusse, thou mightest | j* I vous fussiez, you might >£ 
 
 il fut, he might j ] lis fussent, they might J 
 
 The compound tetis«s of this verb are formed by the 
 help of the auxiliary verb avoir through all its tenses and 
 moods, by adding, after «ach persen and tense, ete for the 
 French, and been for the English ; asj'ai ete\ I have been, 
 &c. ; j'xtvois ///, I had been, &c; and so on. 
 
 Observe, rst, the compound tenses of all other verbs, 
 both regular and irregular, are formed by the help of these 
 two auxiliary verbs, by adding the participle past of the 
 verb you are conjugating, after each tense and person of 
 the auxiliary verb. For example, to find all the compound 
 tenses of the verb parler, to speak, its past participle be- 
 ing parley you need only put parley after the simple tenses 
 of the verb avoir. 
 
 Observe, 2dly, those veibs that are conjugated by the 
 help of etre are only compounded of the simple tenses of 
 that auxiliary verb; that is, the compound tenses of the 
 verb etre do not serve for the compound of others ; but 
 the compound tenses of the verb avoir may serve, though 
 seldom, for the compound of others : consequently, verbs 
 conjugated by the help of avoir are sometimes compounded 
 of it's compound tenses, and those conjugated by the help 
 of etre are only compounded of its simple tenses. The 
 reason of it may be, because the compound tenses of the 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 77 
 
 verb etre are formed by the help of the verb avoir, which 
 reflective, and some neuter, verbs will not admit. Except 
 from this observation verbs used passively, which are con- 
 jugated by the help of etre in all its tenses, both simple 
 and compound. 
 
 N. B. For what verbs are conjugated by the help of 
 avoir or the help of etre — see Preliminary Observations \ 
 p. 73, Art. 5 and 6. 
 
 Conjugation of regular Verbs. 
 
 It is very indifferent how many conjugations we adrnir, 
 Some admit four, others tea or eleven. We shall reckon 
 six. 
 
 f aimer, to love. 
 \ punir, to punish. 
 J devoir, to owe. 
 
 vend re, to sell. 
 
 traduire, to translate. 
 
 joindre, to join. 
 
 ISt. - 
 
 v er 
 
 2d. 
 
 )ir 
 
 3^. 1 
 
 e-voir 
 
 4 th. j 
 
 re preceded by d 
 
 5th. 1 
 
 [ re preceded by ui 
 
 6th.-- 
 
 ' re preceded by ind. 
 
 ■ as 
 
 TERMINATIONS of the PRIMITIVE TENSES of 
 the REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle Participle Present of Preterit 
 Present. Passive- the Ind. of thz hi 
 
 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 
 
 ist* conj. 
 
 aim- 
 
 er -ant 
 
 ~e 
 
 ee 
 
 ~e 
 
 -ai 
 
 zd. conj. 
 
 pun- 
 
 ir miss ant 
 
 ml 
 
 ie 
 
 -is 
 
 -is 
 
 3d, conj. 
 
 d- 
 
 e<voir -evant 
 
 -u 
 
 ue 
 
 m9lS 
 
 -us 
 
 4th. conj. 
 
 vend- 
 
 re -ant 
 
 •u 
 
 us 
 
 -J 
 
 mIS 
 
 5th. conj. 
 
 trad. 
 
 nire -uisant 
 
 -uit 
 
 uite 
 
 -uis. 
 
 muisis 
 
 6th. conj. 
 
 jo. 
 
 indre mignant 
 
 Jnt 
 
 inis 
 
 •ins 
 
 .ignis. 
 
7* A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 -Unvariable TERMINATIONS in all the 
 CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 p l u a 
 
 AL. 
 
 A. 
 
 
 Variable 
 
 .OTIS 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 -ez 
 
 -ent 
 
 B. 
 
 ~0/J 
 
 -0/J 
 
 rotl - ions 
 Preterit. 
 
 -ic%. 
 
 -dent 
 
 i. 
 
 ) "*' 
 
 -tff. 
 
 ma -ames 
 
 -Ms 
 
 -event 
 
 •€ ?' 
 
 f -/i 
 
 -J$ 
 
 ~ii -imes 
 
 -lli'S 
 
 -ire tut 
 
 w # 
 
 3- 
 
 ) .Us 
 
 -US 
 
 .lit -lanes 
 
 * uies 
 
 mtirent 
 
 4- 
 
 -ins 
 
 ~,int <4nmes 
 
 -tntis 
 
 mi invent 
 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 *rai 
 
 -ras 
 
 * ra - rons 
 
 -nz 
 
 'tont 
 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 i 
 
 E. 
 
 •roil: 
 
 mTOU 
 
 -roit -rims 
 
 -rkz 
 
 -rcient 
 
 
 
 SUBJU 
 
 NCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 resent Tense* 
 
 
 
 F. 
 
 J$ 
 
 ?#l 
 
 -e 'ions 
 Preterit. 
 
 ~iex 
 
 ~ent 
 
 i, 
 
 \ ~\ -asse 
 
 masses 
 
 -at -ass ions 
 
 -assk-z 
 
 -assent 
 
 3 
 
 , f -isse 
 . £ -usse 
 
 misses 
 
 -usses 
 
 -it missions 
 -lit -ussions 
 
 -issiez 
 -ussiez 
 
 missent , 
 -ussent 
 
 4 
 
 . J -iuiie 
 
 -ii/sses 
 
 mint -in.sions 
 
 -iussicz 
 
 minsscnj 
 
 INFFNITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Participle Present. 
 
 . IL manU 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 K* Variable - u •*» 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 AlM-ER, to 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT, PAST, 
 
 Aim-ant, hving, | Aim-c, loved. 
 
 ent. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 19' 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 J 'aime, / love* ', 
 tu aimes, thou lovest } 
 ii aime, he loves. 
 
 J'aimoiSy / did live, 
 
 tu a i mo is, thou didst love, 
 \\ a i molt, he did love. 
 
 J'aimai, I loved \ 
 
 tu aimas, thou loved ft > 
 
 il aima, he loved. 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 * Nous ai mons, nve love, 
 vous aimez, you love, 
 ils aiment, they Jove, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous aimions, vje did love? 
 vous aimiez, you did love, 
 ils aimoient, they did love. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous ai Biames, *we loved, 
 vous airiiates, you loved, 
 
 ils aime rent, they loved, 
 
 ♦ 
 
 Future. 
 
 J'aimerai, I shall or *wil}}m)e y Nous aimerons, <we shall love. 
 
 tu aimeras, thou shah love, 
 il aimera, he shall love* 
 
 vous aime fez, you shall love, 
 ils aimeront, they shall love* 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINCULAR* 
 
 J'aimerois, / should love, 
 tu aimercis, thou should st love, 
 ii aimeroitj he should low. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous aimefiohs hxde sh. love, 
 vous a i m er i e 2 , \ ou s h ould love r 
 ils aimeroient, they sho. love* 
 
 IMPERATIVE- MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Aime, Lve thou j, 
 qiril aime, let him love, 
 qu'elle aime, let her love. 
 
 PLURAL* 
 
 A i mons, let us love, 
 
 aimez^ love you, 
 
 qu'ils a i meat, let them love. 
 
 * Or I do love, or I am lov'irg, which is to be observed in all other 
 verbs. 
 
 t Or, 1 ivas loving, or J zuas used to love, or J ssal to love. It is the 
 same in all other verbs. 
 
 t Or, do thou love^ and likewise in all other verbs. 
 
 * 4 
 
I* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 J'aime, that I may love, 
 tu aimes, thou mayst lo<ve, 
 il aime, he may love, 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 J'aimasse, that I might love, 
 tu aimasses, thou mighiest love, 
 il aimat, he might love* 
 
 que plural. 
 
 Nous aimions, <we may Urue> 
 
 vous aimiez, you may love, 
 ils aiment, they may love. 
 
 Nous aimassions, ive mi. lo<ve % 
 vous aimassiez,j0# mig, love, 
 ils aimassent, they might love. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pun-ir, to punish, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST* 
 
 Pun-issant, punishing. | Pun-i, punished* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je punis, / punish, 
 
 tu puiUSj thou punishes t, 
 
 II punit_, he punishes. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous punissons, five punish, 
 vous punissez, you punish, 
 ils putiissentj they punish. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je punissois, / did punish, I Nous punissions., ive did } ^ 
 tu punissois, thou didst punish, vous punissiez, you did 
 il punissoit, he did punish. \ ils punissoient, they du 
 Preterit. 
 
 did ) <J 
 did \% 
 did ) 5, 
 
 Je punis, / punished, 
 tu punis, thou punishedst 9 
 ii pun it, he punished. 
 
 Nous punimes, ive punished, 
 vous punites, you punished, 
 ils punirent, they punished. 
 
 Future. 
 Je punirai, I shall funish, 
 tu puniras; thou shalt punish, 
 il punira, he shall punish* 
 
 re. 
 
 Nous puniroi s, w* shall ^ <£ 
 vous punirez, jtf// j/w// > g 
 ils puniront, they shall j <, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 Si 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je punirois, / should -j 
 tu punirois, thou shouldst J 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous punirfons, we sho. 
 il puniroit, he should J <§, | fls puniroient, they sho," 
 
 <i 
 
 vous puniriez,j0» shou 
 
 Is 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOLX 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Punis, punish thou, 
 
 qu'il punisse, let him punish , 
 
 qu'elle punisse, let her punish. 
 
 PLVRAL. 
 Punissons, let us punish, 
 punissez, punish you, [nish 
 qu'ils punissent, let them pu~ 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 it 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je punisse, that I may 
 
 tu punisses, thou mayst 
 
 il punisse, he may 
 
 que 
 
 Je punisse, that I might ^ ^' 
 
 tu punisses, thou mightest * '§ 
 
 il punit, he might 3 5. 
 
 que PLURAL. 
 
 Nous punissions, we may -^ <J 
 vous punissiez, you may \ "? 
 ils punissent, they may J 
 Preterit. 
 
 JNous punissions, we mi 
 
 * 
 -**■ 
 
 vous punissiez, you might > '5 
 
 ht 3 & 
 
 ils punissent y they might 
 Third Conjugation, 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 D-EVOIR, to owe. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. P,A3To 
 
 D-evant > owing. | D-u, owed-* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD; 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je dois, / owe, 
 tu dois, thou owest, 
 i\ doit, he owes. 
 
 Je devois, I did owes, 
 tu devois, thou didst owe, 
 il devoit, he did owe. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Nous devons, we owe y 
 vous devez, you owe, 
 ils do i vent, they owe 9 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous devions, we did owe, 
 vous deviez, you did owe, 
 ils devdient, they did ewe, 
 5 
 
%z 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Jc duSj / owed, 
 tu dus, thou owedst> 
 il duty he owed* 
 
 Je d'evrai, / shall owe, ■ 
 tu devras,. fhou shah owe, 
 il devra, he shall owe. 
 
 Preterit. plura«l, 
 
 Nous dumes, we owed, 
 vous dutes, you owed, ' ■ 
 ils durent, they owed'. • -. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Nous devrons, <wc shall owe, 
 vous devrez, you shall on.ve> 
 ils devront, they shall owe, 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je devrois, / should owe, 
 tu devrois* thou shouldsf owe, 
 il devroit,. he should owe. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous dev rions, we should owe, 
 vous devriez, you should owe> 
 ils devroient, they should ewe* 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Dois, owe thou, 
 
 qu'il doive, hthim owc y 
 
 qu'elle doive, let her owe* 
 
 Devon s, let us owe, 
 
 devez, owe you, 
 
 qu'ils doivenr, let them m>* 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense, 
 que singular. que plural. 
 
 Je doive, ihaf I ?nay owe, [ Nous devious, we may owe t 
 tu doives, thou .may est owe 7 . vous devicz,,you may owc D 
 il doive, he may owe*. j ils doivent, thty ?nay\owe % 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je dusse, that I might owe y 
 tu dusses, thou Slightest owe,. 
 il. diit, he might owe. 
 
 Nous dussions, we might owe 
 vous dussiez, you might owe 3 
 ils dussent, they might viva* 
 
 Fourth Conjugation; 
 INFINITIVE MOOD,. 
 
 Ven-dre, to sell. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 FfcESINT. PAST. 
 
 Ven-dant, selling, \ Ven.du, sold* 
 
SINGU.LAR. 
 
 Je vends, / sell, 
 
 tu vends, thou sellest, 
 
 il vend, he sells. 
 
 Je vendois, 2 did sell, 
 tu vendois, thou didst sell, 
 il vendoit, he did sell.. 
 
 Je vendis, / sold, 
 
 tu vendis, thou soldesi, 
 
 il vend it, he sold. 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 8j 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Preseat Tense. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous vendons, <we sell, 
 vons yendez, you sell, 
 ils vendenr, thy sell. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous vend ions, *we ctictsetFy 
 vous vendi.cz, you did s<il> 
 ils vendoient, they did sell.. 
 Preterit.. 
 
 Nous vendimes, <vjs sold,. 
 vous vendues, you sold, 
 il vendirent, they sold. 
 Future.' 
 
 Je vendrai, T shall sell, 
 tu vendras, thou shah sell, 
 il vendra, b* shall sell. 
 
 Nous vendrons, <we shall stllL 
 vous vendrez, you shall- sel\ 
 ils ' y endron t, they shall sell* 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je vendrois, / should sell, 
 tu vendrois, then shonldst sell, 
 11 Vend mi t, he should sell. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous vendrions, <vue should sell r . 
 vous vendriez, you should sell ^ 
 ils vendroient,.//^- shcu-ld selh. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR.. 
 
 Vends, sell thfa 9 
 
 qu'ii vende, let him r ell, 
 
 qu'elle vende, ht her sell, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense., 
 que singular. que plural. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Vendons, let us sell,, 
 
 vendez, sell you. 
 
 qu'ils vendent, let. them sell*. 
 
 J-e vende, that I may sell^ 
 tu vendes, thou may est sell, 
 
 ii vende, he 
 que 
 
 stlL 
 
 No us ve nd I o r i s , *we may sell^ 
 vous vendiez. you- may sell^ 
 ils vend en r j. tb^y may. sell. 
 Preterit.. 
 
 Jc'vendisse, that I might sell. 
 t li Vi -ndisses-j thou might est sell, 
 ii venal/,, be viight Silk 
 
 Nous-vend is si on s^aw wig. sell 1 
 vous vendisi,iez> j^./ might sell ^ 
 | iis Yznd'iMznV,.ibeymigbtcs£ll^ 
 
 B 6) 
 
84 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Fifth Conjugation. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Trad-uire, to translate* 
 
 Participles, 
 present. past. 
 
 Trad-uisant, translating. | Trad-uir, translated. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je traduis, / translate , I Nous traduisons, <we transl. 
 
 tu traduis, thou translate st, I vous traduisez, you translate, 
 il traduit, he translates. | ils traduisent, they translate* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je traduisois, I did •}<; | Nous traduision«, at^/V/ j .^ 
 
 tu traduisois, thou didst > § vous traduisiez, you did s 
 il traduisoit, he did J £ | ils traduisoient, they did * £ 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je traduisis, / translated, 1 Nous traduisimes, <we \ ^ 
 tu traduisis, thou translatedst, I vous traduisites, you 
 il traduisit, he translated* | ils traduisirent, they J £ 
 
 Future. 
 
 Noustraduirons,iivj&tf. -* . 
 vous traduirez, you shall \ 
 
 Je traduirai, / shall -j 
 tu traduiras, thou shah > 8 
 
 il traduira, he shall 3 £ 
 
 ils traduiront, theyjhallj £ 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je traduirois, / should «* ^ 
 tu traduirois, thou should. C | 
 il traduiroit, he should j £ 
 
 Nous traduirions, *ute sh. -^ ^ 
 vous traduiriez, you sh. \ | 
 ils traduiroient, they sh. J £ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Traduis, translate thou, 
 qu'il traduise, let him trausl. 
 qu'elle traduise, It her tran. 
 
 Tradaisons, let us translate, 
 traduisez, translate you, 
 qu'ils traduisent, let them tr. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 85 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense, 
 que singular. que plural. 
 
 Je traduise, that I may 1 <r I Nous traduisions,«utf#tt7. 1 ^ 
 tu traduises, thou may at \ | vous U aduisitz, you may I § 
 il traduise, he may J £ | ils traduisent, they may J £ 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je traduisisse, that I mi. "| ^ I Noustraduisissions, <we > , 
 tu traduisisses, thou mi. \ § vous traduisissiez, you \ 
 il traduisit, he might J £ | ils traduisissent, they m. J 
 
 Sixth Conjugation. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Jo-INDRE, to join, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 J«.ighant,/0/>»z?£. | Jo-int, joined. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je joins, I join, 
 tu joins, thoujoinest, 
 il joint, he joins. 
 
 Nous joignons, njoe join, 
 vous joignez, you join, 
 ils joignent, they join. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Je joignois, / didjoin,^ 
 tu joignois, thou didst join , 
 il joignoit, he did join. 
 
 Nous joignions, we did join, 
 vous joigniez, you did join, 
 ils joignoient, they did join. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je joignis, I joined \ 
 tu joignis, thoujoinedst, 
 il joignit, he joined. 
 
 Nous joignimes, ive joined, 
 vous joignites, you joined, 
 ils joignirent, they joined. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Je joindrai, / shall join , 
 tu joindras, thou shalt join, 
 li joindra, he shall join* 
 
 Nous joindrons, *we shall join, 
 vous joindrez, you shall join, 
 ils joindront, they shall join. 
 
SS 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je joindrois, / should join, 
 tu joindrois, th:u shouldestjo. 
 il joindroit, he should join* 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous joindrions ive sh. jom % 
 vous joindriez, you sh. join, 
 ils joindroient, they sh.jouu 
 
 /IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Joins, Join thou, . . 
 qu'il joigne, let him join, 
 qu'eile joigne, let her join. 
 
 Joignons, let us join, 
 
 j oignez, join you y 
 
 qu'ils joignent, let them join* 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je joigne, that I may join , 
 tu joignes, thou m ay est join y 
 il joigne, he may join. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que PLURAL. 
 
 Nous joignions, <zve may join* 
 vous joigniez, you may join y 
 ils joignent, they may join. 
 
 que 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je joignisse, that Imightjoin^ 
 tu joignisses, thou mightestjo. 
 i\ joignit, he might join. 
 
 Nous joignissions, <wemi. jo, 
 vous \oigu\^\tz y you-mig join, 
 ils joignissent, they mi 'g. join \ 
 
 Conjugation of Reflected Verbs. 
 A Reflected Verb, as I have hinted before, has always 
 9e before it's infinitive ; as, se repentir, to repent ; but it 
 is generally an active verb, the action of which returns 
 upon the agent that produces it. The following example 
 of the first conjugation will be sufficient, to teach how to 
 conjugate any reflected verb. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD.. 
 Se Lever, to rise, 
 
 PARTI.CIPL'SS. 
 PRESENT. PAST* 
 
 Se levant, rising. | Lc^ e, risen. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PI UR AL. 
 
 Je me leve, / tMe% 
 
 tu te I eves, tbtu ristst,. 
 
 il se leve, he ritu* 
 
 Nous nous levonsj ace rfse s 
 \ vous V()i s* t l fc#, 
 
 ib se 10 vent, tbtj rise* 
 
TRENCH TONGUE. 
 singular. Imperfect. plural. 
 
 37 
 
 Je me levois, / did rise, 
 tu te levois, thou didst rise, 
 ii se levoit, Ife did rise. 
 
 Je me levai, / rose, 
 
 tu te levas, thou didst rise, 
 
 il se leva, he did the. 
 
 Je me leverai, / shall rise, 
 tu te lever as, thou shalt rise, 
 il se levera, he shall rise. 
 
 Nous nous levions, <we did ri. 
 vous vous leviez, we did rise, 
 iis selevoient, they did rise. 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous nous levames, *we rose, 
 vous vous levates, you rose, 
 ils se leverent, they rose. 
 Future. 
 
 [rise, 
 Nous nous leverons, *we shall 
 vous vous leverez, you sh. ri a 
 ils se leveront, they sh. rise* 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je me leverois, / should rise, 
 tu te leverois thou shou. rise, 
 \\ se leveroit, he should rise. 
 
 1MPERATIV 
 
 plural. [rise. 
 
 Nous nous leverions, ^we sh. 
 vous vous lev criez, you. sh.rise r 
 ils se leveroient, they sh. rise* 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Leve-toi, rise thou, 
 
 qu'il se leve, let him rise, 
 
 qu'elk se leve, let her rise. 
 
 PLUR A L . 
 
 Levons-nous, let us rise, 
 levez-vous, rise you,. 
 qu'ils.sc levent, let them rise. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 
 que 
 
 Je me leve, that I ?nay rise, 
 tu te leves, thou may est rise, 
 il seleve, he may rise. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 que. [r/se r 
 
 Nous nous levions, nve 7nay , 
 vous vous leviez, you may ru 
 ils se levent, they may rise. 
 
 que 
 
 Je me levasse, that I might ri. 
 tu te lev asses, that Tightest ri. 
 il se lev at, h? might rise. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 [rise, 
 Nous' nous levassions-, we mi.. 
 vous vous lev assiez,y oumi.ri. 
 ih'seievassent,-.^^ mi. rise. 
 
 £ There are neuter verbs, which become reflected by the 
 addition of the panicle en iiximed lately, after the double 
 
si 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 pronouns, s'en aller, to go away ; s'en retourner, to re- 
 turn. 
 
 A reciprocal verb, which is by no means to be confounded 
 tvith a reflected one, is used in the plural only, and conju- 
 gated like reflected verbs with a double pronoun. 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Verbs, alphabetically *♦ 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 A B SOU D RE, to absolve. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Absolvant, absolving. \ Absous, absolved. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR* 
 J'absous, / absolve , 
 la absous, thou absolvest, 
 il absent, he absolves. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous absolvons, <we absolve, 
 vous absol vez,^0# absolve, 
 ils absolvent, they absolve. 
 
 J'absolvois, / did absolve, 
 tu absolvois, thou didst absol. 
 il absolvoit, he did absolve. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous absol vions, <we did abs. 
 vous absolviez,^0**fo/ absol. 
 ils absol voient, they did absol. 
 
 Future. 
 
 J'absoudrai, I shall | £ 
 tu absoudras, thou shah >*^ 
 il absoudra, he shall J *| 
 
 Nous absoudrons,<u* sh. "I ^ 
 vous absoudrez, you sh. >"g 
 ils abseudront, theysh* J 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 J *absoudrois, / should 
 tu absoudrois, thou sho. 
 il ahsoudroit, he should 
 
 J «5 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous absoudrions 
 vous absoudriez 
 ils absoudroien 
 
 lL. 
 
 :ions, nve s. 1 £ 
 iez, ycu sh. >*j 
 mt,thtysh. J *§ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Absous, absolve thou, 
 
 qu'ii absolve, let him absolve. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Absolvons, let us absolve, 
 absol vez, absolve jcu, 
 qu'ils absolvent, le them abs. 
 
 * When a tense is not conjugated at length, you will find a reference 
 to the proper tense in the tabic el" termination vp« 7 8. 
 
 5 
 
que PLURAL. 
 
 Nous absolvions, <we m. 1 s£ 
 vous absolviez, you may >"*§ 
 ils absolvent, they may J *§ 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOODv 
 
 ^ije SINGULAR, 
 
 J ' absolve y that I may 1 C 
 tu absolves, thou mayest >^ 
 i\ absolve, he may J *| 
 
 Abstraire, to abst ratty like traire. 
 
 ACCUEILLIR, to receive, like cueillir. 
 
 ACCOURIR, to run to y like courir* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 A C £U E R I R, to acquire. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST* 
 
 Aequerant, acquiring. | Acquis," acquired, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 J'acquiers, / acquire > 9 
 
 tu acquiers, thou acquired, 
 
 il acquiert, he acquires. 
 
 J'acquerois, I did 
 
 tu acquerois, thou didst 
 
 il acqueroit, he did 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous acquerons, <we acquire,. 
 vous acquerez, you acquire, 
 ils acquierent,*/^ acquire. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous acquerlons,<w^ did 1 £ 
 vous acquerie2;,j0# did V 'S 
 ils ac/7 ueroient, they did J ^ 
 Preterit. 
 
 acquimes, nve acquired, 
 vous acquites, you acquired, 
 ils acquirent, they acquired, 
 
 J - 
 
 J'acquis, I acquired, 
 
 tu acquis, thou ac quired st, 
 
 il acquit, be acquired. 
 
 Future. 
 J'acquer-rai, I shall acquire. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 J'acquer-rois, I should acquire. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Acquerons, let us acquire. 
 
 Acquiers, acquire thou. 
 qu'il acquiere, let him acqui. 
 
 acquerez, acquire you, 
 qu'ils acquierent, let them ac. 
 
90 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 J'acquiere, / may 
 
 tuaequieres, thou mayest 
 
 il acquiere, he may 
 night 
 
 que 
 
 J'acquisse, I mi^ 
 
 tu acqnisses, thou might 
 
 il acquit, he might 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nousacqnerions, tvern. "] £ 
 voos acqueriez, you may I g^ 
 ils acquierent, they may J ^ 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous acquissionsji^f mi 
 I vous acquissiez, you ?ni 
 ^ j ilsacquissent, thtymigh, 
 Admettre, to admit y like met t re. 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 i 
 
 :! 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 Allan t, going. 
 
 Aller, to go. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 'PAST. 
 
 J Alle, gone. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je vais, I go, 
 
 tu vas, thou goest, 
 
 il va, he goes. 
 
 J'allois, I did go, 
 
 tu allois, thou didst go, 
 
 il alloit, he did go. 
 
 J'allai, / went, 
 
 tu alias, thou <uutntest, 
 
 il alia, he ivent. 
 
 J'irai, / shall go, 
 tu iras, thou shaft go, 
 il ira, he shall go. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous allons, *ive go p 
 vous a\\zx,you go> 
 ils vonr, they go. 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Nous all ions, <ive did go ± 
 vous M\tz,you did go, 
 ils alloient, they did go. 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous allames, <zve <went^ 
 vous a Hates, you <zueut, 
 ils alle rent, they *wext. 
 Future. 
 
 Nous irons, e we shall go > 
 vous irez, jou shall go. 
 ils iront, they shall go* 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGUXAR. PLURAL. 
 
 
 J'irois, / should go j 
 
 tu irois, thou shouldest go, 
 
 il iroit, he should go. 
 
 Nous irions, <we should go,. 
 vous iriez, you should go, 
 ils iroient, they should go. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Allez, let us go, 
 
 91 
 
 Va, go thou, 
 
 qu'il ailie, lei him go. 
 
 allez, go you, 
 
 qu'iis aiiknt, let them g9> 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 one SINGULAR. 
 
 j*dille. I may go, 
 tu allies, thou mayest go, 
 ii ailie, he may go, 
 
 que 
 
 J'allasse, I might go, 
 
 tu allasses, thou mightest go, 
 
 il allat* he might go. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous alliens, we may go y 
 vous alliez, you may go, 
 ils -aiilent, they may go* 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous allassions, we might go f 
 vous allassiez, you might go % 
 ils allassent, they might go* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 S'Asseoir, to sit dewn. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 S'Asseyant, sitting down. | Assis, sat down* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
 
 [down* 
 Nous nous asseyons, we sit 
 
 Je m'assieds, / sit down, 
 tu t'assieds, ihsu sittest down, 
 il s'assied, he sits down. 
 
 Je m'asseyois, / did sit douon, 
 tu t'asseyois, thou didst sit do. 
 il s'asseyoit, he did sit down. 
 
 vous vous asseyez ycu sit d 9 
 ils s'asseyent, they sit down* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ["«/ down* 
 Nous nous asseyJons, we did 
 vous vous asseyiez, you did 
 ils s'asseyoienr, they did ui d. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je m'assis, I sat down, 
 
 tu t'assis, thou sattest down, 
 
 il b'assit; he sat down. 
 
 Nous nous assimes, we sat do* 
 vous vous assites, you sat do. 
 ils s'assirent, they sat down* 
 
92 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Future. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je m'assierai *, I shall sit do. 
 tu t'assieras, thou sbalt sit do. 
 il s'assiera, he shall sit down.. 
 
 PLURAL. [sit dozvn r 
 
 Nous nous assierons> we shall 
 vous vous assiereZyjou sha . sit 
 , il s'assieront, they sh. sit do.. 
 
 * Or, Je nfaueyeral, according to the French Academy, 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 [down, 
 Je m'assierois *, / should sit 
 tu t'assierois, thou sbo. sit do. vous vous assieriez, yon sho, 
 
 il s'ass&roit, he should sit do. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 [sit deivn 3 
 Nous nous assierions, i»e sh. 
 
 ils s'assieroient, they sh.sit. d^ 
 
 * Or, je tri'esseyerris.—'lb'id, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Assieds.toi, sit thou down, 
 qu'il s'asseye,/*/ him sit down. 
 
 FLURAL* 
 
 Asseyons-nous, let us sit down 
 asseyez-vous, sit (you) down, 
 qu'ils s'asseyent, let the. sit d» 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 que 
 
 Je m'asseye^ / may sit down, 
 tu t'asseyes, thou mayst sit do. 
 il s'asseye, he may sit down. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 [sit down, 
 Nous nous asseyions, we may 
 vous vous assey \zz,you may s. 
 il s'asseyent, they may sit do. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 [sit doivn. 
 Nous nous assissions, we mi* 
 vous vous assissiez, you mi. 
 il s'assissent, they mig. sit do. 
 
 que 
 
 Je ra'assisse, that I mig. sit d. 
 tu t'assisses,/^*/ mightest sitd. 
 il s'assit, he might sit down. 
 
 Obs. Grammarians do not agree about the orthography 
 of this verb : it has been conjugated according to the 
 French Academy. 
 
 ApprendrEj to learn, like prendre. 
 A 8 s a i l L I R , to assault, like trcssaillir* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Battre, to beat. 
 
 9J 
 
 Battant, beating* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 j Battu, beaten. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
 
 Je bats, / beat, I Nous battons, we beat-,\ 
 
 tu bats, thou beatest, vous battez, you beat, 
 
 il bat, he beats. ils battent, they beat. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je batt-ois, I did beat. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je battis, / beat, Nous battimes, nve beat, 
 
 tu battis, thou beatest, vous battites,j>ou beat) 
 
 il battit, he beat* ils battirent, they beat. 
 
 Future. 
 Je batt.rai, .1 shall beat. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD, 
 
 Je batt-rois, I should beat. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Battons, let us beat. 
 
 Bats, beat thou, 
 
 tju'il batte, let him beat. 
 
 battez, beat you, 
 
 qu'ils battent, let them beat. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 /jue SINGULAR. 
 
 Je batte, that I may beat, 
 tu battes, thou mayest beat, 
 il batte, he may beat. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous battions, <we may beat, 
 vous battiez, you- may beat, 
 ils battent, they may beat. 
 
 ■que 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je batrisse, that I might beat, 
 tu battisses,/£?ft mightestbeat, 
 il battit, he might beat. 
 
 Nous battissions,**;*' mi. beat, 
 vous battissiez, you might be. 
 ils bzxtissent, they might beat. 
 
9* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOQ. 
 Bo I re, to drink. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Buvant, drinking. | Bu, drunk. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 Je hois, / drink ) 
 
 tn bois, thou drinkest, 
 
 il boit, he drinks. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 ' Nous buvons, <ive drink, 
 vous buvez, you drink , 
 ils boivent, they drink. 
 Imperfect. 
 Je buv-ois, / did drink. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit, 
 je bus, / drank. Nous bumes, w* drank, 
 
 tu bus, /&<;# drankesty vous butes, j>b# drank, 
 
 il but, £f drank. | ils burent, /£<?>' drank. 
 
 Future. 
 je boi-rai, I shall drink. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je boi-rois, / should drink. Seep. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Bois, drink thou, 
 
 qu'ii boive, let him drink. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Buvons, let US drink , 
 buvez, drink yen ^ 
 qu'ils boivent, /*/ them drink* 
 
 que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 je boive, / may drink, 
 
 tu boives, thou may est drink, 
 
 il boive, he may drink , 
 
 Nou s buy ia n s ; -us ma y drht , 
 vous buviez, you may drinky 
 ils boivent, ihey may drink. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je busse, / might drink, I Nous bussions, <ive might dri. 
 
 tu busses, thou migfote&t drink) j vousbussiez, you might* 
 
 il but, he might drink > j iis b.M&sentj th • drink. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 EouiLLIR, to boil. 
 Participles. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Bouillant, boiling. j Bouilli, boiled. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense, 
 
 9* 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous bouillons, -jue boil, 
 voiis bouiilez, you boil, 
 ils bouiiient, they boil. 
 Imperfect. 
 
 See page 78. B. 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous bouilJimes, ewe boiled, 
 vous bouiliires, you boiled, 
 ils bouillirent, they boiled. 
 Future. 
 Je bouiiii-rai, I shall b:il. See page 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je bouilli-rois, I should boil. See page 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Bouillons, let us boil, 
 bddillez, boil \ou y 
 qti*iis b^u'llent, let them boil. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 Je bous, / boil, 
 tu bous, thou boil est, 
 il bout, he boils. 
 
 Je bouill-ois, / did boil. 
 
 Je bouUlis, / boild, 
 
 tu bouiliis, ifyou boiledtt, 
 
 il bouillit, he boiled. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Bous, boil thou, 
 
 qu'ii bouilie, let him boil. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tens", 
 que singular. ( • riURAL, 
 
 Je/ bouili-:', I may Vfji?, \ Nous bqu\llionsj ^wemayboil^ 
 
 tu bouides, thou ma\-fl joil, J vous bouilliez, ycu way bo;/, 
 il bouilie, he may boil. J ils bouiiient, they may boil. 
 
 que 'Pret.rit. 
 
 je bouiilisse, 1 might bo : l, I Nous bouillissicns, nve m. bo. 
 tu bouillissQSj^^iw [hi. boil, 1 vous bopiilisiez, you might b. 
 il bouiilir, be might b il. \ ils bouillissent, they might b. 
 
 This verb is seldom u edj excep r In the third persons 
 singular and plural ; and instead of bomllir de la <viande> to 
 boil meat, we siy, /aire boudlir de la <viaude. 
 
^6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 CirconCIRE, to circumche . 
 This verb is not of great use. It is conjugated like lire, 
 to read, except in both the preter tenses, and in the past 
 participle, where it makes je circoncis, je ch-ccncisse, cir- 
 
 CGUCii. 
 
 Com? Rend RE, to under standf like prendre. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Conclure, to conclude* 
 Participles, 
 present, past. 
 
 Concluant, concluding. | Conclu, concluded. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous concluons, ive conclude , 
 vous conclue z, you conclude •, 
 ils concluent, they conclude. 
 
 Je conclus, / conclude^ 
 tu conclus, thou concludest, 
 il conclut, he concludes. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je conclu-ois, 1 did conclude. Seep. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je conclus, ] concluded, I Nous conclumes,^<?<:<wr /#</?, 
 
 tu conclus, thou condudtst, vous conclutes, j0« concluded, 
 il conclut, he concluded. | ils conclurent, they concluded. 
 
 Future. 
 Je conclu-rai, I shall conclude. Seep. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je conclurois, / should conclude. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Concluons, let us conclude, 
 Conclus, conclude thou, 
 <j j'il conclue, Jet him conclude , 
 
 concluez, conclude you, 
 qu'ils concluent, let them con. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 que 
 
 Je conclue, that J may conclude, 
 XUCO\\c)u?s,fheu may st conclude, 
 il conclue, he may conch de. 
 
 [conclude, 
 Nous conditions, ive may 
 vous concluiez, you may c^.'u 
 il-e concluent, they may cone 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 91 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 que [conclude, 
 
 Je concludes, that I might 
 tu conclusses, thou mightest c. 
 il cenclih, he might conclude. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 [conclude* 
 Nous conclusions, ive might 
 vous conciussiez,^0K might c m 
 ils conclussent, they might cm* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 CONFIRE, to pickle* 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Confisant, pickling. \ Confit, pickled* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je confis, I fickle T 
 tu confis, thou picklest, 
 il confit, he pickle i. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous confisons, <we frc'klr, 
 vous confisez, you pickle % 
 ils confisent, they pickle* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Je conn's- ois, I did pickle. See p. 78. 
 Preterit. 
 
 B, 
 
 Je confis, / pickled, 
 
 tu confis, thou pickle dst } 
 
 il con fit, he pickled. 
 
 Nous conflmes, we pickle d* 
 vous confites, you pickled, 
 ils confirent, they pickled. 
 
 Future. 
 Je confi-rai, / shall pickle. See page 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD, 
 j^ confi-rois. / should pickle. See page 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Confis, pickle thou, 
 
 qu'il confise, let him pickle. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Confisons, let us pickle, 
 
 confisez, pickle you, 
 
 qu'ik confiaent, let tkempiJk* 
 
9« 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je confise, that I may pickle , Nous confisions,iy<? may pic 'k. 
 tu-confises, thou mayst pickle, vous confisiez, you may pick. 
 il confise, he ?nay pickle. \ iis confisent, they may pickle. 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 [pickle. 
 
 que 
 
 Je confisse, that I might pick 
 tu confesses, thou mightst pick 
 il confit, he might pickle. 
 
 Nous confissions, we night 
 vous conrisbiez, you might pi. 
 ils confissent, they might pic % 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 CoNNOlTRE, tO knOW. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Connoisant, knowing. | Connu, known. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je connois, / know, [ Nous connoissons, we knew, 
 
 tu connois, thou knowest, vous connoissez, you know, 
 
 il coiinoit, he knows. ils connoissent, they know. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je eonnoiss-ois, I did know. See page 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je connus, / knew, 
 
 tu connus, thou knewest, 
 
 ii connut, he knew. 
 
 Je connoitrai, I shall know, 
 wnoxiVJSythoT/shaltknow, 
 I a, he shall know. 
 
 Nous connumes, we knew, 
 vous conmnes, you knew, 
 ils connurent, they knew. 
 
 Future. 
 
 \know % 
 Nous connoitrons, we shall 
 
 vous connoitreZjjytf* shaltkno. 
 ils connoitront, >/•£>• shall kno. 
 
99 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous connoitrions, ave should 
 vous connoitneZyjcu sho. ktt* 
 
 J e connoitrois, I shout, know, 
 tu-connoitrois, tbousfo know, 
 
 il connoitroit, he shou. know, lis connoitroient, tkej sh. kn* 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Connoissons, let us knovj, 
 connoissez, knovjyou, 
 qu'ils c'onnoissenr, let them k c 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Oonnois, knovJ thou, 
 
 qti'il connoisse, let himkno<w. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 q e [know, 
 
 ]e connoisse, that I may 
 ta connoisses, thou mayst kn. 
 il connoisse, he may know. 
 
 Preterit, 
 qpe {knvw, 
 
 Je connusse, that I might 
 tu connu&sesj -thou mi. know, 
 il connut, he might k/ioiv. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 [kno<iu 9 
 Nous Connoissions, we may 
 vous connoissiez, you may zn. 
 ils connoissent, they may kno. 
 
 £xno<zt*) 
 Nous connussions, nxe might 
 vous connussiez,j^ mi. kno. 
 ils connussent, they mi. hiovj* 
 
 C o m qtr e'r I R , to conquer, like acqutrir. 
 Consentir, to consent, like sentir. 
 Contenijl, to an tain, like tenir. 
 
 Co NT RED IRE, to gainsay. 
 This verb is conjugated like dire, except in the second 
 person plural, where it makes vous contredisex. 
 
 Contrevenir, to infringe, 1 ike venir. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Convaincre, to convince* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Convainquantj convincing. | Convaincu, convinced* 
 
 F Z 
 
100 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Je eonvaincs, I convince) 
 tu eonvaincs, thou conv incest, 
 il convainc, he convinces. 
 
 [vince 9 
 Nous convainquons, vue con- 
 vows convainquez, jou conv. 
 ils convainquent, they conv* 
 
 Imperfecta 
 
 \yinee, 
 Je conraincfuois, / did con- 
 tu con vain quois, thou didst c. 
 il convainquoit, he did conv. 
 
 [convince^ 
 Nous convainquions, we did 
 vous convainquiez, you did c. 
 ilsconvainquoient, they did c. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je convainquis, / convinced, 
 tu convainquis, thou convin. 
 
 \vinced, 
 Nous convainquimes, voe cou- 
 vous convainquites, you con. 
 
 II convainquit, he convinced, ils convainquirent, they con* 
 
 Future. 
 
 \yince, 
 Je convaincral, / shall con- 
 tu convaincras, thou shalt co. 
 
 il convaincra, he shall conv. 
 
 [convince^ 
 Nous convaincrOns, vue shall 
 vousconvaincrez, you sh. co* 
 ils convaincront, they sh. xo. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 [convince, 
 Je convainc rois, / should 
 tu convaincrois, thou she., con. 
 il convainuroit, he should con. 
 
 nURAL. 
 
 [convince, 
 Nous convaincrions, qve sho. 
 vous convaincriez, yon sho. e. 
 ils convaincroient, tbty sh. co. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Convaincs, crivince thou, 
 cju'il convainque, let him con. 
 
 7 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Convainquons, let usconvvice 9 
 convair.qucz, convince you. 
 qu'ii convainquent, let th. co. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 is* 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 «JUe [convince) 
 
 Je convainque, that I may 
 tu coiwinques, tko.masyt co. 
 il convainque, he may convu 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 Present Tense* 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 [convince f 
 Nous convainquions, we may 
 vous convainquieZjjtf^/Tz^ c* 
 lis convainquSnt, they m. con. 
 
 Preterit, 
 que [convince, 
 
 Je convainquisse, / might 
 tu convainquisses, thou mh r r 
 il convaiuquit, he might con. 
 
 [might convince r 
 Nous convainquissions, we 
 vous convainquissiez, you m* 
 ils con vainquis sent, they m. <* 
 
 Convenir, to agree , like venir. 
 Cor romp re, to corrupt y like romfre* 
 
 INFINITIVE MGOLX 
 Coudre, to sew. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Cousantj sewing. ■ ] Cousu, sevsed* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous cousons, we'tew y 
 vous cousez, you sew, 
 ils cousent, they sew.- 
 Imperfect. 
 
 See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous cousimes, vjc sewed, 
 vous cousites, you sewed, 
 ils cousirent, they sewed. 
 
 Future. 
 Je coud-rai, I shall shew. See p. 78. D. 
 
 * 3 
 
 Je couds, / sew, 
 
 tu couds, thou s&west, 
 
 il coud, he sews, 
 
 Jecous.ois, I did sew. 
 
 Je cousis, I sewed, 
 
 tu cousis, thou sewedst, 
 
 il cousit, he sewed. 
 
105 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je coud-rois, I should se*w< See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 SINGUEAR. PLURAL 
 
 Cousons, let us sew, 
 Couds, sew thou, 
 du'il couse, let him sew 
 
 eouseZj sewyou, 
 
 qu'ils cousent, let them sew. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR* 
 
 Je couse* that I may sew % 
 tu co uses, thou mnyst sew, 
 il couse, he may sew* 
 
 que 
 
 Je cousisse, that I might sew, 
 tu co.us.issesi/^02 mightest s?w, 
 il cousit, he might sew* 
 
 PLURAL.. 
 
 Nous cousioilSj we may sew, 
 vo,us,cousiez, you may sew, 
 ils cousentj they may sew. 
 Preterit. 
 
 [sew, 
 Nous cousissions, we might 
 vous cousissiez,j0# mig. sew, 
 iis cousissent, they might stw* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Courir, to run. 
 
 PARTICIPLES, 
 PRESENT. PAS** 
 
 Courant, running. | Couru, run. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous courons, we run, 
 vous courez, you run, 
 ils courent, they run. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous couriimes, we ran, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je cours, / run, 
 
 tu cours, thou run nest, 
 
 il court, he runs. 
 
 Je cour-ois, / did run. 
 
 Je courns, / ran, 
 
 tu courus, thou tannest % 
 
 il couru t, he ran. 
 
 vous courutes, you ran, 
 ils coururent, they ran* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 103 
 
 Future. 
 Je cour-rai, / shall run. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je cour-rois, / should run . See p. 78. E, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Courons, let us ru?i> 
 
 courez, run you , 
 
 qu'ils courent, let them run. 
 
 Cour$, run thou, 
 
 qu'il coure, let him run. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je coure, that I may run* 
 tu couresj tht>u mayst run, 
 il coure, he may run* 
 
 que 
 
 Je courusse, that I might run, 
 xucourusses, thtumrghu st run, 
 il courut, he might run. 
 
 Nous courions, <we may rux, 
 vous counez, you may run, 
 ils CQ\H£'Mythey may run. 
 Preterit. 
 
 [run, 
 Nous courussions, we might 
 vous courussiez, \ou might r. 
 lis courus^ent, they might ran* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 C o u v R 1 r, to cover. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Couvrant, covering. j Couvert, covered". 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je couvre, / cover, 
 
 tu couvres, thou coverest, 
 
 il couvre, he covers, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je couvr-ois, I did cover. See p. 78. B 
 
 F 4 
 
 Nous couvrons, voe cover y 
 vous couvrez, you cover, 
 ils couvrent, they cover* 
 
J04 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 singular. Preterit. plural. 
 
 Je couvrisj / covered, Nous couvrimes, vue covert 
 
 tu couvris, thou coveredst, vous couvrites, you covered > 
 
 il couvrit, he covered. ils couvrirent, they covered* 
 
 Future. 
 Je couvri.rai, I shall cover. See p. 78. D. 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je couvri-rois, I should cover. See p. 78, E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Couvrons, let us cover, 
 
 couvrez, cover you, 
 
 qu'ils couvrent, let them co<P, 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 
 Couvre, cover thou, 
 
 qu'il couvre, let him cover. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 je couvre, that 1 may cover, Nous couvrions, we may cov> 
 
 tu couvres, thou mayst cover, vous couvriez, you may cover, 
 
 il couvre^ he may cover. ils couvrent, they may cover. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 [cover, 
 
 que 
 
 Je couvriase, that J might 
 tu couvrisses, thou mi. cover, 
 ilcouvrit, he might cover. 
 
 [cover, 
 Nous couvrissions, ive might 
 vous couvrissiez, youmigktco» 
 ils couvrissent, they might co* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 Croyant, believing. 
 
 Croire, to believe. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PAST. 
 I Cl'U, believed. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je crois, / believe, 
 t« crois, thou bclievcst, 
 il croit, he helivcs. 
 
 Nous croyons, ive believe^ 
 vous croycz, you believe, 
 ils croient, thty believe* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 10; 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je croy-ols, I did believe. See p. 78. 
 Preterit. 
 
 B. 
 
 Je cms, / believed, 
 tu crus, thou believedst, 
 il crut, be believed* 
 
 Nous crumeSj <we believed, 
 yous emits, you believed \ 
 ils crurent, they believed* 
 Future. 
 Je croi-rai, / shall believe. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je croi-rois, I should belieeve. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Crois, believe thou, 
 
 qu'il croie, let him believe. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Croyons, let us believe,- 
 croyez, believe you, 
 qu'il-s-croient, let them belie* 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que singular. plural, [lieve, 
 
 Je croie, that I may believe. Nous croyions, <we may be* 
 
 vous croyieZj ysu may belie, 
 ils croient, they, may believe* 
 
 \lieve. 
 Nous crussions, vue might be* 
 vous crussiez, you might beU 
 lis crussent, they might belie. 
 
 tu croiesj thou mayst believe, 
 il croie, be may believe. 
 
 Preterit, 
 que 
 
 Je crusse, that I might belie 
 tu crusses, thou mightest belie, 
 il ciut, be might believe, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 CroitrEj to grow* 
 participles. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Cyissant, growing. | Cru, grown. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 singular. 
 Je crois, I grovu, 
 
 tu crois, thou grace sty 
 il croit, he groiys* 
 
 plural. 
 Nous croissons, <we grew, 
 vous croissez, you grow, 
 ils croissent, they gravis 
 
io5 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je croiss^ois, I did grow.. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous crumes, we grew^ 
 vous crutes, you grew, 
 ils crurent^ they grew*. 
 
 Future. 
 Je eroit-raij I thai! grow. See p. 78. D. 
 
 Je cms, I gre<vj, 
 
 tu crus, thou grewesty 
 
 il crut, he grew.. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je'croiUrois, I should grow. See p. 78. E* 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 €rots, grow thw, 
 
 qu'il croisse, let him grow, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Croissons, let us grow* 
 
 croissez, growyoit) 
 
 q-u'ils croissent, let them gro* 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je croisse, that I may grow, 
 tu croisses, thou may st grow, 
 il croisse, he may grow*. 
 
 que 
 
 Je crussej that I might grow, 
 tu crusses, thou might st grow, 
 ll crut, he- may grow. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous emissions, we may gn. 
 vous croissiez^^w^v^roxt;, 
 ils croissent, they may grow. 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 Nous crussions, we mi. gro, 
 vous crussiez, you might grc* 
 ils cryssent, they might grow* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Cueillir, to gather.. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PA-9T. 
 
 Cueiilant, gathering. \ Cueilli, gathered* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 102 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR., PLURAL. 
 
 Je cueille^ I gather, 
 
 tu cueilles, thou %atherest, 
 
 il cueille, be gathers. 
 
 Nous cueillois, <w? gather^ 
 vous cueillez, you gather^ 
 ils cueillent, they gather. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je cueilLois, I did gather. See p. 78. B^ 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous cueilKmes, <we gathered*^ 
 vous cueillites, you gathered,. 
 ils cueillirent, they gathered* 
 
 Je cueillis, 1 gatherea, 
 
 tu cueillis, thou gatheredst, 
 
 il cueillit, he gathered'. 
 
 Future. 
 Je €ueille-rar r I shall gather. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je cueille-rois, I should gather. See p. 78. E 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR... 
 
 Cueille, gather thou,. 
 
 qu'il cueille, let him gather. 
 
 PLURAL.- 
 Cueillons, let us gather^ 
 cueillez, gather you, 
 qu'ils cueillent, lettb. gathers 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je cueille, that I may gather \ 
 tu cueilles, thou may st gatb, 
 il cueille, he may gather. 
 
 tber. 
 
 que* ^gathi 
 
 je cueillissesj that 1 might 
 
 tu cueillisses, thou might < t ga. 
 ]i. Cueillit, he might gather. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Terwe. 
 
 PLURAL.- 
 
 Nous cneillions, *we m.gath*- 
 vous cueilliez,_V3«#z. gather 3 > 
 ils cueillent, they may gather v 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 feather* 
 Nous cueiilissions^'u^ might 
 vous cueiU\&s\ez f you-m* g atb m . 
 
 ils cueillissent,./^ m. gathv 
 
 T 6 
 
tot A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 De'qhoir, to decay, to decline. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Decheant, decaying. | Dechu, decayed. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Peesent Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je dechois, / decay, 
 
 *4i dechois, thou decay est 9 
 
 tu dechoit, he decays. 
 
 Nous dechoyons, r we decay, 
 vous dechoyez, jw« decay, 
 ils dechoient, they decay. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je dechus, / decayed, 
 tu dechus, thou decayedst, 
 il dechu t, he decayed. 
 
 Future. 
 Je decher-rai,. / shall decay. See p. 78. D 
 
 Nous dechumes, <voe decayed^ 
 vous dechutes, you decayed, 
 ils dechurent, they decayed* 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je decher-rois, / should decay. See p. 78. E» 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense # 
 
 gilC SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je dechoie, that I may decay, j Nous dechoy ions, we mayde. 
 
 vous dechoyiez, you may de* 
 ils dechoient, they may decqy* 
 
 tu dechoies, thou mayst decay, 
 il dechoie, he may decay. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je dech-usse, I might decay. See p. 78. G. $. 
 
 De'couvrir, to discover, like cowvrir. 
 Dk'mettre, to remove, like ?nettre. 
 De'sapprendre, td unleaw, like prendre* 
 Dessert 1 r, to take away, like servir. 
 Df/tenir, to detain , like tenir. 
 D E T e n l R , to become, like w;;>. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Dire, to say> or tell. 
 
 PARTICIPLES,- 
 PRESENT. PAST* 
 
 Disant, saying. \ Dlt, said. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense* 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous disons, njoe say T 
 vous dites,_ytf# say, 
 ih- disent r they say. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous dimes, <we said), 
 vous dites, you said y , 
 ils direnty they said.. 
 
 Future; 
 Je di~rai, / shall say. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD.. 
 Je di-rois, / should say* See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 109 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 
 Je dis, / say, 
 
 tu dis r thou sayesiy 
 
 II dit, he says. 
 
 Je dis-ois, / did say. 
 
 Je dis, / said, 
 
 tu diSj thou saidsty 
 
 il dit, he said. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Dis, say thou, 
 
 im'il dise, let him say. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 Disons, let us say, 
 ditQSySayyoUy 
 qu'ils disent, let them say* 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 «me LINGULAR. 
 
 Je dise, that I may say, 
 til discs, thou may st say, 
 il disc, he may say. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous disions, ive may say. 
 vous disiez, you ?nay say, 
 ils disent, thoy may say. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je d-isse, that I might say. See p. 78. G. 2. 
 
 Redire is conjugated after the same manner# 
 
no A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Disconvenik, to disagree, like venir*. 
 DisCOURlR, to converse, like courir. 
 Dissoudre, Jo dissolve, like absoudre* 
 Distrairje, /a distract* like train.. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Dor MIR, to sleep. 
 
 PARTICIPLES, 
 PRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Dormant* sleeping. | Dormi, slept. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 STNGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je dors, / sleep. Nous dormons, *we sleeps 
 
 tu dors, thou sleepest, vous dormez, jou steep,. 
 
 il dort, he sleeps. iJs dorment, they sleep*. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je dorm-ois, I did sleep. See p. 78. B^ 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je dorm-is, I slept. See p. 78. G. 2. 
 
 Future. 
 Je dormi-rai, r shall sleep. See p. 78. D'. 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je dormi-rcis, I should sleep. Seep. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Dormons, lei us sleep, 
 
 Dors, sleep thou, 
 
 qu'il dorme, let him sleep. 
 
 dormez, shep you. 
 
 qu'ils dorment, let them shep* 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL,. 
 
 Nous dormions, ive may sleep, 
 vous dormiez,^« may shep i 
 ilb dorment, they may sleep,. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je dorm-isse, that- 1 might sfcrp. See p. 78, G* z» 
 
 Je dorme, that J may shep, 
 tu dormes, thou majvst sleep, 
 il dorme, he jnay sleep. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, u.i 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD, 
 Ecrtre, to write \ 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST* 
 
 £crivant, -writing. J Ecrit, written. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense 
 
 SINCITLAR. PLtTRAr# 
 
 J'ecris, I write, I Nous ecrivons, we write?, 
 
 tu ecris, thou writest, , vous ecrivez, you write, 
 
 il ecrit, be writes. [ ils ecrivent, they write*. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 ]'zcTiv-ois, I did write. See p. 78. B, 
 
 Preterit. 
 y€cri-Y.is h I wrote*. See p. 78. C. 2.. 
 
 Future. 
 J'ecrLrai, / shall write. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD., 
 J'ecri-rois, / should write. See p. 78. E, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
 
 Ecrivons, let us write, 
 
 ecrivez, write you, 
 
 qu'iis ecrivent, let them write, 
 
 Ecris, write thou, 
 
 qu'il e.crive, let him write. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,. 
 Present Tense.. 
 
 que SINGULAR.. PLURAL. 
 
 y&crive.jhat. I may write, 
 tu ecrives, thou nuiyst write, 
 il ecrive, he may write. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 J'ecriv-isse, that I might write*. See p. 7$. G. 2* 
 
 Nous ecrivions, we may write 
 vous ecriviez, you may write p . 
 ils ecrivent, they may write. 
 
tit A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Emouvoir, to stir up, like mowed r. 
 Encourir, to incur, like courir. 
 Endormir, to lull asleep , like dormir. 
 S'e QUERIR, to inquire, like acquerir. 
 S'entremettre, to intermeddle, 1 i ke mettre* 
 Entreprfndre, to undertake, 1 ike prendre. 
 Entretenir, to entertain, like tenir. 
 E ntr ' o u v r i r , to open a li. tie, like ouvrir. 
 
 Envoy er, to send. 
 This verb is irregulir in two tenses only, <viz+- 
 Future. 
 J'enver-rai, / shall send. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD.. 
 J'enver-rois, / should se?id. ^ce p. 78. E. 
 
 The other tenses are regular. It's compound renvoyer, 
 to send back, is likewise irregular only in the two tenses 
 above. 
 
 EQUIVAX.OIR, to be of equal Value, liae *valoir. 
 Exclure, to exclude. 
 This verb is conjugated like conclure, except in the 
 participle past, where it is spelled exclu^ exclue y ox exclus^ . 
 excluse. 
 
 Extra 1 re, to extract, like traire, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Fa 1 RE, to do, or to make. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Faisant, {pron. fes ant) doing. | Fait, def/e. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINCULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 [*we do, 
 Je fids, / do, Nous famous, [pron % fesans) 
 
 tu fais, thou doest. vous faitcs, you do, 
 
 il fcit, h'c does. J.ils font, they do. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 tij 
 
 Je fis, / did, 
 
 tu fis, thou didst, 
 
 il fit, he did. 
 
 Imperfecta 
 je fais-ois, (/►>$;*. fesois) I did do * See p. 78. B* 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous fimes, oi;^ <//</, 
 vous fites, you did* 
 il firent, they did,. 
 
 Future. 
 Je fe-rai, I shall do. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je fe-rois, I should do. See p. 7$. E» 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 
 Fa is, do thou, 
 
 qu'il fasse, let him do. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Faisons, [pvon % fesons }/?///* <&<>. 
 
 faites, do you, 
 
 qu'ils fassent, /<?/ /&7* d>. 
 
 que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLUK.AL. 
 
 Je fasse, that I may do, 
 tu fasses, thou mayst do. 
 il fasse, he may do. 
 
 que 
 
 Je fisse, that I might do, 
 tu fisses, thou mightst do, 
 il fit, he might do. 
 
 Nous fassions, nve may de 9 
 vous fassiez, you may do, 
 lis fassent, they may do. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous fissions, <we might dt* 
 vous fissiez, you might do,. 
 ils fissent, they might do*. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 FuiR, to flee. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 HRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Fuyant, fleeing. j Fui, fled. 
 
j i 4 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je fuis, I flee, 
 
 tu fuis, thou flee sty 
 
 ll fuit, h* flees. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous fuyons, *we flee 9 
 vous fuyez, you flee, 
 ils fuient, they flee* 
 
 Je fuy-ois, / did flee. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 See p. 78. B. 
 Preterit. 
 Je fu-is* I fled '. See p. 78. C. 2. 
 
 Future. 
 Je fui-rai, I shallflfc. See p. 78. 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 Je fui.rois, / should flee. See p. 7 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD, 
 
 D. 
 
 MOOD. 
 3. E. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 FuiS, flee thou 9 
 
 qu'il iuie, let him flee. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Fuyons, let us flee y 
 fuyez, fleeyouy 
 qn'ils fuient, let them flee*. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je fuie, that 1 may flee y 
 tu tuies, thru may st flee , 
 il fuie, he may flee. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous fuyionSs <we may flee + 
 vous iuyiez,^* may flee y 
 ils tuient, thy mayflte. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je fuisse, that I might flee. See p. 78. G. 2. 
 
 Hair, to hate* 
 
 This verb is regular: it's irregularity falls only upon 
 the pronunciation of its first, second, and third person 
 singular of he present tense of the indicative mood, and 
 of the second person of the singular in the imperative 
 wood. Thus we write and pronounce in one syllable, Je 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 2 1 3 
 
 hah, I hate; tu hais, thou hatest ; il baity he hates \ hais y 
 hate thou ; whereas, in all other tenses, a is pronounced 
 separately from the following 7, and makes the syllable by 
 itself; as, nous haissonSy we hate; *vous haissez, you hate ; 
 ill baissent, they hate. 
 
 Inter rom pre, to interrupt, like romp re. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD* 
 
 Lire, to read* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 FRESENT. 
 
 Lisant, reading. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 I Lu, read. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 Je lis, / ready 
 
 tu lis, thou readest 9 
 
 il lit, be read** 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Nous lisons, <we ready, 
 vous lisez, you ready 
 ils lisent, they read. 
 
 Imperfect, 
 Je lis.ois, 1 did read* See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je lus, / ready Nous lumes, we ready 
 
 tu his, thou readesty vous lutes, you ready 
 
 il lut, be read, il lurent, they read, 
 
 Future. 
 Je li-rai, I shall read. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je li-rois, I should read. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Lis, read thou y 
 
 qu'il lise i let him read. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 Li sons, let us read 4 
 lisez, read you , 
 qu'ils lisent, let them read* 
 
iiS 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 que ' SINGULAR, 
 Je Use, that I may read, 
 tu Uses, thou may st read, 
 il lise, he maj read* 
 
 que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Nous lisions, <we may read r , 
 vous lisiez, you may ready 
 ils iiseut, ih^y may read. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je lusse, that I might read, 
 tu lusses, thou mightest ready 
 il lut, he might read. 
 
 Nous lussions, ive might ready 
 vous lussiez, you might ready 
 ils lussent, they might read. 
 
 Maintewir, to maintain y like tenir. 
 
 Maud i re, to curse. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like dire 9 except in the second 
 
 person plural, where it makes, vous maudissez. It doubles 
 
 also the s in all the other tenses and persons ; as maudis- 
 
 iant* nous maudissonSy je maudis'sois y que je maudisse* 
 
 M£ D I R E , to slander* 
 Thia verb is conjugated like dire, except in the seconcfc 
 person plural, where it makes vous me'disez.. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Mentir, to lie* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Mentant, lytugy | Menti, lied. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 5INGULAR. 
 
 Je mens, / lie, 
 
 tu mens, thou liesty 
 
 il menr,. he lies. 
 
 Je ment-ois, / did lie. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous men tons, ive lie, 
 vous mentez, you lie r 
 ils mentent, they lie. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 B. 
 
 See p. 78 
 Preterit. 
 Je ment-is, / lied. See p. 78. C. 2. 
 
 Futuie. 
 Je menit-rai, / shall lie. See p. 78. D» 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je menti-rois, / should lie. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVF MOOD- 
 
 "7 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Mens, Ik thou, 
 
 qu'il mente, let him lie. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Mentons, let us lie, 
 
 mentez, lie you, 
 
 qu'ils mentent, let them lit. 
 
 •que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PXUItAL. 
 
 Nous mentions, <we may lie, 
 vous mentiez, you may lie, 
 ils men tent, they may lie* 
 
 Je mente, that I may lie, 
 *u mentes, thou mayst lie, 
 il mente, he may lie. 
 
 <que Preterit. 
 
 Je ment-isse, that I might lie. See p. 78. G. 2. 
 : S E M e P R E n d R E , to mistake, like j5 rendre. 
 MiisoFFRiR^, to underbid, like offrir. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Mettre, to put. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Mettant, putting. | Mis, put. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. FLURAL. 
 
 Je mets, I put, 
 
 tu mets, thou put test, 
 
 il met, be puts* 
 
 Nous mettons, nxe put^ 
 vous mettez, you put, 
 ils mettent, they put* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je mett.ois, / did put. Seep. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je mis, I put, 
 
 tu mis, thou puftes-t, 
 
 il mitj he Jut. 
 
 Nous mimes, <we puf 9 
 vous mites, you put, 
 ils mirent, they put. 
 
xt-g A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Future. 
 Je mett-rai, I shall put. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je mett-rois, / should put. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Mets, put thou, 
 
 qu'il mttte, let him put. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 Mettons, let us put, 
 
 mettez, put you, 
 
 qu'ils metttnr, let them put 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 le mette, that I may fut % 
 tu mettes, thou mayst put } 
 il mette, he may put. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous mettions, ive may put, 
 vous mettiez, you may put, 
 ils mettent, they may put. 
 
 que 
 
 Je misse, that I might put, 
 tu misses, thou mightest put, 
 il mit, he might put. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous missions-, ive might put, 
 vous missiez, you might put, 
 ils missent, they might put* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 MoUDRE, to grind. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Moulant, grinding. \ Moulu, ground. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je mouds, I grind, 
 
 tu mouds thou griudest, 
 
 il moud,' he grinds. 
 
 PLURAL* 
 
 Nous moulons, <ive grind, 
 vous moulez, you grind) 
 ils moulent, they grind. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Je moul-ois, I did grind. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je moul-us, I ground. See p. 78. C. 5. 
 
 Future. 
 Je moud-rai, I shJ! grind. See p, 78. D. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 119 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je moud-rcis, I should grind. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Moulons, let us grind % 
 
 Mouds, grind thou, 
 
 qu'il moule, let him grind. 
 
 moulez, grind jou, 
 
 qu'ib mouhnt, let them grind. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 C[lie SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous mou\ions,ive may grind, 
 vous mouliez, you may grind, 
 ils moulent, they may grind* 
 
 Je moule, thai I may grind, 
 
 tu moules, thou mayst grind, 
 
 il moule, he may grind. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je moul-usse, that I might grind. See p. 78. G. 3. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Mourir, to die. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Mourant, dying. I Mort, dead. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous mourons, ive die, 
 vous mourez, yen die, 
 ils meurent, they dk* 
 
 Je meurs, / die, 
 
 tu meurs, thou diest, 
 
 il meurt, he dies* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je mour.ois, I did die. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit, 
 Je mour-us, / died. See p. 78. C. 3. 
 
 Future. 
 Je mour-rai, I shall die. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je mour-rois, / should die. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Mourons, let us die y 
 Meurs, die thou, 
 qu'il meure, let kirn die* 
 
 mourezj die you, 
 
 qu'ils meurent, let them die* 
 
sac* A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ^Tje SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
 
 Nous mourions, vue may die, 
 vous mouriez, you may die^ 
 ils meurent, they may die* 
 
 Je meurc, that I may die 9 
 tu meures, thou mayst die, 
 il meure, he may die. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je mour-usse, that I might die. See p. 78. G. 3. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 MouvolR, to move. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Mouvant, moving. \ Mu, moved. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 J* mens, / move, f Nous mouvons, vue move^ 
 
 tu meus, thou movest, J vous mouvez, you move, 
 
 il meut, he moves. J ils men vent, they move* 
 
 Imperfect, 
 Je mouv-ois, I did move. See p. j3. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je m-us, / moved. See p. 7&. C. 3. 
 
 Future. 
 Je mouv-rai, I shall movs. See p. 73. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je mouv-rois, I should move. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Mouvons, let us move, 
 Meus, move thou, meuvez, move you, 
 
 •qu'il raeuve, let him move, qu'ils meuvent, let them move* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. .12 1 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ^fte SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je me uve, that I may move, 
 tu meuves, thou mayst move, 
 
 Nous mouvionsjot^ may move, 
 vous mouviez,jw# m&ymove t 
 
 il meuve, he may move. ] ils meuvent, they may move. 
 
 -. 
 que Preterit. - 
 
 Je m-usse, that I might move. See p. 78. G. J, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Naitre, to be born* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Naissant,- being bom. \ Ne, born. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
 
 m 
 
 Je nais, / am born, 
 tu nais, thou art bom, 
 \\ nait, he is born. 
 
 Nous naissons, <we ere bom, 
 vous naissez, you are born, 
 ils nais sent, they are bom* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je naiss-ois, I was born. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je naquis, / was bom, 
 tu naquisj thou wast bom, 
 il naquir, he ivas bom. 
 
 Nous naquimes,'^ <zvere born^ 
 vous naquites, jouvuere bom, 
 iisnaquirent, they were born. 
 
 Future. 
 Jenatt-rai, I shall be bom. See p. 78. D, 
 
 G 
 
122 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je nalt-rois,, I should be bom. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nais. be thou born* 
 
 <ju'il naisse, let him be born. 
 
 Naissons, let us be born, 
 
 naissez, be you born, 
 
 qu'ils naisscnt, let th. beborn m 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 que [bom, 
 
 Je naisse, that I may be 
 fa naisse, thou mayst be born, 
 i\ naisse, he be born* 
 
 [born, 
 Nous naissions, ive may be 
 vousnaissiez, you may be bom, 
 ih naissent, they may he born. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 born. 
 
 [be bo 
 
 Nous nacjuissions, *ve might 
 vous naquissiez, you might be 
 ils naquissent, they might be 
 
 <pe [horn y 
 
 Je naquisse, that I might be 
 in naquisses, thoumightst be b. 
 i\ naquir, he might be born. 
 
 Obtenir, to obtain, like tenir. 
 Offrir, to offer, like cowvrir. 
 Omettre, to omit, like mettre. 
 Ouvrir, to open, like cowvrir* 
 
 OuiR, to hear. 
 
 This verb is very seldom used, except in the past parti- 
 ciple, and before dire; as, Je V ai oui dire, I heard it. — 
 In this case it is conjugated by the help of a<voir, through 
 all its tenses. Instead of the verb ouir, we make use of 
 entendre. 
 
 Paitre, to graze. 
 
 This verb k conjugated like naitre, but the two preter 
 tenses arc wanting; while rcpattre, its compound, though 
 little used, has them all. — See Refaiire. 
 
 P a r c o u R 1 r, to run <rver, like Qourh\ 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. ■ i Z$ 
 
 Pargitre, to appear. 
 
 This verb and its compound are conjugated like croftr*. 
 
 Partir, to go away, like mentir. 
 Parvenir, to atta in, like <venir. 
 Permettre, to permit y like mettre. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Plaire, to please. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Plaisant, pleasing. I Plu, pleased* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous plaisons, nue please $ 
 vous plaisez, you please, 
 lis plaisent, they phase* 
 
 Je plais, / p/ease 9 
 tu plais, thou pleases t 9 
 il plait, he pleases. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je plais-ois, I did please. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nau s pi a m es , n ue p lea tcd t 
 vous pliites, yon pleased^ 
 ils plu rent, they pleased.. 
 
 Future. 
 Je phi-rai, I shall please. Seep. 78. D. 
 
 Je plus, I pleased, 
 tu plus, thou pleased sty 
 il plut, he pleased. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je plai-rois, I should please. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 PiaiS Ons, let us p lease., 
 
 Plaise, please thsu, 
 
 qu'il plaise, let him please. 
 
 plaise £, please you, 
 
 qu'i Is plaisent, let 1 hem plea ^ 
 
 c z 
 
**4 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je plaise, that I may f lease, 
 tu plaises, thou may st please, 
 il plaise, he may please. 
 
 Nous plaisions, <we may please, 
 vous plaisiez, you may please, 
 ils plaisent, they may please. 
 
 que 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je plusse, that I might please, 
 tu plusses, thou mightst please, 
 il plut, he might please, 
 
 Nous p\ussion$,<we might plea. 
 vous plussiez,^ -ou might please 
 ils plussent, they might please. 
 
 Poursuivre, to pursue, like sulvre. 
 Pourvcir, to provide. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like pre'voir, except in the pre- 
 ter tenses, where it makes, Je pourvus Je pourvusse* 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Pou voir, to be able. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Po^vant, being able. > | Pu, been able. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SIXGULAR. 
 
 Je puis *, / am able, 
 tu peux, thou art able, 
 il pent, he is able. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je pouv-ois, 1 was able. See p. 78, B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous pouvons, ive are able, 
 nous pouvez, you are abk, 
 , ils peuvent, they are able. 
 
 Je pu% / iv as able, 
 tu pus, thou wast able, 
 il put, he ivas able. 
 
 Nous pumes, we were able, 
 VOUS putcs, you were able, 
 ils purentj they were able. 
 
 * J c peux may be used in conversation and in poetry, accord'ng to 
 the French Acadi my. 
 
 5 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. , 12 < 
 
 Future. 
 Je pour-rai, I shall be able. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je pour-rois, / should be able. See p. 78. E. 
 
 The IMPERATIVE MOOD is Wanting. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL. £*£&« 
 
 je puisse, that I may be able, 
 tu puisses, thou mayst be able, 
 il puisse, he may be able. 
 
 que 
 
 Je pusse, that I might be able, 
 tu pusses, thou might st be able y 
 il put, he might be able. 
 
 Nous puissions, *we vuiy be 
 VGUspuissiez,^'^ may be able** 
 ils puissent, they may be able. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 {able, 
 Nous pussions, w might be 
 vous pussiez, you might be ah. 
 i!s pussent, they might be al. 
 
 Pre'dire, to foretell. 
 This verb is conjugated like dire, except in she second 
 person plural, where it makes vous predisez. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Prendre, to take. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT, PAST. 
 
 Prenant, taking* | Pris, taken. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je prends, / take, 
 tu prends, thou takest, 
 il prend, he takes. 
 
 Nous prenons, <uue take, 
 vous prenezjjtfa take, 
 ils prennent, they take. 
 Imperfect. 
 Je pren-ois, / did take. See p. 78; B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous primes, <we took, 
 
 Je pris, I took, 
 tu pris, thoutcokest, 
 il prit, he took. 
 
 vous prites, you took, 
 ils prirent, they took. 
 c 3 
 
126 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 # 
 
 Future. 
 Je prend-rai, / shall take. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je prend-rois, i T should take. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR* PLURAL. 
 
 Prenons, let us take, 
 
 prenez, take you, 
 
 qu'ils prennent, let them take. 
 
 P rends, take thou, 
 
 qu'il prenne, let him take. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense, 
 
 lie SINGULAR. PLURAL 
 
 e prenne, that I may take, 
 tu prennes, thou moyst take, 
 il prenne, he may take, 
 
 Nous prenions, <we may take, 
 
 vous preniez,_j>0# may take, 
 
 ils prennent, they may take. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je prisse, that I might take, ] Nous prissions,itv might take, 
 
 vous prissiez,j0/< might take,, 
 ilsprissent, they might take* 
 
 tu prisses, thou mights take, 
 il prit, he might tah, 
 
 Pressentir, to foresee, like sent jr. 
 Pre'valoir, to prevail. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like vcdoir, except in the sub* 
 junctive, where it makes que je pre vale, tu pre vales, &q, 
 
 Pre'venir, to prevent, like venir. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pre'vocr, to foresee. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. past. 
 
 Prevoyant, foreseeing. | Previa, foreseen. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Jfc prevois, I foresee, 
 
 tu prevois, thou foresee st, 
 
 il prevoit, he foresees. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je prcvoy-ois, / did foresee. See p. 78,8, 
 
 Nous prevovons, ivt foresee, 
 vous prevoyez, you foresee, 
 ils prevoient, theyfonsee. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 127 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je prev-is, /foresaw. See p. 78. C. 2* 
 
 Future. 
 Je preroi-rai, I shall foresee* See p. 78. D* 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je prevoi-rois, I should foresee. See p. 78. E* 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Prevoyons, let us foresee -, 
 prevoyez, foresee you, 
 qu'ils prevoient, let themfo* 
 
 Prevois, foresee thou, 
 
 qu' il pr e voie, let him foresee 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SIKCWLAR. PLURtAL. 
 
 [foresee^ 
 Nous preVoyions, nve may 
 vous prevoyiez, you may fo* 
 ils prevoient, they may fores* 
 
 que [see, 
 
 Je pre voie, that I mayfore- 
 
 tu prevcies, thou may st fores. 
 
 il prevoie, he may foresee* 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je prev-isse, that I might foresee* Seep. 78. G. 2* 
 
 Promettre, to promise, like mettre* 
 
 Provenir, to proceed, like venir. 
 
 Sh Rasseoir, to sit down again \ like asseohr* 
 
 Recowrir, to have recourse, like courir, 
 
 Recuuvrir, to cover again, like cowvrir* 
 
 Recueilljr, to reap, 1 i ke cueillir. 
 
 Rrmettre, to replace, like mettre. 
 
 Repaitre, to feed. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like naltre, exeept in the two 
 preter tenses, and in the past participle, wherein it make* 
 Je repus* * . . Je repusse, . . . repu, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Repentir (Se), to repent* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Se Repentant, repenting* \ Repenti, repented. 
 
 G 4 
 
12$ 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense 
 
 SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
 
 \pent, 
 
 Nous nous repentons, <we re. 
 vous vous repemez,j<?# repe. 
 ils se repentent, they repent* 
 
 Je me repens> / repent, 
 
 tu te repens, thou repentest, 
 
 il se repent, he repents. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je me repenuois, I did repent. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je me repent-is, / repented. See p, 78. C. 2. 
 
 Future. 
 Je me repenti-rai, / shall repent. See p. 78.- D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je me repenti-rois, I should rtpent. See p .78. Et 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Repentons-nous, let us repc,tt> 
 repentez-vous, repent you, 
 qu'ils se repentent, let them r. 
 
 Repens- 1 01, repent thou, 
 cm'il se repente, let him rep 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 ^ue \,p en U 
 
 Je me repente, that I may re. 
 tn te repentes, thou mnyst re. 
 ils se repente, he may repent. 
 
 [may repent, 
 Nous nous repentions, ive 
 vous vous repentiez, you may 
 ils se repentent, they may re. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je me repent-isse, that I might repent. See p. 78. G. 2, 
 
 Rkprendiie, to take again, like prendre. 
 R E Q U e'r I R, to request, like aenne'rir. 
 
 5 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ri'sot/DRE, to resolve. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Resolvant, resolving. | Resolu*, res 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 129 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je resous, / resolve, 
 tu resous, thou re solve st, 
 i-1 resout, he resolves. 
 
 PLURAL* 
 
 Nous resolvons, *ve resolve^ ; 
 vous resolvez, you r-ejolvc, , 
 ils resolvent, they resolve* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je resolv-ois, / did resolve. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je resol-us, I resolved. Seep. 78. C. 3. 
 
 Future. 
 Je resoud-rai, / shall resolve. See p. 78. D. ., 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je resoud-rois, I should resolve. See p. 78. E. . 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Resolvons, let us resolve, , 
 Resorts, resolve thou y 
 
 qu'il resolve, let him restive. 
 
 resolvez, resolve you , 
 
 qu'ils resolvent, Ijet tfam reso. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 je resolve, that I may resolve, 
 tu reso) ves, thou may it resolve y 
 il resolve, he may resolve. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 [solve, 
 Nous resolvions, <we may rc~ 
 vous resoMez, you may reso. 
 ils resolvent, they may resolve. 
 
 * We say, likewise, wwj, speaking of tilings which may be re- 
 solved into others. It is never used in the feminine gender, according' 
 to the French Academy 3 thus we say, un brouillard resous en ^!uh 
 - feg resolved into vain.. 
 
 € ' 5 
 
ija A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je resol-usse, I might resolve. Seep. 78. G. 3. 
 
 Rissentir, to feel y like mentir. 
 Ressortir, to go out again , like mentir* 
 Retenir, to retain y like tenir. 
 Revenir, to return , like vmik, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 REVeTiR, to invest. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Revetantj investing. \ Revet*, invested. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nous re ve tons, ive invest^ 
 vous revetez,^0# invest , 
 ils revetent, they invert*. 
 
 Je yevets, / invest, 
 
 tu revets^ thou invested, 
 
 il revet, he invests. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je revet-ois, I did invest. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je revet-is, I invested. Seep. 78'. C. 1* 
 
 Future. 
 Je reyeti-rai, / shall invest. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je reveti-rois, I should invest. See p. 78* R. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Revetons, let us invest, 
 Revets, invest thou? 
 qu'il rev etc, let him invest. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 r e v t te 2L, invtst ycu ,. 
 
 qu ils revetent, let them inv* 
 
 Je revete, that I may invest, 
 tu revctcs, thou tnuyst invest, 
 
 ii revere, he may invest. [ ils ievetcnt, tkejf may invest* 
 
 Nous re v£ (ions, vce may tnv.. 
 vous rev ci iez , 1 cu may. itrvtsty. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je revet-isse, that I might ivvest. See p. 78, G. 2* 
 
 Re voir, to see again, like w, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD, 
 
 Rire, to laugh . 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Riant, laughing. \ Ri, laughed, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ijl 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je rjs, / laugh> 
 
 tu ris, thou la ugh tity 
 
 il rit, he laughs. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous rions, we laugh % 
 vous riez y you laugh, 
 ils rient, they laugh. 
 Imperfect. 
 Je ri-ois, I did laugh. Seep. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je ris, / laughed, I Noas rimes <we laughed^ 
 
 tu ris, thou laughedstj ' vous rices, jou laugh ed v 
 
 il rit, he laughed* \ ils rirent, they laughed^ 
 
 Future.. 
 Je ri-rai, I shall laugh. See p, 7&. E. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD;. 
 Je ri-rois, / should laugh. See p. 7.8. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Ris, laugh thou, 
 
 qu'il rie, let him laugh. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Rions>. let us laugh, 
 riezi, laugh you, 
 quails rient,, let them, laughs 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je rie, / may laugh, 
 tu ries, thou mayst laugh t , 
 il lie, he may laugh. 
 
 PLURAU 
 
 Nous r-iions, e we may k>ughy 
 vous riiez, you may laugh, 
 ila rient, they may laugh* 
 
 e 6 
 
'3* 
 que 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 Preterit. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Je risse. that I might laugh, 
 tu risses, thou mightst laugh, 
 ll lit, he might laugh. 
 
 Nous rissions, we might langht 
 vous rissiez, youir.ight laugh, 
 ils rissent, they might laugh. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 RoMPREj to break. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Rompant, breaking. | Rompu, broken. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 singular. 
 Je romps, / break, 
 tu remps, thou breakest, 
 il rompt, he breaks. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 Nous rompons, <we break, 
 vous rcmpez, you break, 
 ils rompent, they break. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 B. 
 
 D. 
 
 Je romp-ois, I did break. See p. 78. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je romp-is, / broke. See p. 78. C. 2 
 
 Future. 
 Je romp-rai, I shall break. See p. 78 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je romp-rois, / should break. Seep. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL 
 
 Rompons, let us break, 
 Romps, break thou, 
 qu'il rompe, let him break 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 -ye SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 rompez, breakyou, 
 
 qu'ils rompent, lei them break. 
 
 le rompe, that I may break , 
 tu rornpes, thou mayst break, 
 \\ rompe, he may break. 
 
 NousrompionSjiivzvrfv break, 
 vous xomjpitz, you mny break, 
 ils rompent, they may break. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 l 3?> 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je romp-isse, that I might break. See p. 78* G. 2. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 S a voir, to know. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST* 
 
 Sachant, knowing. | Su, known. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je sais, / know, J Nous savons, we knew, 
 
 tu sais, thou knowest, vous savez, you know, 
 
 iJ salt, he knows. ils savent, they know. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Je sav-ois, I did" know. See p, 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je sus, / knew, 
 
 tu sus, thou k newest, 
 
 \\ sut, he knew. 
 
 Nous surpes, we knew, 
 vous sutes, you knew, 
 lis surent, they knew. 
 
 Future. 
 Je saurai, / shall know, j Nous saurons, <we shall know, 
 
 tu sauras, then wilt knew, vous saurez, you will know, 
 il saura, he will know. \ ils sauront, they will kjisw. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je saurois, / should know, J Nous saurions, wesho. know, 
 tu saurois, thwwouldst know, vous saurie7.,you would know, 
 il sauroit, he would know. ils sauroient, they wo. know. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Sachons, let us know, 
 
 Sache, kntw thou, 
 
 qn'il sache, let him know* 
 
 sachez, know you, 
 
 qu'ils. sacbent, let them fW&r% 
 
134 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 que 
 
 Je sache, that I may know, 
 tu saches, thou mayst kuonjUy 
 il sache, he may know. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je susse, that I might kuoiVy 
 tu susses, thou might st kno<w y 
 ils Sut, he might know* 
 
 Nous sachions, ive may \mru> 9 
 vous sachiez, y%u may kno e w % 
 ils sachent, they may know. 
 
 Nous sussions, <we mig. hiow 
 vous sussiez, you might know, 
 ils sussent, they might kno<w* 
 
 Secourir, to succour y like cou rir. 
 
 Sentir, to feel \ 
 Servir, to serve* 
 
 Je sersy tu sers y il sert, imperative mood second person 
 singular, sets ... in other tenses follows the same varia- 
 tions as ir in mentir. 
 
 Sortir, to go cut. 
 
 These three verbs are conjugated like mentir, 
 
 S o U F F R I R , to suffer y 1 ike couvrrr. 
 Soustraire, to subtract, like traire* 
 Soutenir, to support y like ten+r. 
 Se Souvenir, to remember, like ntenir* 
 
 Suffire, to suffice. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like lire y except in the two 
 prefer tenses, and the past participle, where it makes Jt 
 suffis , . . Je suffsse . . suff. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Suivre, to follow. 
 participles, 
 present. past. 
 
 Suivantj following^ [ Suivi, feffewed* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 ns 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je suis, / follow, 
 
 tu suis, thou fol lowest) 
 
 il suit, he follows* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous suivons, we folhw % 
 vous suivez, you follow , 
 ils suivent, they follow. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je suiv-ois, I did follow. Seep* 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je suiv-is, I followed. See p. 78. C. 2. 
 
 Future. 
 Je suiv-rai, I shall follow. Seep. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je suiv-rois, I should follow. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR, PLURAL. 
 
 Suivons, let us follow, 
 
 Suis, follow thou, 
 
 qu'il suive, let hirz follow. 
 
 suivez, followyou, 
 
 qu'ils suivent, let us follow* 
 
 que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Nou s s u i v ions , we mayfollowy 
 yous suivlez, you may follow, 
 ils suivent, they may follow . 
 
 Je suive, that I may follow, 
 tu suives, thou may st follow, 
 il suive, he may follow. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je suiv-isse, that I might follow. Seep. 78. G, 2» 
 
 SuRPRENBRK, to su r prise, like prendre . 
 S u r s e o 1 R , to adjou *n % 1 i ke aPteoir. 
 Sukvenir, to eime upo?2 , like veuir. 
 Survivre, to survive, 1 i ke wvre. 
 
 T A 1 r e , ( S E ) to hold the tongue \ 
 
 This verb is conjugated like flaire* 
 
IS* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Te'nir, to hold. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST, 
 
 Tenant, holding. | Tenu, held. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. • 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je tiens, / hold, 
 
 tu tiens, thou holdestj 
 
 il tient, he holds. 
 
 Nous tenons, nve hsld, 
 vous tenez, jou hold, 
 ils tiennent, they hold. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je teruois, I did hold* See p. 78. B, 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je tins, / held, 
 tu tins, thou h eldest, 
 il tint, he held. 
 
 Nous tinmes > nve held y 
 vous tintes, you held, 
 ils tinrent, they held. 
 
 Future. 
 Je tiend-rai, I shall hold. See p. 73. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD 
 Je tiend-rois, I should hold. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Tiens, hold thou, 
 
 qu'il tienne, let him hold. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Tenons, let us hold, 
 
 teuez, held you, 
 
 qu'ils tiennent, let them hold. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
 
 Je tienne, that J may hald, 
 tu titnnes, thou may it hdd, 
 il tienne, be may held. 
 
 Nous ten ions, ive may / 
 vous.teniez, you may held, 
 ils tienrenr, they rry ! 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 37 
 
 que 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Je tinsse, that I might hold, 
 tu tinsses, thou mightst hold, 
 il tint, he might hold. 
 
 Nous tinssions, we might hold, 
 vous tinssiez, you might hold, 
 ils tinssent, they might held. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Traire, to milk. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Trayant, milking. | Trait, milked. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL." 
 
 Je trai8| / milk } Nous trayons, we milky 
 
 tu trais, tbm milfast, vous trayez, you milt, 
 
 il trait, be milku ils trayeiv, they milk, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je tray-ois, I did milk. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Future. 
 Je trai^rai, I shall milk. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Je trai-rois, I should milk. See p. 78. T. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 T rayons, let us milk, 
 Trais, milk thou, 
 qu'il traye, let him milk. 
 
 trayez, milkyou, 
 
 qu'ils trayent, let them milk* 
 
 que 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je traye, that I may milk, 
 tu trayes, thou mayst milk, 
 il traye, he may milk. 
 
 Nous tray ions, nxe may milk, 
 vous trayiez, you may milk, 
 ils trayent, they' may milk. 
 
ij& A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 TRESSAILLIR, to start. 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Tressaillant, starting. \ Trassailli, started. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense* 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je tressaille, / start) 
 
 tu tressailles, thou siartesty 
 
 il tressaille, be Harts* 
 
 Nous tressaillons, <u* start, 
 vous tressaillez, you start, 
 ils tressaillent, they start* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 }e tressaill-ois, I did start. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je tressaill-is, I started. See p. 78. C. 2. 
 
 Future. 
 Je tressallli.rai, I shall start. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je tressaillurois, I should start. See p. 78. E. 
 
 The IMPERATIVE MOOD is wanting, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 [start. 
 
 que 
 
 Je tressaille, tlwt I may start, 
 tu tressailles, thou may st start y 
 
 Nous tressail lions, nve maj 
 vous tressailliez,joz< may sta. 
 
 ii tressaille, he may start, \ ils trcisaillentf they may start* 
 
 que Imperfect. 
 
 Jc UessailUisse, that might start. See p. 78. G. 2. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 139 
 
 Vaincre, to vanquish. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like convaincre ; but it is sel- 
 dom used in the singular of the present tense of the indi- 
 cative mood. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 V a l o i R, to be 'worth. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Valant, being worth. \ Valu, been worth* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je vaux, / am worthy 
 lu vaux, thou art worth, 
 il vaut, be is worth* 
 
 Nous valons, we are worthy 
 vous valez, you are worth, 
 ils valent, they an worth* 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je val-ois, 2 was worth. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit, 
 Je val-us, / was worth. See p. 78. C. 3. 
 
 Future. 
 Je vaud-raij I shall be worth. See p. 78. D. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je vaud-rois, J should be worth. See p. 78. E 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Valons* let us be worth t 
 Vaux, be thcu worth, 
 qu'il vaille, let him be worth. 
 
 que 
 
 Je vaille, that I may be worth, 
 tu vailles, thou may st be worth, 
 il vaille, he may be worth. 
 
 valez, be you worth, 
 
 qu'ils vaillent j let them be wo, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 \worth % 
 Nous valions, we may be 
 vous val iez j.j'00 may be worthy 
 ils yz'illent, thy may be war tfjt 
 
140 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 que Preterit, 
 
 Je val.usse, that I might be -u.orth. See p. 78. G. 3. 
 
 Venir, to come. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like tenir. See p. 136. 
 
 VeTiR, to tlofhe, like revkir. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Vivre, to live* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 Vivant, living. | Vecu, lived. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Je vis, / live, 
 
 ta vis, thou live st) 
 
 il vie, hi lives* 
 
 Je viv-ois, / did live. 
 
 Te vecus, / lived, 
 
 tu vecus, thou livedst, 
 
 il vecut, he lived. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous vivons, voe live, 
 vous vivez, you live, 
 ils vivent, they live. 
 Imperfect. 
 See p. 78. B. 
 Preterit. 
 
 Nous vecumes, <we lived^ 
 vous vecutes, you lived, 
 il vecurenr, they lived. 
 Future. 
 See p. 73. D. 
 
 Je viv-rai, I shall live, 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je viv-rois, / should live. See p. 78. E. 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Vis, live thcuy 
 
 qu'il vive, let him live. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Vivons, let us live, 
 
 vivez, live you, 
 
 qu'ils vivent, let them live. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 que SINGULAR. 
 
 Je vive, that I may live, 
 tu vives, then mayst live, 
 il vive, he may I've. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nous vivions, we may live^ 
 vous viviez, you may live, K 
 ils vivent, they may live. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 141 
 
 que 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Je vecusse, that I might live, 
 tu vecusses, thou mightst live, 
 i\ vecut, he might live* 
 
 Nous vecussions, we might li. 
 v ous v ecussizz, you might live, 
 ils vecussent, they might live. 
 
 Voir, to see. 
 
 This verb is conjugated like prevoir, except in the fu- 
 ture, where it makes Je verrai ; and in the conditional, 
 where it makes Je verrois. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 VouloIr, to be willing, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT.* PAST. 
 
 Voulant, being willing. J Voulu, he en willing, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Je reux, / am willing, 
 tu veux, thou art willing, 
 II vein, he is willing* 
 
 Nous v©ulons, we a re willing, 
 vous voulez, you are willing, 
 ils veulent, they are willing. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Je voul-ois, I was willing. See p. 78. B. 
 
 Preterit. 
 Je voul-us, I was willing. See p. 78. C. 3. 
 
 Future. 
 Je voud-rai, / shall be willing. See p. 78. D, 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 Je voud-rois, 1 should be willing. See p. 78. E. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Veut lions, let us he willing, 
 
 Veuille, be hou wilting, 
 qu'il veuille,/^/ him be willing. 
 
 \ e u i 1 1 e z , be you willing, 
 c^u'ils veuillem, let them be w. 
 
Hi A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 
 SINGULAR, PLURAL, 
 
 que [ling, 
 
 Je veuille, that I may be wil- 
 tu veuilles, thou majst be ivi. 
 il veuille, he may be willing. 
 
 [*wil!ing 9 . 
 Nous voulions, nve may be 
 vous vouliez, you may be iv. 
 lis veuillent, they may be «u>. 
 
 que Preterit. 
 
 Je voul-usse, that I might be willing. See p. 78. G, 3. 
 
 Particular Observations upon some Verbs> chiefly De* 
 fective, and their Manner of being conjugated, and 
 used ; in Alphabetical Order. 
 
 A SSORTIR, to suit, to match: this verb is regular, and 
 •^•*- conjugated like funir: so is ressortir, when it signifies 
 to be under the jurisdiction of a court ; but, when it 
 signifies to go out again, it is irregular, and conjugated 
 like mentir. 
 
 Braire, to bray: this verb is used only in the following 
 tenses, il brait y it braira, it brairoit* 
 
 Bruire, to bluster: this verb is used only in the infini- 
 tive, and in the third person of the imperfect tense, indi- 
 cative mood, both singular and plural, il bruyoit, ils 
 bruyoient ; as, let <veuts bruyoient, the winds blustered* 
 
 Eruyanty having both genders and numbers, is by no 
 means the participle of this verb, but an adjective \ as, let 
 Jfstt bruyanSy the blustering waves. 
 
 Choi-r, to fall: this verb is hardly fcstd) but in the 
 infinitive mood, and in the participle past, chu. Instead 
 of the feminine ehue, we formerly made use of chutc y which 
 is still use-a in these proverbial manners of speaking, cbtrcbet 
 chape-chutc, trouper cbapeJ(lmte y to look for, or to rind 
 some occasion, to make an advantage of the negligence or 
 misfortune of somebedv. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 143 
 
 Clorre, to close: this verb is used only in the three 
 persons singular of the present tense, indicative mood, 
 je clos, tu clos, il clot; in the future, je clorrai; in the 
 conditional, je clorrois ; and in the participle past, clos* 
 This verb is sometimes neuter in the third person singular, 
 as, la parte ne clot pas bien ; il y faut mettre de la lisiere y 
 -elk dorr a mieux ; the door does not shut close ; you must 
 put some list to it, it will shut closer, 
 
 Df.faillir, to decay^ to grow fai?it or weak : this verb 
 is used on y in the plural number of the indicative mood, 
 present tense, nous defaillons y <vous defaillez, ils defaillent ; 
 in the imperfect and preterit tenses, both singular and 
 plural, of the same mood, je defailloisy &c, je defaitlis, 
 Sec. ; in all it's compound tenses, j'ai defailli, &c. ; and 
 in the infinitive mood. Instead of this verb, it is always 
 better to make use of tomber en defaillance* This verb 
 likewise signifies to fail, to want ; as, toutcs chases com- 
 mencement a leur defaillir y they begin to want every thing ; 
 but in this sense it grows obsolete ; it has no participle 
 active in either sense. 
 
 Demouvoir, to make to desist, (a law term :) this verb 
 is used only in the infinitive mood ; as, rien ?ie Pa pu de- 
 mouvoir de ses pretentions : nothing could make him give up 
 his pretensions. 
 
 Echo 1 r, to fall out, to chance: this verb is conjugated 
 like dechoir, see page 108 ; but it is only used in the third 
 person singular of the indicative mood, present tense, in 
 the preterit and future tense, of the said mood, in the 
 conditional, in the preterit tense of the subjunctive mood, 
 in the participle past, and the participle of the present, 
 wherein it niakes echtant. 
 
 Eclorre, to be hatched : this verb is used only in the 
 third person singular and plural of the present tense, indi- 
 cative mood, // e'clot, ih eclose?it ; in the future, il cclorra, 
 ils eclorr on t ; in the conditional, if eclorroit, ils eclorroient ; 
 in the present tense, subjunctive mood, iljclose, ils eclosent ; 
 and in the participle past, wherein it makes e'efos. This 
 verb, in it's compound tenses is conjugated with the 
 auxiliary verb etre ; and is sometimes used in a figurative 
 sense, speaking of our thoughts, designs, &c. ; which 
 begin to be discovered, after having been some time hidden; 
 
 3 
 
i 4 4 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 as, tet desseins echrront quelque jour ; his designs will one 
 day come to light. 
 
 Emouvoir, to stir zip, to move: this verb is conju- 
 gated like mmevoir : it is used both in a proper and figu- 
 rative sense : in the first, it is said of the most subtile 
 parts of the body, as humours, vapours, blood, &c. : as, 
 le soldi emeut les <vapeurs, the sun stirs up the vapours ; 
 in the second it is applied to whatever may cause a motion, 
 or excite a passion, &c, as, e'est un homme que rien 
 n'emeut, he is a man whom nothing moves. This verb is 
 likewise used in a reflective sense ; as, il s f emut une grande 
 tembtte, there arose a great tempest. 
 
 Enclorre, to enclose, is conjugated like clorre, and 
 used in the same tenses. 
 
 S'Ensuivre, to ensue, to follow: this verb is conju- 
 gated like saivre, in all it's tenses and moods, but used 
 only in the third person singular and plural. 
 
 Faillir, to fail: this verb is conjugated in the present 
 tense, indicative mood, je faux, tu faux, il faut, nous 
 faillons, <vous faillez, ils failUnt ; in the preterit tense of 
 the same mood, jefaillis, Sec. ; and in the participle active 
 faillant ; as, arrvver a jcur full ant, to arrive at the close 
 of the day. This verb is seldom used ; however, we still 
 make use of the past participle; as, s*il a failli, il font 
 qu*il soit puni ; if he have done amiss, he must be punished. 
 We likewise say in conversation, le coeur me faut, my 
 heart fails me *. 
 
 Falloir sometimes signifies to want, to come short, 
 to be far from ; as, il s'en faut heaucoup, there wants a 
 greit deal o£ it, it comes far short of it : in this tense it 
 is preceded by s y en, and conjugated only in the third person 
 singular, both in it's simple and compound tenses ; as, il 
 s'en faut, falloit, fallut, faudra, faudroit, faille, fallut ; 
 il s'en est fallu, &c. 
 
 * The authors of the Dictionary of Trevoux ha\ f.-.'.'ira in the 
 future tense; and they seem to be in the right. However, we say, 
 son ami re lul faudra pas au beiein, his friend will n< .ting to him 
 
 in time of need 5 << hut then it is rather the futur 
 
 which, though different from the verb failiir, ha. , : the same 
 
 signification. '* DicTiohnairf. di i Tr£V9UX« 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. t 4 j 
 
 Ferir, to strike: this verb is used in the infinitive 
 mood only in this phrase, sans coup ferir, without strik- 
 ing a blow. The past participle, feru, is still used in the 
 two following expressions, speaking in jest ; il est fern 
 centre un tel; he is indiposed towards such a person; il 
 estfe'ru de cettefemme ; he is smitten with this woman. 
 
 Frire, to fry : this verb is used only in the three per- 
 sons singular of the present tense, indicative mood, jefn's, 
 tu fris, U frit ; in the future tense singular and plural, je 
 friraiy &c. ; in the conditional, singular and plural, je 
 frirois, Sec. ; in the imperative mood, second person sin. 
 gula,/r/j; and in the past participle, frit 
 
 Gesir, to lie: this verb is quite obsolete, even in the 
 infinitive mood; however, we still say, git, nous gissons, ih 
 % gissent, il gisscit : as, tout git en cela ; the whole business 
 lies in that point ; ci-gh, here lies. 
 
 Luire, to shine: this verb is conjugated like traduire, 
 except in the past participle, where it makes lui ; and so 
 is it's compound reluire. These two verbs want the pre- 
 terit tense of the indicative and subjunctive moods. 
 
 Nuire, to hurt: this verb, in all it's tenses and moods, 
 is conjugated like traduire, except in the past participle, 
 where it makes nui. 
 
 Pleuvoir, to rain; this verb is used only in the third 
 person singular, and sometimes in the plural, — il pleut, il 
 plewvoit, il plut, il plewvra, il plewvroit, il pleuve, il plut 3 
 plu ; les fleches pleuvoient de tsutes parts. * 4 
 
 Promouvoir, to promote: this verb is used only in the 
 infinitive mood, and in the past participle, promu. 
 
 Querir, to fetch: this verb is used only in the infini- 
 tive mood, with the verbs eller, <venir, and envojer : as, 
 allcz querir, go and fetch. 
 
 R v avoir, to have again: this verf) is used only in the 
 infinitive mood. 
 
 Refartir: when this verb signifies either to go away 
 again, to set out again, or to reply, it takes no accent upon 
 the first syllable, is irregular, and conjugated like partir ; 
 but when it signifies to share, or to divide, it takes an acute 
 accent upon the first syllable, is regular, conjugated like 
 funir 9 and scarcely used, but in a few expressions, cspeak- 
 
 H 
 
* 4 € A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ing of an estate, money, &c. : as, repartir une somme d*ar« 
 gent ; to divide a sum of money. 
 
 Ressortir, see Assortir, page 142. 
 
 Saillir: when this verb signifies to gush out, it is re- 
 gular, and conjugated like, punir ; but when it signifies 
 to jutouty it is irregular, wants the past participle, and is 
 used only in the infinitive mood, and in the thiid person 
 of some tenses ; as ce balcony C£tte corniche, saille trop, 
 saillera trop, sailleroit trop. In this sense it likewise 
 wants the participle of the present, though we say in 
 Fortification, angle saillant ; and in Architecture, corniche 
 saillante ; but then saillant is an adjective, 
 
 S-eo-i-R, to fit well, to become: this verb is never used 
 in the infinitive mood, but only in the third person sin- 
 gular and plural of the following tenses, il sied, ils sieent ; 
 il seyoit, ils seyoient ; il sie'ra, ils sieront ; il sieroit, ils sieroient. 
 This verb is still used in the participle of the present ; 
 as, .cette ^ouleur wous seyant si bietty <vous auri,% tort d'en 
 porter d' autre; since this colour becomes you so well, 
 you would be in the wrong to wear any other : but it is 
 better to avoid it. Sometimes it is used impersonally ; 
 as, il sied mal a un homme de • . . ,• it does not become a 
 man to . . . This verb in the sense of to sit do*wn is 
 obsolete; however in Chancery or Law, we still make 
 use of the participle of the present seant, and the parti- 
 ciple of the past sis: the former is applied to a person or 
 persons who are sitting or residing; as le Roi scant en son 
 lit de justice, the King sitting on his throne ; le Farlement 
 est scanty the Parliament is sitting ; the latter signifies 
 situate ; as, un heritage tis a * • • , an estate situate . . . ; 
 une maison sise rue St. Paul, ahouse situate in St. Paul's Street, 
 
 Sortir : when this verb is used in Law, and signifies 
 to get , to obtain, it is regular, and conjugated like punir; 
 biit it is used in a few tenses ; as, cette sentence sortira 
 son plein et entier cjfct ; this sentence will take effect ; 
 j'entends que cette clause sortisse son pit in et entier effet, 
 I expect this clause to take effect. 
 
 Soudre (une question,) to sohe or resolve (a question.) 
 This verb is used only in the infinitive mood, but it is ob- 
 solete, and we make use ofrc'soudre. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 147 
 
 PART III. 
 
 THEORY joined to PRACTICE. 
 
 THE FORMER CONTAINING TH-E 
 
 R.ULES OF THE FRENCH SYNTAX,* 
 
 WITH MANY 
 
 NEW OBSERVATIONS: 
 
 THE LATTER, THE 
 
 Rules and Observations exemplified Separately, 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 SCHOLARS PRACTICE, 
 
 AFTER EACH PART OF SPEECH. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 Rules and Observations upon the Article* 
 
 1. npHE definite article is used before the common 
 -*- nouns, denoting an individual dhtinction, or a 
 totality of objects : as the spring is an agreeable season, 
 le printemps est tine sat son agreable: men are mortal; le$ 
 hommes sont morte/s. 
 
 2. The indefinite article is used before nouns taken in 
 an indefinite and indeterminate sense, or in a sense which 
 
 h 2 
 
i+8 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 does not denote either an individual, disc: ction or a 
 specific totality; as, learned people have approved his 
 work ; des ya<vans ant approwve son ouvrage. See Rule 
 18. 
 
 3. All common noun substantive take the definite ar- 
 ticle ; also names of kingdoms, rivers, provinces, moun- 
 tains, &c, unless in the sense of remaining in, going to, 
 or coming from ; in this case we make use of the pre- 
 positions en and de : as I am going to France ; je <vais 
 en France: He is arrived from ^Flanders, il e it arrive de 
 Flandre. They live in Italy, ik demeurent en Italie* 
 
 4. When a superlative follows immediately it's substantive, the de* 
 
 finite article is always put before the superlative in the first case, and 
 
 agrees with the substantive in gender and number ; as, he is the most 
 
 learned man ; c'est I'bomme le plus savant. You speak of the most 
 
 . learned man t vous parley de Vhotnme le plus savant. 
 
 Except when un or ur.c is followed by a substantive; in this case 
 the definite article is commonly used in the second case plural ; as, 
 he is one of the most learned men ; c*est un bomme des plus savam y or 
 ftsfun des hommes Us plus savansy or c*est un des plus savans bommes. 
 
 5. Adjectives used substantively take the article ; as, 
 idle people are despised : les paresseux sont me'prises. 
 
 6. Nouns of measure, weight &c, of things bought 
 or sold, take the definite article, rendered in English by a 
 or an ; as, ten crowns a bushel ; dix ecus le boisseau. 
 
 7. When a substantive, having the definite article be- 
 fore it, is preceded by tout, the article is kept, in the 
 first case, through all the cases of tout ; as, all the world ; 
 tout le monde ; of all the world, de % tout le monde ;' to all 
 the world, a tout le monde* 
 
 8. Some adverbs or prepositions, used substantively, 
 require the article ; as, the inside, le dedans ; tlie outside, 
 le dehors 1 the upper part, le dessus; the under part, le 
 dessous. 
 
 9. Obs. The definite article is put before the name of the Italian 
 authors according to their syntax j as, Tasso y le Tasse; except Ra 
 JMicbel-Ange, Pcirarque, Bocace, Santtaxar 9 and some others ; and those 
 who have written in Latin, as Sadolet, Mmnucey Baroni*s t Sec. 
 
 Proper names in the plural take the definitive article, ihough they 
 have none in the singular, as U% li::n.rc, lis Vvrfjk % &c. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 149 
 
 10. Obs. After the verb jouer, to play, we make use of the definite 
 article in the second case, speaking of musical instruments 5 as, jouer 
 du 'vision, de la guit-are ; and speaking of games at cards, or bodily 
 exercises, we make use or the same article in the third case; as, jotter 
 aux cartes, a \a paume , and after joueur, a player, we make use of the 
 preposition de in both instances; as, un joueur de *vioJon y de guitare 9 
 de cartesy de paums. 
 
 11. Gbs. The adverb bien, used for beaucoup, much, requires after ifc 
 the definite article in the second case: as, he has much money; il a 
 bien de V argent : but beaucoup, and likewise all the adverbs of quantity, 
 as, peu, moms, trcp, &c. take the preposition de\ as, il a beaucoup d'tfr- 
 vem ; unless it is determined and specified by a relative pronoun that 
 follows it ; as, il a defense beaucoup de V argent que *vous lui a<vie% donney 
 he has spent a great deal of the money that you gave him. 
 
 12. Obs. Some names of countries, contrary to the exceptions of 
 the third rule, retain their article even in the sense of remaining in, 
 coming to, or going from. These names are particularly those of re- 
 mote countries, *ri% s of America, Asia, and Africa, to which we may 
 join la Marche, le Perche, le Maine, &c. provinces in France; le Man- 
 touan, le Mi/anois, le Parmesan, &c, divisions of Italy. 
 
 13. Obs. No article is used before cardinal numbers, except first, 
 when the nouns to which they are joined have a fixed number, either 
 by themselves 5 as, les quatre salons, the four seasons ; or by a relation 
 to something else expressed by the circumstances of the discourse ; as, 
 les de-ux lettres que je vous ax ecrites, the two letters which I wrote to 
 you. Secondly, speaking of cards, or the day of the month, as, le dix ; 
 le neuf . . de Janvier, de Fe'vrier, . . de cceur, de pi^ue, &c. 
 
 14. No article is used before proper names, particular 
 places, towns, or .villages, &c, except, first, le Mans, 
 le Cdtelet, la Fere, la Ferte', le Havre de Grace y la RoJ 
 chelle, le Quewoy y Sec. cities, in France, to which add le 
 Caire> Cairo, la Haye y the Hague. 
 
 Secondly, some nouns, when they denete an individual 
 distinction, or a particular appellation, V Athalie de 
 Racine, la Me'rope de Voltaire, speaking of two plays 
 ©f these two authors. 
 
 15. No article is used before nouns immediately fol- 
 lowing certain verbs, or prepositions, with which they 
 form a kind of adverb ; as, avec amitie y with friendship ; 
 sans dedainy without disdain : par depit y through spite, 
 avoir ewvie y to have a mind to. 
 
 Except, when these nouns are followed, first, by the re- 
 lative pronouns qui, que, lequel, &c, secondly, by a super- 
 lative ; thirdly, -by a noun in the second case. 
 
 16. No article is used after the preposition en y except 
 in a very few cases, which will be noticed in the obset* 
 
 » 3 
 
j 5 o A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 vations about prepositions ; whereas dans always requires 
 an article after it, unless it is followed by a conjunctive 
 possessive pronoun, and likewise by a demonstrative, or 
 indefinite pronoun : as, dans ma chdmbre, in my room ; 
 dans cette circonstance, in that circumstance ; dans quelques 
 moment, in a few moments. 
 
 17. No article is used before a noun, which follows 
 Immediately the name of a particular place, to which it 
 belongs : as, I was born in London, the capital fity of 
 England; Jfe suis ne a Londres, ville capitale d*Angle- 
 terre. Neither is the article used after the verb hre : 
 as, il est medecin, he is a physician, and not il est un 
 medecin: unless in the exceptions of the 15th observa- 
 tion, and unless the verb be preceded by cei as, e'est un 
 midecm^ 
 
 18. The indefinite articles du, de /*?, des, a du, a de la, 
 a des, are used according to the second observation, and 
 answer to some, either expressed or understood before a 
 substantive. 
 
 19. Obs. When the adjective goes before it's substantive, we use, 
 instead of the foregoing indefinite articles, de for the first case, Jt de for 
 the third case ; as, voila de ben pain, that is good bread ; njoila de belles 
 dames, those are fine ladies; and not, du ben fair, des belles dames. 
 
 N. B. There are some substantives in the plural, with which we u*« 
 ^*ta, not de, though preceded by their adjectives. This is, the case when 
 the adjective and substantive make but one idea, and the adjective is 
 used only to render the signification of the substantive complete : such 
 are belles-lettres, beaux -ei frits, grands-seigneurs, which signify polite lite- 
 rature, men of learning, people of high rank. 
 
 20» The articles un, une, are used when ihey signify 
 only a kind of indeterminate individuality, or an indivi- 
 duality in an indeterminate manner: as, a king ought to 
 be the father of his people : un roi doit etre le pere de 
 son peuple. However, these articles may sometimes be 
 changed for the definite article : as, a wise man rules his 
 passions ; un homme sage regie ses passions, or Vhomme sage, 
 &c. The articles un and une are expressed in English by 
 a or an* 
 
 21. Articles are repeated brfore each substantive, 
 though synonymous ; as, les faveurs et les graces que nous 
 reasons du citl : the favours and kindnesses which we re- 
 ceive from Heaven, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 *5* 
 
 fci. Obs. When two adjectives, used positively, are joined together 
 by a conjunction, and have the same substantive, the article is put be- 
 fore the first of them only, if they be synonymous, or very nearly- 
 alike ; as, les riches et magnljfi^u£s present 5 the rich and magnificent pre- 
 sents. If they be not synonymous, the article must be repeated $ as> 
 les ricba et les pawvres; the rich and the poor, 
 
 'Rules and Observations upon the Articles, exemplified fof 
 the Scholar s Practice. 
 
 [ 1 J There are ten parts of 
 speech; the* article, the 
 noun, the adjective, the 
 pronoun, the verb, the 
 participle, the adverb, the 
 proposition, the conjunc- 
 tion, the interjection. 
 
 The article shows the object 
 or thing. 
 
 The noun names the thing. 
 
 The adjective expresses the 
 quality of the thing. 
 
 The pronoun supplies the 
 place of the noun. 
 
 The verb shows the action, 
 or passion of the object. 
 
 The participle partakes of 
 the nature of the verb and 
 noun ; it is used in the 
 conjugation of passive 
 verbs, and for that of the 
 compound tenses of the 
 other verbs. 
 
 The adverb marks the differ- 
 ence and circumstances of 
 the action or passion. 
 
 The preposition is an inde- 
 clinable word, placed be- 
 fore the nouns, pronouns 
 
 By a dix parties d'oraison : 
 /' * article, le nom, /'ad- 
 jectif, le pronom, le verbe,' 
 le participe, /'ad verbe, la 
 preposition, la conjonc* 
 tion, /'interjection, 
 
 Z'article montre /'objet ou 
 la chose. 
 
 Le nom nom me la chose. 
 
 Z'adjectif exprime la qualite 
 de la chose. 
 
 Le pronom tient la place dii 
 nom. 
 
 Le verbe montre /'action,, 
 ou la passion de /'objet. 
 
 Le participe tient de la na- 
 ture du verbe et du nom ; 
 il sert a la conjugaison 
 des verbes passifs, et a 
 celle des- temps composes 
 des autres verbes. 
 
 Z'ad verbe marque la diffe- 
 rence et les circonstances 
 de Paction ou de la passion. 
 
 La preposition est w un mot 
 indeclinable, place de* 
 vant ks noms, les pro- 
 
 * The words which are the objects of the rules are printed in Ita* 
 lie, both in the French and English examples, if there be any expressed 
 in the latter, throughout the rules and observations exemplified, to ihe 
 end of the French Syntax. 
 
 H 4 
 
and verbs 
 verns. 
 
 The conjunction joins words 
 
 and phrases. 
 The interjection expresses 
 
 the motions or passions of 
 
 the soul. 
 Summer is an agreeable sea. 
 
 son. 
 Idleness is despicable. 
 Shut the window- shutters. 
 Open the window. 
 Draw the curtains. 
 Bring the mustard. 
 Give me the loaf. 
 Cut th-e meat. 
 Emulation is a noble passion. 
 
 Virtue and beauty are esti- 
 mable. 
 
 Virtue is preferable to 
 riches. 
 
 The heart often betrays the 
 mind. 
 
 I like fruit, 
 
 [3.] France is a large coun- 
 try. 
 
 I speak of France. 
 
 Let us speak of England. 
 
 He talks only of Holland. 
 
 Tonr.iine is the garden of 
 
 France. 
 The Thames is a fine river. 
 
 The Rhine is a rapid river. 
 
 Parnassus,. Pindus, and He- 
 licon, are the mountains 
 of the poets. 
 
 My brother is come from 
 India. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 which it go- 
 
 noms, et lei verbes qifelle 
 regit.^ 
 
 La conjonction joint lei 
 mots et Us phrases. 
 
 Z'interjection exprime lei 
 mouvemens ou lei pas- 
 sions de /'ame. 
 
 Z'ete est une saison agrea*. 
 bte. 
 
 La paresse est meprisable. 
 
 Fermez lei volets. 
 
 Ouvrez la fenetre. 
 
 Tirez lei rideaux. 
 
 Apportez la moutarde. 
 
 Donnez-moi le pain. 
 
 Coupe z la viande. 
 
 Z'emulation est une noble 
 passion. 
 
 La vertu et la beaute sont 
 estimables. 
 
 La vertu est preferable aux 
 richesses. 
 
 Le cceur trompe souvent 
 /'esprit. 
 
 J'aime le fruit. 
 
 La France est un pays con. 
 siderable. 
 
 Je pftfle de la France. 
 
 Parlons de V Angle terre. 
 
 II ne parle que de la Hol- 
 lands 
 
 La Touraine est le jardin de 
 la France. 
 
 La Tamise est une belle ri- 
 viere. 
 
 Le Rhin est une riviere ra- 
 pide. 
 
 Le Parnasse, le Pind?, et 
 /'Helicon, sont lei mon- 
 tagnes da poetes. 
 
 Mon frerc est arrive des In. 
 des. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 Hi 
 
 My sister tfae* in France. 
 
 I shall go to Italy next 
 spring. 
 
 I am going to Spain. 
 
 I am come from Portugal. 
 
 He lives in England. 
 
 [4.] It is the custom of the 
 most barbarous people. 
 
 He speaks of the most un- 
 happy man. 
 
 He is the best educated 
 child. 
 
 tie is the most presumptu- 
 ous man. 
 
 She is the most beautiful and 
 amiable lady. 
 
 I am writing upon the nicest 
 matter, though the least 
 shining. 
 
 * It is one of the most bar- 
 barous customs. 
 
 He speaks of one of the most 
 unhappy men. 
 
 He is one of the best edu- 
 cated children. 
 
 He is one of the most pre. 
 sumptuous men* 
 
 She is one of the most beau- 
 tiful and amiable ladies. 
 
 I am writing upon one of the 
 nicest matters, though the 
 least shining. 
 
 [5.] Politicians dissemble. 
 
 The ambitious sacrifice every 
 thing to fortune. 
 
 Ma'sceur demeure ra France. 
 J'irai en Italie au printemps 
 
 prochain. 
 Je vais en Espagne. 
 Je viens de Portugal, 
 II demeure en Angleterre. 
 C'est la coutume des peuples 
 
 lei plus barbares. 
 II parle de /'homme le plus 
 
 malheureux. 
 C'est /'enfant le mieux elevev 
 
 C'est /'homme le plus pre- 
 
 somptueux. 
 C'est la demoiselle la plus 
 
 belle et la plus aimable. 
 J'ecris sur U matiere la plus 
 
 delicate, quo i que la mo ins 
 
 brillante. 
 C'est une des coutumes let 
 
 plus barbares. 
 II parle d'nn des hommes les 
 
 plus malheureux. 
 C'est un des enfans les mieux 
 
 eleves. 
 C'est un dei hommes les plus 
 
 presomptueux. 
 C'est une des demoiselles lei 
 
 plus belles et les plus 
 
 aimabies. 
 J'ecris sur une matiere dei 
 
 plus delicates, quoique des 
 
 moins brillantes. 
 Les politiques dissimulent. 
 Les ambitieux sacririent tout ' 
 
 a la fortune. 
 
 * I make use, on purpose, of the six foregoing examples, to render 
 the exception to the fifth observation mere obvious to the learner. The 
 article immediately following un or une may be omitted, as in the last 
 example; in this case the substantive is put in the singular; as C'est 
 une ooutume ties glus barbares j lifarle d'un homme des }lut malheureux-* 
 
 » 5 
 
m 
 
 We ought, in learned works, 
 to join profit with plea- 
 sure. 
 
 [6.] Coals are sold for a 
 shilling a bushel. 
 
 Eggs, have been sold for one 
 pound a hundred ; that is 
 more than four shilling a 
 quarter of a hundred. 
 
 Candles are sold for nine 
 pence a pound. 
 
 Butter is sold for ten pence 
 a pound. 
 
 This lace cost one guinea a 
 yard. 
 
 [7.] It is every body's cus- 
 tom. 
 
 Every body knows it. 
 
 He tells the same story to 
 every body. 
 
 She speaks ill of all men. 
 
 All men are not liars. 
 
 All women are not proud. 
 
 He slanders all women* 
 He paid all the expenses. 
 All fashions are not ridicu- 
 lous. 
 I learn every day. 
 It is the report of the whole 
 
 city. 
 [8.] The inside of the house 
 
 "is very fine. 
 The outside of the church is 
 
 majestic. 
 The upper part is quite 
 
 spoiled. 
 [10.] My sister plays upon 
 the guitar, and my bro- 
 ther upon the violin. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 On doit, dans les ouvrages 
 d'esprir, joindre /'utile a 
 /'agreable. 
 Le charbon se vend un 
 
 schelling le boisseau. 
 Les ceufs ont ete vendus une 
 liv re sterling & cent; c'est 
 plus de quatre schellings 
 U quarteron. 
 Les chandelles se vendent 
 
 neuf sous la livre. 
 Le beurre se vend dix sous 
 
 la livre. 
 Cette dentelle coute une 
 
 guinee la verge. 
 C'est la coutume de tout le 
 
 monde. 
 Tout le monde le sait. 
 II raconte la meme histoire 
 
 a tout le monde. 
 Elle parle mal de tous les 
 
 hommes. 
 Tous les hommes ne sont 
 
 pas menteurs. 
 Toutes les femmes ne sont 
 
 pas fieres. 
 II medit de toutes les femmes. 
 II pay a tous les depens. 
 Toutes Us modes ne sont pas 
 
 ridicules. 
 J'apprends tous les jours. 
 C'est le bruit de touie la 
 
 ville. 
 Le dedans de la maison est 
 
 tres-beau. 
 Le dehors de l'eglise est ma- 
 
 jestueux. 
 Le dessus est tout gate. 
 
 Ma srrur joue de la guitare* 
 et mon frere joue du vis- 
 ion* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 He is a good player at bil- 
 liards, at tennis, &c. 
 
 We played yesterday at pi- 
 quet. 
 
 [i i.]. He has much money. 
 
 I have ready^ot; books. 
 
 She has matiy friends. 
 
 You take a great deal of 
 pains. 
 
 They give themselves less 
 trouble. 
 
 He has spent too much mo- 
 ney. 
 
 [12.] I shall go to China 
 next year. 
 
 He is arrived at Mexico. 
 
 He is come back from Ja- 
 pan, from India, fr$m 
 Florida, from Canada, &c. 
 
 He lives at the Hague. 
 
 [13.] Here are the two roses 
 you gave me to day. 
 
 Of the four seasons of the 
 year, the summer pleases 
 me more than the other 
 three. 
 
 I lost the two letters you 
 wrote to me. 
 
 [14.] I come from London, 
 from Greenwich, from 
 Chelsea, from Kensing- 
 ton, &c. 
 
 Athal'm is famous in sacred 
 history, Merope in pro- 
 fane history. 
 
 Racine's Athalia and Vol- 
 taire's Merope are drama- 
 tic master-pieces. 
 
 " *55 
 
 C'est un bon joueur de bil- 
 lard, de paume, &c. 
 
 Nous jouames hier au pi- 
 quet. 
 
 II a lien de /'argent, ou 
 heaucoup ^'argent. 
 
 J*ai In feu du livres. 
 
 Elle a heaucoup ^/'amis. 
 
 Vous prenez heaucoup de 
 peine. 
 
 lis se donneot mows de 
 peine. 
 
 II a depense trap d*argent. 
 
 J'irai a la Chine Parmee 
 
 prochaine. 
 11 est arrive au Mexique. 
 11 est revenu du Japon, des 
 
 Indes, de la Floride, du 
 
 Canada, &c. 
 II demeure _a la Haye. 
 Voici les deux roses que vous 
 
 m'avez donnees aujour- 
 
 d'hui. 
 Des quatre saisons de l'-aiu 
 
 nee, l'ete me plait plus 
 
 que les trois autres. 
 
 J'ai perdu les deux lettres 
 que vous m'avez ecrites. 
 
 Je viens de Londres, de 
 Greenwich, de Chelsea, 
 de Kensington, &c. 
 
 Athalie est fameuse dans 
 l'histoire sacree, Merope 
 dans l'histoire profane. 
 
 V Athalie de Racine et la 
 Merope de Voltaire sont 
 des chefs.d'csuvre drama- 
 tiques. 
 h 6 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 156 
 
 Milton's Paradise Lost is a 
 
 fine poem. 
 [15.] She received me kindly. 
 He did it through spite. 
 Speak to him without dis* 
 
 da in. 
 I haw e a mind to go thither. 
 She received me with the 
 
 greatest friendship. 
 He did it through the hatred 
 
 he had for her. 
 She spoke to him with the 
 
 contempt he deserved. 
 He submitted to it with the 
 
 greatest patience. 
 [16.] He is in a furnished 
 
 lodging. 
 You will find it in the box. 
 
 Is there any ink in the bot- 
 tle ? 
 
 Here is some in the ink- 
 stand. 
 
 [17.] Paris is the capital of 
 France. 
 
 He lives in Paris, the capital 
 pf France. 
 
 London is the capital of 
 England.. 
 
 He was born in London, the 
 capital of England. 
 
 George III, king of England 
 and elector of Hanover, 
 grandson to George II, 
 has married the princess 
 Charlotte, daughter to the 
 prince of Mecklenburg- 
 Streiitz. 
 
 He is a merchant. 
 
 He is a physician. 
 
 Le Paradis perdu de Milton, 
 
 est un beau poerre. 
 Elle me re cut avec amitii. 
 II le fit par depit. 
 Parlez-lui sans dedain. 
 
 J'ai envie d'y aller. 
 
 Elle me recut avec la plus 
 
 grande ami tie. 
 II le fit par la haine ou'il 
 
 avoit pour elle. 
 Elle lui parla avec le mepris 
 
 £#'il meritoit. 
 II s'y soumit avec la plus 
 
 grande patience. 
 II est ioge en chambre gar- 
 
 nie. 
 Vous le trouverez dans la 
 
 boite. 
 Y a-t-il de l'encre dans la 
 
 bouteille ? 
 En voici dans /'ecritoire. 
 
 Paris est la capitale de la 
 France. 
 
 II demeure a Paris, *ville ca- 
 pitale de France. 
 
 Londres est la capitale de 
 PAngleterre. 
 
 II est ne a Londres, <ville ca- 
 pitale d'Angleterre. 
 
 George trois, roi d' Angle- 
 terre et electeur d'Hano- 
 vre, pet it -fits de George 
 second, a epouse la prin- 
 cesse Charlotte, fills du 
 prince de Mecklenbourg- 
 Strelitz. 
 
 II est marchand, ou e'est un 
 marchand. 
 
 II est medecin, ou cUst m 
 iiicdecin t 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 She is a milliner. 
 
 He is the merchant whom 
 you, look for. 
 
 He is the physician whom 
 you ask for. 
 
 He is the most upright mer- 
 chant. 
 
 He is the most skilful phy- 
 sician. 
 
 She has more custom than 
 any other milliner. 
 
 [18.] Give me some bread, 
 some meat, some wine, 
 some beer, &c. 
 
 Bring some salt, some pep- 
 per, some mustard, &c. 
 
 There is wine and water. 
 
 Do you choose beer, or 
 cider ? 
 
 Eread and water are suffici- 
 ent for him. 
 
 You must lay this fruit in 
 straw. 
 
 Lend me some paper and 
 ink. 
 
 Have you thread or silk ? 
 
 Mend my stockings with 
 
 cotton. 
 I spent my money in goods. 
 
 This thread is like silk. 
 
 He compares this stuiF to 
 velvet. 
 
 She will not trust such cor- 
 rupted men. 
 
 This cider is like wine. 
 
 A f.ne discourse often dis- 
 pleases ignorant people. 
 
 Give me some apples, some 
 
 Elle est coiffeuse, ou c'est 
 
 une coiffeuse. 
 II est le marchand que vous 
 
 cherchez. 
 II est le medecin que vous 
 
 demandez. 
 II est le marchand le plus 
 
 integre. • 
 U est le medecin le plus ex- 
 pert. 
 Elle est la coiffeuse la plus 
 
 achalandee. 
 Donnez-moi du pain, de la 
 
 viande, du vin, d,e la 
 
 biere, &c» 
 Apportez du sel, du poivre, 
 
 de la moutarde, &c. 
 Voiia du vin et de /'eau. 
 Souhaitez-vcus de la biere, 
 
 ou du cidre ? 
 Du pain et de / eau lui suffi- 
 
 sent. 
 II faut mettre ce fruit dans 
 
 de la pa i lie. 
 Pretez.moi du papier et de 
 
 /'encre. 
 Avez-vous du fil, ou de la 
 
 soie ? 
 Raccommodez mes bas avec 
 
 du coton. 
 J'ai employe mon argent a 
 
 de la marchandise. 
 Ce fil ressemble a de la soie. 
 II compare cctte etoffe a du 
 
 velours. 
 Elle ne vent pas se fier a des 
 
 hommes si corrompus. 
 Ce cidre ressemble a du vin. 
 Un beau discours deplait 
 
 sou vent a d:s ignorans. 
 Donnez.moi des pommes, 
 
u* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 pears, some oranges, some 
 
 nuts, &c. 
 [19.] There are very fine 
 
 flowers. 
 I have bought ^fine lace. 
 To write well, we must make 
 
 use of good paper, good 
 
 ink, and good pens. 
 
 Here are some fine ladies. 
 There are some fine houses 
 
 and fine streets in London. 
 This lord has fine estates and 
 
 fine gardens. 
 This lady has a great estate. 
 
 This writing-master makes 
 
 fine letters. 
 Frederic II. king of Prussia, 
 
 took a particular delight 
 
 in having tall soldiers. 
 
 His brother applies himself 
 
 to polite literature. 
 I am acquainted with people 
 
 of wit. 
 I saw last week some great 
 
 lords in the Park, 
 
 [20.] A child ought to obey 
 his father and mother. 
 
 A king ought to be the fa* 
 ther of his people. 
 
 It is a thing unheard ofw 
 
 It is an uncommon friend- 
 ship. 
 
 A prudent man ought to 
 know how to keep a se- 
 cret. 
 
 The last two observations [21] and [22] have beeiv 
 sufficiently exemplified in the foregoing examples. 
 
 des poires, des oranges, 
 des noix, &c. 
 Voila de tres. belies fleurs. 
 
 J'ai achete de belle dentelle. 
 Pour bien ecrire, il faut se 
 
 servir de bon papier, de 
 
 bonne encre et de bonnes 
 
 plumes. 
 Voici de belles demoiselles. 
 II y a de belles maisons et de 
 
 belles rues dans Londres. 
 Ce seigneur a de belles ter« 
 
 res et de beaux jardins. 
 Cette dame a de grands 
 
 biens, 
 Ce maitre a ecrire forme de 
 
 belles lettres. 
 Frederic second, roi de Prus- 
 
 se, prenoit un plaisir par- 
 
 ticulier a avoir de grands 
 
 soldats. 
 Son frere s'applique aux 
 
 belles-lettres. 
 Je connois des beaux-esprits. 
 
 Je vis la semaine passee des 
 
 grands-seigneurs dans le 
 
 Pare. 
 Un enfant doit obeir a son 
 
 pere et a sa mere. 
 Un roi doit etre le pere de 
 
 son peuple., 
 C'est une chdse inouie. 
 C'est une rare amine. 
 
 Un homme prudent, ou 
 /'homme prudent doit sa- 
 voir garde r un secret. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 159 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 -Rules and Observations upon Nouns. 
 
 1. T^TTHEN two substantives come together in English 
 * * with of before them, that preceded by of in 
 English is put in the second case in French ; as, the top of 
 the mountain ; le sommet de la montague. 
 
 Sometimes of is omitted, and the substantive, which it 
 would have preceded, is put before the other in what is 
 called the genitive or possessive case, which is commonly 
 denoted by 'm added to the word, when the latter of the 
 two substantives must be the first case in French, and 
 placed at the beginning ; as, my father's house; la maison 
 de mon j>ere. Likewise in the English compound words r 
 the first in English is commonly the second in French ;. as, 
 a seaport ; un port de mer. 
 
 2. Adjectives, have the same gender and number as 
 their substantives ; as, a good book ; un bon lev re : a good 
 pen ; une bonne plume : good books ; de bons litres : good 
 pens ; de bonnes plumes. 
 
 Except,— first, /*«, late, deceased, before the article or pronoun 5 nu % 
 bare, before tete, pieds, jambes> Sec. 3 detnl, half, before its substan- 
 tive.— Secondly, tout> followed by an article, or by an adjective, end- 
 ing with an e mute in its masculine gender, before the word gem y 
 which is feminine; as, all people of probity; tous les gens de probite'^ 
 all honest people ; tous lei bonnctes gens. But if the word tout be either 
 immediately followed by gens, or if gens be preceded by. an adjective, 
 not ending with an e mute in its masculine, then the word tout follows 
 the rule, and is put in the feminine *, as, all old people ; toutes les 
 weilles gens; they are all persons whom I do esteem, ce sont toutes 
 gens que je n'estime point." -Thirdly, adjectives following gens y as they 
 are polite people ; cesont des gens polis. 
 
 3. When two or more substantives of different genders, 
 and not separated by a disjunctive, are the first case to the 
 verb etre y the adjective, or participle, that follows, ought 
 t® be in the masculine plural ; as the trunk, the closet, 
 and the room, are open ; le cojfre, le cabinet, tt la chambre 9 
 sont ouverts. 
 
 f The French Academy^ 
 
 7 
 
i6a A GRAMMAR OF THE , 
 
 4. Two or more substantives of different genders, im- 
 mediately followed by an adjective or ; articiple, require 
 commonly, that the adjective or particple, should agree 
 in gender and number with the last substanthe, as she 
 found the trunk, the closet, and the room open ; elk trouva 
 le cojfre, le cabinet, et la chambre^ ouverte. 
 
 Except when an adjective, or a pa'rticiple past, implies 
 ,a union, or a collection; such as joint, uni, rami; as, 
 the children, father, and mother united or joined toge- 
 ther ; les enfansy le pere, et la mere reunis ou joints en- 
 semble* 
 
 5. Adjectives are put in French after their substan- 
 tives. 
 
 6. Some adjectives are put before their substantives ; 
 as, beau, bon, grand, gros, jeune, maunjais, mechant, meilleur, 
 petity <vieux. 
 
 There are some adjectives which are to be placed sometimes before, 
 and sometimes after their substantives. See page 23. 
 
 7. Obs. Adjectives of number are placed before their 
 substantives ; except when they are used in a title, or as a 
 surname, without an article; as livre premier, chapitre 
 second, section troisieme, Charles premier, Jacques second, 
 George trois, 
 
 8. Some adjectives govern the following noun in the 
 second case, that is, require the preposition de before it : 
 Such are adjectives signifying desire, kmnxledge, remem* 
 brance, ignorance, ftr getting, care, fear, guilt, fulness, emp- 
 tiness, fleniy, <want, Of. 
 
 9. Some adjectives govern the following noun in the 
 third case, that is, require the preposition a before it ; 
 such are adjectives signifying submission, relation, pleasure 
 or displeasure, due resistance, difficulty, likeness, inclination, 
 aptness, fitness, advantage, profit, &c. 
 
 10. Adjectives sign tying dimension, as, long, thick, 
 high, deep, big, <wi(k, or broad, which come after the 
 word of measure in English, come before it in French, 
 and are followed by the prepositin de ; as, a window 
 three feet broad; uue jhietre large de trcis pieds. Or, 
 which is the more general practice, the adjective is turned 
 into it's substantive, with the w ord of measure before it; 
 in this case the word of measure, or dimension, ic pre- 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 i5i 
 
 ceded by the preposition de ; as, une fenetre de trois pieds 
 de largeur. When in this construction the verb to be hap- 
 pens to precede the word of measure or dimension, it is 
 commonly changed into the verb avoir; and the preposition 
 de s which is before the quantity of measure, is" left out ; 
 as, une fenetre qui a trois pieds de largeur ; a window which 
 is three feet broad. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Nouns, exemplified for ike 
 Scholar's Practice. 
 
 [i.] The love of life is. na- 
 tural to men. 
 
 The study of languages is 
 very entertaining. 
 
 Here is my father's house* 
 
 I saw the king's horses. 
 
 Have you not seen the king's 
 palace ? 
 
 The queen's apartments are 
 very fine. 
 
 It is my brother's book. 
 
 She wears a straw hat with 
 a silk ribbon. 
 
 Is the chamber door shut ? 
 
 We passed over London 
 bridge to go to Green. 
 wich. 
 
 I bought a fine silver tan- 
 kard. 
 
 He is gone to his country- 
 house. 
 
 [2.] He spoke to her bare- 
 headed. 
 
 He goes barefooted, bare- 
 legged. 
 
 The late queen was an ac- 
 complished woman, 
 
 L'amour de la nrie est naturel 
 
 aux hommes. 
 L'etude" des langues est tres- 
 
 amusante. 
 Voici la ma i son de mo« p£re. 
 J'ai vu les.chevaux du roi. 
 N'avez-vous pas vu le palais 
 
 du roi ? 
 Les appartemens de la reine 
 
 sont tres- beaux. 
 C'est le livre de mon frere. 
 Elle porte un chapeau de 
 
 paille avec un ruban de soie, 
 La porte de la chambre est- 
 
 elle fermee ? 
 Nous passames sur le pont 
 
 de LondreSy pour aller a 
 
 Greenwich. 
 J'ai achete un beau pot 
 
 d J 'argent. 
 II est alle a sa maison de 
 
 ca mpagne* 
 II lui parla ##-tete, ou tete 
 
 nue. 
 II va nu pieds, ##-jambes, 
 
 ou il va les pieds nus> les 
 
 jambes nues. 
 Feu la reine, ou la feue 
 
 reine, etoit une femme 
 
 accomplie* 
 
i6z 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 1 shall go out in half an 
 hour. 
 
 It is half an hour past one. 
 
 All people of honour. 
 
 It is the opinion of all peo- 
 ple of probity. 
 
 All honest people have 
 blamed him. 
 
 Almost all young people 
 like play. 
 
 All sorts of people do for 
 him. 
 
 All old people disapproved 
 of it. 
 
 He withdrew from all the 
 bad people of his neigh- 
 bourhood. 
 
 They are polite people* 
 
 They are prudent people. 
 
 You must not trust indiscreet 
 people. 
 
 [3,] Our maid and man ser- 
 vant are very diligent. 
 
 His brother and cousin are 
 very idle. 
 
 The window and the door 
 are open. 
 
 My father and mother a?e 
 sick. 
 
 My brother and sister have 
 caught cold. 
 
 [4.] Her eyes, mouth, and 
 neck are very pretty. 
 
 She sings with a charming 
 and delicate air. 
 
 Why do you leave the win- 
 dows and the door open? 
 
 He had his eyes and mouth 
 open. 
 
 Her body and mind are well 
 framed. 
 
 He found beauty, youth, 
 
 Je sortirai dans une demi* 
 
 hen re. 
 II est une heure et demie. 
 Tous les gens d'honneur. 
 C'est l'opinion de tous les 
 
 gens de probite. 
 Tous les honnetes gens l'ont 
 
 blame. 
 Presque tous les jeunes gens 
 
 aiment le jeu. 
 Us s'accommode de toutes 
 
 sortes de gen's. 
 Toutes les vielles gens Pont 
 
 desapprouve. 
 II se retira de tontes les mau- 
 
 vaises gens de son voisi- 
 
 nage. 
 Ce sont des gens polif. 
 Ce sont des gens prudens. 
 II ne faut pas vous her a des 
 
 gens in disc rets. 
 Notre servante et notre va- 
 let sont ti es-diligens. 
 Son frere et s«n cousin sont 
 
 trcs-paresseux. 
 La fenetre et la porte sont 
 
 owvertes. 
 Mon pere et ma mere sont 
 
 malades. 
 Mon frere et ma sceur sont 
 
 enrhumes. 
 Elle a les yeux, la bouche, 
 
 et la gorge tres- belle. 
 Elle chante avec un gout et 
 
 une dclicatesse charmante. 
 Pourquoi laisscuvous les fe- 
 
 netres et la porte Qnwrie.t 
 II avoit les yeux et la bouche 
 
 owvertc. 
 Elle a le corps et Tesprit bien 
 
 fait. 
 11 trouva la beaute, la jeu- 
 
FRENCH 
 
 riches, wisdom, and even 
 virtue united in her per- 
 son. 
 It is~ exceedingly hot and 
 foggy. in that country. 
 
 The children, father, and 
 mother united. 
 
 Health, honours, and for. 
 tune, joined together, are 
 not able to satisfy the 
 heart of man. 
 
 [5.] I have a green snuffbox. 
 
 The English tongue is co- 
 pious, strong, and harmo- 
 nious. 
 
 The French tongue is very 
 smooth. 
 
 She is a handsome, rich, and 
 virtuous woman. 
 
 Give me a clean shirt, 
 
 A black hat, a green suit, 
 white stockings, red shoes. 
 
 There is a very fine coach. 
 
 He follows the English fa- 
 shion. 
 
 Sing an Italian air. 
 
 People enjoy pure air in 
 France. 
 
 Jft liy do not you wear your 
 black stockings ? 
 
 She is a charming woman. 
 
 She reprimanded him se- 
 verely. 
 
 [6.] He is a naughty boy. 
 Bad weather is tiresome to 
 
 TONGUE. 163 
 
 nesse, les richesses, la 
 
 sagesse, et meme la vertu 
 
 reunies dans sa personne. 
 11 fait dans ce pays- la des 
 
 chaleurs et des brouillards 
 
 excessifs. 
 Les enfans, le pere et la 
 
 mere reunis. 
 La same, les honneurs, et la 
 
 fortune, joints ensemble, 
 
 ne peuvent satisfaire le 
 
 eceur de rhomme. 
 J'ai une tabatiere verte. 
 La langue Anghhe est - 
 - abondante, forte et har- 
 
 monieuse. 
 La langue Francoise est tres. 
 
 douce. 
 C'est une femme belle, riche y 
 
 et vertueuse. 
 Donnez-moi une chemise 
 
 blanche* 
 Un chapeau noir, un habit 
 
 vert, des bas blancs, des 
 
 souliers rouges. 
 Voila un carr osse magnifique* 
 II suit la mode Angloise. 
 
 Chantez un air I tali en. 
 
 On jouit d'un air pur en 
 
 France. 
 Pourquoi ne portez-vous pas 
 
 vos bas noirs ? 
 C'est une femme charmante. 
 C'est une charmante femme. 
 Elle lui a fait de sevens re- 
 
 primandes, ou des lepri* 
 
 mandes se'veres. 
 C'est un mechant ga r con. 
 Le mauvais temps Hi 'en* 
 
 nuic. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 564 
 
 He dwells in a large house. 
 
 London is a fine city. 
 
 He is a man of distinguished 
 merit. 
 
 He is a tall fair man. 
 
 [7.] The first man was the 
 first sinner. 
 
 George III, king of Eng- 
 land, and Lewis XVI, 
 king of France. 
 
 [8.] I am contented with 
 my condition. 
 
 It is a praiseworthy action. 
 
 He is unworthy of your 
 
 friendship. 
 She is incapable of a lie. 
 
 Few people are satisfied with 
 their fortune. 
 
 I am free from fear and 
 danger. 
 
 I was overjoyed at that 
 news. 
 
 Sine is not contented with 
 her maid. 
 
 He is discontented with his 
 wife. 
 
 He is accused of murder. 
 
 He was loaded with praises. 
 
 They «re greedy of glory 
 and riches. 
 
 I am tired of your dis- 
 courses. 
 
 They are enraged at his suc- 
 cess. 
 
 He is deep in debt. 
 
 [9.] That is good for some- 
 thing. 
 
 It is a fruit hurtful to 
 health. 
 
 11 demeure dans une grande 
 
 maison. 
 Londres est une belle ville. 
 C'est un homme d'un grand 
 
 merite. 
 C'est un^rWhorame blond, 
 Le premier homme fut le 
 
 premier pecheur. 
 George Trots, roi d'Angle- 
 
 terre, et Louis Seize, r©i 
 
 de France. 
 Je suis content de ma condi- 
 tion. 
 C'est une action digne de 
 
 louanges. 
 II est indigne de votre amu 
 
 tie. 
 Elle est incapable de men- 
 
 songe. 
 Peu de gens sont contens de 
 
 leur fortune. 
 Je suis exempt de crainte et 
 
 de danger.. 
 Je fus ravi de cette nouvelle. 
 
 Elle n'est pas contente de sa 
 
 servante. 
 II est mecontent de sa femme. 
 
 11 est accuse de meurtre. 
 II fut comble de louanges. 
 II sont avides de gloire et 
 
 de richesses. 
 Je suis las de vos discourse 
 
 11 sont enrages, de son suc- 
 cess. 
 II est charge de dettes. 
 Cela est bon a quelque chose. 
 
 C'cst un fruit nuisible a la 
 sante. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 !<S< 
 
 He is too much addicted to 
 
 study. 
 She is unfit for any cbing. . 
 You are i sensible to all the 
 
 remonstrances of your 
 
 friends. 
 He is fit for any thing. 
 She is not to be compared 
 
 <witb you. 
 That is conformable to truth. 
 
 Yours is : like mine. 
 
 I am ready for your orders. 
 I am very sensible of co\&. 
 That cloth is like yours. 
 [ roj A carpet six yards long 
 and two wide. 
 
 Our house is fourscore yards 
 high, and the foundation 
 is four yards deep. 
 
 This lawn is a yard wide. 
 
 A wall two feet thick* 
 
 A street twenty yards wide. 
 
 Our garden is a hundred feet 
 
 long. 
 That river is forty feet deep. 
 
 A well forty £a:t deep. 
 
 There are fine walks in St. 
 James's Park \ they arc 
 
 II est trop adonne a l'etude. 
 
 Elle n'est propre a rien. 
 Vous etes insensible a toutes 
 
 les remontrances de vos 
 
 amis. 
 II est propre a tout. 
 Elle n'est pas comparable a 
 
 vous. 
 Cela est conforme a la ve- 
 
 rite. 
 Le votre est semblable an 
 
 mien. 
 Je suis pret a vos ordres. 
 Je suis tres-sensible au froid. 
 Ce drap est pareil au votre. 
 Un tapis long de six verges, 
 
 et large de deux ; ou un 
 
 tapis de six verges de lon- 
 gueur y et de xieux de lar~ 
 
 geur. 
 Notre maison a quarante 
 
 toises de hauteur, et les 
 
 fondemens out deux toises 
 
 de profondeur. 
 Ce linon a une verge de 
 
 largeur. 
 Une muraille epaisse de deux 
 
 pieds, ou une muraille de 
 
 deux pieds </'epatsseur. 
 Une rue large de dix toises, 
 
 cu une rue de dix toises 
 
 de largeur. 
 Notre jardin a cent pieds de 
 
 longueur. 
 Cette riviere a quarante 
 
 pieds de profondeur. 
 Un puits de quarante pieds 
 
 de profondeur. 
 II y a de belles allees dans 
 
 le Pare de St. James \ 
 
X 66 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 at least eight hundred elles out au moins quatre 
 yards long. cens toises de longueur. 
 
 Have you ever seen a man Avez-vous jamais vu un 
 eight feet high ? homme de huit pieds de 
 
 hauteur ? 
 A book two inches thick. Un livre de deux poutes 
 
 </'epaisseuF« 
 
 CHAP. IIL 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Pronouns. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Personal Pronouns. 
 
 i, A GOVERNING personal pronoun, in the firft 
 -"- case, must always be put before a verb which 
 
 has no other noun, or prtnoun, for the first case ; as, / 
 
 speak y je parte, &c. 
 
 Except the second person singular, and the first and 
 
 second person plural of the imperative mood, which are 
 
 used without a pronoun personal. 
 
 2. Obs. There are some places where the pronoun personal is put 
 after the verb; as when it is joined with either of the seven follow- 
 ing: dire, to say j repordre, to answer; repliquer y to reply; repartir, 
 to answer again j continucr, to continue 5 poursuivre, to pursue; and - 
 s*ecrier, to cry out \ and forms with it a distinct member of the sen- 
 tence 5 as, Ihave none, answered he ^ je n"en ax point, repondit-il. 
 
 3. Obs. The personal pronoun must be put after the verb in these 
 phrases, dussicz vous, though you should ; fussiex-vous, though you 
 were; puhsie%, or pun,it%-'vous, may you; and in any of those expres- 
 sions which form what grammarians call the optative mood* as, though 
 you were rich, fussier -vous riche; though you should write to him, 
 dusswz~<vous lui tcrire; may you see him in good health, pumieiz-'vous 
 le vcir en borne sante. 
 
 4. Obs. Tt is more elegant to put the personal pronoun, even fol« 
 lowed by que, signifying that, after the vero preceded by one of these 
 conjunctions: aussi, but then j ptut-etre, perhaps; du moins, au moins y 
 at least; en vain, in vain; a print, scarcely, &c. : as, but then he re- 
 ceived his reward, aussi rec-ut-il sa recompense. 
 
TRENCH TONGUE. 1S7 
 
 5. In an interrogation, either affirmative or. negative, 
 the personal pronoun is always put after the verb in 
 simple tenses: as, do you eat? mangez-vous ? do you 
 not write? n'ecrivez-vous pas? In compound tenses it 
 is put immediately after the auxiliary, either in an affirma- 
 tive or negative question : as, have you eaten ? a-vez-wus 
 mange? have you not written? n'a<vez->vous pas ecrit ? 
 
 6. Oas. When, in ah interrogation, we make use of a verb ending 
 with an e mute, we put an acute accent upon the last e of the verb, be- 
 fore the pronoun je } as, do I speak ? parle-j* f and not farh-je? do 
 \ offer? offre-j*. 
 
 However, in this instance, I would advise to make use of the easy 
 way of asking a question by these w®rds, est-a que, as it must be done 
 for some other verbs; as, do I sleep? «/-ce que je don? In this case 
 the pronoun is put before the verb. 
 
 j. When a verb, interrogatively used, ends in the third 
 person singular with a vowel, we always put a t between 
 the verb and the pronouns //, e/Ie 3 as in the following ex* 
 arnples : does he eat? mange-i-il? has she eaten ? a-Uelle~ 
 mange ? 
 
 8. Obs. What we have said in the second rule must be ,said like- 
 wise, when after those verbs comes another noun instead of a pro- 
 noun ; as, all men are fools, says Boiieau, tout les hommes lont fous, dit 
 Boileau. 
 
 Likewise after these pronouns, te y que, k, ce que y it is sometimes 
 mere elegant to put the noun after the verb j as, at first a large parlour 
 presented itself before our eyes ; d'a-bord se present a de-vant nous un 
 grand salon. What reason dictates, is not always true; ce que dicte la 
 raison, n'est pat toujour* vrai. It is thus the parliament would Jiave 
 it j Cest ains'i que le <voulut le parlement. 
 
 9, A governing personal pronoun is superfluous when 
 any noun whatever is the first case to a verb: as 
 George III is a good king; Gesrge III est un ban rot. 
 But in an interrogation, beside the noun, we put the pro- 
 noun after the vorb : as, does your brother w.ijitc ? wtre 
 frere icrit-il? 
 
 Except when in asking a question we make use of 
 this idiom, est-ce que ; in this case the pronoun is left 
 out, as in the foregoing example; est.ee que uotre frere 
 icrit? 
 
i68 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 10. Personal pronouns of the first and second person 
 plural are commonly put before the verb, if the verb 
 have for it's nominative several personal pronouns, or 
 only one personal pronoun, in the first or second person 
 of either number, joined with one or more nouns : as, you 
 and I are idle; <vous et mot nous sommes paresseux : 
 your brother and I were present, <votre frere et moi nous 
 e'tions presens. <% 
 
 Except a noun substantive is joined with lui or elle, 
 when the personal pronoun is left out, and the verb is 
 put in the third person plural : as, your brother and he 
 are idle, <votre frere et lui sont paresseux. 
 
 1 1 . Governed personal pronouns are put before the 
 verb in French, though after it in English ; as, he told 
 me; it me ait. Foreigners should attend to this r«le, 
 against which they are very apt to offend. 
 
 Except, ist, in the second person singular, and first, 
 and second persons plural of the imperative: as, tell me, 
 difes-moi . . . Observe, that me is always put instead 
 of moi, when it comes before the verb, unless it be se- 
 parated from the verb by a conjunction : as, it is to me 
 he gives it; e'est a moi qu'il le donne: 2dly, after the 
 verb etre, when it signifies to belong to, and after the 
 verb se fier, to trust, or rely on : as, you rely on me, 
 <vous vous fez a moi : this house belongs to me ; cette 
 maison est a moi : 3dly, after the verbs singer, penser, 
 parler, when the last signifies to direct our discourse to, 
 and a very few others. 
 
 12. The supplying pronouns le, la, and les, are always 
 put before the verbs by which they are governed, and 
 are placed before lui and leur ; as, you give them to him ; 
 'vous les lui donnex: whereas they are put after the other 
 personal pronouns ; as, I give it to you; je vous le donne ; 
 except in the imperative mood in affirmative sentences ; 
 as, give it me'; donuexAcmoi. 
 
 i}. The supplying pronouns en and y are also placed 
 before the verb, and are put after all other personal pro. 
 nouns, and en after y ; as, I have sent some to them thither; 
 je lent y en <ti envoys* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 169 
 
 Bacept whenjj and moi meet together in the seeand persoa of the 
 imperative mood affirmatively used, y is put before &?i \ as, carry me 
 thither j menev-y-moi. 
 
 N. B. The last three observations, with their exceptions, are fully 
 exemplified in their proper places, and in the supplying pronouns. 
 
 14. //, which some wrongly call a personal pronoun in the follow- 
 ing examples, is commonly used before the verb etre followed by an 
 adjective, where the word thing is understood j as, it is glorious to die 
 for our country ; il est glor'ieux de mourir pour sa patrie. If the 
 adjective make a complete sense, ce is commonly used : as, it is true j 
 e'est vrai. 
 
 7/ is likewise used when we speak of the time and hour: as, it 
 is eleven o'clock; il est on%e bcures\ it is bad weather} il fait mawvais 
 tempi. 
 
 Except, when a question is asked with ce\ as, quelle beure est-ce la ? 
 the answer is, cest une beure. Ce is commonly used in the beginning of 
 a sentence before a substantive : as, it is a pity; c*est dommage. 
 
 ic. //, elle, singular, or ils, elles> plural, and ce, are 
 indiscriminately u^ed ; 1st, before substantives expressing 
 the sex, quality, profession, or trade of a person ; asj he 
 is a merchant ; il est marchandy or e'est uu march and : 
 2diy, before names of nations : as, they are Frenchmen ; 
 its sont Francois, or ce sont des Francois. Observe, that in the 
 two foregoing instances, no article is put before the sub- 
 stantive after the personal pronounsyV, tu y il, Sec. 
 
 16. Personal pronouns, whether conjunctive or dis. 
 junctive, in their oblique cases, are always to be repeated; 
 as, I say and declare to yon, je wous dis, et worn declare ; 
 take the books, and read them; prenez, let Irvres, et la 
 liscZf or /iscz-les. 
 
 17. Personal pronouns are repeated before each verb: 
 1st, when they are followed by verbs, in different tenses : 
 as, I say, and shall always say ; je dis } et je dirai toujour; ; 
 zdly, when we pass from a negation to an affirmation, 
 or from an affirmation to a negation : 3cUy, after the con- 
 junctions mat's, meme, cependant, neanmoins, nonobstant^ 
 malgre tout cela, anssi, ai/si, on, &c. But when the 
 personal p.onouns belong to the same ten e and person, 
 they are commonly not repeated ; as, 1 say and declare ; 
 
 je dis et declare. Observe here, that the pronoun on is 
 always repeated : as, people speak and act ; on farle e^ 
 on agit. 
 
 I 
 
3 70 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 18. The pronouns \ui % eitx, elle, elles, arte used at the 
 ^nd of a sentence, only when we are speaking of persons ; 
 as, is it your brother? // is; Est-ce votrefrere? C'tst 
 lui. When we are speaking of inanimate things, we make 
 use of the pronouns /<?, la, les: as, is it your hat? Yes, 
 it is* Est-ce la votre chapeau ? Oui, ce I'cst, and not c'at 
 lui*. 
 
 19. Obs. The foregoing pronouns lui, eux, elle, leur, when we are 
 speaking of inanimate things, are sometimes used in the middle of a 
 •entence t, sometimes not ; but there is no other rule for this than 
 custom, so that it can be learned only by use : for, speaking of a sword, 
 1 may say, je lui deh la vie? I am indebted to it for my life ; and yet 
 we must say, speaking of the same sward, attache%-y ce tueud, hang 
 that swordknot to it; not attach^x-lm. 
 
 20. //, ih\ elle, elles, in the beginning of a sentence, 
 are used, speaking even of inanimate things; as, when 
 speaking of a house, I say, elle est belle. 
 
 21. Lui, leur, elle. Sec*, governed by a preposition, 
 are never used, speaking of irrational and inanimate 
 things : as, you see that house, he lives over against it ; 
 njQus wqyez ceite maisotiy il demeure c vis.a~ e vh } and not 
 wis-a-vis d 3 elle. 
 
 In this case the prepositions become adverbs. But observe, that 
 some prepositions never, or very seldom, become adverbs : as, «<vec, 
 with} sans, without, Sec. ; therefore, in such cases, give another turn 
 to the sentence : as, I cannot do without it, je tie pun pi* en passer 5 he 
 tame with it, il l\i apportf. 
 
 It may be observed, that aprh and avec are sometimes followed by 
 hi, eux, elle, or tlltii as, when the river overflows, it carries every 
 thing away with it; lorsqut ceite riviere se delorde, tilt ehimme tout 
 avec elle: but as such sentences are a> good without avec elle, or apt A 
 tile, as with, and it very often happens, that we cannot make u-e of 
 these expressions; it is 'best to avoid them by omit tin's them abso- 
 lutely, as in the toregoing example, where, hrique cette riven se 
 de'borde, elle eritrdtne tout, is as ^ood Fiench without avec die, as if these 
 words were aude?]. 
 
 22. Ops. Lt'i, elle, and soi, at the end of a sentence, are not to be 
 used indifferently. Soi is very seldom used'in the plural. When 
 we speak of things in the masculine gender, soi is used j as, the loal- 
 
 * See the third observation upon supplying pronouns, and the exam- 
 ples thereon. Section VI, N« 3. 
 
 -r When things Jtre personified : as, gh ", 'victory, virtue, &c. ; or 
 when we make use of personal phrases, .. „•. phrases which are applied 
 onlv to persons, Restaut, 
 
 7 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 i?t 
 
 Stone attracts iroa : Va'unant attire le fer a soi. EUe-msme may be mel 
 in tl*e feminine} as, virtue is lovely in itself: la vertu est almable eo 
 eiie-mcme. 
 
 Speaking of persons in general, soi is to be used : as, a man ought 
 not to speak ofrbimself but with great modesty; on ne dolt -parley de soi, 
 quavec beaucoiip de modestie. When we speak of a particular person, 
 lui or elle is used instead of soi: as, that man speaks of nobody but 
 himself: cet bomme ne park que de lui. 
 
 N. B. Meme is often elegantly put after lui, elle, eux, soi, &c. ; sn£ 
 must be put after them, when they follow a reflected verb. 
 
 Personal Pronouns exemplified fir the Scholar* t 
 Practice. 
 
 £i.] / am learning my les- ^J'apprends ma lecoa. 
 son. 
 
 He is writing his theme* 
 
 She is embroidering. 
 
 We have a holiday. 
 
 Veu are lazy, 
 
 They make a noise. 
 
 jl/y mother is in the country. 
 
 She is g©ne out. 
 
 [l.j I have none, said he. 
 
 t had not seen it, answered 7. 
 
 But she replied , why do you 
 concern yourself about 
 it? 
 
 ,[3.] Though you should 
 blame me. 
 
 Though you were still more 
 surprised* ' 
 
 [4.] Perhaps he will say, 
 that he found it. 
 
 {5.] Have you learnt your 
 lesson ? 
 
 £6.] / scarcely begin to 
 perceive it. 
 
 But then I do not suffer my- 
 self to be insulted. 
 
 Do / tell a lie ? 
 
 {7. J Has he not been angry 
 wiih mc ? 
 
 77 ecrit son theme. * 
 
 , Elle brode. 
 Nous avons conge. 
 Fous etes paresseux. 
 lis font du bruit t 
 Ma mere est a la campagne* 
 Elle est sortie. 
 Je n'en a point, dit-//. . ~ 
 je ne l'avois pas vu, repoti- 
 
 dis-/V. 
 lVJais, repliqua-tW/p, de quel 
 
 vous melez-vous? 
 
 Dussiez.s/<?fcj me blamer. 
 
 Fussiez-iw/x encore plus 
 
 surpris. 
 Pevt-etre dira Uil qu'il l'a 
 
 trouve. 
 Avez-vous appris votre le- 
 
 con ? 
 A peine commence./* a m'eflt 
 
 apercevoir. 
 Aussi ne soufFre je pas q Von 
 
 m'insulte. 
 'Est ce que je mens ? 
 N'a-/-// pas etc fachc coatee 
 
 moi ? 
 
 1 t 
 
\~,z 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Has she not been in the 
 
 country ? 
 Does she embroider ? 
 [8.] Love your neighbour 
 
 like yourself, says the 
 
 Gospeh 
 So the law of God re- 
 quires. 
 [9.] Is your sister at home? 
 Does your brother improve 
 
 in the French tongue ? 
 Is yonr sister sick ? 
 [10.] You and I are good 
 
 friends. 
 She and I went together to 
 
 the Park. 
 My brother and I go to the 
 
 play this evening. 
 He and my brother are part- 
 ners. 
 She and her sister learn 
 
 French, 
 fn.] She told me> that she 
 
 had written to him. 
 Do not fall violently upon 
 
 them. 
 I gave him the bcok which 
 
 you sent me. 
 I shall tell him. 
 Have you promised him P 
 I have not promised -her. 
 When will you send to him? 
 Give me. 
 Bring me. 
 Torgive him. 
 Speak to her. 
 He has promised it tQ me. 
 Do not confide in him. 
 You may confide in me. 
 This book is mine. 
 This thimble is not jours. 
 
 N'a t-elle pas ete a la cam- 
 
 pagne ? 
 Br ode-/-*//*.* 
 Aimez votre prcchain comme 
 
 vous-meme, dit l'e'<van- 
 
 gile. 
 Ainsi le veut la hi de Dieu# 
 
 Votre sceur est-*//* au logis ? 
 
 Votre frere fait.// des pro- 
 gres dans le Francois ? 
 
 Votre soeur e&t-elle malade ? 
 
 Vous et moi nous sommes 
 bons amis. 
 
 Elle et moi nous allames en- 
 semble au Pare. 
 
 Mon frere et moi nous allons 
 ce soir a la comedie. 
 
 Lui et mon frere sont asso- 
 cies. 
 
 Elle et sa sceur apprennent 
 le Francois. 
 
 Elle m'z dit qu'elle lui avoit 
 ecrit. 
 
 Ne hur faites pas de vio- 
 lence. 
 
 Je lui ai donne le livre que 
 vous w'avez envoye. 
 
 Je lui dirai. 
 
 Lui avez-vous promis. 
 
 Je ne lui ai pas promis. 
 
 Quand lui enverrez-vous ? 
 
 Donnez- moi. 
 
 Apportez-we/. 
 
 Pardonnez-/#/. 
 
 Parlez./*/, 
 
 C'cst a moi qu'il Pa promis. 
 
 Ne vous fiez pas A lui. 
 
 Vous pouvez vous fier a moi. 
 
 Ce livre est a ?noi. 
 
 Ce de n'esrt pas a <vous. 
 
Do not think of him any 
 
 more. 
 I am speaking to him y and 
 
 not to you. 
 You gave it to me. 
 [12.I Will you give it to 
 
 him ? 
 There are fine oranges ; will 
 
 you sell them to her ? 
 Show me your letter ; when 
 
 will you send it to her? 
 
 There is a fine book ; I gave 
 
 it to her. 
 When will you give it to 
 
 us? 
 You had promised it to me. 
 Give // to him. 
 Bring it to me. 
 Show it to her._ 
 [13.] Will you carry some 
 
 to them thither? 
 I have sent seme to them 
 
 thither. 
 I shall send some to you 
 
 thither. 
 When did you send some to 
 
 him thither? 
 Why have you not carried 
 
 some to her thither? 
 Carry me thither. 
 Give me some. 
 Do not carry me thither. 
 [14.] What o'clock is it? 
 It is two o'clock. 
 // is a quarter after two. 
 // is half an hour after two. 
 // is three quarters after two. 
 
 // is very fine weather. 
 
 // is gloomy. 
 
 // is rainy weather. 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 173 
 
 Ne songez plus a lui. 
 
 Je park a hi, et non pas <r 
 
 <VGUS. 
 
 Vous me /'avez donne. 
 Le lui donnerez-vous I 
 
 Voila de belles orangfes 5 lei 
 lui vendrez-vous ? 
 
 Montrez-wa* votre lettre ; 
 quand la lui enverrez- 
 vous ? 
 
 Voila un beau Hvre; je U 
 lui ai donne. 
 
 Quand nous le donnerez- 
 vous ? 
 
 Vous me 7'aviez promis. 
 
 D on nez -/?-/#/', 
 
 Apportez-/«-7W. 
 
 Montrez -&-/#/. 
 
 Leurj en ponerez^vous Y' 
 
 Je leur y en ai envoy e. 
 Je <vousy en enverrai. 
 
 Quaod lui y en avez-vous 
 envoye ? 
 
 Pourquoi ne lui y en avez- 
 vous pas porte ? 
 
 Menez-y-OTo/. 
 
 Donnez-^zV;/. 
 
 Ne m'y menez pas. 
 
 Quelle heure est-;//* 
 
 J I est deux heures. 
 
 //est deux heures et un quart. 
 
 11 est deux heures et demie. 
 
 //est trois heures moins un 
 quart. 
 
 // fait fort beau temps. 
 
 // fait sombre. 
 
 // fait un iemps pluvieux. 
 1 3 
 
'7+ 
 
 // is time to rise. 
 // is hot ; // is cold. 
 // is my book. 
 // is my handkerchief, 
 // is a fine house. 
 They are your pens. 
 They are young ladies. 
 
 It is a pity. 
 
 They are strange people. 
 
 It is enough. 
 
 It is not too much.. 
 
 It was without design, 
 
 // is in spite of him. 
 
 [15.] He is a doctor* 
 
 He is a goldsmith. 
 
 He is a learned man. 
 
 They are idle. 
 
 He is a merchant. 
 
 They are Englishmen, 
 Frenchmen. 
 
 [16.] He loves me, and has 
 a regard for me. 
 
 I have taken it, and kept 1/. 
 
 I know her, and see her very 
 often. 
 
 He esteems and honours you, 
 
 I saw and spoke to her. 
 
 [17.] They say and affirm 
 that . . . 
 
 Yon have seen and will al- 
 ways see. 
 
 He made his theme ; but he 
 did not read his rules. 
 
 She speaks to him, though 
 she does not like him. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 //est temps de se lever. 
 
 II fait chaud ; it fait froid. 
 
 Coil -mon livre. 
 
 C'est mon mouchoir. 
 
 C'est une belle ma i son. 
 
 Ce sont vos plumes. 
 
 Ce sont de jeunes demoU 
 
 selles. 
 C'est doirrmage. 
 Ce sont d'fct ranges gens. 
 C'est assez. 
 Ce n'est pas trop, 
 C<? fut sans dessein. 
 C'est malgre lui.. 
 // est docteur, ou rest un 
 
 docteur. 
 // est orfevre, ou c'est un 
 
 orfevre. 
 II est savant, ou c'est un sa- 
 vant horn me, 
 lis sont paresseux, ou ce sont 
 
 des paresseux. 
 II est negociant, ou c'est un 
 
 negociant. 
 lis sont Anglois, Francois, 
 
 ou ce sont des Anglois, 
 
 des Francois. 
 II ftr'aime, et me considere. 
 
 Je /'ai pris, et /'ai garde. 
 Je la connois, et la vois tics- 
 
 souvent. 
 II <v6us estime et 'vans honore* 
 Je /'ai vue et lui ai parte* 
 On dit et oh assure qr.e . . . 
 
 Vous avcz vu et vons verrcz 
 
 toujours. 
 II a fait son theme: vmis il 
 
 n'a pas lu scs regies. 
 Elle lui parle, cc pendant <U» 
 nc l'aimc pas. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 [ i&] Is it your sister ? Yes, 
 it is. 
 
 Are they your books? They 
 are. 
 
 [ 19.}^ Self-love blinds us-; 
 it is the cause of the 
 greatest part of our mis- 
 fortunes,. 
 
 Those flowers want wat^rf 
 give them some* 
 
 My coat has a hole, put s 
 patch on it. 
 
 [20.} I saw a fine garden ; 
 /'/ is enamelled with a 
 thousand fine flowers. 
 
 These shoes are too narrow ; 
 they hurt me. 
 
 [21. j Do you know where 
 the Exchange is ? He lives 
 opposite to H 9 
 
 Give me my book; I can- 
 not do without //. 
 
 [22.] A wise man is master 
 of himself. 
 
 V/e make our own happi- 
 ness. 
 
 A wise man mistrusts hint* 
 self. 
 
 She is too much conceited 
 of herself. 
 
 We ought not to flatter <wr- 
 sdvis. 
 
 He loves only himself \ 
 
 Falsehood is odious in itself. 
 
 The loadstone attracts iron. 
 A man ought not to speak 
 
 of himsdfbut with great 
 
 modesty. 
 That man speaks of nobody 
 
 but himself. 
 
 *7i 
 
 Est-ce voire' sceur ? Oui, 
 
 e'est elle. 
 Sout-ce ves livres ? ce let 
 
 sonr.- 
 L'amour propre nous aveu : - 
 
 g\e ; e'est lui qui est la 
 
 cause de la plupatt de . 
 
 nos raalheurs. 
 Voila des fleurs qui ont be- 
 som d'eau ; donnez-/*7/r- 
 
 en. 
 Mon habit est troue, cousez- 
 
 y une piece. 
 J'ai vu un beau jardin ; r/ 
 
 est emaille de mille belles 
 
 fleurs. 
 Ces souliers sont trop etroits ; 
 
 its me blessent. 
 Savez-vous ou est la Bourse ? 
 
 II demeure vis-a-vis. 
 
 Donnez-moi mon livre ; je 
 
 ne puis vcCen passer. 
 Le sage est maitre de sol. 
 
 On fait sa felicite soi-meme.- 
 
 Le sage se'mefie de lur- 
 
 meme. 
 Eile a trop bonne opinion 
 
 A* clle me me. 
 On ne doit pas se flatter sou 
 
 me me. 
 II n'aime que lui me me. 
 La faussetc est odieuse en 
 
 elle-meme. 
 L'aimant auire le fer a soi. 
 On ne doit parler de soi 
 
 qu'avec beaucoup de mo- 
 
 destie. 
 Cet homme ne parle que de 
 
 lui- mi 'me \ 
 4 
 
i7<5 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 I will do it myself. Je 1c veuji faire moi.meme* 
 
 She relies too much on her- Elle se fie trap a elle-mcme. 
 
 self. 
 
 They betray themselves. J Is se trahisSent eux-memes* 
 
 You hurt nobody but jw/r- Vousne faites tort <j*'a<dffi* 
 
 ■f^ meme* 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Possessive Promuns 4 
 
 i. The conjunctive possessive pronouns come always 
 belbre the nouns to which they are joined : as, it is my 
 snuff-box ; e'est ma tabatitre. In this case, mon t ton, son, 
 are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before feminine nouns 
 beginning with a vowel or h mute, for the sweetness of 
 sound: as, my sword; mon epeei thy soul; ton dme: 
 his friendship ; son am tie. Absolute possessive pronouns 
 are put after the noun with the definite article, U t la, ks ; 
 as, le mien, la mknne. 
 
 2. When sake signifies amour in French, the English 
 possessive pronoun is to be rendered in French by the 
 disjunctive personal pronoun : as, for your sake ; pour 
 I* amour de vous, and not four voire amour. 
 
 3. When the verb etre signifies to belong to> the Eng- 
 lish possessive pronoun is rendered in French by the 
 disjunctive personal pronoun : as, that house is mini; cette 
 waison est a ffitoi, and not est la mienne. But, when the 
 particle ce is joined to the verb etrc> the possessive pro- 
 noun is commonly used; as, this is my house ; e'est ma 
 maison: it is his book, and not yours; e'est son li<vre y et 
 mon fas le voire. 
 
 4. The gender of possessive pronouns does not follow 
 that of the person who speaks, or is spoken of, but agrees 
 with the particular gender of ev^ery noun it is joined to : 
 as, her father is dead ; son pere est mort. 
 
 5. The possessive conjunctive pronoun is always re. 
 peated before a substantive, and after a conjunction; as, 
 my brothers and sisters; mes frerrs et mes saeurs : his 
 father and mother ; son pere et sa mere. 
 
 6. Le mien, It ticn , le sien> &c. in the masculine gen- 
 der and singular number, sometimes signify a person's 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 1-77. 
 
 due: as, we must give every one his due; il faut rendre 
 a chacun le sien. In the plural number and masculine gen- 
 der they sometimes signify relations : as, your relations 
 and his ; les <votres et les siens. 
 
 7. His, it's j their 9 &c, are commonly rendered in 
 French, by son, sa, ses y leurs: as, plants have their pro- 
 perties : les plantes out leurs proprietes. But when it's 
 or their belongs to a substantive preceding, it is com- 
 monly rendered in French by the supplying pronoun en : 
 as, these plants are good, I know their qualities ; ces 
 plantes sont bonnes, j'en connois les qualites. This happens 
 when the pronouns may be resolved into the substantive 
 to which it relates, as in the foregoing example : these 
 plants are good, I know the qualities of these plants. 
 
 8. The conjunctive possessive pronoun, with the par- 
 ticle de before it, is used instead of the absolute possessive 
 pronoun on all such occasions as the following : an ac- 
 quaintance_of his : une de ses conttoissances : a friend of 
 mine ; un de mes amis. 
 
 9. The conjunctive possessive pronoun is used when we 
 call or answer friends, relations, &c. ; as, come, daughter, 
 Vimx, ma fill ei yes brother; oui, moufrere. 
 
 IG. Obs. Conjunctive possessive pronouns, coming, in English, 
 afrer some verbs not signifying a distemper, are resolved into the con- 
 junctive personal pronoun; and, instead of the possessive pronoun, 
 we put the definite article; as, I have pared my nails: je me suh 
 rigne\t$ ong/es : he has cut my hair; il nCa coupe les cbeveux. 
 
 II. Obs. Generally, when in a sentence a noun or a personal pro* 
 noun iufficiently denotes what- thing it is you are speaking of, the pos- 
 sessive pronoun is omitted as useless, and resolved i to the definite 
 article : ai, I have a pain in my teeth, in my stomach, in my head, in 
 my eyes, &c. ; 'fa\ mal aux der.ts> a Veaomac, a la tete, zuxyeux, (&c* 
 However, when a pain or distemper continues for some time upon 
 us,^ we may say, speaking to a person acquainted with it, mzjambc rfs 
 guentpas; my legs does not heal: ma toux me fatigue beaucoup \ my 
 cough teases me very much. This may likewise happen in a few 
 other instances. Generally, the last two rules tak? place, when there- 
 is- a sort of equivocation or amphibology. 
 
i7« 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Possessive Pronouns exemplified for the Scholar's 
 Practice. 
 
 [i.] My house is larger than 
 his. 
 
 Have you seen my garden ? 
 
 Come and see my flowers. 
 
 Where is your book ? 
 
 Show me your books. 
 
 Lend me your penknife. 
 
 Our school-fellows are play- 
 ing in the street. 
 
 Her apron is quite black. 
 
 Her fail is broken. 
 
 Give me my shoes, my stock- 
 ings, my handkerchief, my 
 shirt, and my hat. 
 
 Your stockings have holes 
 in them. 
 
 What is become of his pens ? 
 
 How does your sister do ? 
 
 You hare my needle. 
 
 Is that your hat ? 
 
 1 know your sentiments; 
 and you are no stranger 
 to mine. 
 
 The Thames got out of it's 
 channel. 
 
 [2.] Do it for my sake. 
 
 1 will do it for your sake. 
 
 For her sake. 
 For his sake. 
 [ 3.] This pen is not yours ; 
 
 it is mine. 
 Whose book is this ? It is 
 
 not mine; it is his, or 
 
 bers. 
 **t is jour knifc, and not his. 
 
 Ma maison est plus grande 
 
 que la sienne* 
 Avez-vous vu mon jardin ? 
 Venez voir mes fleurs. 
 Ou est <votre livre ? 
 Mont rez* moi <vos livres. 
 Pretez-moi <votre canif. 
 Aw compagnons d'ecole 
 
 jouent dans la rue. 
 Son tablier est tout noir. 
 Son eventail est rompu. 
 Donnez-moi mes souliers, 
 
 mts bas, mon mouchoir, ma 
 
 chemise, et mon chapeau. 
 Fes bas sont troues. 
 
 Que son tde venues ses plumes? 
 Comment se porte <vctre soeur ? 
 Vous avez mon aiguille. 
 'Est-ce la ruotre chapeau ? 
 Je connois <vos sentknens ; 
 
 et vous n'ignorez pas les 
 
 miens. 
 La Tamise est sortie de torn 
 
 lit. 
 Faites-le pour l*amour de 
 
 ?noi. 
 Je le ferai poor I'aincur de 
 
 'VOUS. 
 
 Pour l'amour dW/r. 
 Pour Tamour de hi. 
 Cette plume n'est pas a 
 
 <vous ; elle est a moi. 
 A qui est ce livre ? II n'est 
 
 pas a moi; il est a lui, on 
 
 a elle. 
 C'est <votre couteau, et ncn 
 
 yas U sien* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 ' 79 
 
 Is this yotlr needle ? 
 
 It is my paper and not 
 
 jours. 
 [4.] Ic is my opinion and 
 
 ber l s. 
 It is his brother, 
 Ir is his sister. 
 The horse broke his bridle 
 
 and halter. 
 My horse carries his head 
 
 well. 
 Your horse has lost his shoes. 
 [>•] My father and mother 
 
 are sick. 
 His brother and sister are in 
 
 the country. 
 Your brother and my cousin 
 
 are very good friends. 
 Her mother and aunt are 
 
 against it* 
 {7.] Put your books in their 
 
 places again. 
 Their reasons are bad. 
 1- saw the fireplace of his 
 
 chamber; //'/mantle-piece 
 
 is &f marble. 
 You have bought an elbow- 
 chair ; it's arms are too 
 
 hi S h \ 
 Your stick is not conveni- 
 ent ; it's end is too sharp,. 
 
 He has bought a sword; it's 
 hilt is of silver. 
 
 Have you read my book ? Is 
 not the tvpe very beauti. 
 ful. 
 
 He ordered his country- 
 house to be rebuilt ? it's 
 rooms and it's situation 
 are fine. 
 
 There is a very large gar- 
 
 1 6 
 
 Certe aiguille est.elle a <vous & 
 Ce papier est a moi 3 et npn 
 
 pas a <vcjus. 
 C'est mon sentiment et k 
 
 sien. 
 C'est son frere. 
 C'est sa soeur. 
 Le cheval a rompu sa bride 
 
 et son licou. 
 Mon cheval porte bien sa 
 
 tete. 
 Votre cheval a perdu see fers. 
 Mo 71 pere et ma mere sont 
 
 malades. 
 Son frere et sn soeur sont 
 
 a : la campagne. 
 Votre frere et men cousin 
 
 sont tres-bons amis. 
 Sa mere et sa tante s'y op- 
 pose nt. 
 Remettez <vos livres a leurs 
 
 places. 
 Lturs raisons sont mauvaises. 
 J'ai vu.la cheminee de *z 
 
 chambre ; le manteau en 
 
 est de marbre. 
 Vous avez achete urv fau- 
 
 teuil ; les bras en sont 
 
 trop hauts. 
 Votre baton n'est pas com- 
 mode ; le bout en est trop 
 
 pointu. 
 II a achete une epee ; la gar-- 
 
 de en est d'argenr. 
 Avez. vous lu mon livre ? Le 
 
 caractere n'en est-il pas 
 
 bien beau ? 
 II a fait rebatir sa maisoa 
 
 de campagne ; les cham- 
 
 bres et la situation en sont 
 
 belles. 
 II y a un tres-grand jnrdui 
 
1*0 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 den behind his house ; 
 the trees of it are very- 
 well planted, their fruit 
 is excellent. 
 Where did you buy this 
 book ? the binding is very 
 good. 
 
 Every state has it's advan- 
 tages, and it's troubles. , 
 
 He is satisfied with his situ, 
 ation; he knows all it's 
 pleasures. 
 
 The art of war has it's dan- 
 gers. 
 
 He is not satisfied with his 
 situation ; he sees all it's 
 dangers. 
 
 It is a small house, which 
 has it's conveniences. 
 
 That tree spreads /A branches 
 very far. 
 
 [9.] Brother, lend m^ your 
 pen. 
 
 Sister, I cannot; I am, writ- 
 ing my theme. 
 
 [10.] He got his hajr cut. 
 
 You split my head. 
 
 He fell from his horse, and 
 
 broke his leg. 
 They have cut off his leg. 
 He cannot walk out ; the 
 
 gout has swelled his feet. 
 Wash your hands, mouth, 
 
 and face. 
 I pricked my finger with my 
 
 needle. 
 [11.] He only grins. 
 
 He waited on the lady to 
 her coach. 
 
 derriere sa maison ; les 
 
 arbres en sont tres-bien 
 
 plantes, les fruits en sont 
 
 exsellens. 
 Ou avez-vous achete ce li- 
 
 vre ? La reliure en est 
 
 tres-bonne. 
 Chaque etat a set agremens 
 
 et ses peines. 
 II se plait dans sa situation : 
 
 il en connoit tous les 
 
 plaisirs. 
 I/art de la guerre a ses dan- 
 gers. 
 II ne se plait pas dans sa 
 
 situation ; il en voit tous 
 
 les dangers. 
 C'est une petite maison, qui 
 
 a ses commodites. 
 Voila un arbre qui etend ses 
 
 branches tres-loin. 
 Mon frere, pretez-moi -joire 
 
 plume. 
 Je ne puis, ma sceur; j'ecris 
 
 mon theme. 
 II s'est fait couper les ehe- 
 
 veux. 
 Vous me fendez la tete. 
 11 tomba de cheval, et se 
 
 cassa la cuisse. 
 On lui a coupe la jambe. 
 II ne peut sortir; la goutte 
 
 lui a enfle les pieds. 
 Lavez-itf»j les mains, la 
 
 bouche, et le visage. 
 Je me suis pique le doigt 
 
 avec mon aiguille. 
 II ne rit que du bout des 
 
 lev res, ou des dents. 
 II donna la main a la dame 
 et la conduisit a son car. 
 rosse. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 Why do you not speak ? Are 
 you dumb ? 
 
 He cannot stand upon his 
 
 legs. 
 She gave im her word for it. 
 She gave him her hand to 
 
 kiss. 
 He stands on tiptoe. 
 
 He gave his arm to the sur- 
 geon, who was to bleed 
 him. 
 
 The patient lost all his 
 blood. 
 
 He raised his voice. 
 
 She stretched out her arms. 
 
 He makes a shift to lire by 
 
 hard labour. 
 You have hurt my foot. 
 You hurt my finger. 
 Have you never had the 
 
 tcothach ? No : bur I 
 
 have very often a pain in 
 
 my stomach. 
 I am sick. 
 His mind is undisturbed. 
 
 Her mind is agitated with a 
 thousand fears. 
 
 My finger is not yet healed. 
 
 Pourquoi ne parlez-voiu 
 
 pas ? Avez-vous perdu la 
 
 parole r 
 II ne pent se tenix sur set 
 
 jambes. 
 Elle m'en donna sa parole. 
 Elle lui donna sa main a 
 
 baiser. 
 II se tient sur le bout des 
 
 pieds. 
 II donna son bras au chi- 
 
 rurgien, qui devoit le sai. 
 
 giier. 
 Le malade perdit tout son 
 
 sang. 
 II eleva la voix. 
 Elle etendit ses bras, ou les 
 
 bras. 
 II vit du travail de ses mains. 
 
 Vous m'a vez fai t mal au pied. 
 Vous vie faites mal au doigt. 
 N'avez-vous jamais eu mal 
 
 aux dents ? Non : mais 
 
 j'ai fort souvent mal a 
 
 /'estomac. 
 J'ai mal au cceur. 
 II a /'esprit en repos, ou w». 
 
 esprit est en repos. 
 Elle a /'esprit agite de mille 
 
 craintes ; ou son esprit est 
 
 agite de mille cr times. 
 Man doigt n'est ps encore 
 
 gueri. 
 
182 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns n 
 
 r. Ce or cet 9 cettc, and ces, are joined to and go before 
 a substantive ; as,- this book, this man, this pen, these 
 houses ; ce li<vre y .cet hommCy cette plume, ces maisons* Gcluf 9 
 celUy ceuxy ce/Ies, ought to be followed by a second case : 
 as, he of you, celui de <vous ; or the relative pronoun qui, or 
 que : as, he who loves^ celui qui aime ; he whom* you love, 
 celui que njous ai?nez. 
 
 2.- Ce is used before a noun ^masculine beginning with & 
 consonant ; but if the rnoun begin with a vowel, .or an h 
 mute, cet most be used, Ce is likewise- used before qui or 
 que: in this case it is said of inanimate things only, and 
 signifies <what ox- the things -which ; as, ce que <vous cherchez 
 n'est pastici ,\ what you look for is nowhere, or, the thing 
 you look for is not here. , 
 
 3. Obs. The particles ci and la* zxt sometimes joined by a hyphen 
 to" a substantive ; as this man, that woman, cet bomme-L], alte-Jiminc- • 
 la. They are likewise joined-in the same manner to the demonstra- 
 tive pronouns. 
 
 4 . Hi ivhoy he thaty she ixhhy they who, such ns, &c. • 
 in the sense of that, even governed of the verb substantive 
 to bey are rendered in French bv ielui qui y celle qui, ccux 
 qui, which arc never separated. 
 
 5. Obs. He *cho\ he that, &c., whether, they 'be separated -in English 
 or not, are sometimes elegantly lendcred in French by the impersoral 
 c*est t or c\st ne.pas, according as the sentence is affirmative or negative, 
 with an infinitive followed by que de before a second infinitive ; as, 
 He who trusts to empty men's promise? is ignorant of the human- heart. 
 C'estne pas annoure le xteur lumain que de se jitr aux tftcixes premises 
 des bommes. 
 
 I say sometimes, because, first, if one of the English verbs be in the • 
 future tense, it is by no means to be used. Secondly, there are mmy • 
 cases, in which it is never used 5 a?, tb<y were punished ivko did it, ■ 
 ceux qui Vent fait out ete funis; to put the two verbs in the. infinitive 
 mood would be nonsense, 
 
 • Ci denotes an object near, and til at a distance. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE.. 183 
 
 6. ©as. Ce qui, ce que y what, beginning a sentence of two parts, is 
 commonly followed by a sub>tantive; as, what I am saying to you 
 is the truth ; ce que jcvcus <l\s\ c'est la verite. Sometimes the verb 
 e:re is followed by the preposition de with an infinitive \ as, what 
 grieves him r is not to have s-u^ccedei r ce qui le fdebe, c'e*t de n^wcir 
 pas rtuss'i. Sometimes by que, if it come before another mood; as, 
 ce qui le fatbe, e'est qu'il ria pas reussi. Ce qui is used before neuter 
 verbs; as, ce qui me plait, what pleases me ; and before active verb?, 
 when it is the nominative of the verb. In other cases cezue is used. 
 
 7. Obs-. 7. Ce is not repeated in the before-mentioned- case before 
 an adjective, or past participle ; as, what Lam saying to you is true, ce 
 
 q:*e je vous disest 1/rau 
 
 8. Oss. Ceei, this,. cela, that, are sometimes relative to a s'ngle 
 noun ; as donr.ex-moi ceci, ou cela, give me tbfo or that, speaking of 
 any sing^ tiling v/hatever. Sometimes they are not relative to a 
 single noun, but to aw entire action: in this case cela generally sig- 
 nifies the action before spoken of ; a?, we often speak ill of absent 
 people, ivbicb is base; on park sewvent mat del absent, cela est indigne. 
 Ceci generally signifies the action which is going to be mentioned ; .as, 
 this is like to surprise you, a man died a hundred and ten years old "j 
 Ceci va %-eus surprendre, un bommt qui murut age de cent dix anw 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns, exemplified for the 
 Scholar's Practice. 
 
 [1.] Show me that beok # Montrez-moi ce livre. 
 
 Give me that pen. Donnez-moi cette plume. 
 
 These houses are very fine. Ces maisons sont tres-belles. 
 
 These ladies have a great Ces dames sont tr£s-spirr- 
 
 deal of wit. tuelles. 
 
 [2.] Tint man is very fan- Cet homme est tres-fantas- 
 
 tastical. que. 
 
 That child is very amiable. Cet enfant est tres-aimable. 
 
 Do you know what has hap- Savez-vcus ce qui lui est ar- 
 
 pened to him [or her]? rive ? 
 
 Has she shown you ivhat Vous a-t-elle montre ce 
 
 was given to her ? ou'on lui a donnc ?, 
 
 Yoii will never guess what Vous ne devinerez jamais 
 
 was sard of you. ce ou on a dit de vous. 
 
 Guess what they are about . Devir.cz ce qu'\\% font. 
 
iS4 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 I know what you say. 
 
 1 know what makes you 
 angry. 
 
 He does not know what you 
 have written, 
 
 [3.] That man makes him- 
 self beloved by every 
 body. 
 
 These people are in the 
 right. 
 
 Those women are very ca- 
 pricious. 
 
 That man is in the wrong. 
 
 Those apples are good for 
 nothing. 
 
 Give me some of those pears. 
 
 [4.] He who betrays his 
 friend is unwerthy of 
 friendship. 
 
 They who despise learning 
 do not know the value 
 of it. 
 
 He who shuns company is a 
 stranger to the charms of 
 society. 
 
 She 'who loves nobody does 
 not taste the pleasures of 
 friendship. 
 
 Such as are enemies to vir- 
 tue, are stragers to it. 
 
 Such as are idle, do not 
 know the value of tim,e. 
 
 [$•] They who are con- 
 tented with their lot are 
 happy. 
 
 He who does not study will 
 never be learned. 
 
 He who did it was pu- 
 nished. . 
 
 Je sais ce que vous ditei. 
 Je sais ce qui vous fache/ 
 
 II ne sait pas ce que vous 
 
 avez ecrit. 
 Cet homme-Az se fait aimer 
 
 de tout le monde. 
 
 Ces gens-r/ ont raison. 
 
 Ces femmes-/<z sont tres-ca- 
 
 pricieuses. 
 Cet homme-Za a tort. 
 Ces pommes-Za ne valent 
 
 rien. 
 Donne z-moi de ces poires-/*. 
 Celui qui trahit son ami est 
 
 indigne d'amitie. 
 
 Ceux qui meprisent la scien- 
 ce, n'en connoissent pas 
 
 1c prix. 
 Celui qui evite la compagnie, 
 
 ne connoit pas les charmes 
 
 de la societe. 
 Celle qui n'aime personne, 
 
 ne goute pas les plaisirs^ 
 
 de l'amirie. 
 Ceux qui sont ennemis de la 
 
 vertu, ne la connoissent . 
 
 pas. 
 Ceux qui sont paresseux, ne 
 
 connoissent pas le prix du 
 
 temps. 
 dux qui sont contens de 
 
 leur sort, sont heureux. 
 
 Celui qui n'etudie pas, ne 
 
 sera jamais savant. 
 Celui qui a i&it ccla a c;e 
 
 puni. 
 
 S 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 I ley who have written their 
 themes have been re- 
 warded, 
 
 Thtj who seem to be happy- 
 are not always so. 
 
 We should ever remember 
 
 the cares of those, by 
 
 ivbom we were brought 
 
 up. 
 We ought to encourage the 
 
 endeavours of those, who 
 
 apply themselves to the 
 
 arts and sciences. 
 [6.] What makes him angry 
 
 h her bad humour. 
 What an honest man ought 
 
 to bewail is the loss of 
 
 time. 
 What grieves him /; not to 
 
 have succeeded. 
 
 What rejoices me is to have 
 seen you and your family 
 in good health. 
 
 [7.] What I say to you is 
 
 true. 
 What she said to yoa is 
 
 false. 
 What you have told me is 
 
 surprising. 
 [8.] Does this please you ? 
 Does that make you angry ? 
 That surprises me. 
 What do you think of it f 
 I neysr thought of that. 
 Keep this, and give me that. 
 
 Did you write that? 
 1 do not like that. 
 That is wonderful. 
 
 ,85 
 
 Ceux qui ont fait leurs 
 themes ont etc recom- 
 penses. 
 
 Ceux qui paroissent etre 
 heureux, ne le sont pas 
 tou jours. 
 
 Nousdevrions toujours nous 
 souvenir des soins de ceux 
 par qui nous avons ete 
 eleves. 
 
 On doit encourager les ef- 
 forts de ceux qui s'appli- 
 quent aux arts et aux 
 sciences. 
 
 Ce qui le fache, cest sa mau- 
 vaise humeur. 
 
 Ce qu'wn honnete homme 
 doit regretter, c J est la 
 perte du temps. 
 
 Ce qui le fache, e'est de n'a- 
 voir pas reussi, ou e'est 
 qu'il n'a pas reussi. 
 
 Ce qui me rejouit, e'est de 
 vous avoir vu* vous et 
 toute votre famille, en 
 bonne same. 
 
 Ce que je vous dis est vrai. 
 
 Ce ^'elle vous a dit est 
 
 faux. 
 Ce que vous m'avez dit est 
 
 surprenant. 
 Ceci vous plait-il ? 
 Ce/n vous fache- t-il ? 
 Cela me surprend. 
 Que pensez-vous de cela ? 
 Je n'ai jamais pense a cela. 
 Gardez ceci et donnez-moi 
 
 eel 1 . 
 Avovous ecrit cela? 
 Je n'aime pas cela. 
 Cela est admirable,, 
 
>M A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 i. 1 he relative pronoun qui is the nominative, and que 
 the accusative, in speaking of all sorts of objects ; as, the 
 stone which is here, la pkrre qui est ici ; the house that 
 you see, la nmisoii q ; ue <vous vov-czr 
 
 Except mat qui is used in the accusative case instead of que, when it 
 signifies that person ; as, je sals qui vous aimex, I know whom you love, 
 or what person you love $ and when it is governed by a preposition ; 
 as, en qui, sue qui, ai/a' qui, &c. In the last case, Uquel, &c. may like- 
 wise be used. 
 
 2 t When qui is in the second ease, or comes after any 
 preposition whatever, it is applied only to persons, or 
 objects used as persons ; and therefore it vvmild be a 
 fault to say, e'eit la maison de qui je vous ai parle' y it is 
 the house of which I have f spoken to you* In this case 
 we make use of duquel, de laqttelle, &c. or dont y which fs 
 used equally for all objects, and often more properly tharv 
 de quf, or duquely de lciquelle> [8cc. ; as, e'est la muison dent 
 je *vouim par lev 
 
 3. A qui is sometimes used in speaking of animate ob- 
 jects, though they are not persons, or objects used cis 
 persons ; but as we can never err By making use of au~ 
 quel, alaqutUe^ oVc.,. I would advise the learner to do so. 
 
 4. The relative pronoun, though not expressed in Eng.- 
 fish, must always be expressed in French ; as, the man 
 you see, I hqmme que vous njojez; the book you speak of> 
 U li-ore dont <vous parLz. 
 
 5. Lequely laquelhy &c, are to be used instead of qui, 
 isr, when 7/// is equivocal : zdly, when the relative pro- 
 noun is in the second ca«e after a substantive;, as, a cou- 
 rier has "been sent to court, at whose return . . . on a in* 
 <voje un courrur d la cour, au rctcur duquel . , • jdly, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. i<; 
 
 "-hen the relative pronoun expresses a choice; as, which 
 will y&a pee ? lequel, or laqoelle, voukzr-uous voir ? 
 
 6. Speaking of things, in *tohkb'f itt what, to which, 
 a! nvbkb, at what, in the sense of where, wherein, or when r 
 arc rendered in French by cu instead of dans lequely la. 
 quelle, &c % as, the house in which, or where he lives, la 
 mtiison oil il demeure ; the end at which he aims, le bni Oa 
 /'/ tend ; the century in which he lived, le siecle ou il c vi r uoit. 
 From which, frQ?nwhnt, are rendered by d'eu instead- of 
 duqnel, de laqudle, Sec, : as, the country from which' L 
 come, le pajs d'ou je w'ens. Through which* by which, 
 are rendered by far cil } or par lequel, 6cc\ 
 
 7. The relative pronoun quoi is used only in speaking 
 of inanimate objects. 
 
 A quoi must always be used when it has for it's ante- 
 cedent ce and the verb Sire, or rien, and is followed" by. 
 a nounj or verb governing the third case ; as, it is to that 
 I apply myself, e'est a quoi je m* applique ; there is no- 
 thing, to which I am not disposed, il n'j a rien a quoiyV 
 ne sois dispose, 
 
 8. De quoi is used when it follows immediately ce and 
 the verb etre, and is followed by a noun, or a verb go- 
 verning the second case ; as, it is that. I complain of, Vest 
 de quoi je me plains. But after rien we make use of 
 dont ; at least it is a great deal better; as, there is no- 
 thing in the world of which God is not the author,, il n'y 
 € rien au muhde dont Dieu ne soil l auteur* 
 
 1 
 
 9. O-bs. ^5/ may likewise be used instead of lequel, laqueUe y &c. 
 after a preposition governing it, such a% :ur, in, a£res t a"ViC, &c. ; as, 
 the reason I rely upon, la raisin sur quti je rr.efcntie. 
 
 'However,- in mo>t circumstance, auyuc', duquel, sar lequeU &c, 
 may r anil even must be used j but these practice alone can tsach. 
 
 10. Obs. <$ue is used instead of de qui and a qui. It happens not 
 enly when the second or third case of a personal jionoun comes im- 
 mediately before ir, but likewise after any other noun, when the sen* 
 tence begins with ce and cire : as, it is to you that I speak, e'est a vous 
 yue je park; it is to hapfiuets that I aspire, t % cs au mbettf %u* 
 
i'88 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 j* 1 aspire : it is from the public, that I expect approbation, c'est du pu- 
 blic que j* attends V approbation. 
 
 The true rule for distinguishing this is when que has the l unification 
 of the conjunction that, nor of Svb'cb, as you may see by the foregoing 
 examples: by this rule there is no danger of being mistaken. Hence 
 it may appear, that in such c^ses que is to be looked upon as conjunc- 
 tion, rather than a relative pronoun. 
 
 Relative Pronouns, exemplified for the Scholar $ 
 Practice. 
 
 [i.] It is the Lady <wbo 
 
 spoke to you. 
 Speak to this Gentleman 
 
 nahb is here. 
 Is this the new hat which 
 
 you bought ? 
 The book which you lent 
 
 me is very well written. 
 I know whom you mean. 
 You do not know who it is. 
 Do you know whom I love ? 
 I know whom she loves. 
 [2.] He is a friend in whom 
 
 I put my confidence. 
 He is a person to whom you 
 
 may confide. 
 She is a Lady against whom 
 
 nothing can be said with 
 
 truth. 
 I know the person to whom 
 
 you were talking. 
 It is the man of whom I 
 
 spoke to you. 
 [3]. The dog of which they 
 
 have cut the ears. 
 There is a bird to which it 
 
 is necessary to give some- 
 thing to eat. 
 [4.] It is the horse he spoke 
 
 to you about. 
 [5.] She is a woman in 
 
 Cost la Dame qui vous a 
 
 parle. 
 Parlez a ce Monsieur qui 
 
 est ici. 
 Est-ce la le chapeau neuf 
 
 que vous avez achete ? 
 Le livre que vous m'avez 
 
 prete est tres-bien ecrit. 
 Je sais qui vous voulez dire. 
 Vous ne savez pas qui e'est. 
 Savez-vous qui j'aime ? 
 Je sais qui elle aime. 
 C'est un ami en qui je mets 
 
 ma confiance. 
 C'est une personne a qui on 
 
 peut se fier. 
 C'est une Demoiselle contre 
 
 qui on ne peut mal parler 
 
 avec verite. 
 Je connois la personne a<vec 
 
 qui vous avez pnrle. 
 C'est rhomme de qui, ou 
 
 dont je vous ai parle. 
 Le chien a qui, ou a u quel on 
 
 a coupe les oreilles. 
 Voila un oiseau a qui, ou 
 
 auqucl il fa ut donner a 
 
 manger. 
 C'est le cheval duquel, ou 
 
 dont il vous a parle. 
 C'est une femme sur la con* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 189 
 
 •whote behaviur there is 
 nothing to censure. 
 
 He is a merchant whose ho- 
 nour and probity cannot 
 be doubted. 
 
 [6 ] The circumstances you 
 are in. 
 
 The danger he is in. 
 
 The end she aims at. 
 
 The house where she lives. 
 
 He has the same frame of 
 mind and the same senti. 
 ments, which he has al- 
 ways haa 
 
 I know the place whence 
 you come. 
 
 These are the reasons from 
 which I conclude. 
 
 These are his discourses by 
 which he insinuates. 
 
 Thii is the city through 
 which I have passed. 
 
 I know the means by which 
 he has gained his point. 
 
 [7.] It is what I am think- 
 ing about. 
 
 It was what he applied him- 
 self/0. 
 
 It was what she exhorted 
 him to. 
 
 I will think about it. 
 
 There is nothing in which 
 I am not ready to oblige 
 you. 
 
 [8. ] That is the matter in 
 question. 
 
 It is what he complains of. 
 
 It is what 1 am sorry for. 
 There is nothing I am more 
 sorry for. 
 
 There is nothing he com- 
 plains of more. 
 
 duite de la quelle il n'y a 
 rien a red ire. 
 
 C'est un negociant sur l'hon- 
 neur et la probite duquel 
 il ne peut y avoir de doute. 
 
 Les circonstances cu vous 
 etes. 
 
 Le danger ok il se trouve. 
 
 Le but ou elle vise. 
 
 La maison oh elle demeure. 
 
 H est dans la meme disposi- 
 tion d'esprit, et dans les 
 memes sentimens, ou il a 
 toujours ete. 
 
 Je sais la place d'ou vous 
 venez. 
 
 Voila les raisons d'ou je con- 
 chas. 
 
 Voila. ses discours far ou il 
 insinue. 
 
 Voila la ville par ou j'ai 
 passe. 
 
 Je sais les moyens par cu \\ 
 parvint a ses fins. 
 
 C'est a quoi je pense. 
 
 C'etoit a quoi il s'appliquoit* 
 
 C'etoit a quoi elle l'exhor- 
 
 toit. 
 C'est a quoi je penserai. 
 II n'y a rien a quoi je ne 
 
 sois dispose pour vous 
 
 obliger. 
 Voila de quoi il s'agit. 
 
 C'est de quoi il se plaint. 
 C'est de quoi je suis fache. 
 II n'y a rien dont'yt sois plus 
 
 fache. 
 II n'y a rien dont il se plaigne 
 
 davant^ge. 
 
igo 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 There is 4io tiling that he is 
 
 not capable or". 
 [9.] I do nor see upon what 
 
 his discourse is grounded. 
 It is what you may rely on. 
 
 It is an argument to which 
 there is no answer. 
 
 Death is an evil for which 
 
 there is no remedy. 
 Idleness is a vice to which 
 
 young people are much 
 
 inclined. 
 This is the reason upon 
 
 which I am grounded. 
 It is the happiness to which 
 
 I aspire. 
 These are the -reasons by 
 
 wfjich I convinced him. 
 {10.] It is to you that I 
 
 shall speak. 
 It is to her that I had pro- 
 mised it. 
 It is from his friend that he 
 
 has received so many fa- 
 vours. 
 it is his brother that he 
 
 complains of. 
 It was by my friend that I 
 
 was betrayed. 
 It is to continual study that 
 
 your brother owes his 
 
 great learning. 
 It is to my sister that you 
 
 have given it. 
 It is to her that you have 
 
 spoken. 
 It is from her that I expect 
 
 that favour. 
 
 II n'y a rien do at il ne soit 
 
 cap.ible. 
 Je ne vols pas sur quoi son 
 
 discours peut etre fonde. 
 Cest sur quoi vous pouvez 
 
 compter. 
 Cest un raisonnement att- 
 
 quei il n'y a point de re- 
 
 ponse. 
 La mort est un mal auquel 
 
 liny- a point de remede«, 
 La paresse est un vice au- 
 quel les jeunes gens sont 
 
 tres-en-clins. 
 Cest la raison sur laquclle 
 
 je me fendc. 
 Cest le bonheur apres Je- 
 
 quel j' a spire. 
 Ce sont les raisons a<vec let- 
 
 quelle s je lat convaincu. 
 Ce.rt a vous que je parlerai. 
 
 Cest a elle que je l^avois 
 
 pro mis. 
 Cest de son ami qu'il a recu 
 
 tant d'amities. 
 
 Cest de son frere ^*'il se 
 
 plaint. 
 Ce fut par mon -ami que je 
 
 fus trahi. 
 Cest a une etude continu- 
 
 elle que votre frere doit 
 
 ses grandes connoissances. 
 Cest a ma sccur que vous 
 
 f'avcz donne. 
 Cost a elle que vous avez 
 
 parle. 
 Cest d'clle que j* at tends 
 
 cette giace. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. i 9 i 
 
 It is to trade 'that he ap~ C'est au commerce qu'W. 
 
 plies himself. s'applique. 
 
 It is to the protection of C'est a li protection de ses 
 
 friends that he owes his amis qif'A doit sa fortune. 
 
 fortune. 
 
 It is by the public that he is C'est du public qu'il est ap. 
 
 approved. prouve. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Interrogatory Pronouns. 
 
 i. Que, as interrogative, is applied only to things, and 
 f&s only to parsons ; as, what do you say ? que dites-vous ?\, 
 for whom are you looking ? qui cherchez^vous f Both are 
 used in all their cases as above. 
 
 2 « G vr,/ *> interrogative, is used after a preposition ; as, 
 upon what are you grounded ? $ur quoi vous fo7idez~ r Jous / \i 
 about what do you busy yourself? -de quoi *mm melez- 
 *vou$ f. 
 
 3. If prar be not immediately followed by a verb, it 
 may sometimes be used in the first case ; as, what is there 
 greater r quoi de plus grand? It sometimes expresses only 
 an emotion of the mind ; as, how / you are angry ! quoi! 
 *vo:ts c'tes fachef 
 
 4-. Qj^h quelle y &c, are said of persons and things. 
 It is to be observed, that quel is always followed by it's 
 substantive; as, what man is it? quel ho?7i?7ie est-re ? 
 Except when the noun was expressed before ; as, this is 
 my opinion; what is yours ? <voiIa mon sentiment; quel 
 tjt le voire ? 
 
 5. Lequel, &c, is also said of persons and things ; it is 
 always followed by a genitive expressed or understood; 
 as, which of the two will you have ? lequel des denxvou- 
 hz^uous P Ojtel answers to 'what : lequel > to which. 
 
 6. Whose y signifying to whom a thing belongs, is trans- 
 lated into F#nch by the dative, a qui ; as, whose house 
 is that ? a qui est cette maiSQU? 
 
l$2 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Interrogatory Pronowis exemplified for the Scholar *'& 
 Practice. 
 
 [ i .] What do you say ? 
 What do you want ? 
 What do you ask for ? 
 What do you fear ? 
 What is the matter ? 
 
 What shall we do ? 
 For whom are you looking ? 
 Who has done that ? 
 Who spoke to you f 
 Whom do you suspect ? 
 
 From whom have you that 
 news ? 
 
 Who is come ? 
 
 To whom do you give the 
 preference ? 
 
 [2.] Why do you concern 
 yourself? 
 
 Of what does she complain ? 
 
 What is the matter ? 
 
 Why so much ado ? 
 
 Tq what do you apply your- 
 self? 
 
 How do you spend your 
 time ? 
 
 What can she expect ? 
 
 Of what is he talking ? 
 
 Far what is she so angry ? 
 
 Que * dites-vous ? 
 
 Que souhaitez.vous ? 
 
 Que demandez-vous ? 
 
 Que craignez-vous ? 
 
 Qu' est-ce que e'est? or Qji'esi* 
 re qu'il j a P 
 
 Que ferons-nous ? 
 
 Quiir cherchez-vous ? 
 
 Qui a fait eel a ? 
 
 Qui est.ee qui vous a parle ? 
 
 Qui est-ce que vous soupcon- 
 nez ? 
 
 De qui tenez-vous cette 
 nouvelle ? 
 
 Qui est-ce qui est venxi ? 
 
 A qui donnez-vous la prefe- 
 rence ? 
 
 De quoi vous melez-vous ? 
 
 De quoi se plaint-elle ? 
 De quoi s'agit-il ? 
 A quoi bon tant de fa cons ? 
 A quoi vous appliquez-vous ? 
 
 A quoi passez-vous le temp> ? 
 
 A quoi peut-elle s'attendre ? 
 
 De quoi parle-t.il ? 
 
 De qui e sue lie si lachee ? 
 
 * Observe here, that instead of que, we often make use of qu\*st- 
 it que. In this case the personal pronoun comes before the verb. 
 
 + Instead of qui % ■■ this and similar interrogation, it is equally 
 proper to use qui est-ce qui in the nominative, and qui est-ce que in 
 the accusative j in this case the perse al pronoun is put btfore tki 
 verb. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 Of what are they so jealous ? 
 T§ what do you impute the 
 
 fault ? 
 How shall we spend our 
 
 time ? 
 [3.] What is there more glo- 
 rious than to die for our 
 
 country ? 
 Mow ! would you deceive 
 
 me ? 
 [4.] What man spoke to 
 
 you ? 
 What woman have you 
 
 seen ? 
 What lace has she bought ? 
 
 What books have you read ? 
 What sort of shirts does he 
 
 wear ? 
 This is my opinion ; what is 
 
 his? 
 This is your advice ; what 
 
 is hers ? 
 It was her sentiment ; what 
 
 was yours ? 
 What grammar do you read ? 
 [5*.] Of all the grammars 
 
 which have been printed, 
 
 to which do you give the 
 
 preference ? 
 There are apples and pears ; 
 
 which do you like best ? 
 
 Which of these two oranges 
 will you have ? 
 
 Which of these two ladies do 
 you think the handsomest ? 
 
 Which of all the gramma- 
 rians has written mgst 
 clearly and precisely ? 
 
 *9J 
 
 De quoi sont-ils si jaloux ? 
 A quoi attribuez-vous la 
 
 faute ? 
 A quoi nous amuserons-nous ? 
 
 Quoi de plus gtorieux que 
 de mourir pour notre pa- 
 trie ? 
 
 Quoi! voudriez-vous me 
 tromper ? 
 
 Quel homme vous a parle f 
 
 Quelle femmeavez-vous vue ? 
 
 Quelle dentelle a-t-elle ache- 
 tee \ 
 Quels livres avez-vous lus ? 
 Qaelles chemises porte-t-il ? 
 
 Voila mon opinion ; quelle 
 
 est la sierme t 
 Voila votre avis \.quel est le 
 
 sien ? 
 C'ecoit son sentiment ; quel 
 
 etoit le votre \ 
 ^/^//^grammairelisez-vous ? 
 De tontes les grarnmair« 
 
 qui ont ete imprim&s, & 
 
 laquelle don nez- vous la 
 
 preference ? 
 Voila des pommes et das 
 
 poires ; lesquelUs aimez. 
 
 vous le mieux ? 
 Laqudle de ces deux oranges 
 
 voulez-vous? 
 Laqutlle de ces deux dames 
 
 trouvez-vous la plus belle ? 
 Lequel de tous les grammai- 
 
 riens a eerie le plus clai- 
 
 rement, et avec le ptus de 
 
 precision ? 
 
 K 
 
194 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Which of the books you Des livres que vous avez las; 
 have read do you think fttqueh trouvez-vous les 
 the most useful ? plus utiles ? 
 
 [6.] Whose penknife is this ? A qui est ce canif ? 
 
 Whose pen is this ? A qui est cette plume ? 
 
 Whose hat is this ? A qui est ce chapeau ? 
 
 Whose garden is this ? A qui est ce jardin ? 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 Indefinite or Indeterminate Pronouns. 
 
 i. Pas un, aucun, nul, are three negative pronouns, 
 having the signification of no person or nothing, and 
 require the particle ne before the verb; as: nobody 
 spoke of it; aucun^ ox pas un, or nul n'en a parle'; no- 
 body knows it ; aucun, or pas un, or nul ne le salt. 
 
 Nulls never used in an interrogation ; for we do not say, vul ne It 
 
 salt-il f 
 
 2. Or.s. Aucun is sometimes used without a negation, in phrases of 
 interrogation or doubt. In such a case it may be rendered by quel- 
 quun ; as; of all those who know my reasons, is there any one who 
 ha3 blamed me ? de tous eeux qui savent mes raisons, y en a-t-il aucun 
 qui iii* ait blame'? 
 
 3. Obs. When aucun and mil are followed by a second case, or a 
 substantive either expressed or understood, they must be in the same 
 gender as that second case or substantive, but not in the same num- 
 ber; as: none of them has been there, aucun d y eux, speaking of men,- 
 or sucutie d'cl/es, speaking of women, n'y a ete. These thiee pronouns, 
 used as pronouns, have no plural. 
 
 4. Nul and aucun are sometimes to be looked upon as 
 adjectives : this happens when they are joined to a sub- 
 stantive ; as, he yields to no reason, il ne se rend a 
 aucune raisoni she has no pleasure, elle n'a aucun plaisir. 
 iV.v/may likewise be used, but aucun in such a case is far 
 better. 
 
 5. Obs. AV is also a law term signifying void; in such a case it 
 has a plural, if the noun be in the plural; as: the proceedings are 
 void, Us procedures sent nulles. 
 
 6. Chacuuy each, signifies every person or thing, has 
 no plural, is indifferently applied to persons and things, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 195 
 
 and follows the gender of the norm to which it is joined, 
 or relates ; as, each of these two women has seen it ? cf:a~ 
 C€ine de cet deuxfemmes I 3 a "vu: 
 
 Obs. If the noun be a collective one, and cannot be divided by 
 one or two, chacun is put in the tnacuiine gender, though the collec- 
 tive noun be feminine ; as: the Commons withdrew, each of them t* 
 their own home,; les communes le retirerent, chacun che-z sci. 
 
 N, B. Custom does no # t allow us t<r say un chacun^ instead of chacun* 
 
 7. Persemte signifies nobody, has no plural, is always 
 X)f the masculine gender, and is attended "by the particle 
 tie before* the verb ; as, nobody saw it, personne tt* 
 
 8. Oas. Whfert p&stinne signifies any body, and is not preceded by 
 an adverb of denial ; such as ^ not, never, &c, the particle ne must be 
 'omitted ; as, did evrr any bo-ly find the phiIsopher*s stone ? per* 
 -Sonne a-t-il jamais tr.uz/ la perre pbihsopbaic ? This way of speak- 
 ing in>inuates ? that you do notbdieve the thing concerning which yon 
 inquire. Take care not to confound this pronoun with the noun 
 substantive ; a person, une personney the person, la penomte, which is 
 always feminine. 
 
 9. Tout has many significations-: it sometimes sig* 
 nifies, all, every, or the whole. When it is joined to a 
 €ubstantive, it requires the 'definite article before the 
 following noun, notwithstanding its having before it de 
 or a ; as, the whole house,* toute la ?nmson .• of the 
 whole house, de toute la maison ; to the whole house, a 
 ttute la mauoju 
 
 10- The pronoun tout, used by itself, is always put in 
 the masculine singular ; as : almost every thing is uncer- 
 tain in this world : presque, tout est incertain dam le 
 tnonde^ Sometimes it has the signification of chaque ; as: 
 every day, tcus hs jours ; every moment, a tout moment^ 
 Sec. But we say, a chaque instant^ a chaque 7ninute i every 
 instant, every minute. 
 
 ii. Ons. Tout sometimes signifies although-, followed by a wori 
 denoting the quality, office, dignity, trade, calling, circumstance, Sec, 
 of the object ; in such a case, the word denoting such quality, &c , 
 which is placed after the verb in English, must be placed in French 
 immediately . alter hut, and must be followed by que ; as : though be 
 
R,<5 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 38 learned, he mistakes sometimes, tout savant quV/ est, U se trompe 
 qudquefois. When tout is rendered by blen que, or quoique, the verb 
 must be put in the subjunctive mood ; as, bien quo, or quoiqu'il soit, 
 savant, &c, 
 
 12. Obs. When the word that comes after the verb does not de- 
 note the quality of the subject, then, notwithstanding, or although must 
 be rendered in French by bien que, or quoique \ as, although you make 
 use of this physician, bien que, or quoique vous vous servie% de ce medecin. 
 
 13. Obs. Tout, in the sense of although, is indeclinable, except be- 
 fore a noun feminine beginning with a consonant. 
 
 14. Obs. Tout sometimes signifies quite, entirely; as, she is in 
 every respect lovely ; eile est tout aimable. In this sense it is likewise 
 declinable only before a noun feminine beginning with a consonant. 
 
 15. Obs. When nen signifies nothing, or not any thing, the particle 
 tie must be placed before the verb; as, I have seen nothing prettier, 
 je rCtii rien <vu de piuz beau. 
 
 But when it signifies any thing, and is not preceded by an adverb 
 of denial, the particle nt is omitted ; as, have you ever seen any thing 
 so beautiful ? a*voz-vous jamais rien vu de si beau f 
 
 16. Plust'eurs signifies many or several. It is always 
 plural ; as several have believed, that the world was 
 eternal , plusieurs ont cru le monde eterneL It is some* 
 tim^s an adjective ; as, many friends, plusieurs amis. It 
 is declined with the indefinite articles de and a. 
 
 17. Obs. Autre, other, is sometimes an adjective; as, another 
 book, un i.utre li-vre ; sometimes a substantive, when it is preceded by 
 en, to which it has relation ; as, 'fen conncis un autre, I know another : 
 sometimes a pronoun ; as, another than you, un autre que vouu—Autrui 
 our neighbour, others, or other people, is more commonly used in the 
 second and third cases ; as, of others, toothers, d^autrui, a autrui.— 
 Ni run ni FauU-e, neither the one nor the other, will have the verb in 
 the plural, whether it come after or before; as, neither the one nor 
 th£ other knows the reason of it, ni Tun ni 1'autre, rfcn savent la raison ; 
 Us n'en savent /# raison ni Tun ni rautre.— L'un Pautre, one the other, 
 one another, is used to express the mutual action of two objects on 
 each other, and consequently it is always reciprocal ; as, they love one 
 another, Us s'aimtnt Tun Pautre. The first is always in the first case.— 
 l?un tt Fautrt, the one and the other, or both, has a different meaning : 
 it signifies the union of two ebjects already mentioned ; as, both are in 
 the wrong ; ih ont tort Vun et I 'autre or Pun ft P 'autre ont tort ; it always 
 governs the plural. Both of these tw© words are declined with the 
 definite article. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. T97 
 
 Take notice, that Pun I* autre comes always after the verb ; >;/ fato 
 m Pautre, and Pun et Pautre, in the first case, go indifferently befope 
 or after, with this difference, that, when they are put after, the per- 
 sonal pronoun goes always before the verb, though noc expressed in 
 English; and, when they are before the verb, the personal pronoun 
 is omitted, though expressed in English ; as, they are both in the 
 wrong, or both are in the wrong j Us ont tort Pun et I* autre? or Pun et 
 P autre ont tort, 
 
 18. Qjie[que y some, signifies in fhe singular, that the 
 object is taken indeterminately : as, he is always read- 
 ing some good book, il lit toujour* quelque ban livre. la- 
 the plural, it expresses an indeterminate number of ob- 
 jects ; as, he is addicted to some vices, */ est adonne « 
 quelque* vices* 
 
 19. Obs. Sometimes quelque signifies not the indeterminate number,, 
 but the indeterminate quality or quantity of things, and answers th* 
 English expressions, whatever, although, though, ever so much y Sec. i 
 is, although they are learned, quelque savaus qu'ds silent. $%ueiqui y 
 taken in this sense, has no plural before adjectives, unless they aie. 
 immediately followed by their substantive ; as, though they seem ever 
 so rich, quelque riches quells far oissent j though he has penormed ever 
 so good actions, quelques belles actions, qu'il ait fait es. Hence it appears, 
 how much an author is mistaken, who says that, quelque can never 
 come before an adjective except with etre. 
 
 Observe, that quelque in this case is always followed by que, or qui t 
 which governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. 
 
 20. Obs. Quel que, whatever, s followed immediately by a verb 
 in the subjunctive mood. It must be separated into two words, and 
 then quel has both numbers and genders, and que is not repeated 
 in the following part of the sentence; as, whatever his intentions ap- 
 pear, quelles que parohsent ses intentions; whatever I am, quel que ft 
 soh j whatever they may be, (speaking of women) quelles v^elkt 
 fuissent etre 
 
 2 1, Quelqu'un, in the sense of somebody, or any body r 
 is used in all its cases in the singular masculine only ; a>, 
 somebody has told it to me, quelqu'un me I'a dst.. I know 
 it from somebody, /<> le sals de qiulqu'un; 1 have given 
 it to somebody, je l y ai donne a quelqu'wu However, 
 quelques-nns is used as the nominative of the verb ; a*, 
 seme persons have said it, quelques. tins I'ont dit. In the 
 other cases we make use of quelques personnel > and not 
 quelque s-uns* 
 
 22. Quelqu'un sometimes signifies an indeterminate part 
 of a number, and is then joined with the second, case ©£ 
 
 * 3 
 
i9« A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 some other noun expressed, or sufficiently tinderstood '; 
 ©r with the particle en instead of the second case ; in this 
 sense quelqu'nn is used in all the genders, numbers, and 
 cases ; as^ has any of these gentlemen heard any thing of 
 it? quelqu'un, or quelques-uns de ces Messieurs en an- 
 roit-il) or auroient.ils entendu pcirler ? Those are fine 
 flowers, give me some ; <voila de belles fours y donnex-m* en 
 quelques-unes. 
 
 23. Obs. When whatever has no relation either to an adjective or 
 a substantive, it must be rendered by quoi que, tout ce qui, tout ce que 5 
 as, whatever happens, quoi qu'i/ arrive', whatever you please, tout ce 
 quV vous piaira—Qui que is used only in the first case, whereas tout 
 ce qui> tout ce que, are used in all their cases. Observe, that quci que 
 ee soit (whatever it maybe) is likewise used in all its cases; as, of 
 whatever he may speak, de quoi que ce soit qu*/7 parte ; to whatever he 
 may apply himself a quoi que ce soit qu*i7 s' 'applique : this last pronoun, 
 when followed by a verb, requires that verb in the subjunctive mood 
 with que before it, as may be seen by the foregoing example. 
 
 Qui que ce -olt, in a sentence with the particle ne before the veib, 
 ■ signities nothing at all, or nothing whatever: as he talks of nothing 
 whatever j U ne parle de quoi que ce soit. 
 
 14. Obs. Qui que ce soit, whoever, or whatever person, is used in 
 all it's cases; as, from whomever he may have learned it, de qui que 
 ce soit qu'il Pait appris ; to whomever he may address himself, a qui 
 que ce soit qu'd s'adresse. When this pronoun belongs to a sentence 
 wherein ne precedes the verb, it stands for nobody whatever; as, I 
 shall speak of it to nobody whatever, je n % en parlerai a qui que ce soit. 
 Hence it appears, that quoi que ce soit is used for things only, and qui 
 yue ce soit for persons. 
 
 Observe, that instead 01 qui que ce soit que, in the sense of who- 
 ever, or whatever person, it is often more elegant to use only qui pie ; 
 as, whomever you may sec, qui que vous voyhz, except beiore the pro- 
 nouns U% ds } to avoid ti,e hard sound qui q-uiL 
 
 25. Ob?. Qui que ce scit, in the sense of quicenque, whoever, or what- 
 ever person, must always be followed by i/, elle, &c, or qui, ;.nd 
 sometimes by both: as: whoever it may be, he will be discovered, 
 «iui que ce soit, il sera de'eeuvert : whoever deceives me shall be dis- 
 covered, qui que ce soit qui me trempe, il sera d? convert : but alter qui. 
 cov.que il and qui are omitted; as, quiconque m$ (romper*, sen* de.cu* 
 iert, ;\nd not;/ sera, ccc. 
 
 26. Metre is sometimes an adjective ; as, the same au- 
 thor, le me me auteur : sometimes it answers to self in 
 , English; as, myself, vwi-mem: in these two senses ic 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 199 
 
 has a plural*: sometimes it answers to even in English; 
 as, even this book, ce li*vre me me. 
 
 27. Je ne sais qui, I do not know who, is used in all it's 
 cases in the singular only for persons. Je ne sais quoi, I 
 do not know what, is u^ed in all its eases lor things only 
 in the singular. Je ne sais quel is used in all its num- 
 ber-, cases, and genders, speaking of persons or things, 
 and is always followed by a substantive. 
 
 28. They, people, men, we, &c, are sometimes ren- 
 dered by en ; as, they, or people, talk ; on parle ; may I 
 know r peut-on sansoir ? 
 
 Sometimes on signifies it: in th'rs case the verb, which is in Eng- 
 lish in the passive voice, must he changed in French into" the active j 
 as, it is hoped, oneSpere\ it was said, on <iisoit.~ Farrfier, a* the 
 passive voice is seldom used in French, in such a case the noun, ov 
 pronoun, which is the object of the passive verb. in Fngiish, mifef 
 be made the object of the verb in French, and the passive verb rncne 
 be changed in o the active, and put into the same tense as in Ivnglhh : 
 as, great rejoicings have been made this week j on a fail cttie umairfc 
 de grandes r/jouissances, instead of de grandes rejomssancts ont eie 
 fades. 
 
 Indeterminate Pronouns exemplified for the Scho~ 
 lav's Practice. 
 
 [1.] Nobody spoke to him, Aucun, pas un, ou nul ne 
 
 lui a parle. 
 Nobody knows it. Aucuk, fas un, ou nul ne 
 
 le sait. 
 Nobody has seen it. Aucun, pas nn, ou nul ne 
 
 l'a vu. 
 Nobody can boast of it, Aucun pas tin, ou nul ne 
 
 peut s'en vanter. 
 Of all the grammars I am a De toutes les grammaires, 
 slave to none. je ne m* attache a eu- 
 
 cune. 
 I never saw any of them. Je n'en ai jamais* vu un, ou 
 
 aucun, and not nnh 
 Did you ever see any one, En avez-vous jamais vu un 9 
 who . . . ? ou aucun qui . , . ? and 
 
 not nuL 
 
 * See rule 22, of the personal pronouns, at the end of page 170* 
 K 4 
 
2 CO 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 [2.] Is there any one, who 
 can blame roe ? 
 
 Is there any one, who has 
 seen it? 
 
 [3.] I have not read any of 
 the books you lent me. 
 
 I did not see any of the la- 
 dies you spoke of. 
 
 I knew none of those mer^ 
 -chants, 
 
 I saw none of them, 
 
 [4.] He has no resj. 
 
 She has no uneasiness of 
 
 mind. 
 1 have no interest in it, 
 
 [$.] The sentence was an- 
 nulled. 
 
 All their privileges are an- 
 nulled. 
 
 [6 ] Every one lives after 
 h : s own n winner. 
 
 All men are faulty. 
 
 All men desi e to be happy. 
 
 Every one ot them was sur- 
 prised. 
 
 I know two ladies ; they 
 have, each of them two 
 thousand pounds a year. 
 
 The two clerks have, each 
 of them, written four let- 
 
 ■ ters. 
 
 The commons withdrew, 
 each of them to hi* own 
 lpine* 
 
 3 
 
 Y en a-t-il aucun qui puisjt 
 me blamer ? 
 
 Y en a-t-il aucun qui Pait 
 vu ? 
 
 Je n'ai lu aucun des livres 
 
 que vou6 m'ave* pretes. 
 Je n'ai vu aucune des Dames 
 
 dont vous avez parl«. 
 Je ne connois aucun de ces 
 
 commercans. 
 Je n'ai vu aucun d'eux, for 
 
 the masculine i aucune 
 
 d'elles, for the feminine* 
 II n'a nul repos-~aucun ra- 
 
 pos. 
 Elle n'a nulle, ou aucune 
 
 inquietude d'esprit. 
 Je n'ai nul y ou aucun in. 
 
 teret en cela. 
 La sentence fut declaree 
 
 ?2ulle, 
 Tous leurs privileges sont 
 
 nuls, 
 Chacun vit a sa mode. 
 
 Chacun fait des fautes. 
 Chacun veut e'tc heureux. 
 Chacun d'eix fut surpris, 
 
 for the mosaiine: cha- 
 cune del les fut surprise, 
 for the fcmi?;ine, 
 
 Je cor.nois deux demoi- 
 selles : elles ont chrcunc 
 deux mille livres sterling 
 de rente. 
 
 Les deux commis ont ecrit 
 chacun quatre lettrcs. 
 
 Les Communes se retire- 
 rent chacun ches sou 
 
FRENCH TONGUE". 
 
 2©i 
 
 Each of the shires sends two 
 representatives to Parlia- 
 ment. 
 Put the books in order, and 
 put every one into it's 
 place. 
 \j.] Nobody talks of it,- 
 Nobody has seeayou. 
 Nobody has guessed the 
 
 meaning of the riddle^ 
 Nobiay knows it.. 
 Nobody suspected hen 
 She toid it to nobody,. 
 He mistrusts nobody. 
 She trusts nobody.. 
 [8.] Did ever any bodj know 
 all the properties of mat- 
 ter ? 
 Did ever any body seriously 
 doubt, of the existence of 
 God? 
 Did ever any man compre- 
 hend the mysteries of re- 
 ligion ?. 
 [9. 10.] ////is lost.. 
 AH is quiet now.. 
 Every thing in nature is lia- 
 ble to change, 
 He mistrusts every thing.. 
 She is frightened at every 
 
 shadow,. 
 He is capable of every thing. 
 Can a man be sure of every 
 
 thing? 
 Lam disposed for any thing 
 
 )o:i please. 
 He is fit for any thing. 
 They are against evtry thing. 
 I see her ; and speak, to her 
 
 tviry day. 
 Sine goes to the play almost 
 itvery evening, 
 
 Les provinces envoient cha- 
 cune deux deputes au 
 Parfement. 
 
 Arrangez les livres, et les 
 mettez chacun a sa places 
 
 Personne n'en parle. 
 Per sonne ne vous a vu. 
 Personne «'a devine 1'enig- 
 
 me. 
 Per sonne ne sait.- 
 Per sonne ne la soupconnjoit*- 
 Elle ne Pa dit ?l personne. 
 II ne se merle At per sonne. 
 Elle ne se fie a personne. 
 Per sonne a-t-il jamais connu' 
 
 toutes-les proprietes de la- 
 
 matiere ? 
 Personne a-t-il jamais doute. 
 
 serieusement de Pexis-- 
 
 tence de Dieu ? 
 Personne- a-t-il jamais com- 
 
 pris les mysteres de la 
 
 religion h- 
 Tout est perdu. 
 Tout est tranquille a present;. 
 Tout dans la nature est sujet 
 
 au changement. 
 II se merle de tout. 
 Elle est epouvantee de tout;. 
 
 II est capable de tout. 
 Peut-on etre.fcurde tout ^ 
 
 Je suis^ pret a tout ce qu'ili 
 
 vous ^I'iira. 
 II est p;opre a tout. 
 lis s'opposent a tout, 
 Je la vuis, et lui park :our> 
 
 les jours*- 
 Elle va a la cc.redre pres*- 
 
 que torn les sons,,. 
 
£0* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 He flies into a passion every II s'emporte a lout moment. 
 
 moment. 
 
 [l r, 12.] Though . he is Tt/*/ riche qu'W est, ou ^2/- 
 
 rich, he is not the more qu'il soit riche, il n'en est 
 
 contented. pas plus content. 
 
 Although he seems angry, he Tout fache qu'il paroir, on 
 
 is not really so. quoiqu'W paroisse iache, 
 
 ally 
 
 [13, 14.] She was quite 
 frightened. 
 
 She lives wholly in retire- 
 ment. 
 
 [ic.] I saw nothing more 
 extraordinary. 
 
 He applies himself to no- 
 thing. 
 
 Nothing is more surprising. 
 
 I do not suspect you of any 
 thing. 
 
 Is there any thing more 
 wonderful ? 
 
 I doubt whether any thing 
 he more useful. 
 
 qu 01 qu'il par 
 il ne 1'est pas. 
 Elle fut tout epouvantee. 
 
 Elle vit toute retiree. 
 
 Je a'ai rien vu de plus ex- 
 
 traordinire. 
 II ne s"*applique a rien, 
 
 Rien n'est plus snrprenant. 
 
 Je ne vous soupconne de 
 rien. 
 
 Y a-t-il rien de plus admi- 
 rable ? 
 
 Je doute que rien soit plus 
 utile. ' 
 
 £16.] Many are not of your Plusuurs ne sont pas de votre 
 
 opinion. 
 Many are of this opinion. 
 
 It is the lot of many. 
 
 It is the voice of many. 
 
 She told it to many. 
 
 '[17] Have you re ad the 
 
 book? will you have an. 
 
 other ? 
 If you do not like that 
 
 pen, I will give you an* 
 
 tithe r* 
 Another would be more 
 
 grateful. 
 Another would have married 
 
 him. 
 Jbtotber would have been 
 
 deceived. 
 
 opinion. 
 
 flaneurs sont de ce senti- 
 ment. 
 
 C'est le partage de plusicursm 
 
 C'est le defaut de p!usieurs. 
 
 Elle l'a dit a flutieurs. 
 
 Avez-vous lu le livre? en 
 voulcz-vous un autre? 
 
 Si vous n'aimez pas cette 
 plume, je vous en donne- 
 rai unc autre. 
 
 Un autre seroit plus reeon- 
 noissant. 
 
 Uue autre l'auroit epouse. 
 
 Un autre auroit fete txompe. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 203 
 
 I gave it to another, 
 I know neither of them. 
 
 Neither 
 him. 
 
 of them spoke to 
 
 Neither of them studies. 
 
 They hate one another. 
 We know one another. 
 
 They cheat one another. 
 
 They mistrust one another. 
 
 It is uncommon for two au- 
 thors to speak well of one 
 another. 
 
 We trust one another. 
 
 You wrong one another. 
 
 Let us not hurt one another. 
 
 Each of them is good. 
 
 Both are bad. 
 
 Both shall be punished. 
 
 Each of them shall be 
 
 warded, 
 I do not care for cither. 
 
 She complains of loth. 
 
 been cheated 
 
 re- 
 
 by 
 
 He has 
 
 both. 
 1 cenfide in both.. 
 Give to both. 
 She speaks to both^ 
 [18.] I have received some 
 
 money. 
 He has fallen into some 
 
 errours.. 
 
 Je l'ai donne a un autre. 
 Je ne connois ni Vun ni l y au- 
 tre. 
 Ni Pun ni V autre ne liii ont 
 parle, ou, ils ne lui ont 
 parle, */ Vun ni V autre. 
 Ni Vun ni V autre n'etu- 
 dient j ou, ils n'etudient 
 ni Vun ni V autre. 
 Ils se haissent Vun V autre. 
 Nous nous connotssoris Vuw 
 
 Vautre. 
 lib se trompent Vun Vautre* 
 11 se mefient Vun de Vautre. 
 II est rare que deux auteur^ 
 disent du bien Vun de' 
 V 'autre. 
 Nous nous fions Vun & Vau- 
 tre, 
 Vous vous faites du tort Vuw 
 
 a Vautre. 
 Ne nous nuisons pas Vun £ 
 
 Vautre. 
 L'un et Vautre sont bons. 
 Vun et Vautre sont mauvais- 
 He seront punis Vun et Vau- 
 tre. 
 lis seront recompenses Vuw 
 
 et Vautre. 
 Je ne me soucie ni de Vun nJ 
 de V autre. , 
 
 Elle se plaint- de Vilw et de 
 
 Vautre. 
 II a etc trompe par Vim ett 
 
 par Vautre.. 
 Je me fie a Vun et a Vautre* 
 Donne z a Vun et a Vautre.. 
 Elle parle a Vun et a ['autre*. 
 J'ai recu que J que argent. 
 
 II est torn be 
 erreurs* 
 
 dans- guelqpas 
 
 x 6 
 
204 
 
 A GRAMMAR OE THE 
 
 You are mistaken by some 
 
 shillings. 
 Apply yourself to some use- 
 nil work. 
 [19.] Though you pretend 
 
 to be ever so bold. 
 Though he be ever so rich, 
 
 he is very covetous. 
 Whatever happy talents a 
 
 man may have, he ought 
 
 to cultivate them. 
 However far I may be from 
 
 you, I shall not forget 
 
 you. 
 However rich you saw them, 
 
 they are now very poor. 
 
 However cunning they ap- 
 pear, they are sometimes 
 deceived. 
 
 Though they pretend to ever 
 so much honesty, they 
 sometimes cheat. 
 
 Whatever friends he may 
 have, he will never suc- 
 ceed , 
 
 Whatever small rewards 
 you may give him, he will 
 be grateful for them. 
 
 Whatever riches you have. 
 
 [20.] Send me some news 
 whatever it may be. 
 
 Ke shall be punished who- 
 ever he may be. 
 
 Whoever you may be, they 
 will render you justice* 
 
 Whatever his sister may be, 
 I will never marry her. 
 
 Whatever her sisters may 
 be, they are not so. lovely 
 as she is. 
 
 Vous vous trompez it quel* 
 
 ques schellings. 
 Occupez-vous a quelque 
 
 ouvrage utile* 
 Quelque hardi que vous af- 
 
 fectiez d'etre. 
 Qu4que riche qu'il soit, il 
 
 est fort avare. 
 Quelques heureux talens 
 
 qu'un homme puisse avoir, 
 
 il faut qu'il les cultive. 
 Quelque eloign e que je sois 
 
 de vous, je ne vous oublie- 
 
 rai pas. 
 Quelque riches que vous les 
 
 ayez vus > ils sont a pre- 
 sent fort pauvres. 
 Quelque ruses ^a'ils parois- 
 
 sent, ils sont quelquefois 
 
 trompes. 
 Quelque honnetes qu'Ws pre- 
 
 tendent etre, ils trompeat 
 
 quelquefois. 
 Quelques amis ^a'il ait, il ne 
 
 reussira jamais. 
 
 Quelques petites recompen- 
 ses que vous lui donniez, 
 il en sera reconnoissant. 
 
 Quelques richesses que vous 
 ayez. 
 
 Envoyez-moi des nouvelles, 
 quelques y^'eiles-soient. 
 
 II sera puni, quel qu'il soit> 
 
 Qutl que vous soyez, on VOUS 
 
 rendra justice. 
 Quelle que soir sa soeur, je 
 
 ne l'epou serai jamais. 
 Quelle s que s< \-:w\ ses sceurs, 
 
 elles ne soi:( pas si airoa- 
 
 Lies cuj'elle. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 Whatever these conditions 
 may be, I will never sub- 
 mit to them. 
 
 Whatever these goods are, 
 send them to me. 
 
 ZQ$ 
 
 Do not rely upon the pro. 
 mises of men, 'whatever 
 they may be. 
 
 He will not hear of any ac- 
 commodation, whatever it 
 may be. 
 
 I do not care for him, who- 
 ever he is, 
 
 [21.] Is any body come ? 
 
 Somebody told it you. 
 
 Did any body speak to him 
 (or to her?) 
 
 Did you see any body there ? 
 
 She knows it from so;* body. 
 
 He took it from somebody. 
 
 She mistrusts somebody. 
 
 Give this to somebody. 
 
 They spoke to somebody. 
 
 He wrote to somebody. 
 
 Some people say. 
 
 Some believe. 
 
 I have this news from some 
 persons.. 
 
 I told this news to some- 
 body. 
 
 [22.] Some of the prisoners 
 made their escape. 
 
 I know it from some of those 
 who were present. 
 
 He has given bread to some 
 of those who were in need 
 of it. 
 
 Some of the robbers have 
 been taken. 
 
 Some of them will be hang- 
 
 Qiielles que soient ces condi- 
 tions, je ne m'y soumet- 
 trai jamais. 
 
 Quelles que soient ces roar- 
 chandises, envoyez-les- 
 moi. 
 
 Ne vous fiez pas aux pro- 
 messes des hommes, quel* 
 les Relies soient. 
 
 II ne veut entendre parler 
 d'aucun accommodement, 
 quel qu\\ puisse etre. 
 
 Je ne me soueie pas de lui, 
 quel qu'il soit. 
 
 Onelqu'un est-il venu. 
 
 Quelqn'un VOUS l'a dit. 
 
 Quelqu'un lui a-t-il parle T 
 
 Y avez-vous vu quelquun? 
 Elle le sait de quelqu'un. 
 II l'a pris de qu.lqu'un. 
 Elle se mefie de qudqu'un^ 
 Donne z cela a quelqu-un.. 
 lis ont parle a quelqu'wt* 
 II a ecrit a quelqu'un*. 
 Quelque s~uns disent. 
 Quelque s-uns croient. 
 Je tiens cette nouvelle de 
 
 quelques personnes. 
 J'ai dit cette nouvelle a 
 
 quelques personnes-. 
 Quelque s-uns des prisonniers 
 
 se sont eVades. 
 Je le ^ais de quelques uns ct£ 
 
 ceux qui etoient presens. 
 II a donne du pain a queL 
 
 ques-uns de ceux qui en 
 
 avoient besoin. 
 Quelques-uns des voleurs ont 
 
 ete pris. 
 Quelques, uns d'e^x seront 
 
 pendus^ 
 
2*5 
 
 Do you know any of those 
 
 ladies ? 
 
 know some of them. 
 Will you have any of these 
 
 oranges ? 
 Give me some. 
 Buy some of those apples. 
 
 Will you taste any of them ? 
 
 [26.] Whatever may happen, 
 he is always the same. 
 
 Whatever you say, it shall 
 be so. 
 
 Whatever he may under- 
 take he will never suc- 
 ceed. 
 
 I know every thing he is 
 able to do. 
 
 Do vjhatever yon please. 
 
 I do not care for whatever 
 
 he may do. 
 Take whatever you like 
 
 best. 
 I am ready for whaevcr you 
 
 please. 
 She applies herself to every 
 
 things that may be «se- 
 
 ful to her. 
 Any thing he writes to you, 
 
 tell it me. 
 Do not talk of any thing. 
 He succeeds in whatever he 
 
 applies himself to. 
 [24.] They will tell him the 
 
 same thing, to whomever 
 
 he- may address himself. 
 He does not care for any 
 
 person whatever*. 
 I saw nobody at alU 
 He knows nobody* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Connoissez-vous que/ques-- 
 
 unes de ces Dame. ? 
 J 'en connois quelques-unesS 
 Voulez-vous quelques -lines 
 
 de ces oranges ? 
 Dcnnez-m'en quelques. unes, 
 Achetez quelques.unes de ces 
 
 pom Ties. 
 En voulez-vous gouter queK 
 
 que s -lines ? 
 Ojioi qu'il puisse arriver, il 
 ' est toujours le memc. 
 Quoi que vous disiez, il en 
 
 sera ainsi. 
 Quoi qu'il puisse entrepren- 
 
 dre, il ne reussira jamais. 
 
 Je sais tout ce qu'il peut faire. 
 
 Faire 1 tout ce que vous vou- 
 
 drez. 
 Je ne me soucie pas de tout 
 
 ce qu'il peut faire. 
 Prenez tout ce que vous 
 
 aimez le mieux. 
 Je suis pret a tout ce que vous 
 
 voudrez. 
 Eile s 'applique a tout ce qui 
 
 peut lui etre utile. 
 
 Quoi que ce soit qu'il vous- 
 
 ccrive, dites-le-moi. 
 Ne parlez de quoi que ce soft* 
 11 reussit a quoi que ce soit 
 
 qu'il s 'applique. 
 On lui dira la meme chose, 
 
 a qui q;ie ce soit qu'il s'a- 
 
 dresse. 
 11 ne se soucie de qui que ce 
 
 SOit, 
 
 Je n'ai vu qui que ce soit. 
 II no connoit qui que ce self. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 2CJ 
 
 1 spoke to nobody whatever* 
 Do not talk to any body. 
 Whoever we may be, it is 
 
 nothing to you. 
 To whomever you may 
 
 speak, do not mention that 
 
 affair. 
 iVhoevrr you may be, I do 
 
 not fear you, 
 [25.] Whoever he is that 
 
 speaks to you, give him 
 
 an answer. 
 Whoever he is, he is in the 
 
 wrong. 
 Whoever speaks English 
 
 shall be lined. 
 Whoever does not learn his 
 
 lesson, shall be marked. 
 [26.] The same author has 
 
 written other books. 
 I 'shall speak to him or to 
 
 her, myself. 
 Write your letter yourself* 
 
 They wrong themselves. 
 
 [28.] Ptople say, people 
 talk, people believe, peo- 
 ple fancy, people do not 
 know, &c. 
 
 May / know, &c. 
 
 Has any one spoken to you ? 
 
 May / ask you ? 
 
 Has c.ny one seen you ? 
 
 May we go along this street ? 
 
 May vje see the Queen's 
 apartments ? 
 
 77 is said,. it is reported, it 
 is asserted, it is doubted, 
 it has been proposed, // 
 has been resolved, &c. 
 
 The letters have not yet 
 keen received. 
 
 Je n'ai parle a qui que ce soit* 
 Ne parlez a qui que ce soit. 
 Qui que nous soy oris, pen 
 
 vous importe. 
 A qui que vous parliez, n© 
 
 dites rieh de cette affaire. 
 
 Qui que vous soyez, je ne 
 
 vous crains pas. 
 Qui que cc Soil qui VOUS parle, 
 
 repondez-lui. 
 
 Qui que ce soit, il a tort. 
 
 Quiconqne parlera Anglois, 
 sera mis a Pamende. 
 
 Qui con que ne saura pas sa 
 leeon, sera marque. 
 
 Le mime auteur a fait d au- 
 tres livres. 
 
 Je iui parlerai m&i-meme. 
 
 Ecrivez votre lettre vous-^ 
 
 me mem 
 lis se font tort a eux-memes 9 
 Ou dit, on parle, on croir, 
 
 on s' imagine, on ne sait 
 
 pas, &c. 
 
 Teut-on savoir? 
 
 Vous-n-t-on parle ? 
 
 Peut-0/z vous demander ? v 
 
 Vous a-t-07/ vu ? 
 
 Peut-wr passer par cette rue? 
 
 Peut-0« voir les apparte- 
 mens de la Reine i 
 
 On dit, on rapporte, on as, 
 sure, on doute, on a pro- 
 pose, on a lesolu, &c. 
 
 On n'a pas encore recu fes 
 lc tires. 
 
*o8 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Great preparations have 
 bee?i made for the recep- 
 tion of «,.•'•• . 
 
 Great rejoicings <were rmde 
 at St. James's on the 
 Queen's birthday. 
 
 Great news <was received by 
 the last mail. 
 
 A courier has been dispatch 
 
 ed to the French court. 
 // is believed, that war 
 
 will be declared against 
 
 France. 
 // nvas said so, but contrary 
 
 news has been received 
 
 this week. 
 
 On a fait de grands prepa- 
 ratifs pour la reception 
 de ► . . . 
 
 On a fait de grandes rejouis- 
 sances a St. James, le jour 
 de la naissanee de la Reine. 
 
 On a recu dc grandes nou- 
 velles par l'ordinaire der- 
 nier. 
 
 On a depeche on courrier a 
 la cour de France. 
 
 On croit qu'on declarera la 
 guerre a la France, 
 
 On le disoit, mais on a recti 
 des nouvelles contraires 
 cette semaine-ci. 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 Supplying Pronouns, le, en, y. 
 
 t. It, or so, is sometimes rendered by le; as, give it 
 
 to me, donnez-le-moi; I will give //• to you, je <vous le 
 d-onnerai; I think so, je le crois. 
 
 In some instances the English for le is not expressed. 
 
 *• Qf> f rom > with, by, about. Sec, him, her, it, them,. 
 some, any, &C, and thence, by en; as, do not speak of it 
 to me ; ne m'en parlez pas. 
 
 J. To it, there, therein, in it, hi them, about it, abort 
 them, &c, hy y ; as, I will not be against it, je ne m'yt 
 oppcurai pas. These pronouns are called supplying 
 because they stand not only for one preceding word, but 
 sometimes for whple sentcne s, and are chiefly used in^ 
 stead of the pronouns, lui\ elk ; eux, elUs. 
 
 ♦4. Le and en are applied either to persons or things,, 
 and_y to things only; except in a few instances, and'in 
 an answer to a question ; as, Do you think of roe J Yes,. 
 I do ;. Ptnuz.vQus *- moi ?■ Qui> j'y faisc*. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 209 
 
 5. Le put after ce i when we speak of things, is de- 
 clinable ; as, Are these your horses ? Yes, they are : Sont* 
 ce la vos che<vaux F Oui y ce les sent. I say when we speak 
 of things ; because, when we speak of persons, we make 
 use of the personal pronouns ; as, Are these your bro- 
 thers ? Yes, they are : SonUce la <vos freres P Oui y ce sort* 
 eux> and not ce Us sont. 
 
 It is the opinion of several, that le is declinable after an adjective 
 in the feminine singular only, in the following and similar expressions 
 spoken by women ; I was frightened, and I am so still ; je fui ef~ 
 fraye'e et la suis encore : of others, .that it would be more proper 
 ta say, et je le suis encore* P'augelaSy the Abbe Cirardy Restaut, the 
 French Academy, &c, are for the latter j so that there can be no 
 doubt. 
 
 Supplying Pronouns exemplified for the Scholars 
 Practice. 
 
 [1.] Will you give it him Le lui donnerez-vous ? 
 
 [or her] ? 
 
 Have you given it him [or Le lui avez-vous donne? 
 
 her] ? 
 
 I have promised it him [or J e le lui ai promis. 
 
 her]. 
 
 I have not promised it him Je ne le lui ai pas promis, 
 
 [or her]. 
 
 Have you sent it to them ? Le leur avez-vous envoye ? 
 
 I j not sent it to them. Je ne le leur ai pas envoye. 
 
 Have you told it him [or Le lui avez-vous dit ? 
 
 her] ? 
 
 I hare not told it him [or Je ne le lui ai pas dit. 
 
 her]. 
 
 Do nor tell it him [or her]. Ne le lui elites pas. 
 
 Do you know // ? Le savez-vous ? 
 
 She does know it, Elle ne le sait pas. 
 
 I do not know //. Je ne le sais pas. 
 
 He told me something, will II m'a dit quelque chose, U 
 
 you know it? voulez-vous savoir ? 
 
 Ask him, I will not tell it Demandez-/^-lui, jc ne veux 
 
 you. pas vous U dire. 
 
2fO 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Why will you not tell it 
 
 me ? 
 Because he forbade me. 
 Tell it me. 
 
 1 will never tell // you* 
 Do you believe iff. 
 I do not believe it. 
 She believes it. 
 [2.] Give me some. 
 Do not give him [or her] 
 
 any. 
 Wil you give him [or her] 
 
 any P 
 Do not speak of it to him 
 
 [or to her]. 
 Did you Sjteak 0/" it to him 
 
 f*r to her] ? 
 I did not say a word of iU 
 Will you have *«y ? 
 Take some. 
 
 Give him [or her] some. 
 Will you be satisfied w/VA 
 
 i / /> 
 I will not meddle with it. 
 I am sorry for it. 
 I am very glad of it. 
 She wonders at it. 
 She complains of it. 
 He is overjoyed a/ //. 
 I will not hear any more 
 
 about it. 
 What do you say to it? 
 I wonder at it. 
 She will repent it. 
 I am sure of //. 
 Have you any money ? Yes, 
 
 I have some. 
 She has none. 
 Will you join with us P 
 I come thence. 
 Do you know any thing of 
 
 itP 
 
 Pourquoi ne voulez-vous pas 
 
 me le dire ? 
 Parce qu'il me /'a defendu. 
 Dites-Zf-moi. 
 Je ne vous le dirai jamais. 
 Le croyez-vous ? 
 Je ne le crois pas. 
 Elle le croit. 
 Donnez-mVtf. 
 Ne lui en donnez pas 
 
 Lui en donnerez-vous ? 
 
 Ne lui en parlez pas. 
 
 Lui en avez-vous parle ? 
 
 Je nen ai pas dit le mot. 
 En voulez-vous ? 
 
 Prenez-<r#. 
 
 Donnez-lui-^;/. 
 
 £« serez-vous content ? 
 
 Je ne veux pas m*en meler, 
 
 I'en suis fache. 
 
 yen suis bien aise. 
 
 Elle sV* etonne. 
 
 Elle s f «f plaint. 
 
 11 sV* rejouit. 
 
 Je nV« veux plus entendre 
 
 parier. 
 QuV« dites-vous ? 
 JV;/ suis surpris. 
 Elle sV* repentira. 
 JV;/ suis siir. 
 Avez.vousdePargent ? Oui, 
 
 j'<v? 'A. 
 Elle nV// a point. 
 Eu voulez-vous etre ? 
 JV/y viens. 
 En savez-vous quelque. 
 
 chose ? 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 211 
 
 I know nothing of it. 
 He shall know nothing of it. 
 Have you any ? 
 [3.] Have you been there? 
 Have you thought of it ? 
 I have not yet been there. 
 S'e was forced to it. 
 Has he consented to it ? 
 I shall never consent to it. 
 They have been against it. 
 Do not think of// any more. 
 The government have wisely 
 
 provided 'for it. 
 The King will not be against 
 
 it. 
 I am prepared for it. 
 Will you go t hi the r ? 
 You pay no attention to it. 
 Mind it. 
 I shall mind it. 
 1 have added many new ob- 
 servations to //. 
 [4,] He is a traitor \ do not 
 
 go to him. 
 He is aa honest man ; trust 
 
 to him. 
 Do you think of me ? Yes, 
 
 I do. 
 [j.] Are these your books ? 
 
 Yes, they are. 
 Are these your pens ? Yes, 
 
 they are. 
 Are those your father's 
 
 horses ? Yes, they are. 
 
 Are these your favours ? 
 
 Yes, they are. 
 ' Are these your sentiments ? 
 
 Yes, they are. 
 Are these your reasons ? 
 
 Yes, thej are. 
 
 Je n'en saii rien. 
 II n'en saura rien. 
 En avez-vous ? 
 
 Y avez-vous etc ? 
 
 Y avez-vous pen^e ? 
 
 Je n'_v ai pas encore ete. 
 Eilej 3 ete forcee. 
 
 Y a-t-il consenti ? 
 
 Je x\'y consenti rai jamais, 
 
 Us s'y sunt opposes. 
 
 N'j pensez plus. 
 
 Le gouvernement y a sage* 
 
 meet pourvu. 
 Le Roi ne s'j opposera pas. 
 
 ]\y suis prepare. 
 
 Y Vou-ez-vous aller ? 
 Vous n'y prenez pas garde. 
 Prenez y garde. 
 
 J'y prendrai garde. 
 
 Yy ai ajoute plusieus nou- 
 
 velles remarques. 
 C'est un traitre ; ne vousjr 
 
 fiez pas. 
 C'est un honnete homme : 
 
 fiez-vous-7. 
 Pensez-vous a moi ? Oui, 
 
 Yy pense. 
 Sont-ce la vos livres ? Oui, 
 
 ce les sont, 
 Sont-ce la vos plumes ? Oui, 
 
 ce les sont. 
 Sont-ce la les chevaux de 
 
 votre pere ? Oui, ce les 
 
 sont. 
 Sont-cc la vos amities ? Oui, 
 
 ce ies sont. 
 Sont-ce la ves sentimens ? 
 
 Oui, ce les sont. 
 Sont ce la vos raisons ? Oui, 
 
 ce les sont. 
 
 I 
 
212 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Is that your penknife ? Yes, 
 it is. 
 
 Are they your sisters? Yes, 
 
 they are* 
 Are these his brothers ? 
 
 Yes, they are. 
 Are these her cousins ? Yes, 
 
 they are. 
 Are these your brothers ? 
 
 Yes, they are. 
 Is it your cousin ? Yes, 
 
 it is. 
 
 Est-ce la votre canif ? Oui, 
 
 ce /'est. 
 Sont-ce la vos sceurs ? Oui, 
 
 ce sont elles. 
 Sont-ce la ses freres ? Qui, 
 
 ce sont eux. 
 Sont-ce la ses cousines ? Oui, 
 
 ce sont elles, 
 Sont.ce la vos freres? Oui, 
 
 ce sont eux. 
 Est-ce votre cousin ? Oui, 
 
 c'est lui: 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon the Degrees of 
 Comparison. 
 
 Obs. t^ RAMMARIANS seem to be in a mistake 
 ^-* about the degrees of comparison ; for compa- 
 rison implies a relation to another thing, with which the 
 comparison is made : wherea^ the positive is the adjective 
 in it's natural state, without relation to another thing; as 
 when I say, this house is pretty; cctte maison est belle, 
 there is in fact no comparison at all. However, if by de- 
 grees of comparison we mean different manners of express- 
 ing the quality of something, there are three; the posi- 
 tive, the comparative and the superlative, 
 
 i. When the adjective is compared in an equal, higher, 
 or less degree, it is called comparative, which comparison 
 is made in French by placing before it plus, more ; mews, 
 less ; j/, so ; aussi, as, &c. 
 
 2. Plus and moins are commonly followed by the par- 
 ticle que y and, when a verb comes immediately after it, 
 that verb hns the negative particle tie before it ; as, he 
 was richer than was believed ; il ctoit plus rkke c^x'on ne 
 croyoit* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 213 
 
 Except, when the following verb is in the infinitive 
 mood, or preceded by a conjunction, tie must be left out ; 
 as, he finds himself more undisturbed in the country than 
 in town ; // se trowve plus tranquille a la campagne, que 
 d'etre a la ville, or que s'il <v*voit a la <ville. 
 
 3. Si, so; tant, so much, as much, as many, so many, 
 comparatively used, are always used negatively ; as you 
 are not so rich as he, vous n'etes pas si rkbe que hi; he 
 has not so many friends as you, il n'a pas tant d'amis que 
 <vous. In other case?, aussi, or autant, is to be used ; ex- 
 cept in an interrogation, where si and tant may be used 
 eithe? with or without a negation, according to the inter- 
 rogation being affirmative or negative. 
 
 4. When plus, msins, autant, tant, are immediately 
 followed by a substantive, that substantive must be pre- 
 ceded by the preposition de ; as, more money, plus d'^zr- 
 gent ; less credit, moins de credit; so much pain, autant 
 de peine; so many rings, tant de bagues. 
 
 5. When the verb avoir, or etre, is before .plus, moins, 
 autant, &c. s and the same verb follows que, the second 
 avoir, or etre, is more properly left out in the French, 
 though it may be expressed in the English 3 and we are 
 contented with que and the pronoun only, or any other 
 noun i as, you have more money than I, or we have, 
 *vous avez, plus d' argent que moi ; or que nous; or some- 
 times vous a<vez plus d' argent, que je n'en at, or que vous 
 n'en avons ; Miss A* is as sensible -as she is, Mademou 
 selle A, est aussi sen see qu'elle, and not quelle est. Ex- 
 cept when que is followed by a conjunction, or by the 
 same verb in the infinitive mood, with a government after 
 it, or a preposition ; as, you have more pleasure, than if 
 you had great riches, vous avex plus de plaisir, que si <vous 
 aviez beaucoup de richesses, or que d 'avoir beaucoup de 
 rkhesses ; you are more happy, than if you were married, 
 vous etes plus heureux que si *vous etiez marie, or que d'etre 
 marie. 
 
 d. When plus and moins are adverbs of quantity, or 
 meet with a noun of number, the word than, which im- 
 mediately follows more or less, is expressed by the pre- 
 position de: as, he has more than ten guineas ; il a plus 
 <ie dix guinees* 
 
2i4 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 7. When the quality is raised to the highest degree, .or 
 depressed to the lowest, it is called superlative. 
 
 8. The definitive article, le, la y &c, are put before ///'*, 
 mains, mcilhur y pire, &c, in the superlative degree ; ai:d,. 
 when the superlative is followed by the noun with which 
 the comparison is made, this noun must be in the second 
 case> as : he is the best of my friends ; il est le fneilleur 
 de mes amis, or c'tst le meilleur de mes amis, 
 
 9. When the superlative is followed by a verb, that 
 verb mu^t be in the subjunctive mood, preceded by qui % 
 dont, or que, rs, the most happy woman alive, la fern me 
 la plus heureuse qui soit ; the most happy man that I 
 know, Vhomme le plus heureux que je conmisse. 
 
 10. Sometimes a quality is mentioned in the highest 
 degree without comparison ; and this is done in French 
 by placing adverbs of exaggeration before it ; as, very 
 rich; trh-riche: very polite; trh-poli: extremely ob- 
 ligel; infinimetk ghlige. 
 

 
 3*2.3 
 
 3*H.3 
 
 3 C5 ~ 
 
 * 3 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 > 
 
 9* 
 > 
 
 H 
 
 w 
 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 as y g ?* s ?> ! 
 
 b 
 k 
 
 til 
 
 b 
 
 Co 
 
 Co ^ 
 
 s -. 
 
 Ok) 
 
 
 3 
 
 T2. 
 
 *H. 
 
 
 o 
 
 •"J 
 
 —t 
 
 Co 
 
 
 r» 
 
 rt 
 
 & 
 
 3* 
 
 *• 
 
 w 
 
 •o 
 
 o- 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 *t 
 
 pa 
 
 99 
 
 R 
 
 o 
 
 km 
 
 l-v- 
 
 TJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ST 
 
 CI 
 
 o 
 
 e* 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 c\ 
 
 w o 
 
 a: o 
 
 "*2 
 
 a 
 
 hr^ '-^ 
 
 "SLIL 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 Co 
 
 
 ZL — 
 
 C c 
 
 Cj 
 
 CO CO 
 
 CO CO 
 
 *S 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 k 
 
 w o - 
 
 B3 CJ 
 
 c c 
 
 
 =5*: 
 
 "3 »T3 
 
 < < 
 
 D - p* 
 
 
 
 ft: ft; 
 
 fti ftJ 
 
 «^* 
 
 c c 
 
 
 3 D 
 
 «■* 
 
 co en 
 
 OB CO 
 
 <-»• -*• 
 
 N. 
 
 "S "a 
 
 o »■ 
 
 
 s* 
 
 rt CD 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 5 55 
 
 > 
 
 V 
 
 w 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 o 
 
 ** 
 
 M 
 
 b 
 
 ►d 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 1— 1 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 fej 
 
 o 
 
 5° 
 
 •§ 
 
 
 SS 
 
 
 -S 
 
 
 I* 
 
 
 Co* 
 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 
8l5, 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Degrees of Comparison exemplified for the 
 Scholar's Practice. 
 
 [i.] London is more popu- 
 lous than Paris. 
 
 France is larger than Eng- 
 land, Ireland, and Scot- 
 land. 
 
 The streets of London are 
 wider than those of Paris. 
 
 My snuff-box is prettier 
 than yours. 
 
 My books are dearer than 
 yours. 
 
 He is more idle than his 
 brother. 
 
 Your father is richer than 
 his. 
 
 His house is greater than 
 yours. 
 
 [2.] They are msre forward, 
 than I thought. 
 
 He gave me more money, 
 than I asked for. 
 
 You have met with more ob- 
 stacles, than you thought. 
 
 I have found it easier, than 
 
 I foresaw. 
 They have more friends, 
 
 than you believe. 
 He has lost more, than he 
 
 he has won. 
 You have asked for less, 
 
 than was your due. 
 She has worked more than 
 
 her task. 
 
 Londres est plus peuple que 
 
 Paris. 
 La France est plus etendue 
 
 que PAngleterre, l'lr- 
 
 lande, et l'Ecosse. 
 Les rues de Londres sont plus 
 
 largesque celles de Paris. 
 Ma tabatiere est plus belle 
 
 que la votre. 
 Mes livres sont plus chers 
 
 que les votres. 
 II est plus paresseux que son 
 
 frere. 
 Votre pere est plus riche que 
 
 le sien. 
 Sa maison est plus grande 
 
 que la votre. 
 lis sont plus avances que je 
 
 ne croyois. 
 II m'a donne plus d'argent 
 
 que je ne demandois. 
 Vous avez trouve ////^ob- 
 stacles que vous ne pen* 
 
 siez. 
 J'y ai trouve plus de facilite 
 
 que je ne prevoyois. 
 lis ont plus d'amis que vous 
 
 ne croyez. 
 11 a perdu plus qu'il #'a 
 
 gagne. 
 Vous a*ez demande moins 
 
 qu'il ///vous etoit da. 
 Elle a fait plus d'ouvrage 
 
 qu'on ne lui avoit pres- 
 ent. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 J did not ask far more, than 
 
 was my due. 
 Haye you not undertaken 
 
 more, than you were able 
 
 to perform ? 
 She is happier, than if she 
 
 tvere married. 
 
 Fh is more contented with 
 her, than if he had all tne 
 gold of Peru. 
 
 I am quieter in my room, 
 than if I were in com- 
 pany. 
 
 You look more sickly, than 
 while you were in the 
 country. 
 
 They are less troubled in the 
 country, than if they were 
 in town. 
 
 [3.] Ke is not so rich as it 
 is said. 
 
 She is not so old as yon be- 
 lieve. 
 
 I am not to idle as my bro- 
 ther. 
 
 We are not so much sur- 
 prised as you think. 
 
 You are not so brave, as you. 
 pretend to be. 
 
 They are not 10 learned, as 
 they would make us be- 
 lieve. 
 
 They are not so proud as to 
 despise your praises. 
 
 She is net so vain, as to listen 
 
 to your flatteries. 
 I have not won ;i>jnuch as I 
 
 thought. 
 
 tlj 
 
 Je n'ai pas demande plus 
 qu'il ns m'etoit du. 
 
 N'avez-vous pas entrepris 
 
 plus que vous ne pouviez 
 
 execute r? 
 Elle est phis heureuse fme 
 
 d'etre mariee, ou que si 
 
 elle etoit mariee. 
 II est plus content avec elle 
 
 que s'W avoit tout Tor da 
 
 Perou. 
 je suis plus tranquille c\zx\% 
 
 ma chambre que si j'etois 
 
 en compagme. 
 Vous parors^ez plus malade 
 
 que lorsqne veus etiez a la 
 
 campagne. 
 Us sont moins deranges a la 
 
 campagne, que j'ils etoient 
 
 a la ville. 
 II n'est pas si riche £«'on le 
 
 dit. 
 Elle n'est pas si agee que 
 
 vous croyez. 
 Je ne suis pas si paresseux 
 
 que m©n frere. 
 Nous ne sommes pas si sur* 
 
 pris que vous pensez. 
 Vous n'etes pas si braves 
 
 que vous dites. 
 II ne sont pas si savans 
 
 qu\\s voudroicnt nous 
 
 le fa ire croire. 
 Elles ne sont pns ti fleres 
 
 que de mepriser vos lou- 
 
 aoges. 
 Elle n'est pas si vaine que 
 
 d'ecouter vos flatteries. 
 Je iv a i p.is tent gagne que 
 
 ■je pen-sois. 
 
Zi% 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 lie has not lost so much as 
 you. 
 
 j^4 ] She r has not so much- 
 money as you think. 
 
 We have not so much self- 
 love, as to prefer our- 
 selves to you. 
 
 You have not so much busi- 
 ness, as to hinder you 
 <from applying yourself to 
 the study of the French 
 language. 
 
 They have not so much cou- 
 rage, /is they pretend to. 
 
 They have not so much plea- 
 sure in the country as in 
 town. 
 
 [5.] I am as much surprised 
 as you. 
 
 He is as learned as his elder 
 brother. 
 
 She is as lovely as her sister. 
 
 We are as quiet as you* 
 
 You are as brisk as he. 
 They are as rich as your 
 
 ♦father. 
 They are as witty as his 
 
 sisters. 
 1 have as many friends as you. 
 He is as covetous as ever* 
 
 ,She has as much beauty 04 
 
 formerly. 
 We have as much trouble as 
 
 you. 
 You have as many books as 
 
 I hav.e. 
 
 II n'a pas tant perdu que 
 
 vous. 
 Elle n'a pas tant Sargent 
 
 que vous pensez. 
 Nous n'avons pas tant d'a- 
 
 mour-propre, que de nous 
 
 preferer a vous. 
 Vous n'avez pas tant d'oc- 
 
 cupations, que vous ne 
 
 puissiez vous appliquer a 
 
 1'etude de la langue Fran- 
 
 <coise. 
 lis n'ont pas tant de courage 
 
 qu'ils se fiattent d'en 
 
 avoir. 
 Elles n'ont pas tant de plai- 
 
 sir a la compagne qu'k la 
 
 ville. 
 Je suis aussi surpris que 
 
 vous. 
 II est aussi savant que son 
 
 frere aine. 
 Elle est aussi aimable que sa 
 
 soeur. 
 Nous sommes aussi tran- 
 
 quilles que vous. 
 Vous etes aussi vif que lui. 
 lis sont aussi riches que votre 
 
 pere. 
 Elles sont aussi spirituelles 
 
 que ses sceurs. 
 J'ai autant ^'amis que vous. 
 II a autant d'avarice que 
 
 jamais. 
 Elle a autant de beaute 
 
 ^'autrefois. 
 Nous avons auians de peine 
 
 que vous. 
 Vous avez autant de livre* 
 
 que moi« 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 They have as much honour 
 
 as your countrymen. 
 They have as much love for 
 
 the sciences as their bro- 
 thers. 
 Y#Gr suit is more worn 
 
 than mine. 
 Her apron is cleaner than 
 
 her sister's. 
 You are more learned than I 
 
 am. 
 He is older than you. 
 She is more lovely than he. 
 You are older than she is. 
 [6.] My brother has more 
 
 books than you. 
 We have more pleasure than 
 
 they. 
 I have lost more than ten 
 
 guineas. 
 She has brought him for her 
 
 portion more than ten 
 
 thousand poands. 
 She has less vivacity than 
 
 her sister. 
 We have less trouble than 
 
 you. 
 They have spent more than a 
 
 thousand pounds a year. 
 He owes more than four 
 
 thousand pounds. 
 He has written more than ten 
 
 letters to day. 
 I am more than half per- 
 suaded of it. 
 My brother is more than 
 
 twenty years old. 
 I am no more than twelve 
 
 yeass old. 
 I have more friendship for 
 
 lii'm, than he has for me. 
 
 L 
 
 lis ont autant </' hon near que 
 
 vos compatriotes. 
 Elles ont autant Mainour 
 -pour les sciences que leurs 
 
 fr£res. 
 Votre habit est plus use que 
 
 le mien. 
 Son tablier est plus Wane 
 
 que celui de sa sceur. 
 Vous etes plus savant que 
 
 moL 
 II est plus age que vous. 
 Elle est plus aimable que lui. 
 Vous etes plus age ^'elle. 
 Mon frere a plus de livres 
 
 que vous.. 
 Nous avons plus de plaisir 
 
 qu'eux. 
 J'ai perdu plus de dix guu 
 
 nees. 
 Elle lui a apporte en manage 
 
 plus de dix mille livres 
 
 sterling. 
 Elle a moins de vivacite que 
 
 sa sceur. 
 Nous avons twins de peine 
 
 que vous* 
 II ont depense plus de miile 
 
 livres sterling par an. 
 II doit plus de qua t re mille 
 
 livres sterling. 
 II a ecrit plus de dix lettres 
 
 aujourd'hui. 
 J'en suis plus d'k moitic 
 
 persuade. 
 Mon frere a plus de vingt 
 
 ans. 
 Je n'ai pas plus de douze 
 
 ans. 
 J'ai plus */'amitie pour lui 
 
 qu*\\ n'en a pour rooL 
 z 
 
220 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 She has more money than I Elle a plus d'argent que mou 
 
 have. 
 
 I have not more cunning Je n'ai pas plus de finesse 
 
 lhan they. ^«'eux. 
 
 $ take more pains than you. Je prgnds plus de peine que 
 
 vous. 
 
 You have less pride /&7// he. Vous avez moins ^/'orgueil 
 
 > que lui. 
 
 J 7.] He is the most skilful C'est le plus habile medecin 
 
 physician in the whole de toute la viile. 
 
 city. 
 
 He is the idlest of them all. C'est le plus paresseux de. 
 
 tous. 
 
 She is the loveliest of them C'est la plus aimable de 
 
 alL routes* 
 
 England has given birth to L'Angleterre a donne nais- 
 
 the most skilful philoso- sance anx plus frabiles vt&~ 
 
 phers in Europe. F losoohes de 1'' Europe. 
 
 £8. ] She is the most lovely C'est la plus aimable demoi- 
 
 lady I know. sclle que je couuoisse. 
 
 It is the greatest piece of C'cst la plus grande sottise 
 
 folly you can ever com- que vous puissLz jamais 
 
 mit. faire. 
 
 He is the greatest ninny you C'est Thomme le plus sot que 
 
 e\ev saw. vous puissiez voir. 
 
 The French is the most use- Le Francois est la Jangue la 
 
 ful language you £an pos- plus utile qu'on puisse ap- 
 
 sibly learn. prendre. 
 
 J9.] I am <vcry glad of it. J'en suis bien aise. 
 
 I am very much concerned at J 'en suis m-j-mortifie. 
 
 it. 
 
 He is a 'very polite man* C'est tin horwme //t-j-poli. 
 
 He is 'very diligent. II est /nk-diligenc. 
 
 She is 'very lovely. Etle est fri*-aimable. 
 
 I am much indebted to you. Je vous suis //^j-redcva- 
 
 ble. 
 
 I am infinitely obliged to Je vous suis infinwunt obli- 
 
 you. go. 
 
 I cr is 'very rich. Son pere est tres riche. 
 
 are *very much persuaded Nous en sommes //vVper. 
 
 of it. suades. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. tmn 
 
 I am your most humble Je suis votre /m'-humble 
 
 servant. serviteur. 
 
 Your most obedient servant. Votre /rvi-cbeissant servi- 
 teur. 
 
 The Exceptions p. £15, exemplified. 
 
 He is the best man in the C'est le meilleur homme dgr 
 
 world.. monde. 
 
 Your pen is letter than Votre plume est meilleure que 
 
 mine. la mienne. 
 
 French fruit is better than Les fruits de France sont 
 
 English, meilleurs que ceux d'An- 
 
 gleterre. 
 
 It is the best reason you can C'est la meilleure raison que 
 
 give him* vous puissiez lui donncr. 
 
 They are the best people in Ce sont les meilleure s gens da 
 
 the world. monde. 
 
 Flis theme is better written Son theme est mieux fait que 
 
 than yours. le votre. 
 
 The least thing makes me La moindre chose m'enrhu- 
 
 catch cold. me. 
 
 His writing is 'very bad; Son ecriture est tres~mau. 
 
 but yours is worse. <vaise ; mais la votre est 
 
 pi re. 
 
 Let the worst come to the Au //jailer. 
 
 worst. 
 
 I shall do it to the best of my Je le ferai le mieux qu'il me 
 
 power. sera possible. 
 
 He obliged me the least of II m'a oblige le mains de 
 
 any. tous. 
 
 It is the least thing you can C'est le moins que vous puis- 
 
 do. sie^ faire. 
 
 t 1 
 
2*2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Verbs. 
 
 HP HE verb agrees In person and number with it's sub- 
 -*- ject, or nominative case. All nouns whatever, in 
 grammatical construction, are of the third person ; as, 
 
 the air prepossesses ; the behaviour engages ; lair pre\ienr, 
 les manieres eng agent. 
 
 i. Two or more nouns in the singular number have 
 verbs agreeing with them in the plural number; as, the 
 father and the mother have consented to it, le fire et la mere 
 y ont consenti. 
 
 Except when they are joined by the disjunctive con- 
 junction qu ; as, on le psre ou la mere j a consenti. 
 
 3, The verb following the conjunction ni is always put 
 piural ; as, neither rnudress nor force can move him, 
 ni la douceur ni id force ne pewvent le'mcuzoir* 
 
 t Oss. If many nouns, or pronouns, singular or plural, be sejra. 
 rated by mals^ rler;, tout, &c, then the verb agrees in number and 
 person with the noun or pronoun which follows these words; as, 
 not only his estate and health, but also his reputation, has suffered by 
 it : notu-setiltmiH ses blent et sa sante, inais .encore sa reputMmm en a 
 souffert. 
 
 J. Collective partitive* nouns, as, infinite', nomlre, 
 la plupart 3 quantitc 3 troupe, multitude f, &C, followed 
 
 * They are called partitive, and not general, because they denote 
 some parts of a whole. For want of making that distinction, Rettaut 
 seems to contradict himself; for fage 34 of his French Grammar, 9th 
 Edition, he says, thzt fir$t t pcuple, arr.e'e, are collective nouns; and, 
 page 174, he say;-, that when the verb has for it's nominative a collec- 
 tive noun in the singular, used by itself, or followed by a noun in the 
 plural, the verb is put in the plural, which is false; because forit,p a-. 
 ple armi:, always govern the verb in the singular. 
 
 + Except from these, la mv*\:\ le tier:, le fUartf which always go- 
 vern the verb in die singular. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 223 
 
 by a noun in the plural, require the verb in the plural; as,, 
 moat men are of that sentiment; la plupart des hom?ncs 
 sont de ce sentiment* 
 
 When they are used by thenrselves, they generally govern the verb 
 in the plural, if ihey have a relation to a noun in the plural which id* 
 understood. La plupart^ according to the French Academy, almost 
 always governs the veib in the plural, whether the noun to which it 
 relates be in the plural or not. 
 
 6. When ce is the nominative to the verb etre, this verb' 
 is put in the singular, if it be followed by the personal 
 pronoun nous or <vcus ; as, it is we, c' est nous;, is it you, 
 my friends ? est.ee <vous, mes amis ; but it is always put in 
 the plural, when followed by eux 3 elhs> or a substantive 
 in the plural • as, it is they, ce so?it eux y these are my 
 bocks, ce sont la mes litres; were these your reasons ? 
 e'toient-ce la <VOS raisons P 
 
 7. After the determining pronoun qui, the verb is put 
 in the same number and person, as the word to which qui 
 relates; as, you who speak, vqus qui par/ez: we who study, 
 nous qui etudiois. 
 
 8. The verb is commonly repeated in French, 1st when 
 the first member of the sentence is affirmative, and the 
 second negative; or the first negative, and the second 
 affirmative; as, we ought to expect every thing of God, 
 and nothing of ourselves, on doit attendre tout de Dim 
 et ne rien attendre de soi-meme ; our reputation does not 
 depend on the caprice of men, but on the praise-worthy 
 actions which we do, notre reputation ne depend pas dpi 
 caprice des hzmmeSy ma is elle depend des actions louabL-s qne 
 nous faisons. 
 
 2dly. When the verb is active in the first member, 
 and passive or reflected in the second ; as, lazy men 
 are not esteemed, because they do not deserve it ; on 
 n'estime^tfj les faineans, parce qu'ils ne meritent pas d'etre 
 estimes. 
 
 N. B. Three things are chiefly to be considered in 
 verbs, «v/». the use of tense?, the use of moods, and the 
 government of veris. 
 
 L 4 
 
224 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 The Use of the Tenses* 
 
 i. The present denotes the actual or habitual action or 
 passion of the subject : as j'e'cris, which answers to the 
 English* I write, I do write, I am writing. 
 
 This tense is often used in familiar discourse instead of the future, 
 but then it must be joined to lome words which denote futurity; as, 
 1 shall be wkh you in a moment, je suis a i>ous dans un moment. It is 
 also used, as in all other tongues, particularly in the French, in ora- 
 tions, pcetry, or set discourses, instead of Lome other tenses, to repre« 
 tent an action past in a more lively and emphatical manner. 
 
 2. The imperfect tense represents the time of an event 
 under two points of view, or relative circumstances. 
 
 j st. The imperfect represents a past event, as present 
 at the time of another event past, and mentioned or un- 
 derstood in the sentence; and then it exactly answers the 
 English expression, / <was doing, as I was reading when 
 you came into my room ; je lisois quand wous ent rates dans 
 ma chamhre* The action of reading is past in itself, but 
 it is present in respect of your entrance into my room : I 
 had a design to speak to him, but he was not at home, 
 /'avois desstin de lui parler> +nais il »'etoit pas chez /*/*• 
 My design to speak to him, though past in itself, was pre- 
 sent in respect of the circumstance uuderstood, when J 
 *went to his house* 
 
 sdly. The imperfect is used to represent a continuity, 
 a repetition, a habitude, and then it exactly answers the 
 English expression, / used to do; as this man altered his 
 mind every day, cet bourne changeoit tcus les jours de 
 dissew. The act of altering his mind being repeated, 
 requires the imperfect. Lewis XIV loved war too 
 much, Louis &IV aimoit trap la guerre. Here also 
 
French tongue. **5 
 
 the imperfect must be used to express a habitual dispo- 
 sition, 'But should we specify how many times, or how 
 long an action has b^en repeated, or the exact duration 
 of the' habitude, the preterit ought to be employed in- 
 stead of the imperfect; as, this man altered his mind 
 - three times, or, for three days, cet homm* changea.d? 
 dessein trois /bis, or, pendant trois Jsurs, and not chan~ 
 geeit. Lewis XIV loved war too much all his life, 
 Louis X/Z^aima trap la guerre pendant toute sa <ure 3 and not 
 ai?noit, 
 
 N.B. The imperfect is used after si, if, -instead of the subjunc- 
 tive mood, expressed by should, could, would, .< in English: as; \£ 
 you" would conve, si vqus vouliez r vemr : if virtue should re.iga, si la 
 1/ertu reguoit. 
 
 3. The preterit denotes an action entirely past, in a 
 time also entirely past : as, he was happy last week, 
 last month, last year; // fut heureux la semaine passee> 
 le mois passe ^ Va?inee passe'e. If the time be not en- 
 tirely past, we make use of the compound of the pre- 
 sent tense ; as, he has been happy this week, this month, 
 this year: il a etc heureux cette semaine-ci> ce mois a' f . 
 cette anne'e-ci* 
 
 The preterit is used when we speak of an action done but once 
 or very seldom, and the time is specified ; as, Edward -III t«ok 
 Calais the 3d of August, 134.7; Edouard \\\ prit Calais/* -3 d'^w/, 
 1347. If the time be not specified, we more commonly use the 
 compound of the present: as, Etfouaru III a pvh Calais. 
 
 We commonly make use of the compound of the present tense 
 before defuls, since : as, there has been a great battle, since I saw 
 you, il y a eu une grande batailk, depuis que je ne vous al va. Some- 
 times we make use of this tense instead of the compound of the future; 
 as, will you have done soon ? avcz-i/wu bientCt fait, instead of, aurez- 
 n*us bkr.tU fait ? 
 
 4. The future is used as in other languages. 
 
 5. The conditional is usad as in Enghlh, but never 
 after the conjunctions which govern thQ subjunctive mood,' 
 though it has been erroneously placed by some grammarians 
 among the tenses of that mood. 
 
tiG A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Tenses of Verbs exemplified for the Scholar's 
 Practice. 
 
 {Chap. V. 1 .] The sun Le soleil luit. 
 
 shines. 
 
 The summer it a very agree- L'ete est une saison tri- 
 able season, agr£ah!e. 
 
 Winter does, not please me. L'hiver ne me plait pis. 
 
 The stars begin to appear. Les etoiles commencent a pi- 
 
 roitre. 
 
 The days are very much Les jours sont tres-alonges. 
 
 lengthened. 
 
 These meadows are very Ces prairies sont tres-belles. 
 
 beautiful, 
 
 [2.] The brother and sister Le frere et la sceur s'y sont 
 
 were against it. opposes. 
 
 The father and mother have Le pere et la mere y ont 
 
 consented to it. consent!. 
 
 [3.] Neither he nor she Ni lui ni elle ne lul ont 
 
 has spoken ro him [or to parle. 
 
 her.J 
 
 Either your brother, or- yoi*r Ou votre f*6re, on. votre 
 
 sister, has told it you, fceur, vous Ya dit. 
 
 [4.] Prayers, threats, #*- Prieres, menaces, rien ne 
 
 thing can move him. peut l'emouvoir. 
 
 Honours, riches, pleasures, Honneurs, richesses, plahirs>. 
 
 t<very thing disappears at tout disparoit a la mort. 
 
 ckalh. 
 
 [$.] A vast number of peo- Une iofinitede gens^ sont les 
 
 pie are duped by one dupes les uns des autres. 
 
 another. 
 
 ft great number of ships are Un grand nombre, de vais, 
 
 ready to sail. seaux sont prets a faire 
 
 voile. 
 
 Most part .of the goods ha<ve La plupart des .marehandkes 
 
 been bold. ont etc vendues. 
 
 p6.] // was I who saw it. C**sl moi qui Wat vu. 
 
 It ijas we who hindered C\st nous qui Yawns em- 
 
 him. pechc. 
 
 J: was you who made the C\st vous qui a<v z fait le 
 
 noise. bruit,. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 // was they who heard it. 
 
 227 
 
 [Sect. I. 2,] When I was 
 
 young, I /<rv ed play greatly . 
 1 had a mind to write to 
 
 him. 
 He had a mind to come aiird 
 
 see you. 
 When I was in London, I 
 
 used to go very often to 
 
 the^lay. 
 You 'were scarcely gone, 
 
 when he arrived. 
 I expected nothing , else. 
 
 He was afraid to interrupt 
 
 yoo. 
 She was not so angry, as she 
 
 seemed^ t<ybe. 
 I was in the Park, when he 
 
 spoke to you.. 
 I was in London, when the 
 
 duke of Cumberland died. 
 
 He seemed much surprised at 
 
 that news. 
 Where were you, when the 
 
 King was crowned? I was 
 
 in France. 
 He was very sprightly in his 
 
 youth. 
 He had a great many friends 
 
 in London. . 
 He was not persuaded of 
 
 what he said. 
 My father was seventy years 
 
 old when he died. 
 His mother was forty years 
 
 old, , when, she married 1 
 
 again. 
 i/.yeu would speak to him 
 
 \qr to her.] 
 
 Ce sont eux qui Vont en ten* 
 
 du. 
 Quand y/fois. jeune, y aimois 
 
 beaucoup le jeu. 
 ]'a-vo/s envie de lui ecrire. 
 
 11 a<vo it erwie de venir vous 
 
 voir. 
 Quand j'etois a Londres, 
 
 j % alldis t r es - s o u v en t a ia* 
 
 corned ie. 
 A peine etiez* vous parti,- 
 
 qu'il arriva, 
 Je ne m'attendois a rien au~ 
 
 tre chose. 
 II await peur de vous inter- 
 
 rompre. . 
 Elle n'etoit pas si fachee 
 
 qu*elk le parsissoit. 
 Ye'tois au Pare quand il vous 
 
 par la* ; 
 Ye'tois a Londres, quand le 
 
 due de Cumberland moo- 
 rs tv. 
 II parol ssoit fort surpris de 
 
 cette nouvelle. 
 Ou ///Vz-vous, quand le Roi 
 
 fut couronne ? J'e'/ois en 
 
 France. 
 II etoit tres-vif dans sa jeu-- 
 
 nesse. 
 II awoit beauconp d'amis a 
 
 Londres. • 
 II n'e'toit pas persuade de ce 
 
 qu'il disoit.. 
 Mon pere aw*t so»xante-ef- - 
 
 dix ans,- quand il mourut. • 
 §a mere await quarante ans 
 
 quand elle se remaria. 
 
 Si vous lui parliez* • 
 
 L 6; 
 
2*S 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 If you should write to him 
 [or to her.] 
 
 If she would be angry at it. 
 
 If I should go and see him. 
 
 If he would employ half his 
 time. 
 
 If she would apply herself to 
 music. 
 
 If we could "know. 
 
 If they would apply them- 
 selves to something use- 
 fui. 
 
 if they would listen to flat- 
 teries. 
 
 [3.] I have written six let- 
 ters to day. 
 
 i&^ you seen him to day ? 
 
 1 have not spoken to him far 
 
 to her} to day. 
 Where have you few* to 
 
 day ? 
 I; £tfiY been in the Park;, 
 J saw him to day. 
 She went to the play this 
 
 week. 
 He has not studied this 
 
 week. 
 I «u^#/ into the country this 
 
 week. 
 You have lost your time this 
 
 week . 
 What have you done this 
 
 week ? 
 We haw* spent a great deal 
 
 of money this week. 
 
 You have done more work 
 ihan I this week. 
 
 1 his morth has not been 
 very sharp. 
 
 Si vous lui ecrrviez* 
 
 <S/elIe s'en fachoit. 
 
 Si je Y allots voir. 
 
 ff*il employoit la moitie de 
 
 son temps. 
 «5V elle s'appliqutit a la mu- 
 
 sique. 
 «S7 nous savions, 
 S'ils % y appliquoient a quelqtJ6 
 
 chose d'utile. 
 
 & elles prttoient 1'oreiUe 
 aux flatteries. 
 
 ]'ai ecrit six lettres aujour- 
 d'hui. 
 
 L'^t^-vous *vu aujour- 
 d'hui ? 
 
 Je ne lui at pas parte au- 
 jourd'hiw. 
 
 Ou avez-vous //*' aujour- 
 d'hui ? 
 
 Vat ete au Pare. 
 
 je l\z/ i;a aujourd'hui. 
 
 Elle a ete a la comedie cette 
 semaine. 
 
 II tfa pas etudie cette se~ 
 maine-ci. 
 
 YaieWi. la campagne cette 
 semaine-ci. 
 
 Vous avez perdu rotre 
 temps cette semaine-ci. 
 
 QuWra-vous fait cette se- 
 maine ? 
 
 Nous avons depense beau- 
 coup d'argent cette sc* 
 maine-ci. 
 
 Vous avez fait plus d'ou- 
 vrage que moi cette se- 
 maine-ci. 
 
 Ce moisicLn/o- pas ete tr£s- 
 rutie. 
 
It has been very hot this 
 
 month. 
 It has rained all this month. 
 It has not snowed this month. 
 It has been exceeding cold 
 
 this month. 
 They have had a plentiful 
 
 harvest this year. 
 This year has not been very 
 
 favourable to me. 
 •You have been very lucky 
 
 this year. 
 They have lost a great deal 
 
 of money this year. 
 I have been in France this 
 
 year. 
 She died this year. 
 He has been very sick this 
 
 year. 
 He is arrived from the West 
 
 Indies this year. 
 I wrote six letters y ester. 
 
 day *. 
 Did you see him yesterday ? 
 I did not speak to him [or to 
 
 her] yesterday. 
 Where did you go yesterday ? 
 
 I went to the Park. 
 I saw him yesterday. 
 I met with her "yesterday in 
 
 the street. 
 She went to the play last 
 
 week. 
 He did not study last week. 
 
 I went into the country last 
 
 week. 
 You lost your time last 
 
 week. 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 229 
 
 II a fait tres-chaud ce mois. 
 
 II a plu tout ce mois-ci. 
 
 Iln'tf pas neige ce mois-ci. 
 
 II a fait tres-froid ce mois- 
 ci* 
 
 On a eu une moisson abon- 
 dante cette annee-ci. 
 
 Cette anne-ci ne m'a pas 
 ete tres-favorable. 
 
 Vous avez eti tres-heureux 
 cette annee-ci. 
 
 lis ont perdu beaucoup d'ar- 
 gent cette annee-ci. 
 
 Yaietetvi France cette an- 
 nee-ci. 
 
 Elle est morte cette annee-ci. 
 
 II a ete tres-nialade cette 
 annee-ci. 
 
 II est revemt des Indes Oc- 
 cidentals cette annee-ci* 
 
 \ecrivis hier six lettres. 
 
 Le vztes-vous hier ? 
 Je ne lui parlai pas hier. 
 
 Ou /#/*$- vous hier? Je fits 
 au Pare. 
 
 Je ie vis hier. 
 
 Je la rencontrai hier dans la 
 rue. 
 
 Elle fut a la comedte la se- 
 maine passee. 
 
 II v\etudia pas le semaine 
 passee. 
 
 Je fus a la campagne la se- 
 maine passe* 
 
 Vous perdites votre temps la 
 semaine passee. 
 
 • I repeat, purposely, the foregoing examples, to render the different 
 uses of Che tenses more intelligible Co che learner, 
 
2-3P 
 
 A. GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 What did yon do last week ? Que ffos-vous la semaine 
 
 We spent a great deal of mo- 
 ney last week* 
 
 You did more work than I 
 last week. 
 
 Last month was not very 
 
 sharp. 
 It was exceeding hot last 
 
 month, 
 It rained all last month* 
 It did not snow last month. 
 
 It was exceeding cold last 
 month. . 
 
 They had a plentiful harvest 
 last year. 
 
 Last year was not very fa- 
 vourable to, me. 
 
 Yon were very lucky last 
 year. 
 
 They lost a great deal of mo- 
 ney last yean 
 
 1 went to France last year* 
 
 She died last year. 
 
 He was very sick last year; 
 
 He arrived from the West 
 
 Indies last year,. 
 How have you been, since I 
 
 had the pleasure of seeing 
 
 you ? 
 I have been very sick, since 
 
 I arrived from the East- 
 Indies. 
 I have received no. tidings 
 
 of him. since he went 
 
 away, 2 
 
 passee r 
 Nous depemanus beaucoi:p 
 
 d* argent la seraaine pas- 
 
 sie. 
 Vous fites plus d'ouvrage 
 
 que moi la semaine paa* 
 
 see. 
 Le mois passe ne fut pas 
 
 tres-rude. 
 II fit tres-chaud le mors; 
 
 passe. 
 Wplut tout.le moi passe. 
 11 ne neigea pas le mois pas* 
 
 se. 
 II fit tres-froidle mois pas* 
 
 se. 
 On eut une moisson abon- 
 
 dante Panee passee. 
 L'annee passee ne. me /;»* 
 
 pas tres-favorable. 
 Vous futes tres-heureux Pan* 
 
 nee passee. 
 lis perdirent beaucoup d'as- 
 
 gent Pannee passee. 
 j'alfai en France Pannee 
 
 passee. 
 Elle mourut Pannee passee. 
 11 jut tres-malade Pannee 
 
 passee. 
 11 arriva des lades Occi- 
 
 dentales l'annee passee. 
 Comment vous etes-vous 
 
 parte, depuis que je n'ai 
 
 en le plaisirde vous voir ? 
 )\ai cte tres-malado, dcpi:U 
 
 que je suis arrive des hi- 
 des Orientates* 
 Je x\ ai pas rccu de ses nou* 
 
 velles depuis qu'il ell; 
 
 parti* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 231 
 
 Have you seen him, since he LWfZ-vous <i>«, depuis qu'il 
 arrived from France? est arrive de France ? 
 
 Where ha<vt you £«»/?, J/tffe' Ou avez-vom ete\ depuis 
 you went out ? que vous etes sorti ? 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 The Use of the Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 1. The subjunctive mood is used after que, or qui, preceded by a verb 
 denoting doubt, wish, fear, command, prohibition, &c.j such are 
 craindre, prier, dcuter, soubaiter, permetire, commander, de'fendre, Sec, ; aj, 
 his father has forbidden him to go thither; son pent a defendu qu'il y 
 allit. But when any of these verbs govern a noun or pronoun, and 
 the action of the verb following belongs to the person designated by the 
 noun or pronoun, it is. put in the infinitive mood, commonly with the 
 preposition de before it; , as in the foregoing example, son pere lui a 
 defendu d'y al/er. 
 
 2. The subjunctive mood is likewise- used after que preceded by an 
 impersonal verb that denotes a thing ought to be, or to be done; as, I 
 must go thither ; iifaut que j y y aille. See the 9th observation upon im- 
 personal verbs, 
 
 3. There are some impersonal verbs which govern the indicative 
 mood: such are, i I parol r, U y apparence, &c, and those which de- 
 note any thing as more positively existing or being done. But, .when 
 the same impersonal verbs are used negatively or interrogatively, ..they 
 govern the subjunctive mood; as, it is true that you are married; il 
 est vrai que vous etes marie'; .is it true, that you are married ? est it vrai 
 gue vous soye z marie' f 
 
 4. The subjunctive mood is used after verbs preceded by ne or si, 
 used in a doubtful manner, and followed by que or qui; as ,1 do not be- 
 lieve, that he has done it; je ne crois pas qu'i/ I'aixtfait ; if you think I 
 am an honest man, si vous croye-z, que je sois bonnete bomme. Some gram- 
 marians say, that, speaking in the last instance positively, the verb 
 following que is put in the indicative mood; as, si vous croyt% que je suit 
 bonnete bomme *. 
 
 The indicative mood is more properly used in the foregoing case, af- 
 ter the verbs dire, tnoncer, affirmer, and the like, as : if you say, that 
 he is an honest man ; si vous dites qu'i/ est bonnete bomme ; Except when 
 the verb dire implies a command or prohibition ; as, tell him to come 3 
 drtes-lu: qu'//vienne# 
 
 6 The subjunctive mood is used after the verb il semble, it seerns, 
 when it implies a doubt, when it means to look as if\ as, it seems that 
 you are angry, or, you look as if you were angry; il semble que vous 
 soyez facbe. But if that verb imply a persuasion, or have a pronoun 
 
 * N. B. In this last instance, si has the import of £uisquc, and signi- 
 fies as) % . 
 
23 2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 before it, or a governed word afler it, the indicative mood is to be 
 used ; as, il me terrible, or, il semble a la compagnie que vous etes facte'. 
 
 J. A verb following another, which is in the subjunctive mood, 
 must also be put in the same mood after que or qui ; as, do you be- 
 lieve, that he expects I shall come? croyez-vGus qu 1 /'/ j'attende que je 
 vienne ? , 
 
 8. The subjunctive mood is used, ist. after quolque, quelque que, quel 
 que, &c>. signifying whomever, whatever, &c : as, though you are 
 rich, quoique vtus soyez rkbe ; though you are ever so rich,, queique 
 tube que *voui soyez. See the 19th and 20th observations upoa inde- 
 terminate pronouns, page 197. 
 
 adly, After que used instead of repeating the conjunctions 5/ in the 
 second member of a sentence; as, if you study and take pains; si -vcus 
 etudiez et que vons preniez de la peine. See the 5th observation upon 
 the conjunctions si and que, ch. x. page 294. 
 
 3<Hy, After the pronoun qui or que preceded immediately by a super- 
 lative; as, it is the best news you can tell me, Cest la meilieure ncu- 
 velle que vous puissiez me dire f 
 
 4thly, After que used instead of de ce que, which governs the indi- 
 cative mood ; as, I am sorry he is not come ; je suit facte qu'// ne soit 
 pat *venu^ or, de ce qu'il n*ett pat t venu. 
 
 5thly, After the relative pronoun qui or que between two verbs, sc 
 as to express some desire, need, or necessity 5 as, I seek a woman who 
 is handsome, rich,. and wise, je cbercbe une femme qui soit belle, ricbr, tt 
 sage. 
 
 6thly, We elegantly make use of the compound of the preterit of 
 the subjunctive m >od after 5;, instead of the compound of the imper- 
 fect of the indicative; as, if I. had been informed of it sooner, that 
 would not have happened ; si fen eusse ete averti plus tot, cela ne scrtit 
 pas arrii>e.\ 
 
 9. The verb which is in the future in English is put in the present in 
 French, whenever it ought to be in the subjunctive mood ; as, do ycu 
 think, that he will come } . croyecn-'vous qu'/7 vienne? 1 do not believe 
 that he will write, je re crcii pas qiw/ ecrive. Except after the verbs 
 savoir, assurer, &c, where si signifying whether, must be used in- 
 stead of que :■ as, do you know whether he will come ? sa<ve%.>v<<us s'i/- 
 viendra ? 
 
 10. The verb, which according to the aforesaid rules, is put in the 
 subjunctive mood, must be put in the present tense of thatinooi, if it 
 be preceded by a verb in the present or future tense, or in the impera- 
 tive ; as do you believe that he will guess it, croyez-veus qu'i/ le de- 
 vine ? will. you believe now, that he has written ? croirezvous a present 
 qu'i/tf/r ccrit? If the iirst verb be in a*ny other tense, or in a compound 
 one, the pieterit of the subjunctive mood is to be used: as, what 
 would you have him do? Que vouJricz-'VQus qu'il fit f 
 
 This tense is likewise used, when the verb which is in^the subjunc- 
 tive mood is followed by the conjunction si } and a verb in the imper- 
 fect tense, or a conditional expression, though the first verb is in the 
 present} as, do you believe, that he could guess it, if you would not 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 233 
 
 cell it him r crcytz-vous qu'i/ k devinat, si njous ne k lui disskz pas? { 
 <ioubt whether he would have succeeded without the help, ot hia 
 rriends, je doute ^\x y \\ eut reussi sans le secours de ses urn'is. 
 
 N. B. As there are some conjunctions, which require the subjunc- 
 tive mood, and are every where the same, it will not be amiss to set 
 them down here, as I have met with them in other grammars. 
 
 Conjunctions governing the Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 } 
 
 Afin que, pour que, — 
 
 avant que, — — 
 
 sans que, — — 
 
 quoique, bien que, encore que 
 
 soit que, — — 
 
 suppose ou snpposons que 
 
 au cas, ou en cas que, — 
 a la bonne heure que, 
 non que, 
 non pas que, 
 $e n'est pas que, 
 pourvu que, 
 
 a moins que, — — 
 
 pour peu que, — — 
 
 de peur que, — — 
 
 de crainte que, — ■ — 
 
 loin que, — — 
 
 bien loin que, — — » 
 
 malgre que, — — 
 
 nonobstant que, — 
 
 Dieu veuille que, — 
 Plaise, ou plut a Dieu que, 
 
 a Diu ne plaise que, — 
 sinon que, 1 
 si ce n'est que, J 
 
 • that s to the end that* 
 
 ■ before, 
 
 - with Gttt that. 
 
 ■ though. 
 
 - whether and or. 
 
 • suppzse that, 
 
 • iit that case, or if* 
 
 ■ I grant that* 
 
 ■ not that, 
 
 ■ it is not that* 
 provided, 
 
 - unless. 
 
 ■ if ever so little* 
 for fear that, 
 
 ■ lest, 
 
 ■ far from. 
 
 ■ <very far from, 
 
 for all that, though. 
 
 ■ notwithstanding that* 
 God grant, 
 
 wwld to God, 
 
 ■ God forbid. 
 
 save, but. 
 
 N.B. The last two govern the subjunctive mood, when they are 
 preceded by a verb expressing command, desire, or uncertainty. In 
 other cases they govern the indicative mood; as, I want nothing of 
 you, but to do your duty ; je ne veux rlen autre chose de vous sinon que, 
 ou, si ce n'est que, njoui fassiez votre devAr ; I answered him nothing, 
 but that I had executed his orders, je ne lui ai re'pondu autre cfase y sinon 
 $ue, ou si ce n'est que^'V/ois exe'eutf set crdres. 
 
234 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood exemplified for the Scholar's 
 Practice. 
 
 f i.] I was afraid he would Je craignois qu'il ne mint, 
 
 come. 
 
 I suspected he iviuld write Je doutois qu'il vous e'cri*vft m 
 
 to you, 
 
 1 did not doubt, but he Je ne doutois pas qu*i\ nzf&t 
 
 would be very glad to see bien aise de vous voir. 
 
 you. 
 
 Her mother commanded her Sa mere a commande ^a'elle 
 
 to marry him. Vepousaty ou lui a com- 
 mande de Vcpouser. 
 
 His father has forbidden him Son pere a defendu qu'W 
 
 to play. joudty ou lui a defendu de 
 
 j ouer. 
 
 Her husband permitted her Son mari a permis qu'elle aU 
 
 /0£5 to the play* l&t a la comedie, ou lui 
 
 a permis d'aller a la co* 
 medic 
 fa.] I must write to him. II faut que je lui ccrvve. 
 It is convenient for you to II convient y#*vous lui par- 
 speak to her. hex. 
 It is of consequence for him II est de consequence qu'it 
 
 to hep good company. frequente la bonne com* 
 
 pagnie. 
 
 There is no way for her to II n'y a pas moyen £*'el!e 
 
 escape, echappc. 
 
 It is surpising that she has II est sarprenant f**elle cti 
 
 succeeded, reussi. 
 
 It is just, that he should be Ii est juste qu'il mrt reeorru 
 
 rewarded, pense. 
 
 It is unjust, that he should II est injuste qu'il soit puni. 
 
 be punished. 
 
 It is fit, that you give hirn II est a propos que vous fcr- 
 
 nvarniz/g. <verfissii%>. 
 
 It is necessary for him to go II est nccessaire ja'il y <7/7fr. 
 
 thither. 
 
 It is improper for you to go II est indecent que vous a 9 .* 
 
 alone, //V* scul. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 It is astonishing, that he 
 
 knew nothing of it. 
 It is lucky, that she is not 
 
 dead. 
 It is impossible for him to 
 
 recover* 
 It is next to impossible, that 
 
 she should be ignorant of it. 
 [3.] It seems, that you 
 
 know him. 
 It seems, that he speaks truth. 
 It seems, that he is an honest 
 
 man. 
 It seems that she is surprised 
 It seems that he is angry. 
 It is likely, that he knew 
 
 her. 
 It. is likely, that you saw 
 
 him. 
 It is likely, thai he wrote to 
 
 her. 
 It is likely, that she loved 
 
 him. 
 It is true, that I spoke to him. 
 It is true, that he saw her. 
 It is true, that she wrote to 
 
 him. 
 It is true, that my father 
 
 knows him. 
 It is certain, /^/ he is dead. 
 It is certain, that he li come 
 
 from Flanders. 
 It is certain, that he does not 
 
 know him. 
 It is certain, that he told 
 
 him that news. 
 It is certain, that he •*?»/* 
 
 to her. 
 It is certain, that he under* 
 
 stands his lesson. 
 It is said, that the king of 
 
 Spain, //dead. 
 
 II eft etonnant ^a'il n'en 
 
 sut rien. 
 II est heureux qu'tlle ne &> 
 
 pas morte. 
 It est impossible qu'il en re- 
 
 <vienne. 
 II est presque impossible 
 
 ^'elle ne le sache, 
 II paroit que vous le connois* 
 
 sez, 
 II paroit qu'il dit vrai. 
 II paroit qu'il est honnele 
 
 homme. 
 II paroit ^'elle est surprise. 
 II paroit qu'il est fache. 
 II y a apparence qu'il Va 
 
 connue. 
 11 y a apparence que vous 
 
 1'avez vu. 
 II y a apparence qu'il lui a 
 
 ecrit. 
 11 y a apparence qu'ellt Va 
 
 aime. 
 II est vrai que je lui ai parle* 
 11 est vrai qu'il Va vue. 
 II est vrai qu'ellelui a ecrit. 
 
 II est vrai que mon pere le 
 
 connoh, 
 II est certain qu'il est roorf. 
 II est. certain qu'il est reventi 
 
 dc Flandre. 
 II est certain qu'il ne le tm. 
 
 noit pas. 
 II est sur p'il lui a dit cette 
 
 nouvelle. 
 II est sur qu'il lui a ecrit* 
 
 II est sur qu'il sait sa lec^on. 
 
 On dit que le roi d'Espagne 
 est mort. 
 
236 
 
 It is thought, that he has 
 
 made his fortune, 
 [4.] * It does not seem, that 
 
 you know him. 
 It does not seem, that he 
 
 speaks truth. 
 It does not seem, that he is 
 
 an honest man. 
 It does not seem, that she is 
 
 surprised. 
 It does not seem, that she is 
 
 angry. 
 It is not likely, that he 
 
 knew her. 
 It. is not likely, that you 
 , saw him. 
 It is not likely, that he 
 
 wrote to her. 
 It is not likely, that she 
 
 loved him. 
 It is not true, that I jr/oi* to 
 
 him. 
 It is not true, that he saw her. 
 It is not true, that she wrote 
 
 to him. 
 It is not true, that my fa- 
 ther knows him. 
 It is not certain, that he is 
 
 dead. 
 It is not certain, that he is 
 
 come from Flanders. 
 It is not certain, that he 
 
 does not know him. 
 It is not certain, that he 
 
 te/</him that news. 
 It is not certain, that he 
 
 wrote to her. 
 It is not certain, that he un- 
 derstands his lesson. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Op croit qu'il a fait sa for- 
 tune. 
 II ne paroit pas que vous le 
 
 connoifsiez. 
 II ne paroit pas qu'il dise 
 
 vrai. 
 II ne paroit pas qu'il so it 
 
 honnete homme. 
 II ne paroit pas qu'elle soil 
 
 surprise. 
 II ne paroit pas ^a'elle soil 
 
 fachee. 
 II n'y a point d'apparence 
 
 qu'il I' ait connue. 
 II n'y a point d'apparence 
 
 que VOUS I'aycz^ vu. 
 II n'y a point d'apparence 
 
 qu'il lui ait ecrit. 
 II n'y a point d'apparence 
 
 qu'tlle Yait aime. 
 II n'est pas vrai que je lui 
 
 aie parle. 
 II n'est pas vrai qu'il I'aJtvuz. 
 II n'est pas vrai qu'elle lui 
 
 ait ecrit. 
 II n'est pas vrai que mon pere 
 
 le conuoisse, 
 II n'est pas certain qu'il wit 
 
 mort. 
 II n'est pas certain qu'il s:it 
 
 venu de Flandre. 
 II n'est pas certain qu'il ne 
 
 le connoisse pas. 
 II n'est pas sur qu'i\ lui ait 
 
 dit cette nouvelle. 
 II n'est pas sur y^'il lui ait 
 
 ecrit. 
 II n'est pas sur qu'il sachet* 
 
 lecon. 
 
 * The twenty-one preceding examples are varied here purposely, t* 
 render the third rule, and the exceptions to it more intelligible to tht 
 learner. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 2 37 
 
 ft h not said, that the king 
 
 of Spain is dead. 
 It is not thought, that he 
 
 has made his fortune. 
 [5.] He told me, that he 
 
 ■would write to you. 
 I shall tell him, that you 
 
 ^-rr come to see him. 
 Tell him I will come and see 
 
 him. 
 Did you tell him, that I 
 
 taw you r" 
 Do not tell him, that I shall 
 
 go to the play. 
 Do not tell him, that you 
 
 taw me. 
 Tell him, that I <z^#/ out. 
 Tell him, that I tame to 
 
 speak to him. 
 I shall tell him, that you 
 
 spoke to me. 
 I shall tell him, that you 
 
 were perfect in your les- 
 son. 
 Tell him to come and see me. 
 Tell him not to call to day. 
 
 Tell him to write his theme 
 
 out fair. 
 Tell her to hold her tongue. 
 Tell him tt hriwr his books. 
 
 Tell him to learn his lesson. 
 
 Tell him to give you my 
 
 penknife back again. 
 Tell him to give you paper. 
 
 1 shall tell him, to wriu to 
 
 you. 
 I shall tell him, to tab care 
 
 of you- 
 
 On ne dit pas que le rci , 
 
 d'Espagne soit mort. 
 On ne per.se pas qu y \\ ait fait 
 
 sa fortune. 
 Ii m'a dit qu'il vous ecrira* 
 
 Je lui dirai que vous etes ve- 
 
 nu pour le voir. 
 Dites-lui que je <viendrai le 
 
 voir. 
 Lui avez-vous dit que je 
 
 vous ai vu ? 
 Ne lui dites pas que 'yiraih 
 
 la eomedie. 
 Ne lui dites pas que vous 
 
 m'avez vu. 
 Dites-lui que je suis sorti. 
 Dites-lui que je suis venu 
 
 pour lui parler. 
 Je lui dirai que vous m'avez 
 
 parle. 
 Je lui dirai que vous saw'ez, 
 
 votre iec on. 
 
 Dites-lui f«'il i'wme voir. 
 Dites-lui fa'il ne vie/me pas 
 
 aujourd'hui. 
 Dites-lui qu'il metie son 
 
 theme au net. § 
 
 Dites-lui p'elle se taise* 
 Dites-lui qu'W appcrte ses 
 
 livres. 
 Difes-lui qu'il apprenne sa 
 
 Leon. 
 Dit-es-lui qu'W vous rende 
 
 n>on can if. 
 Dites-lui qu'W vous donne 
 
 du papier. 
 Je lui dirai qu'i\ vous ecrinje, 
 
 Je lui dirai f«'il ait scin de 
 vous. 1 
 
238 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Do not tell her to 'write to Ne lui dites pas qu'tt\\t 
 
 me. m*e'crive. 
 
 Will you tell him to bring his Lui direz- vous qtt\\ apporie 
 
 bill ? son memoire ? 
 
 Will you tell him not to be Lui direz-vous ^a'il ne soit 
 
 angry ? pas fache ? 
 
 I shall tell him not to be un- Je lui dirai qu'il soit tran- 
 
 easy. quille. 
 
 I shall tell her t& send you Je lui dirai ^a'elle vous en- 
 
 your book. voie votre livre. 
 
 I shall tell them to give you Je leur dirai ^a'ils vous/^x. 
 
 an answer. sent reponse. 
 
 I shall tell him to be mode. Je lui dirai qu*x\ soit mo- 
 rate, dere. 
 
 [6.] She seems to be angry. II semble ^'elle soit fachee. 
 
 It seemsj that you know II semble que vous le connois- 
 
 him. siez* 
 
 It seems, that he is in the II semble ^«'il ait raison. 
 
 right. 
 
 It seems, that she is in the II semble ^a'elle ait tort, 
 
 wrong. 
 
 It seems, that you are older. II semble que vous etes plus 
 
 age. 
 
 It does not seem, that she is II ne semble pas ^«'elle soit 
 
 sick. malade. 
 
 It seems to me> that you are II me semble que vous etes 
 
 sorry. Cache. 
 
 It seems to me, that he is II me semble qu'il est fort sa- 
 
 very learned. Vant. 
 
 It seems to him, that she is II lui semble qu'elle est fort 
 
 very pretty. jolie. 
 
 A covetous man thinks he II semble a un avare qu?\\ 
 
 never has enough. n'a jamais assez^ 
 
 Your brother thinks he is II semble a votre frere qu r A 
 
 rich enough. est assez riche. 
 
 [8.] If he come aud ask for S'il vient et qu\\ demande 
 
 me, tell him 1 am not at apres moi, dites-lui que 
 
 home. je ne suis pas au logis. 
 
 If you study, and if you Si vous etudiez, et que vous 
 
 take pains, you will learn freniez de la peine, vous 
 
FRENCH 
 
 'the French language in a 
 
 short time. 
 He is the most conceited 
 
 man I know. 
 She is the handsomest lady 
 
 you ever s£w, 
 
 I am sorry he is sick. 
 
 I am glad she is better. 
 
 I am surprised, that he is 
 not come. 
 
 I am over joyed, that he has 
 gained his lawsuit. 
 
 I am surprised, that she has 
 married him. 
 
 She is grieved, that you 
 ^«</her no news. 
 
 I am surprised at his having 
 made his fortune in so 
 short a time. 
 
 Give me a handkerchief /A*/ 
 
 is clean. 
 I look for a servant whom I 
 
 may trust. 
 He looks for a woman <who 
 
 is rich. 
 She looks for a husband <who 
 
 is handsome. : 
 [-9.] Is it certain, that he 
 
 twill come to day ? 
 
 TONGUE. 239 
 
 apprendrez le Francois en 
 peu de temps. 
 
 C'est Thomme le plus suffi- 
 sant que je cennoisse* 
 
 C'est la plus belle demoi- 
 selle que vous syez jamais 
 vue. 
 
 Je suis fache q?i'i\ soit ma- 
 lade, ou de ce qu'il est ma- 
 lade. 
 
 Je suis bien aise ^a'elle se 
 porte mieux. 
 
 Je suis surpris qu' 11 ne soit 
 pas venu, ou de ce qu'il 
 n'est pas venu. 
 
 Je suis ravi qu'il ait gagne 
 son proces, ou de ce qu''A 
 a gagne son proces. 
 
 Je suis surpris £#'elle Vait 
 epouse, ou de ce ^a'elle 
 Va epouse. 
 
 Elle est ehagrine que vous ne 
 lui donniex, point de nou- 
 velles, ou de ce que vous 
 ne lui donne-z pas de nou- 
 velles. 
 
 Je suis surpris qu'il ait fait 
 sa fortune eu si peu de 
 temps, ou de ce qu ll a fait 
 sa fortune en si peu de 
 temps. 
 
 Donnez-moi un mouchoir qui 
 soit blanc. 
 
 Je cherche un domestique a 
 qui je puisse me tier. 
 
 II cherche un femme qui 
 soit riche. 
 
 Elle cherche un mari qui soit 
 bel homme. 
 
 Est-il sur ^«'il *vienne au« 
 jourd'hui ? 
 
2 4 o A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 [10.] Do you believe, that Croyez-vous ^'elle aille 
 
 she 'will go to the play ? la comedie ? 
 
 I do not believe, that she Je ne crois pas ^a'elle soit 
 
 will be angry with you. fachee contre vous. 
 
 I suspect, that, he twill write Je doute qu'il vous ecri<ve % 
 
 to you. 
 
 Is it certain, that he will go Est-il s\xvqu y \\ aille en France 
 
 to France next spring f au printemps procbain ? 
 
 Is it not certain, that he twill II n'est pas sur ^«'il rebienm 
 
 come back this summer. cet ere. 
 
 Do you thir.k, that he will Croyez-vous qu'W- mpfrennt 
 
 learn French in four le Francois en qua t re 
 
 months ? mois ? 
 
 Do you think, that he will Pensez-vous qu'il soit a la 
 
 be in the country next campagne la semaine pro, 
 
 week * chame I 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 The Government of Verbs. 
 
 1. Active verbs govern the first case ; as, I read the 
 books, je lis les livres. Passive verbs govern the second 
 case : as, he is esteemed by all men, il est estime de tout k 
 monde. 
 
 They also govern the first case with the preposition par^ speaking of 
 some bodily action $ as, he was killed by robbers, II ae.e tue'pzv dei rs- 
 ieurs. In speaking of actions, which partake both of the sentiments of 
 the mind, and motion ot the body, we commonly make use of par % 
 though we say, il est entoure de gens emtuyeux, he is surrounded by trou- 
 blesome -people ; here entture expresses only, tkat troublesome people 
 are round about him. 
 
 2. Verbs that signify to give, or to take away, govern 
 the first case of the thing, and the third ca.->e of the person : 
 as, I have given him the book, je lui at ' dovtie le livre ; 
 they have taken his sword from him, ils lui ont M son 
 
 cpe. 
 
 3. Many verbs govern the infinitive of a verb, with the 
 preposition de before it; which occurs when to in English 
 may be changed into of, from, by, or with ; as, he hin- 
 dered me from working ; il nfempecha de travaiUer* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 2+ i 
 
 4. Many verbs govern the infinitive with the preposi- 
 tion a before it : in this case, to, in English, almost 
 always may be changed into in, or, for ; as, help me to 
 do it, or in doing it, aidez-moi a le faire. 
 
 5. Some verbs have the preposition pour before their in- 
 finitive, which occurs when to denotes the design, end, or 
 reason of fhe passion or action of the verb. In this case, to 
 can be changed into in order to, 'with a design to, to the 
 end that ; as, I came to see you, or in order to see you, or 
 with a design to see you ; je suis wenu pour <vous <voir. 
 
 6. There are five verbs after which de and a are used 
 indiscriminately before the infinitive ; contraindre, continuer y 
 discontinuer, essajer, forcer. 
 
 The verb cbliger, in the sense of to force, to excite, to engage, is 
 followed by the preposition a before the infinitive ; as, I will oblige 
 him to do it, je Vobligerdi a le faire : when it is used passively, it is 
 followed by the preposition de \ as, he was obliged to do it, il fut 
 oblige de le faire. 
 
 When tbe verb tacher means simply to seek or aim at semething, it 
 takes the preposition & before the infinitive ; as, he seeks to injure me, 
 ii tdebe a me nu'ire : when it implies effort, it requires the preposition: 
 de j as I will endeavour to please you, je tdeberai de vous plaire. 
 
 When the verb s'fforcer is used in the sense of to strive, to strain, to 
 make use of all our strength, it requires the preposition a before the 
 next infinitive : but when it is used in the sense of to endeavour, to 
 make use of our industry, it requires the preposition de; as, he strove 
 to run, il s" 'est efforce 'a courir : he endeavours to please her, il s\fferce 
 *ie lu'i plaire. 
 
 When the verb tarder is used personally, it requires the preposition 
 a: when impersonally, the preposition de; as, do not stay, ne tarde% 
 pas a rcvenir: I long to get rid of the business, il me tarde d^etre bsrs d'af* 
 faire. In this tense it is always joined to a third case, and may be fol- 
 k)wed by que, with the verb in the subjunctive mood; as il mt tarde 
 <{\it je sois bort d" affaire. 
 
 The verb commencer is sometimes followed by de; according to tht 
 French Acadsmy, the ear is the judge in such a case. When it sig- 
 nifies to begin by, it is followed by par; as, he began by reading 
 jEsop's Fables, il cemmer.ca par lire let Fables d^Esope. 
 
 The verb manquer requires the preposition de before the infinitive^ 
 when it is used negatively j as, I. will not fail to do what you please, 
 je ne manquerai pat de faire ce que vous voulez : or when it signifies to be 
 near, to be like, to do or suffer any thing ; as, I was like to fall, j'ai 
 manque dc tomber. In this sense it is always used affirmatively, and i* 
 familiar discourse. 
 
 M 
 
242 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 But when it is used affirmatively in the sense of not to do what we 
 ought, it is followed by the preposition a- y as, he has failed to do his 
 duty, il a manque a falre son devoir* 
 
 ? '. De is used before the infinitive of verbs, to which cer- 
 tain nouns are joined without an article; such are avoir 
 congi, permission, en c uie y coutume y besoin y sujet y raison y droit y 
 tort, occasion, Sec. de, 
 
 8. Infinitive moods governed by the verb etre y followed 
 by an adjective governing the second case, take also de be- 
 fore them; as, 1 am glad to see you y je suis bien aise de <vous 
 i'&ir. But if the verb etre be followed by an adjective 
 which governs the third case, the verb which is in the in- 
 finitive takes before it the preposition a; as, he is ready to 
 go thither, il est pret a y a Her, 
 
 9. When etre, signifying to be, is followed by a noun, 
 and preceded by ce y the following verb, in the infinitive 
 mood, is preceded by que de ; as, it is a folly for a man to 
 forget himself: cest une folie que de se meconnoitre. 
 
 10. De is put before the infinitive after venir and nefaire 
 que, signifying an action that has just taken place ; as, I 
 left him jus t now, je <viens de le quitter, or je ne fais que de 
 le quitter. These two verbs are frequently used thus in the 
 present and imperfect tense,, but in no other. m 
 
 11. A is put after the verb -vemr, signifying to begin, or to set about 
 doing something : as, when I began to speak ; quand je vlns a parler. 
 This verb is used in all it's tenses, and is commonly placed after some 
 conjunctions. Sometimes it is not expressed i» English, though it is 
 added to the French verb; as when he shall know that, quand it wen- 
 dra a sa*voir cela. 
 
 12. A is put before infinitive moods or verbal nouns governed by 
 etre, preceded by a', and used in the sense of to be a person's turn, his 
 business, or his duty ; as, it is your turn to drink, c^est a vous a ho'ire. 
 
 13. A. verb coming after asse* or trop very often requires the prepo- 
 sition pour before it; as, he has vanity enough to believe it, il a assez 
 de vanite pour I e noire. Sometimes it takes the preposition de\ as, to 
 sffront him was not sufficient, ce n'ttoit pas assez de Voutrager. ; some- 
 times no preposition at all; as, this is insulting me enough, or too 
 much, c*est assez ou t*est trop m'insulter. Hence it appears how much 
 grammarians are in the wrong, in saying that assez and trop always re- 
 quire the preposition pour betore the next infinitive. mood. 
 
 14.. When two or more verbs requiring different cases 
 after them govern the same object, this must follow the 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 m 
 
 first verb in the case this verb governs, and a relative pro- 
 noun must be put after each of the other verbs in the case 
 governed by that verb ; as, that pleased and charmed the 
 prince, cela plut au prince et ie charma ; and not tela pint et 
 cbarma it prince ; because plaire governs the third case of 
 the person, and charmer the first. 
 
 i£. There are some verbs which take no preposition 
 after them before the infinitive mood ; as, alter , venir, en~ 
 <voyer, s avoir, faire, oser, voir, pouvoir, vouhir, croire, pre* 
 tendre, devoir, eccuter, entendre, daigner, &c. 
 
 Government of Verbs exemplified for the Scholar s 
 
 Practice. 
 [i.] I like Pope's e wsrks. J'aime les ceuvres de Pope. 
 
 You like apples and pears. 
 
 He is beloved by all his re- 
 lations. 
 
 He is respected by all his 
 pupils. 
 
 He was robbed bj two 
 rogues. 
 
 He is surrounded with flat- 
 terers. 
 
 [2.] I gave it to him. 
 
 When will you give me my 
 book ? 
 
 Will you give it to him ? 
 
 I did not give it to him. 
 
 She took it fro?n him. 
 
 Take this knife from him. 
 
 Do not take it from her. 
 
 [3.] Make an end of play- 
 ing. 
 
 I have not blamed you fur 
 having kept him com- 
 pany. 
 
 He has censured him for hav- 
 ing written. 
 
 Cea§e to reproach me with 
 my foible. 
 
 Vous aimez les po:nmes et lei 
 poire s. 
 
 II est aime de tous ses pa- 
 rens. 
 
 II est respectc de toas ses 
 eleven 
 
 II fut vol£ par deux -co- 
 quins. 
 
 il est entoure de flatteurs. 
 
 Je le lui ai donne. 
 
 Ouand me donnerez-vous 
 
 man livre? 
 Le lui donnerez-vous ? 
 Je ne le lui ai pas donne* 
 Eile/^ lui a ote. 
 Otez-iW ce cculeau. 
 Ne le lui otez pas. 
 Finissez de jouer. 
 
 Je ne vous ai point blam£ de 
 l'avoir frequente. 
 
 II Pa cen-sure ^'avoir ecrit. 
 
 Cessez de me reprocher mon 
 
 ■ foible. 
 
244 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Warn her to take care of her Avertissez-la 
 reputation. 
 
 I advised him to ask her 
 pardon. 
 
 Why have you deferred pay- 
 ing him ? 
 
 I wrote to him, to send me 
 my books, 
 
 I was frightened to see him. 
 
 Excuse mtfrom learning my 
 lesson to day. 
 
 Do not undertake to unde- 
 ceive her. 
 
 "Try to persuade her. 
 
 He was constrained to pay. 
 
 He deserves to be punished. 
 
 He has neglected to study. 
 
 I forgot to bring my books. 
 
 He pressingly invited me to 
 dine with him. 
 
 Did you promise to go thi- 
 ther ? 
 
 I advised him to be more 
 diligent. 
 
 She refused to speak to him. 
 
 I intend to go to France next 
 year. 
 
 Endeivour to please her. 
 
 Take care not to tell her, 
 that you know me. 
 
 I repent of having sold my 
 book. 
 
 She cannot forbear lying. 
 
 Make haste to prevent him. 
 
 Make haste to write your 
 letter. 
 
 He flatters himself, that he 
 knows almost every thing 
 that happens in the city. 
 
 de prendre 
 
 soin de sa reputation. 
 Je lui ai conseille de iui de- 
 
 mander pardon. 
 Potirquoi avez-vous differe 
 
 de le payer ? * 
 Je lui ai ecrit de m'envoyer 
 
 mes iivres. 
 Je fus effraye de le voir. 
 Dispensez-moi ^'apprendre 
 
 ma lecon aujourd'hui. 
 N'entreprenez pas de la de- 
 
 sabuser. 
 Essayez de la persuader. 
 II fut contraint de payer. 
 II merite d'etre, puni. 
 II a neglig6 </'etudier. 
 J'ai oublie ^'apporter mes 
 
 Iivres. 
 II m'a presse de diner avec 
 
 lui. 
 Avez-vous promis d'y aller ? 
 
 Ju lui ai recommande d'etre 
 
 plus diligent. 
 Eile refusa de lui parler. 
 Je me propose Waller en 
 
 France l'annee prochaine. 
 Tachez de lei plaire. 
 Gardez-vous de lui dire que 
 
 vous me connoissez. 
 Je me repens </'avoir vendu 
 
 mon livre. 
 EUe ne peut s'empecher de 
 
 mentir. 
 H&tez-vous de le prfvenir. 
 Depechez- vous d'o.cx'ue vo- 
 
 tre lettre. 
 II se flatte de savoir presque 
 
 tout ce qui se passe dans 
 
 la ville. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 245 
 
 1 take upon myself the care 
 * of speaking to him of it. 
 f4.] He learns fencing. 
 You lave to play. 
 He seeks to wrong me. 
 Give me some drink. 
 I am disposed to obey you. 
 He has encouraged him, to 
 
 undertake that work. 
 She has engaged him to play. 
 You have induced me to eat. 
 
 I have exhorted him to be 
 
 wise and dutiful. 
 Help me to write my letters, 
 
 Think of paying me. 
 You expose yourself to fall 
 side. 
 
 He prepares himself for his 
 
 departure. 
 She delights in tormenting 
 
 me* 
 
 [5.] I did not do it to make 
 
 you uneasy. 
 1 told it him to inspire him 
 
 with emulation. 
 He came to see you. 
 /// order to be happy, we must 
 
 be contented. 
 I shall do every thing to 
 
 please you. 
 [6.] I shall oblige him to 
 
 do it 
 You will never oblige him, 
 
 to submit to her. 
 Oblige him to see her. 
 He was obliged to do it. 
 I am obliged to go out. 
 He will be obliged to see 
 her. 
 
 Je me charge de lui en par- 
 
 ler. 
 11 apprend a faire des armes. 
 Ybus aimez a jouer. 
 II cherche a me faire tort. 
 Donnez-moi a boire. 
 Je suis dispose a vous obeir. 
 II l'a encourage a entrepren- 
 
 dre cet ouvrage. 
 Elle l'a engage a jouer. 
 Vous m'avez excite a man- 
 
 £ er \ 
 Je l'ai exhorte a etre sage 
 
 et obeissant. 
 Aidez-moi a ecrire mes let* 
 
 tres. 
 Songez a me payer. 
 Vous vous exposez a tornber 
 
 malade. 
 11 se prepare a partir. 
 
 Elle se plait a me tourmen- 
 ter. 
 
 Je ne l'ai pas fait pour vous 
 faire de la peine. 
 
 Je le lui ai- dit pour lui Con- 
 ner de ^emulation. 
 
 II vint pour vous voir. 
 
 Four etre heureux, il faut 
 etre content. 
 
 Je ferai tout pour vous 
 plaire. 
 
 Je Tobligerai a le faire. 
 
 Vous ae l'obligerez jamais 
 
 a se soumettre a elle. 
 Obligez-le a la voir. 
 II fut oblige de le faire. 
 Je suis oblige de sortir. 
 II sera oblige de la veifa. 
 
 M 3 
 
7 46 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 He aims to hurt me. 
 They aim to deceive you. 
 1 shall endeavour to bring 
 
 him to his duty. 
 Do not stay. 
 Do not delay to speak to 
 
 her. 
 Why do you delay going 
 
 thither ? ' 
 I long to see her. 
 I shall begin to apply myself 
 
 to the French language. 
 I begin to understand French 
 
 a little. 
 He began to take more care. 
 
 We began by breakfasting 
 before we went out 
 
 I shall n©t fail to do what 
 you please. 
 
 Do not fail to be in such a 
 place. 
 
 He has failed to do his duty. 
 
 [7.] You are in the wrong 
 
 to complain. 
 You are in the right to be 
 
 angry with him. 
 Have you not a mind to take 
 
 a little walk ? 
 
 I have leave to go out. 
 
 I want to see him, and speak 
 
 to him. 
 You have no occasion to 
 
 complain of me. 
 Take care to write your 
 
 theme. 
 [8.] I am very glad to see 
 
 you in good health. 
 1 am overjoyed to hear, 
 
 II tache a me nuire. 
 
 lis tachent a vous ' romper. 
 
 Je tacherai de le ramener a 
 
 son devoir. 
 Ne tarclez pas a revenir. 
 Ne tardez pas a lui parler. 
 
 Pourquoi tardez-vcus a y 
 
 aller ? . 
 II me tar3e de la voir. 
 Je eommencerai a rr/appli- 
 
 quer au Francois. 
 Je commence.^ comprendre 
 
 un pen le Francois. 
 11 eommenca ^'avoir plus de 
 
 soin. 
 Nous commencames far de- 
 jeuner avant de sortir. 
 Je ne manquerai pas de fa ire 
 
 ce qui vous plait. 
 Ne manquez pas de vous 
 
 trouver en tel lieu. 
 II a manque a faire son de- 
 voir. 
 Vous avez tort de vous 
 
 plaindre. 
 Vous avez raison */'etre fa- 
 
 che contre lui. 
 N'avez-vous pas envie de 
 
 faire un petit tour de pro^ 
 
 menade? 
 J'ai permission de sortir. 
 J'ai besoin de le voir et de 
 
 lui parler. 
 Vous n'avez pas sujet de 
 
 vous plaindre de moi. 
 Avez soin de faire votre 
 
 theme. 
 Je suis bien aise de vous voir 
 
 en bonne same. 
 Je r suis ravi </'apprendre que 
 
FRENCH 
 
 that all your family is 
 well. 
 I am sorry to see you sick. 
 
 He is very near his death. 
 
 He is very capable of teach- 
 ing mathematics. 
 
 He is incapable of wronging 
 any body. 
 
 She is worthy to be loved. 
 
 I am tired with writing. 
 
 Are you able to walk ? 
 
 Are you sure g/* pleasing her ? 
 
 It is easy to guess. 
 
 This fruit is good to eat. 
 
 He is much inclined, to slan- 
 der. 
 
 You are not exact in learn- 
 ing your lesson. 
 
 Are you ready to go ? 
 
 She plays upon the harpsi- 
 chord very well. 
 
 I am assiduous m reading 
 Telemachus. 
 
 He is first in prattling. 
 
 [9.] It is to no purpose, to 
 spebk to him about it. 
 
 It is a misfortune, to have 
 no friends. 
 
 It is a folly to despise others. 
 
 [10.] I have just breakfast- 
 ed. 
 
 I have just written my let- 
 ter. 
 
 I have just left him. 
 
 He had just dined. 
 
 TONGUE. 247 
 
 toute vatre famille se 
 porte bien, 
 
 Je suis fache de vous voir 
 malade. 
 
 II est sor le point de mourir. 
 
 .11 est t res- capable </'ensei- 
 
 gner les mathematiques. 
 
 II est incapable de faire tort 
 a qui que ce soit. 
 
 Elle est digne */'etre aimee. 
 
 Je suis ias ^ecrire. 
 
 Etes-vous en etat de mar- 
 cher ? 
 
 Etes-vous sur de lui plaire ? 
 
 Cela est aise a deviiier, 
 
 Ce fruit est bon a manger. 
 
 II est tres-enclin a. medire^ 
 
 Vous n'etes pas exact a ap. 
 
 prendre votre leeon. 
 Etes-vous pret a partir ? 
 Elle est habile a toucher du 
 
 clavecin. 
 Je suis assidu a lire Tele- 
 ma que. 
 II est le premier a babiller. 
 C'est temps perdu que de lui 
 
 en parier. 
 C'es.t un malheur que de n'a- 
 
 voir point '/.'amis. 
 C'est une folic que de me- 
 
 priser les am res. 
 Je viens de dejeaner, ou je 
 
 ne fa is que de dejeuner. 
 Je viens ^'ejrire ma lettre, 
 
 ou je nc fais que </'ecrire 
 
 ma lcttre. 
 Je viens de le quitter, ou je 
 
 ne fais que de le quitter. 
 II venoit de diner, ou ii ne 
 
 faisoit que de diner. 
 
 m 4 
 
h* a grammar of the 
 
 She was Just arrived. 
 
 We hadyW got out of the 
 coach. 
 
 They hz&just finished their 
 play. 
 
 [11.] When I began to 
 
 write my letter. 
 He began to speak of his 
 
 riches. 
 As soon as she began to 
 
 speak of her misfortunes. 
 She was very much sur- 
 prised, when we began to 
 
 relate to her that story. 
 When his father shall know 
 
 of it. 
 Jf his wife should know his 
 
 libertinism. 
 If you should speak to her 
 
 about it, tell her, that I 
 
 am not ignorant of it. 
 [ 1 2.] It is your part to obey 
 
 me. 
 It is your part to play. 
 It is my turn to walk out. 
 It is his turn to stay at home. 
 Whose turn is it to drink ? 
 It is her turn to write. 
 It is your turn to read. 
 It is not my business, to 
 
 correct him. 
 It is not your business, to 
 
 meddle with it. 
 It is not her business, to 
 
 find fault with it. 
 It is not their business, to 
 
 take you from your work. 
 
 Elle venoit ^'arriver, ou elie 
 ne faisoit que ^'arriver. 
 
 Nous venions de sortir du 
 carrosse, ou nous ne fax* 
 sions que de sortir du car- 
 rosse. 
 
 lis venoient de finir leur jeu 
 ou ils ne faisoient que de 
 finir leur jeu. 
 
 Quand je vins a ecrire ma 
 lettre. 
 
 II vint a parler de ses ri- 
 chesses. 
 
 Des qu'elle vint a parler de 
 ses malheurs. 
 
 Elle fut fort surprise quand 
 nous vinmes a lui raconter 
 cette histoire. 
 
 Quand son pere viendra a 
 savoir cela. 
 
 Si sa femme venoit a savoir 
 son libertinage. 
 
 Si vous veniez a lui en par- 
 ler, dites-lui que je ne 
 l'ignore pas. 
 
 C'est a vous a m'obeir. 
 
 C'est a vous a jouer. 
 
 C'est a moi a sortir. 
 
 C'est a lui a rester au logk. 
 
 A qui est-ce a boire ? 
 
 C'est a elle a ecrire. 
 
 C'est a vous a lire. 
 
 Ce n'est pas a moi a le cor- 
 
 riger. 
 Ce n'est pas a vous a vous 
 
 en meler. 
 Ce n'est pas a elle a y trou- 
 
 ver a redire. 
 Ce n'est pas a eux a vous 
 
 distraire de votrc ou- 
 
 vrage. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 [13.] He has _ too much 
 pride to own his faults. 
 
 She has still beauty enough 
 to please. 
 
 You have not money enough 
 to bear great expences. 
 
 He is too proud, to ask her 
 
 pardon. 
 It will be sufficient, to write 
 
 to me about it. 
 It wiJl be sufficient, to tell 
 
 it him in two words. 
 It is sufficient to warn her. 
 It is too much to ask of me. 
 It was insulting him too 
 
 much. 
 It is too much, to deplore 
 
 your misfortune. 
 Cease from conversing with 
 
 him ; it is doing him too 
 
 much honour. 
 [14.] I saw her, and spoke 
 
 to her. 
 That play pleased and 
 
 charmed the Queen. 
 She pleases and charms him. 
 
 249 
 
 II a trop d'amour-propre 
 
 pour avouer ses fautes. 
 Elle a encore assez de beautq 
 
 pour plaire. 
 Vous n'avez pas assez d'azv 
 
 gent pour faire de grandes 
 
 depenses. 
 II est trop orgueilleux pour 
 
 lui demander pardon. 
 Ce sera assez de m ? en ecrire.' 
 
 Ce seroit assez de Ie lui dire 
 
 en deux mots. 
 C'est assez de l'avertir. 
 C'est trop me demander, 
 C'etoit trop l'insulter. 
 
 C'est trop deplorer voire 
 
 malheur. 
 Cessez de lui parler; c'est 
 
 lui faire trop d'honneur. 
 
 Je i'ai vue, et lui ai parle* 
 
 Cette corned ie plut a la 
 
 Re'me et la charm a. 
 Elle lui plait et /'enchante* 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 . Rules and Observations upon the Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 i.TMPERSONAL verbs are used only in the third per- 
 -■- son singular. They are of two kinds ; some are im- 
 personal by their nature ; and these are never used but in 
 the third person singular; as, il ?zeige y il pleut : others are 
 sometimes impersonal, sometimes personal. These are per- 
 sonal when il y in French, has a relation to some foregoing 
 noun; as, drawing is a genteel amusement, it becomes 
 young ladies 9 le dessin est un amusement honnite % il con- 
 
 m 5 
 
?5o A GPxAMMAR OF THE 
 
 vient: uux jeujtes demoiselles: here il has a relation to dessht % 
 They are impersonal, when /'/ has no relation to a forego- 
 ing novm ; as, le des sin est nn amusement honnete> il can vient 
 que lei jeunes demoiselles s'j appliquent. 
 
 2« The verb il pleut, beside the use made of speaking of rain, may 
 be used impersonally in a figurative sense, speaking of several other 
 things which may be supposed to fall like rain : as, il phut des pietres, 
 11 plut de la marine dam le desert. And in familiar discourse, to express 
 eagerness for departing, we sometimes say proverbially, je part'irai de+ 
 tnain, quar.d il pleuvroit des hallebardes. In this case, when it follows 
 the substantive, it agrees with it in numbei, according to the French 
 Academy : thus, speaking of a bloody battle, we may say, les mousque- 
 tades y plewuoknt \ thus the relations of cardinal Ma-zarin, who used to 
 send them a great quantity of money, said, il faut croire que l y or & i' 'ar- 
 gent pleuvent en France. 
 
 3. Some personal verbs are used impersonally in the third person sin« 
 gular, though their following nominative is in the plural; as, many 
 ©ccasions are found ; il se trouve bien des occasions, or il y a bien des occa- 
 sions* 
 
 4. 11 y a, there is, there are, some are, many .are., may 
 be followed by a noun in the plural ; as, there are few peo- 
 ple, who apply themselves to their own language - 3 il y a 
 peu de gens qui s'appliquext a leur propre langue. 
 
 Sometimes en is added to it; in this case it has a relation to some 
 preceding noun j. as, parmi teux qui apprennent les Ungues e'trargeres, il y , 
 en a qui negligent leur propre langue: among those who learn foreign lan- 
 guages, there a^e some who neglect their own tongue. 
 
 When we speak of something present, as if pointed at with the fin- 
 ger, there is, is rendered in French by voila j as, there is a handsome 
 lady, voila une belle dame* 
 
 ;V. B. Vaugelas, and, after him, the abbe Girard, will not allow, that 
 \l est might be used instead of il y a. .However, they agree, thatfl n'est 
 jnay sometimes be used instead of il rfy a, and sometimes nor, as in the 
 following example: there is nothing which pleases me mere, il n'est 
 run qui me plaise d' ' advantage 5 whereas it is not used in the following i 
 there is nothing but honour in serving our country, ii n'y a que d 
 r.eur ii serinr sa pairie, and not il n'est que : but, as grammarians are di- 
 vided here avnong themselves, I adv.se the lesrner to make use of U y 
 a instead of il est, and particularly of il ny a instead of il n'est, until he 
 is perfect enough in the French tongue, to know in what circumstances 
 the one may be used instead of the other ; and even Vaugdas, Cc 
 and th« abbe G'irard, do not agree about such circumstances. 
 
 ^. The impel sonzbilya is likewise used to deirctc a quantity of time. 
 
 In 1 his case, ago, since, these, and for, are rendered m French, by ii 
 
 y a beginning the sentence;, afterward* comes the number, followed by 
 
 fu-\ as, I Ktavt arrived in Loiidoa three years agoj il y a trois ans 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. £/* 
 
 que je suis arrive' a Londres. If the impersonal be transposed, que is 
 omitted : as,-/* suis arrive a Londres il y a trois ass. In an interrcgA- 
 tion, combxen y a-t-il que .. . is commonly used. 
 
 6. Verbs construed with the indeterminate pronoun en are not pro- 
 perly impersonal, though used only in the third person singular ; be- 
 cause on may be resolved into a substantive ; as, en parte, or les hommti 
 parent. It may even be resolved into a pronoun ; as, I will see you to- 
 morrow, on <v:us *verra denzain, or je was <verrai aema'tn : consequently 
 all verbs may be preceeded by on, except those which are impersonal 
 fey their nature j as, for example, we never say, on heige. 
 
 7. The auxiliary verb to be, followed by the adjective 
 necessary or requisite, when it may be resolved into -nve 
 musty is commonly rendered in French by il /nut, with the 
 following verb in the infinitive mood ; as, it is necessary 
 to, or we must love our neighbour;. i\.faut aimer son pro-- 
 chain* 
 
 8. II faut, signifying a want, is fo-llowed by a substantive, preceded 
 by one of these articles, un y de, des, du, de la ; as, to Write well, we must 
 have good paper, ink, and pens: pour bien e'erire, il faut de bon papier, 
 de bonne encre, et de bonnes plumes. In this case, when a personal pro- 
 noun is expressed in English, it is put, in French, in the third case, 
 between il and faut ; as, he wants books, il lui faut des fores. 
 
 When a noun is expressed in English, signifying the subject that/ 
 wants, it is likewise put in the third case, but after the noun which is 
 the object ; as, my brother wants books, il faut des 'fores a men frcre; 
 
 9. The verbs, io be necessary, musty and should, signify- 
 ing duty, and preceded by a personal pronoun, or any 
 other noun, are rendered in French by the verbs, il faut y il 
 faudroit, il faudra, &c- according to the corresponding 
 tense in English ; in this case, il faut is followed by que, 
 then comes the pronoun, or the noun ; and the verb fol- 
 lowing both, is put in the subjunctive mood ; as, I must 
 go, ilfatit que faille ; my brother must ^o y ilfant que man 
 frcre aille\. 
 
 As the English verb vnmt is often used personally, and the Trench 
 vtTbfall/<r is always impersonal, whenevera noun or pronoun is use«T 
 as the nominative of the verb must, if that verb-implies an absolute ne- 
 cessity, it must be translate*! according to the foregoing rule ; as, we 
 must die ; such is the law of nature, il faut que ncus mourions ; telle est la 
 hi de nature \ but when the obii<jation may be dispensed with or neg- 
 lected, instead oifallo'.r we may use the verb devoir personally, as mts 
 must help ; one another, les hemmes d'focr.t CentS 'aider ■» 
 
 M 6 
 
H* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 ii. It is, followed by with, is expressed in French by 
 il en est, and the two following nouns are put in the second 
 case, and separated by comme ; as, it is with you as with 
 me, il en est de <vous comme de moi. 
 
 >m Rules and Observations upon Impersonal Verbs, ex* 
 cmplified for the Scholar's Practice. 
 
 [jr.] It is very fine weather 
 
 to day. 
 How is the weather ? 
 It rains, it snows, it freezes, 
 
 it thaws, it thunders* it 
 
 hails. 
 // is hot, it is cold, 
 // is bad weather. 
 // is clear weather. 
 // is dark weather. 
 JThe wind blows. 
 It has rained to day, as fast 
 
 as it could pour. 
 It snows in great flakes. 
 The moon shines. 
 It is dirty. 
 What o'clock is it? 
 Tell me, if you please, what 
 
 o'clock it is. 
 It is twelve o'clock (at 
 
 noon). 
 // is a quarter after twelve. 
 // is half an hour after 
 
 twelve. 
 // is three quarters after 
 
 twelve. 
 // is one o'clock. 
 Jt is a quarter after one. 
 // is half an hpur after one. 
 // is three quarters after 
 
 one, &c. 
 
 8 
 
 II fait tres-beau temps a«- 
 
 jourd'hui. 
 Quel temps fait- il? 
 II phut, il neige, il gele, il 
 
 de'gele, il tonne, ilgrele. 
 
 II fait chaud, ilfait froid. 
 II fait mauvais temps. 
 Ilfait un temps clair. 
 Ilfait un temps obscur. 
 Ilfait du vent. 
 // aplu a verse aujourd'hui. 
 
 II neige a gros flocons. 
 Ilfait clair de lune. 
 II fait sale. 
 Quelle heure est-il? 
 Dites-moi, s'il vous plait, 
 
 quelle heure il est ? 
 II est midi. 
 
 II &st midi et un quart. 
 // est midi et demi. 
 
 // est une heure moins u* 
 
 quart. 
 II est une heure. 
 // est une heure et un quart. 
 // est une heure et demie. 
 II est deux heures moins un 
 
 quart, #C« 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 *S$ 
 
 It is not late. 
 
 // is early. 
 
 // is time to go. 
 
 [3.] Reports are spread in 
 the city, that .... 
 
 Many opportunities are to he 
 met with. 
 
 [4.,] There are occasions on 
 which delay is of the ut- 
 most consequence. 
 
 *There are few people, who 
 know themselves. 
 
 There are handsome women 
 in London. 
 
 There is some danger in it. 
 
 There is no doubt of it. 
 
 There is some profit to be 
 hoped. 
 
 Some books are very useful, 
 many are very dangerous 
 for youth. 
 
 Some women are very capri- 
 cious. 
 
 There is a handsome lady. 
 
 There are fine oranges. 
 
 These are strange reasons. 
 
 There is a very rich shop. 
 
 [5.] How long have you 
 
 been in England ? 
 How long is it since you saw 
 
 him ? 
 How long has he been dead ? 
 
 I' have been in England 
 
 these three years. 
 He has been dead these two 
 
 years. 
 I have not seen him these 
 
 four years. 
 
 II n'est pas tard. 
 
 11 est de bonne heure. 
 
 II est temps de partir. 
 
 11 s'est repandu un bruit par 
 la ville, c'est que .... 
 
 77 se trGwve bien des occa- 
 sions. 
 
 11 y a des occasions ou le 
 delai est de la derniere 
 consequence. 
 
 II j? a peu de gens qui se 
 connoissent eux-memes. 
 
 II y a de belles femmes a 
 Londres. 
 
 II y a du danger. 
 
 II n'y a point de doute. 
 
 II y a du profit a esperer. 
 
 II y a des livres fort utiles ; 
 
 il y en a beaucoup de dan- 
 
 gereux pour la jeunesse. 
 II y a des femmes tresca- 
 
 pricieuses. 
 Viola une belle demoiselle. 
 Voila de belles oranges. 
 Voila d'etranges raisons. 
 Voila une boutique tres- 
 
 riche. 
 Combien y a-t-il que vous 
 
 etes«en Angleterre ? 
 Combien y a-t-il que VOUS 
 
 ne Pavez vu ? 
 Combien y a-t-il qu'il est 
 
 mort ? 
 11 y a trois ans que je suis en 
 
 Angleterre ? 
 II y a deux ans qu'il est 
 
 mort. 
 II y a quatre ans que je ne 
 
 P^i vu. 
 
2 £4 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 She has been married these 
 sick 
 
 ten years. 
 Her husband lias 
 
 been 
 for these five years. 
 
 My brother made his for- 
 tune twenty years agd in 
 the East Indies. 
 
 Where were you ten years 
 ago ? 
 
 [7.] Every man should love 
 
 - his neighbour. 
 
 [ 8 . J I want pens. 
 
 I want nothing now. 
 
 He wants time to learn his 
 lesson. 
 
 [9.] You must go thither. 
 
 She must speak to him. 
 
 He must know it. 
 
 She must learn French. 
 
 They must study. 
 
 Are you not obliged to go 
 out ? 
 
 Is he not obliged- to accom- 
 pany you ? 
 
 He must not go out. 
 
 You must hold your tongue. 
 
 Y©u should go and see him. 
 
 // would be necessary for you 
 to know him. 
 
 tyeuld it not be necessary fat- 
 her to go thither ? 
 
 Would it 'not be necessary for 
 us to know your reasons ? 
 
 7/ twill be necessary for you 
 to speak to his father. 
 
 It will be necessary for' her to 
 apply herself to history. 
 
 II y a <iix ans qu'elle est 
 
 mariee. 
 II y a cinq ans que son mari 
 
 est malade. 
 II y a vingt ans que mon 
 
 frere a fait sa fortune 
 
 dans les Tndes. 
 Ou etiez-vous it y a dix 
 
 ans ? 
 II faut aimer son prochain. 
 
 II me faut des plumes. 
 
 II ne me faut rien a present. 
 
 II lui faut du temps pour 
 
 apprendre sa lecon. 
 II faut que vous y alliez. 
 // faut qu'elle lui parle. 
 // faut qu'il le sache. 
 II faut qu'elle apprenne le 
 
 Francois. 
 II faut qu'ils etuiient. 
 Ne faut-il pas que vous scr- 
 
 tiez ? 
 Ne faut-il pas qu'il vous ae- 
 
 compagne ? 
 II ne faut pas qu'il sorte. 
 II faut que vous vous taisiez. 
 II foudroit que vous allassiez 
 
 le voir,, tej wits* devriez 
 
 allcr le voir. 
 H fan droit que vous le con- 
 
 nussiez. 
 Ne fa u droit - // ' pa s q u ' e 1 le y 
 
 all&t ? 
 Ne f: udroit - il pas que nc b s 
 
 sussions vos raisons ? 
 II faudra que vous parliez a 
 
 son pere. 
 II faudra quelle s'applique 
 
 a l'histoire. • 
 
Will it not be necessary 
 her to prevent him ? 
 
 My brother must go to 
 France. 
 
 My sister must stay at home. 
 
 [10.] // is with poets as 
 
 with painters. 
 It is with you as with me. 
 
 FRENCH TONGUE. 
 for 
 
 *5S 
 
 Ne faudra-t-il pas qu'elle le 
 
 previenne ? 
 II faut que mon frere aille 
 
 en France. 
 II faut que ma soeur reste au 
 
 logis. 
 // en eft des poetes comme 
 
 des peintres. 
 // en est de vou* comme de 
 
 moi. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 Rules and Observations upon the Participles. 
 
 T3ARTICIPLES are either active or passive ; therefore 
 -*- " I shall take notice of them separately in the two fol- 
 lowing sections : 
 
 SECTION I; 
 The Active or Present Participle. 
 
 i. The active or present participle is always indeclina- 
 ble : as, a woman fearing God, and loving her husband ; 
 une fc?nme craignant Dieu et aimant son mar.i. Except in a 
 very few law terms. 
 
 1. We now seldom make use of a participle active, except ataut ?jid 
 Ayanc, used before a participie passive ; as, having met with his bro- 
 ther, he spoke to him ; ayant rencontre ton frere, il lui farla. Except 
 too v/hen it is preceded by en ; as, in going, or while P was going, er. 
 cllant-y in eating, or while 1 was eating, en mange ant. Some call this a 
 gerund. However it matters very little what it is called. 
 
 En, In this case, may be translated into English, by while, or ivhen, 
 which may likewise be rendered in French by comme, Icrsaue, or quand\ 
 the first of these requires the following verb- in the imperfect ; the 
 ©thcr two require it in the present, or in any other tense; as, I never 
 Speak white eating, or while, cr wher, I eat; je ne far le jamais, lorsque 
 ou quand, je rr.angc, and not comme je mange', but we say, as I was *t 
 i , he cam* to see me j comme je djnois, li vint m« voir. 
 
256 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 3. Some participles are, by use, become adjectives, and 
 some substantives : as, a detracting~man, a detracting wo- 
 man ; un homme me'disant, jaie femme medisante or un medi- 
 sattt, une medisante. In such a case they are declinable. 
 
 4. According to the present usage, the present participle governs no 
 base whatever, but we resolve it into a tense of the verb, with the pro- 
 noun relative preceding it. Thus, instead of saying with Vaugelci, in 
 his remarks on the French tongue, these stuffs are not at all like those 
 I saw yesterday, ces etoffes ne sent pas approchantes de celles que jc wis bier ; 
 or, his temper is so repugnant to mine, son hutneur est telkment repu- 
 gnante a la mienne, we say, ces etoffes n'approchent pas de celles que je t\s 
 bier, son humeur repugne telkment a la mienne. Even in the case of the 
 first rule, instead of saying, c'euu une femme craignant Dieu et aimant 
 son marly it is better to say, c'etoit une femme qui craignoit Dieu et aimoit 
 son marl. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 The Passive or Past Participle. 
 
 To show exactly in what instances the participle passive 
 or past is declinable or not, is one of the greatest diffi- 
 culties ot the French tongue. The following observations 
 will set this nicety, hitherto so perplexed, in a clear light. 
 
 I. The passive participle is declinable, 1st, when it is 
 used adjectively ; as men despised, des hommes meprises; 
 they are loved, ils sont aimes, ou dies sont aimees. 
 
 2-dJy, It is declinable, when it is preceded by a noun or 
 pronoun which it governs in the first case ; as, the letters 
 which I have received, les lettres quej'ai revues. 
 
 3dly, When, with the auxiliary verb etre> it forms a neuter, recipro- 
 cal, or reflected verb, not governing a first case, or followed by any 
 other word making but one sense with it 5 as, they have addicted them- 
 selves to trade, il se sont adonnes au negece. But we do not say, she put 
 herself to death, clle s y est donnee la mort\ because la mart is a first case. 
 If the verb has no governed word after it, the practice of the rule is 
 c till more certain. 
 
 The difficulty is to know whether the participle, followed by an in- 
 finitive mood, ought to agree with the foregoing noun or pronoun. A3 
 no grammarian explains this matter in a clear and intelligible man- 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 257 
 
 ncr *, and it is besides of great use, I shall give some observations 
 upon it in the following rule. 
 
 II. The participle, followed by an infinitive mood, is 
 declinable, if it govern the foregoing noun or pronoun ; 
 if the noun or pronoun be governed by the infinitive 
 mood, the parriciple is indeclinable : this rule is plain 
 and certain. Now to know whether the participle, or 
 the infinitive mood, govern the foregoing noun or pro- 
 noun, attend to the following observations. 
 
 1 st. If the infinitive be preceded by a preposition, the 
 participle governs the noun or pronoun, if the noun or 
 pronoun may be. put, without altering the sense, between 
 the participle and the infinitive ; as, the soldiers whom 
 they have compelled to march, les soldais qu'<?// a con- 
 tracts de marcher; for we may say, they have compelled 
 the soldiers to march ; on a contraint les soldats de 
 marcher. Again, the hiftory which I gave you to read, 
 Vhistoire que je vous ai donnee a lire ; for we may likewise 
 say, I gave you the hiftory to read ; je <vous ai donne 
 l'histoire a lire. 
 
 On the contrary, the infinitive governs the foregoing 
 noun or pronoun, if this cannot be put between the par- 
 ticiple and the infinitive : as, we never ought to swerve 
 from the good way, which we began to follow ; il ne 
 faut jamais s'e'carter de la bonne rout que Von a com- 
 mence a suivre ; we cannot say, on a commence la bonne 
 route a survre ; but, we may say, on a commence a suture 
 la bonne route. 
 
 2dly. If the infinitive be not preceded by a preposi- 
 tion, the participle governs the foregoing rlbun or pro- 
 
 * Grammarians give false and inadequate rules about this matter. 
 They say, commonly, that the participle passive is indeclinable, when 
 a pure infinitive follows it; by a pure infinitive they understand an 
 infinitive used without a preposition or any other word. How much 
 they are in the wrong appears by the examples of the second rule. 
 
 Some say, that " the participle is indeclinable, when the pronoun 
 is governed by a verb coming after the tense compound, and not by 
 the tense compound." This rule is not clear, and leaves a learner in 
 darkness: neither is he able to know when the pronoun is thus go- 
 verned; consequently this rule is very inadequate. 
 
 According to others, the, participle is indeclinable, when a verb in 
 tfcfc infinitive ian mediately follows. This rule is false in many cases. 
 
2$% A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 noun ; if the infinitive may be turned into the present 
 participle in English, or rendered in French by qui, and 
 the imperfect of the indicative mood, without altering 
 the sense; as, I saw her painting; je Yai vue peindre : 
 I heard her singj.yV \*m entendue chanter: the ladies , 
 whom I saw passing; les da?nes que j'ai vues passer: 
 the soldiers whom I saw going ; Its soldats que j'ai vus 
 fartir. In ail the foregoing examples I may say, with- 
 out altering the sense, je Yai vue qui peignoit, je Yai en- 
 tendue qui chantoit, &c. 
 
 On the contrary, the infinitive governs the noun or 
 pronoun, when, the infinitive cannot be turned into the 
 present participle, or rendered by qui and the imperfect 
 tense ; thus, speaking of a lady whose picture was 
 drawn, we say, I saw her picture drawn ; je Yai vu 
 peindre : of a song, I heard it sung ; je Yai entendu 
 chanter* 
 
 The verbs falre and lahser, followed by an infinitive, form with it 
 a sort of compound verb, and the participle is indeclinable; as, that 
 woman whom you have put to deatk, cette femme que *vou% a-vcz, fait 
 m»urir' y that opportunity which you have suffered to escape, cette. 
 occasion que vgui avez laisse echapper. 
 
 III. The passive participle is indeclinable, ist. When 
 it is immediately followed by que or qui ; as, the conse- 
 quence which I intended, that you should draw from 
 it ; la consequence que j'ai pretendu que <vous en tiras- 
 s'tez. 
 
 2dly. When the participle and the auxiliary verb are 
 ir.ed impersonally : as, the hot weather we have had ; 
 les chaleurs qu'il a fait, 
 
 3<dly . When it cannot be joined to a substantive as 
 it's adjective ; therefore the participles parle, agi, tie, 
 craint, plaint, &c, are never declined. 
 
 4thly. When it is followed by it's governed case ; as, 
 I have received the letters ; j'ai recu les lettres. 
 
 Jthly« The participles pu from powvoir t <voulu from 
 wottloir, are indeclinable, either because they are not used 
 adjcctively, or, because an infinitive is understood, which 
 governs the preceding noun : as, I made all the endeavours 
 I could ; j'ai fait tons les efforts que j'ai pu ; /aire k under-. 
 6tood after ///. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 259 
 
 IV. It is the opinion of some grammarians, that when the subject 
 or nominative case of the verb comes after it, the participle is indeclin- 
 able ; but good authors, such as the abbes Q'irc.rd and d"* Olivet, Mes- 
 sieurs Vuebs, Marmontely &c, make it declinable; as, there is a good 
 lesson our misanthrope has received: viola une honne lefon qu'a re$ue 
 voire misanthrope ; Marmontel : the impression which the recital of 
 your misfortunes made on me 5 /'impression que m'a faite h re'cit de ves 
 malbeun ; ibid. 
 
 The participles in the foregoing examples are declinable, becaus-e, 
 according to the second obeervation, the foregoing nouns are governed 
 fey the participles. 
 
 V. According to the actual use, the participle is de. 
 clinable, when it is followed by an adjective which it go- 
 verns, and which has a relation to a preceding noun, and 
 makes a part of it ; as, Amasis is the only one of the 
 Egyptian kings, who conquered the isle of Cyprus, and 
 rendered it tributary ; Amasis est le sad des rois d'Egypte 
 qui ait conquis Vile de Cypre, et qui V ait rendue tributaire ; 
 Rollio: 
 
 VI. According to the second observation we write, 
 the ladies whom you came to see ; les dames que wous 
 etes venu voir, because the foregoing noun is governed by 
 the infinitive. 
 
 Though a personal conjunctive pronoun be put before alle or venu, 
 followed- by a verb in the infinitive mood, the participles all: and venu 
 must agree with the person to which they relate : thus we write, she 
 came to see you ; elk votts est venue voir. But it is better to trans- 
 pose the pronoun, and put it immediately before the word that -go- 
 verns it, die est venue vous voir. 
 
 N. B* All the preceding rules are conformable to the present usage ; 
 all the grammaiians and the best authors having agreed respecting them 
 for the iast sixty years. Every rivle inconsistent with these is gene*, 
 rally deemed erroneous, 
 
i6o 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Rules and Observations on Participles exemplified 
 for the Scholar's Practice. 
 
 [Sect, I. i.] A man fearing 
 God, 
 
 A woman loving her hus- 
 band. 
 
 A lady applying herself to 
 study. 
 
 [2.] He died while eating 
 his breakfast. 
 
 Why do you speak nubile 
 .you are eating f 
 
 I saw him while I walked in 
 the Park. 
 
 [3.] Fortune is fickle. 
 
 She is a charming lady. 
 
 She is a slanderous woman. 
 [4.] His [Vher] temper is so 
 
 repugnant to mine, that . • 
 These are reasons proving 
 
 the same thing. 
 [Sect. II. 1.] The idle are 
 
 despised. 
 She was endowed, in her 
 
 youth, with wit and 
 
 beauty. 
 Unpolite men are hated hy 
 
 all. 
 He is cherished by the king. 
 Have you seen the stockings 
 
 I bought ? 
 I have seen the shirts you 
 
 bought. 
 I shall speak to him of the 
 
 affair you communicated to 
 
 me. 
 I have read the letter you 
 
 wrote to me. 
 
 Un horn me qui craint Dieu. 
 
 Un femme qui aime son 
 mari. 
 
 Une demoiselle qui s' appli- 
 que a Tetude. 
 
 II mourut en dejeunant* 
 
 Pourquoi parlez-vous en 
 
 mangeant ? 
 Je le vis en me pr untenant 
 
 au Parct 
 La fortune est change ante. 
 C'est une demoiselle char- 
 
 mante. 
 C'est une femme me'disante. 
 Son humeur ripugne telle- 
 
 ment a la mienne, que . . 
 Ce sont des raisons fui con- 
 
 cluent la meme chose. 
 Les paresseux sont meprises. 
 
 Elle etoit, dans sa jeunesse, 
 
 donee d 'esprit et de beau- 
 
 te. 
 Les im polls sont hats de 
 
 tout le monde. 
 II est chert du roi. 
 Avez-vous vu les bas que 
 
 j'ai a eke les? 
 J'ai vu les chemises que 
 
 vous aves acketees, 
 Je lui parlerai de l'affaire 
 
 que vous m'avez cemmu- 
 
 niquee. 
 J'ai lu la lettre que vous 
 
 m'avez ecrite. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 261 
 
 Have you read the books I 
 lent you ? 
 
 It is a piece of news I have 
 not read in any newspa- 
 per. 
 
 I have not yet read the pa- 
 pers you sent me. 
 
 I had no time to give you 
 an answer to the letters 
 you wrote to me. 
 
 These are not the same hats 
 as I saw. 
 
 You do not know the trou- 
 ble I had to persuade her. 
 
 Do you know the reasons 
 he told me ? 
 
 The lace you bought is very 
 fine. 
 
 I have not learned the lesson 
 you gave me. 
 
 You speak to him of sci- 
 . ences, which he has ne- 
 ver learned. 
 
 You speak of a woman I 
 knew. 
 
 These are things- I never 
 foresaw. 
 
 You talk of an affair I have 
 not forgotten. 
 
 This is as good fruit as 
 you have ever eaten. 
 
 This is the best liquor I ever 
 
 drank. 
 These are the most honest 
 
 people you ever knew. 
 
 The jewels you showed me 
 
 are very rich. 
 The woman he has married 
 
 Avez-vous lu les livres que 
 
 je vous ai pretes ? 
 C'est une nou velle que je 
 
 n'ai lue dans aucun papier 
 
 de nouvelles. 
 Je n'ai pas encore lu les pa- 
 piers que vous m'avez en- 
 
 HJOjes. 
 Je n'ai pas eu le temps de 
 
 foire reponse aux lettres 
 
 que vous* m'avez ecrites. 
 Ce ne sont pas les memes 
 
 chapeaux que j'ai vus* 
 Vous ne savez pas la peine 
 
 que j'ai eue a la persuader* 
 Savez-vous les raisons qu'il 
 
 m'a dites? 
 La dentelle que vous avQfc 
 
 achetee est tres-belle. 
 Je n'ai point appris la lecon 
 
 que vous m'avez donnee. 
 Vous lui parlez de sciences 
 
 qu'il n'a jamais apprises* 
 
 Vous parlez d'une femme 
 
 que j'ai conmte. 
 Ce sont des choses que je 
 
 n'ai jamais pre'vues. 
 Vous parlez d'un affaire 
 
 que je n'ai pas oubliee. 
 Ce sont d'aussi bons fruits 
 
 que vous ayez jamais man* 
 
 C'est la meilleure liqueur 
 
 que j'aie jamais hue. 
 Ce sont les plus honnetes 
 
 gens que vous ayez jamais 
 
 conn us. 
 Les bijoux que vous m'avez 
 
 montre's sont tres-riches. 
 La femme qu'ii a e'pouue^ 
 
t5i 
 
 . A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 has brought him a hand- 
 some fortune. 
 
 There are the bocks you 
 lent me. 
 
 I have found my gloves 
 again, .which I had fast. 
 
 It is a thought I have read 
 somewhere. 
 
 She has applitd herself to 
 the French tongue. 
 
 They have applied- them- 
 selves to trade. 
 
 They have ruined them- 
 selves by foolish ex- 
 penses. 
 
 They have drowned them- 
 selves. 
 
 The garrison has surren- 
 dered at discretion. 
 
 She gave herself up to de- 
 spair. 
 
 She has seen herself i?e- 
 traj^d by her own rela- 
 tions. 
 
 They have found themselves 
 surrounded by their ene- 
 mies, 
 
 [2.3 The soldiers whom 
 they have constrained to 
 submit. 
 
 What is become of the 
 books, which I gave you 
 to read ? 
 
 The lesson, which I gave 
 you to learn is not diffi- 
 cult. 
 
 Where are the letters, which 
 I gave you to write ? 
 
 I expect the ladies, whom I 
 invited to dinner to day. 
 
 que vous 
 
 lui a apporte un bien cou- 
 
 siderable. 
 Voila les livres 
 
 m'avez pretes, 
 J'ai retrouve raes gants que 
 
 j'avois perdns, 
 C'esr une pensee que j'ai 
 
 lue quelque part. 
 Kile j'est appliquce a la lan- 
 
 gue Francoise. 
 lis se sont adonnes au com- 
 merce. 
 lis se sont mine's par de fol* 
 
 les depenses. 
 
 lis se sont noyes. 
 
 La garnison /'est rendue \ 
 
 discretion. 
 Elle j'est abandotmee au de- 
 
 sespoir. 
 Elle j'est vue trahie de ses 
 
 propres parens^ 
 
 lis se sont trouves environnes 
 par leurs ennemis. 
 
 Les soldats qu' on a ccn» 
 traints de se soumettre. 
 
 Q«e sont devenus les livres 
 
 que je vous ai donnes a\ 
 
 lire ? 
 La le^on que je vous ai don. 
 
 nee a apprendre n'est pas 
 
 difficile. 
 Ou sont les lettres que ja 
 
 vous ai donnees a ecrire , 
 J'attends les dames que jail 
 
 prices de venir diner au-| 
 
 jourd'hui. 
 1 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 We ought not to swerve 
 from the good way, which 
 we began to follow. 
 
 The language that you be- 
 gan to learn is very use- 
 ful. 
 
 The lady whom you left off 
 visiting is very witty, 
 
 The history which I hegan 
 to read is very entertain- 
 ing. 
 
 I j<i*w her. painting. 
 
 1 heard her sing. 
 
 The ladies whom I saw 
 passing. 
 
 The soldiers whom I saw 
 going. 
 saw them arriving, 
 
 I sa-uu her picture drawn. 
 
 It is a bong, which I heard 
 sung this week. 
 
 Several ladies came to the 
 door, I did not suffer them 
 to be refused. 
 
 The house, which he or- 
 dered to be built, is very 
 fine and well situate. 
 
 What news have you heard? 
 
 the news I have 
 that I have 
 
 l S> 
 
 This is 
 
 heard. 
 It is a thing, 
 
 seen done. 
 Have you seen the new 
 
 suit of clothes, which he 
 
 ordered to be made for 
 
 him?' 
 
 263 
 
 11 ne faut jamais s'ecarter 
 
 de la bonne route que l'on 
 
 a commence 'a suivre. 
 La langue que vous avez 
 
 commence' d'apprendre, est 
 
 fort utile. 
 La demoiselle que vous avez 
 
 Mti de voir est tres-spi- 
 
 rituelle. 
 L'histoire que j'ai commence 
 
 a lire est tres-amusante. 
 
 Je /'ai <vue peindre. 
 
 Je /'ai ent endue chanter. 
 
 Les dame que j'ai <v«es 
 
 passer. 
 Les soldats que j'ai <vus par- 
 
 tir. 
 Je les ai <v us arriver. 
 Je /'ai <vu peindre. 
 C'est une chanson que j'ai 
 
 entendu chanter cette se- 
 
 maine. 
 Plusieurs dames se sont 
 
 presentees a la porte, 
 
 je ne les ai pas /aisse 
 
 renvoyer. 
 La maison qu'W a. fait batir, 
 
 est tres-belle et tres-bien 
 
 situee. 
 Quelle nouvelle avez-vous 
 
 entendu dire ? 
 Voila la nouvelle que j'ai 
 
 entendu ranconter. 
 C'est un chose que j'ai <vn 
 
 faire. 
 Avez-vous vu l'habit neuf 
 
 qu'il a fait faire ? 
 
 1 
 
264 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 [5.] The books I have <?r- 
 
 dered to be sent to me. 
 The lesson which I com- 
 manded that you should 
 learn. 
 
 The consequences which I 
 intended that you should 
 draw from ir. 
 
 I have been ill during the 
 hot weather we have had. 
 
 The rain we have had this 
 week has spoiled the 
 roads. 
 
 I have read those books. 
 
 I received your letter. 
 
 Have you seen the Queen ? 
 
 Why have you not trans- 
 lated your fable ? 
 
 She has not learned her les- 
 son. 
 
 She used her best endea- 
 vours. 
 
 I have granted her all the 
 pleasures she desired, 
 
 [4.] The impression which 
 the recital of your mis- 
 fortunes' made on me. 
 
 The trouble which your 
 law suit gave me. 
 
 The letters which your bro- 
 ther wrote to me. 
 
 The friends which your mo- 
 ther procured me. 
 
 The surprise which his pre- 
 sence occasioned me. 
 
 [5.] The English rendered 
 themselves masters of 
 Quebec. 
 
 They have rendered them- 
 selves famous in war. 
 
 Les livres que j'ai ordonne 
 
 qu'on m'envoyat. 
 La lecon que jai command e 
 
 que vous apprisslez. 
 
 La consequence que j'ai 
 
 pretend* que vous en ti- 
 
 rassiez. 
 J'ai ete malade pendant- les 
 
 chaleurs qu'il a fait. 
 La pluie qu'il a fait cette 
 
 semaine-ci a gate les 
 
 chemins. 
 J'ai lu ces liv res-la. 
 J'ai recu votre lettre. 
 Avez-vous vu la Reine ? 
 Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas 
 
 traduit votre fable ? 
 Elle n'a pas appris sa leean. 
 
 Elle a fait tous les efforts 
 
 qu'elle a pu. 
 Je lui ai accorde tous les 
 
 plaisirs qu'elle a voulu, 
 L'impression que m'a faite 
 
 le recit de vos malheurs. 
 
 La peine que m'a donne'e 
 
 vorre proces. 
 Les lettres que m'a e'critss 
 
 Monsieur votre frere. 
 Les amis que m'a procures 
 
 Madame votre mere. 
 La surprise que m'a occa~ 
 
 siovnee sa presence. 
 Les Anglois se sont rendus 
 
 maitres de Quebec. 
 
 Us se sont rtndus fameux 
 dans Ja guerre. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 265 
 
 She has rendered herself ce- Elle j'est rendue celebre par 
 lebrated by her wit and son esprit et par sabeaute. 
 beauty. 
 The garrison has surrendered La garnison j'est rendue pri- 
 
 prisoners of war. sonniere de guerre. 
 
 She is come to see us. Elle est venue nous voir, ou 
 
 elle nous est venue voir. 
 They are gone to see him. Elles sont allies le voir, ou 
 
 elles le sont allies voir. 
 They are come to see me- Elles sont venues me voir, ou 
 
 elles me sont venues voir* 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 Rules and Observations upon Adverbs. 
 
 2, A D VERBS, if simple, are commonly placed be- 
 •^*- fore adjectives and participles; as, this wine 
 is very good, ce vin est tres-bon. When they are com- 
 pound, they are commonly placed &fter ; as, he is ar- 
 rived seasonably, il est arrive a. propos. 
 
 2. When adverbs, simple or compound, are joined to 
 a verb, they are commonly placed after it ; as, she loves 
 -him tenderly, elle I'aime tendrement. But when the ad- 
 verb is simple, and joined to a verb in a compound tense, 
 it may be placed before or after the participle, though it 
 is better to place it before; as, elle Va tendrement aime a 
 Except davantage> more, which is always put after the 
 participle. 
 
 The following adverbs, bien, mieux, trop y mal } fort f 
 to74J'jurs> jamais, and some others, are placed between the 
 auxiliary and the participle : and when jamais or tou- 
 jours meets with another adverb, it is always placed first ? 
 as he always spoke well of you, U a toujours bien parte 'de 
 vous. 
 
 3. Beaucoupy peu } ircp, assez, and similar adverbs of 
 quantity, take sometimes before them the particles de 
 or a> in the manner of nouns; as, it is the custom of 
 many people, e'est la c-utume de beaucoup de gens: q£ 
 few people, de peu de gens: that happens to too many 
 
 N 
 
idb A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 people, c la arrive a trop de gem: to too few people, s 
 trop pcu dc gens. 
 
 4. In a negative sentence we generally make use of 
 
 two negative words ; as, nt-plut^ no more ; nt-potnt f 
 
 rot at all; tie-pas, not; tte-rien 9 nothing; ne-Jamais, 
 
 ' never; ne-nullement, by no means ; ne-personne, ne-pai-uti, 
 
 m+mm€m*i nobody ; Arc. 
 
 5. S'e, which is the fir«t negation, always follows the subject of 
 the verb, an J whatever dept-nds on it, if the subject be a noun ; as, 
 
 , being born feeble, is never free from trouble ; rbomme e'tant ne 
 J9ikle % n'ett jamais exempt de feme. If the subject be a pronoun per- 
 icaal, and the sentence interrogative, the sentence begins with ne j 
 as, do ;iot you know ? ne sav^t-'vout pas ? In compound tenses, the 
 second negation 11 always put between the auxiliary and the verb; as, 
 I have not read your book, je n'ai pas lu votre tore. If the verb be 
 in the infinitive mood, the two negatives come before it; as, not to 
 tell you a falsehood, pour ne pas vous dire un mensonge. 
 
 6. We m-ke use of the particle ne, without it's second negative 
 word fas or point, in the following cases : 
 
 1st. When the negative m follows; as, I neither love nor hate him, 
 je ne raxmt ni ne le bais. 
 
 idly. After the conjunctions a moins que, unless ; de peur qv, de 
 crmsrti jue, lest, or for fear that; as, unless he comes; a mtmi quilnt 
 vieaae. 
 
 jdty. After que preceded by the words empecber, to hinder, or keep 
 from; crsindre, to fear; and others expressing fear J n mentioning an 
 »rTcct not desiied ; as, he is afraid that he will come to day, il craint 
 qu'il ne vienne aujourd^bui. , 
 
 But if we wish, that the thing spoken of should happen, then the 
 >erb that follows cra'mdre, or any other verb, expressing fear, must be 
 vied with two negatives ; as, he is afraid, that he will not come 
 to day, il craint quil ne vienne pas aujourd'hui. 
 
 4thly. Before que, taken in the sense of sinen, beside, nothing but, 
 
 •nip; a?, I desire no recompense only, or but, the pleasure of 
 
 ng you, je ne desire pour recompense que le tlaiiir de vou$ 
 
 Stl.Iy. After que ne, taken in the *cnse of why not; a?, why do not 
 you iuiwer, que ne > efrnJez-vous ? 
 
 6(hly. Afttr ne iav.ir u»ed for ne po uv *ir, or when it implies aa 
 of the mind : as, I do not know whether he will succeed, 
 
 uil j'// re'uinr 1. 
 
 If it imply a full ignorance of the thing, it commonly requires 
 tfaovea; aa, I do not know, whether he be come, je ne sais pas 
 
 Jffcjy, After the verbs #ier, caser, and powvoir, used negatively; at, 
 
 1 dj| t0 nim > K n'c" iui e\nre. In an interrogative phrase, 
 
 cud negation is commonly added : as, dare you not write to him? 
 
 e r 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 267 
 
 Sthly. After the verb il y a, followed by a compound of the pre- 
 sent tense in a negative sentence ; as, I have not been in Paris these 
 ten years ; il y a dix arts que je n'ai ete a Parts : even if it be fol- 
 lowed by any other tense, the second negative is still omitted ; as, I 
 had not been in Paris for a year, il y avoit un an que jt fi'aveis e'te a 
 Paris. 
 
 9thly. When, in a negative sentence, the particle de signifies a part 
 of time : as, I will not see him for a year ; je ne le verrai fun an< 
 
 lothly. There are some expressions, in which we indiscriminately 
 make use of a single or double negative, particularly after si : as, *i 
 vous ne voule&. m % y conduire, or si vous ne *uoule% pas my conduire j 
 if you will not carry me thither : si vous ne vene% cette semaine, #r si 
 vous ne venez pas cette semaine j if you do not come this week« &c. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Adverbs, exemplified 
 for the Scholar's Practice. 
 
 [i.j I saw him 'very often. 
 You are in great haste, 
 [2.] You are come very tea* 
 
 sonably. 
 At present , let us see. 
 ^For the present, I am very 
 
 easy. 
 Now, I will tell you. 
 Come to day and see me. 
 Quick, make liaste. 
 I wentyesterday to the play. 
 I saw her the day before 
 
 yesterday. 
 I have known him formerly. 
 He arrived lately. 
 She died not long ago. 
 You must write to her be. 
 
 fore. 
 I shall speak to you to mor- 
 row. 
 I shall have done after to- 
 
 morrow. 
 Come back soon. 
 Henceforward you shall be 
 
 rov friend. 
 
 Je Pai vu tres-souvent. 
 Vons etes //•<*/- presse. 
 Vous etes arrive tr& a pro- 
 
 pos. 
 A present, voyens. 
 Pour le present, je suis trh- 
 
 tranquille. 
 Maintenant, je vous dirai. 
 Venez me voir atijourd'hui. 
 Fife, depeche z . votis . 
 Jefus hier a la cornedie, 
 Je la vis evvant-hier. 
 
 Je Pai connu autrefois, 
 II arriva demierement* 
 Elle mourut depuis pen. 
 II faut lui ecrire anparcL*' 
 
 *vant. 
 Je vous parlerai demain* 
 
 J'aurai fait afrh-demam. 
 
 Revenez bientot. 
 
 Vous serez desormais mon 
 
 ami. 
 2 
 

 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Henceforth it will always 
 be so. 
 
 At fir it he spoke thus. 
 
 J have been often astonished. 
 
 She died suddenly. 
 
 Do you sometimes read ro- 
 mances ? 
 
 I very seldom read any. 
 
 On a sudden he presented 
 himself before my eyes. 
 
 I shall come back, at the 
 latest, by ten o'clock. 
 
 Run thither nvtth all speed. 
 
 I never consented to it. 
 
 I shall always be faithful to 
 you. 
 
 It is all over. 
 
 She torments him continu- 
 ally. 
 
 I shall speak to him at Li- 
 tun . 
 
 I commonly breakfast at nine 
 o'clock. 
 
 At what o'clock do you 
 commonly dine ? 
 
 We dine almost always at 
 
 } three o'clock. 
 
 1 hardly ever go out before 
 dinner. 
 
 I shall meet him enc time or 
 other. 
 
 You go to bed too :oon. 
 
 You rise too late. 
 
 Rise betimes. 
 
 Have you not seem him 
 yet? 
 
 We shall be in the country 
 then. 
 
 Then we shall make our- 
 selves merry. 
 
 from that tune I perceived 
 uia cheating irickb. 
 
 Dorenavant, ii en sera tou- 
 
 jours de meme. 
 D*abord il parla ainsi. 
 J'ai ete souvent e tonne. 
 Elle mourut subitement. 
 Lisez-vous quelquefois des 
 
 romans ? 
 J'en lis tres-rarement. 
 Soudain il se pre sen ta de- 
 
 vant mes yeux. 
 Je reviendrai a dix heuresj 
 
 au plus tard. 
 Courez-y au plus vite. 
 Je n'y z\ jamais consent i. 
 Je vous serai toujours fidele. 
 
 C'en est fait/<?»r toujour:. 
 Elle le tourmente continued 
 
 lement. 
 Je lui parlerai a loisir, 
 
 Je dejeune ordinaireme?it a 
 
 neuf heures. 
 A quelle heure dinez-vous 
 
 co?mnunement% 
 Nous dinons prcsque tou- 
 jours a trois heures. 
 Je ne sors pnsque jamais 
 
 avant le diner. 
 Je le rencontrerai tot ou 
 
 tard. 
 Vous allcz trop tot au lit. 
 Vous vous levez trop tard.- 
 Lcvez-vous de bonne heure. 
 Ne l'avez-vous pas encore 
 
 vu ? 
 Nous scrons alors a la cam* 
 
 pagne. 
 Feur lors nous nous diver- 
 
 tirons. 
 JDesAjrs je m'apercus de ses 
 
 fourbenes. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 269 
 
 I have not seen her since. 
 
 When will you come ? 
 
 Now and then we play at 
 cards. 
 
 We: have made ourselves 
 merry all the night. 
 
 He has been robbed at noon- 
 day. 
 
 I shall send it you the first 
 opportunity. 
 
 I shall be ready to serve 
 you at all times. 
 
 WL 
 
 ere are you going 
 
 Whence do you come ? 
 
 Which way do you go ? 
 
 Come hither* 
 
 Go hence* 
 
 Come this way. 
 
 Stay there. 
 
 Do not stir hence. 
 
 Go that way* 
 
 Look up. 
 
 Go up stairs. 
 
 Your pen is down here. 
 
 See yonder that beautiful 
 
 flower. 
 She comes from above. 
 1 come from below. 
 Take it by the top. 
 Hold it by the bottom. 
 This old house is very fine 
 
 within. 
 This house is very fine with- 
 
 out. 
 How far shall we go ? 
 J have read this book as far 
 
 as this. 
 Let us read as far as this. 
 You will find him bcrt- 
 
 about. 
 
 Je ne Pai pas vue depuis. 
 Quand viendrez-vous ? 
 Nous jouons aux cartes de 
 
 temps en temps. 
 Nous nous sommes divertis 
 . toute la nuit. 
 II a ete vole en plein jour^ 
 
 ou en plein midi. 
 Je vous l'enverrai au premier 
 
 purl 
 Je serai pret en tout "temps a 
 
 vous servir. 
 O/*- allez -vous ? 
 Yyou venez -vous ? 
 Par oil avez- vous passe i 
 Venez ici. 
 Sortez d'ici. 
 Venez par ici. 
 Restez la. 
 
 Ne bougez pas de la. 
 Allez par Id. 
 Regardez la haul. 
 Allez en haut. 
 Votre plume est ici dessous. 
 Regardez Id has cette belle 
 
 fieur. 
 Elle vient d'en haut. 
 Je viens d 3 en has. 
 Prenez-le par en haut. 
 Tenez-le par en has. 
 Cette vieille maison est tres- 
 
 belle en dedans. 
 Celle-ci est tres-belle en de* 
 
 hors. 
 jfusqu'oii irons- nous ? 
 j'ai lu ce Hvyq jufqu'ici. 
 
 Li sons jusque-ld. 
 
 Vous le trouverez aux en- 
 
.270 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF TfrE 
 
 You go very far \ 
 
 He lives hard by. 
 
 I bought it just by. 
 
 I have followed him close. 
 
 Come nearer* 
 
 Go before t I will follow you. 
 
 Walk behind. 
 
 You will nowhere find the 
 
 like. 
 Put this over and that 
 
 under. 
 He struck me behind. 
 You would be rich elsewhere. 
 You will be contented no- 
 where* 
 She will be admired every 
 
 nvh.~ff t 
 His hou-je is m this side. 
 1 i is garden is on that side. 
 They seek for him 001 a!! sides. 
 They have agreed on both 
 
 sides. 
 He runs hither and thither* 
 She goes up and down. 
 Go on the right. 
 Do not go on the left. 
 Go straight along. 
 He fell all along into 
 
 dirt. 
 They went together to 
 
 coffee-house. 
 We treat one another by 
 
 turns. 
 Let us drink about. 
 Do not speak all at once. 
 They run helter skelter. 
 They ran in a crowd to see 
 
 the King. 
 You turn every thing topsy 
 
 tun . 
 And he lilczasc. 
 Give him rwr io little of it f 
 
 the 
 
 the 
 
 Vous allez bien loin* 
 II demeure tout p roc he. 
 Je l'ai achete ici pres, 
 Je l'ai suivi de pres. 
 Approchez-vous de plus prhs* 
 Allez devant, je vous suivrai. 
 Marchez derriere. 
 Vous n'en trouverez nuUe 
 
 fart de semblable. 
 Mettez ceci dessus, et ceia 
 
 desssus. 
 II m' a frappe par dorriere. 
 Vous seriez riche ailleurs. 
 Vous ne serez content null* 
 
 pat*. 
 Elk sera admiree par tout \ 
 
 Sa maison est Nh>dtf4i 
 Son jardin est aiudeia. 
 On le cherche de tuus cotes. 
 11 se sont accordes de jjart 
 
 et d' autre, 
 II court de cote et d* autre* 
 Elle va ca et Id. 
 Allez a dro'Ue, 
 N'allez pas a gauche. 
 Allez tout droit. 
 II tomba tcut 
 
 dans la boue. 
 lis sont alles 
 
 cafe . 
 Nous nous traitons tcur 4 
 
 tour. 
 Buvons a la ronde. 
 Ne parlez pas tous d lafois. 
 lis courent pele.mele. 
 lis coururent en foule pour 
 
 voir le Roi. 
 Vous mettez tout sens dessus 
 
 dessous. 
 Et lui aussiy ou pareillement : % 
 Donnez-lui.en taut soit feu* 
 
 de son long 
 ensemble ail 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 iji- 
 
 Vou give him a great deal. 
 
 Give her but little* 
 
 I have not much of it. 
 
 Have you enough ? 
 
 I have eaten sufficiently , 
 
 You gave me too much. 
 
 You gave him too little. 
 
 By little and little he will 
 
 become a doctor. 
 Do you owe him so mtich ? 
 I have owed him more. 
 I may have it at another 
 
 place for less. 
 I have been, at most, twice 
 
 at her house, 
 Do not fail to write to her 
 
 at least* 
 Y@u bought it too dear. 
 I have not sold it him dear. 
 
 I am infinitely obliged to you. 
 
 He was almost killed. 
 
 You must ask it of him by 
 
 all means. 
 She is tolerably well* 
 
 Why do you not answer 
 
 me ? 
 Hovj is your sister ? 
 
 She is very vosll. 
 She has been very well, since 
 she went into the country* 
 I am admirably vjell. 
 
 My mother is very ill* 
 You have done vcisely. 
 You accuse me falsely. 
 pie thoroughly understands 
 the French language. 
 
 Vous lui en donnez beaucoup, 
 Ne lui en donnez guens. 
 Je n'en ai pas beaucoup* 
 En avez-vous assezf 
 J'ai mange suffisamment. 
 Vous m'en avez trop donne, 
 Vous lui en avez donne trop 
 
 peu. 
 Feu a peu il deviendra, doc- 
 
 teur. 
 Lui devez-vous tant? 
 Je lui ai du davantage. 
 Je l'aurai ailleurs a moins. 
 
 J'ai ete deux fois chez elk, 
 tout au plus. 
 
 Au moins > ne man que z pas 
 de lui ecrire. 
 
 Vous i'avez achetc trop (her. 
 
 Je ne le lui ai pas vend a 
 cher. 
 
 Je vous %m$infiniment oblige. 
 
 II fut presaue tue\ 
 
 II faut que vous le lui de- 
 mand iez absolument. 
 
 Elle se porte passablement 
 lien. 
 
 Pmrfttoi ne me repondez- 
 vous pas I 
 
 Comment se porte mademoi- 
 selle votre sceur ? 
 
 Elle se porte tres-bien. 
 
 Elle se porte tres-bien, depuis 
 qn'elie est a la campagne. 
 
 Je me porte parfaiiement 
 hi en. 
 
 Ma mere se porte tres-mah 
 
 Vous avez agi sagement. 
 
 Vous m'accusez a faux. 
 
 II sait le Francois a fond m 
 
 K 4 
 
272 
 
 You will hardly persuade 
 
 her. 
 She consented to it with re* 
 
 luctancy. 
 She went against her will. 
 3 agree to it heartily. 
 She is secure from all danger. 
 
 I have told yon my senti- 
 ments openly. 
 
 He has given us a descrip- 
 tion to the life. 
 
 He fell upon his hack. 
 
 They went groping along. 
 
 You have put on your stock- 
 ings the wrong side out* 
 ward. 
 
 He did it on purpose. 
 
 I did not do it designedly. 
 
 Do you speak in earnest ? 
 
 I tell it you seriously. 
 
 1 did it in a joke. 
 
 I said it in jest. 
 
 fhe said it in jest. 
 
 You have done it in a hurry. 
 
 1 have done it unawares. 
 
 You speak at random. 
 
 Let the worst come to the 
 worst, you can only lose 
 your labour. 
 
 Their lodgings are small. 
 
 I shall inge?iuously confess it. 
 
 1 won h fairly. 
 
 I am fully persuaded of it. 
 
 He would by all means make 
 me stayat dinner. 
 
 Your book is, in all respects, 
 better. 
 
 I warn you as n friend. 
 
 Let us settle our affairs ami. 
 
 cably. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 A peine la persuaderez-vous* 
 
 Elle y consentit a regret. 
 
 Elle y est allee a contrt-cceur. 
 
 Vy consens de bon caeur. 
 
 Elle est a convert de tout 
 danger. 
 
 Je vous ai dit mon sentiment 
 a decGWvert. 
 
 II nous a fait une descrip- 
 tion au natitrel. 
 
 11 tomba a la renverse. 
 
 lis allerent a tatons. 
 
 Vous avez mis vos bas a 
 Venders. 
 
 II Pa fait expres. 
 Je ne Pai pas fait a desseitt m 
 Parlez-vous de bonne foi P 
 Je vous ie dis serieuscment. 
 Je le rls pour rire. 
 Je Pai dit pour badiner % 
 Elle Pa dit en badinant. 
 Vous Pavez fait a la hate. 
 Je Pai fait par megarde. 
 Vous parlez au ha sard. 
 Au pis aller, vous ne pouvez 
 perdre que votre peine. 
 
 lis sont loges a Vetroit. 
 Je Pavouerai de bonne foi. 
 Je Pai gagne de bonjeu. 
 J'cn suis tout-a-fait persuade. 
 II voulut a toute force me 
 
 fa ire r ester a diner. 
 Votre livre est meiileur a 
 
 tous cgards. 
 Je vous avertis en ami. 
 Regions nos affaires a la- 
 J :lc. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 *73 
 
 He awaked suddenly. 
 
 Let us live in peace. 
 
 You may sleep quietly. 
 
 Will you return empty hand- 
 ed? 
 
 Make free, as if you were 
 at home. 
 
 She has resisted him stoutly. 
 
 Did you go thither on foot ? 
 
 She was on horseback when 
 I saw her. 
 
 Yes, indeed, I have been 
 there. 
 
 Perhaps he will come to 
 day. 
 
 Hz probably does not know 
 it. 
 
 Put them separate. 
 
 1 have put them out of the 
 way. 
 
 I have lefr them apart. • 
 
 I know it better than you. 
 
 Trade goes on worse* and 
 worse. 
 
 I know it as well as you. 
 
 My mother is not so ill as 
 she was. ■•-». 
 
 His affairs go on better and 
 better. • 
 
 He shall pay dearly for it. 
 
 I am thirty years old, nei- 
 ther more or less. 
 
 Above all, do not forget, to 
 bring paper. 
 
 I shall speak ..to her in pri- 
 vate. 
 
 [3.]. It is the opinion of 
 many people. 
 
 It is the custom of few peo- 
 ple. 
 
 That happens to many people. 
 
 II se reveilla en sursaut* 
 Vivons en paix. 
 Vou> pouvez dormir en repot* 
 Vous en retournerez-vous 
 
 a vide ? 
 Agissez librementy comme si 
 
 vous etiez chez vous. - 
 Elle lui a resiste fort etferme. 
 Y allates.vous a pied? 
 Elle eroit a cheval, quand 
 
 je la vis. 
 Oui, en verite, j'y ai ete. 
 
 Peut-etre viendra. t-il au~ 
 
 jourd'hui. 
 Probablement il ne le sait 
 
 pas. 
 Mettez-les se pare menu 
 Je les ai mis a Vecart* 
 
 Je les ai laisses a part. 
 Je le sais mieux que vous. 
 Le- commerce va de pis en 
 
 pis. « 
 Je le sais aussi bien que- vous* 
 Ma mere se porte mains mal 
 
 qu'elle ne faisoit. 
 Ses affaires vont de mieux en 
 
 mieux. 
 II me le pay era cher. 
 J'ai trenie ans, ni plus ni 
 
 moins. 
 Surtout n'oubliez pas d'ap- 
 
 porter du papier. 
 Je lui parlerai en particulier* 
 
 C'est l'opinion de beaucoup 
 
 de gens. 
 C'est la coutume de peude 
 
 gens. 
 Cela arrive a beaucoup de genso 
 
-74 
 
 [4'1 I have not learned my 
 lesson. 
 
 I shall speak to him no more. 
 
 I have not seen him at ail. 
 
 He knows nothing. 
 
 I never knew him. 
 
 By no means consent to it. 
 
 I did not see any body there. 
 
 [$.] Have you not seen my 
 brother ? 
 
 Have you not written your 
 theme > 
 
 Have they not yet break- 
 fasted? 
 
 Has she not consented to it ? 
 
 Has he not spent all his 
 money ? 
 
 Has he not sent for him ? 
 
 [6.] I neither love^r hate 
 
 him. 
 i neither see her nor speak 
 
 to her. 
 Unless you come with me. 
 
 lest he should die. 
 
 I shall hinder him from 
 
 playing. 
 I am afraidhe is sick. 
 
 Be sure that he does not go 
 
 out. 
 I am afraid he will not come 
 
 to day. 
 Why do you fear she wilL 
 
 not write to you ? 
 
 She fears he does not lore 
 
 her. 
 She fears he is not in good 
 
 health. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Je #'ai pas appris ma Jecon, 
 
 Je ne lui parlerai plus. 
 
 Je ne l'ai point vu» 
 
 11 ne sait rien. 
 
 Je ne l'ai jamais conna. 
 
 N'y consentez nullement* 
 
 Je n'y ai vu personne. 
 
 A'avez-vous pas vu mon 
 
 frere ? 
 A^'avez-vous/tfi ecrit votre 
 
 theme ? 
 A^'ont-ils pas encore dejeu- 
 
 ne f 
 A r, y.a-t-elle pas consenti ? 
 A r 'a-t-il pas depense tout 
 
 son argent ? 
 Ne l'a-t-il /tfj envoye cher- 
 
 eher ?" 
 Je ne l'aime mi ne le hahi 
 
 Je ne la vois ni ne lui park. 
 
 A mo ins que vous ne veniez, 
 
 avec moi. 
 De erainte qu'il ne mourut. 
 J'empccherai qu'il ne joue. 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne soit ma* 
 
 lade. 
 Prenez garde qu'il ne sorte. 
 
 Je crains qn'il ne vienne pas 
 
 aujourd'hui. 
 Pourquoi craignez - vous 
 
 qu'clle ne vous ecrivc 
 
 pas? 
 Ellc craint qu'il ' w^ l'aime 
 
 pas. 
 Ellc apprehende qu'il ne icit 
 
 pas en bonne santv 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 I desire no recompense, but 
 the pleasure of obliging 
 you. 
 
 It is only through idleness. 
 
 I know only him. 
 
 It was but a false alarm. 
 
 It is only a jest. 
 We are but two. 
 I spoke but two words to 
 
 him. 
 I have learned French but 
 
 three months. 
 L heard only that news. 
 
 We staid there only one 
 
 hour. 
 She wrote only six lines. 
 Why Acy not you answer ? 
 Why do not you study ? 
 Why do not you write ? 
 Why does ?iot he go thither 
 
 himself ? 
 Why.&i&he not come sooner ?. 
 Why does not she. rise ear-- 
 
 lier ? 
 I. cannot go thither. 
 I cannot keep pace with you. 
 You cannot speak to him .to 
 
 day. 
 I cannot stay any longer. 
 
 Cannot yoir force him to it ? 
 1 dare not speak to her. 
 I dare not contradict him* 
 He does not dart take it 
 
 upon himsel£ 
 She does not dare to declare 
 
 her thoughts freely. 
 Dare you not write to him > 
 
 *75 
 
 Je ne desire pour recom- 
 pense que le plaisir de 
 vous obliger. 
 
 Ce »'est que par pure fai- 
 neantise. 
 
 Je ne connois que lui. 
 
 Ce a'etoit qu'ane. fausse 
 alarme, 
 
 Ce tf'est qu'an badinage. 
 
 Nous ne sommes que deux, 
 
 Je ne lui ai dit que deux 
 mots. 
 
 Je n*ai appris le Francois 
 que trois mois. 
 
 Je tf'ai appris que cette nou* 
 veile. 
 
 Nous n*y restames ^«'une^ 
 heure. 
 
 Eile u'a ecrit que six lignes. 
 
 Qjie ne repondez-vous ? 
 
 Que ff'etudiez-vous ? 
 
 Que tt'ecrivez-vous ? 
 
 Que n'y va-t-il lui-meme ? 
 
 Que Vest-il venu plus tot ? 
 Que ne se leye^t-elle plus 
 
 matin ? 
 Je me puis y aller. . 
 Je ne puis vous tenir pied. 
 Vous ne pwvez. lui parlcr 
 
 aujourd'hui. 
 Je ne puis rester plus long- 
 
 temps. 
 Ne powviz-.Y ous Vy forcer ? 
 Je n'ose Ivli parler. 
 Je *'cse le contredire^ 
 li nose s'en charger* . 
 
 Elle n'ose declarer librement 
 
 ses pensees. 
 <VWx-vqus tax lui ecrlre ? 
 
 K 6 
 
t]6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 D"'S not he dare to go to 
 
 the play ? 
 Docs not she dare to take 
 
 the least pleasure ? 
 I have not seen him these 
 
 ten years. 
 I had not spoken to her for 
 
 two years. 
 I have not been at the play 
 
 these three years. 
 I had not been in the Park 
 
 for four years. 
 I shall not see him for a 
 
 year. 
 I shall not speak to them 
 
 for two years. 
 
 A r W-t-il pas aller b. la co- 
 rn edie ? 
 
 A r, 0j<f.t-elle fas prendre le 
 moindre plaisir ? 
 
 11 y a dix ans que je ne l'ai 
 vu. 
 
 II y avoit deux ans que je 
 ne lui avois parle. 
 
 11 ya trois ans que je «'ai 
 ete a la comedie. 
 
 II y avoit quatre ans que je 
 »'avois ete au Pare. 
 
 Je ne le verrai d'un an. 
 
 Je ne leur parlerai dc deux 
 ans. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon Prepositions. 
 
 COME prepositions govern the first case; some the 
 *^ second ; and some the third. 
 
 1. The following prepositions, as exemplified, govern 
 the first case : 
 
 Avant 
 
 aprcs 
 
 devant 
 
 avee 
 
 chcz 
 
 contrc 
 
 dans 
 
 en 
 
 tic puis 
 
 dis 
 
 ttenicrc 
 
 lc deluge, 
 
 vous, 
 
 lui, 
 
 son ire re, 
 
 vous, 
 
 la muraille, 
 
 la ch imbrc, 
 
 Anglererrc, 
 
 son arrr ee 
 
 before the deluge* 
 after you. 
 hforc him. 
 with his brother* 
 at jour house, 
 against the <walU 
 in the roc?n. 
 in England, 
 since his arrival. 
 
 le commencement, from the beginning. 
 lc j ardi n, . it hind the garden • 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 des«us - 
 dessous - 
 entre 
 envers - 
 
 environ 
 
 la table, 
 
 la table, 
 
 amis, 
 
 son prochain, 
 
 - cent gumees, 
 excepted hormis son pere, 
 
 over the table, 
 under the table, 
 between friends* 
 - towa rd our neig h hour* 
 f about a hundred gui* 
 \ neas. 
 except his father* 
 
 malgre 
 malgre - 
 -outre 
 par 
 
 par mi - 
 pendant 
 durant - 
 pour 
 sans 
 
 moyennant - une somme d'argent, for a sum of money. 
 
 nonobstant, oul x § notwithstanding, or 
 
 ^ sa mere, -J 
 
 elle, 
 
 son logement, 
 
 terre, 
 
 les riches, 
 
 l'hiver, 
 
 la paix 
 
 sa pension, 
 
 amis, 
 
 don, ou sui^ant votre avis, 
 
 - les decombres, 
 
 - le toit, 
 
 - cette affaire, 
 
 le scir 
 les Alper, 
 
 - les Alpes, 
 
 - le corps, 
 
 sous 
 sur 
 
 touchant 
 
 vers 
 
 par-deca 
 par-deia 
 a travers 
 
 in spite of his mother, 
 again her will. 
 beside his lodging, 
 by land* 
 among the rich, 
 during the winter* 
 during the peace. 
 
 - for his board. 
 
 - without friends. 
 
 f according to' your aa* 
 \ &Ke. 
 
 tinder the rubbish. 
 
 upon the roof. 
 
 concerning that 
 fair. 
 
 about the evening. 
 
 on this side the Alps 
 
 beyond the Alps. 
 
 through the body* 
 
 { 
 
 af. 
 
 2. The following prepositions govern the second case : 
 
 or about the 
 
 Autour 
 
 anpres - 
 
 faute 
 
 le long - 
 
 pres, ou proche 
 
 ensuite - 
 
 hors 
 
 loin 
 
 >is-a-Yis 
 
 de la maison, 
 
 de lui, 
 
 d'argent, - 
 
 de la haie, 
 
 du Palais Royal, 
 
 de quoi, 
 
 du cabinet, 
 
 de ses ennemis, . 
 
 de la Bourse, 
 
 { 
 
 round, 
 house. 
 
 near him. 
 for want r f money . 
 
 along the hedge. 
 
 near the Royal Palace. 
 
 after which. 
 
 oui of the closet. 
 far from hts enemies, 
 opposite the Exchange* 
 
278 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 And all others which are composed of a substantive 
 preceded either by a, au, or en. Except a tra<ver; t 
 which governs the first case ; as above. 
 
 3. The following prepositions govern the th'rd case : 
 
 Conformement & Tusage, - agreeable to custom* 
 
 quant - - amoi, - - as for my part. 
 
 jusqu'aux - nues, - to the skies. 
 
 n • f by reason of bis cus— 
 
 par rapport - a ses pratiques, \ t , 
 
 Remarks on Prepositions. 
 
 r. Some prepositions are placed before infinitives,. as well as before- 
 nouns ;, some, when placed before infinitives, have no preposition, 
 after them, others have the preposition de, and some the preposition a. 
 Those which take no preposition after them before an infinitive, ar^ 
 aprcs, par, sans, and pour 5 as, after having talked without knowing any 
 thing of the matter, apres avoir parte sans savoir ce pfii disoiu 
 Those which take the preposition de after them before an infinitive, 
 are, bois, bormis, except/, a la re'serve, loin, au lieu, faute, a force, au peril, 
 and perhaps some others; as, far from blaming you, loin de vous blame. 
 Those which take the participle a are, sauf and jusque ; as, I can but 
 begin again , sauf a recommencer. 
 
 2. En is. never followed by the article, though we say, in a. familiar 
 way of speaking, he is dead ; il est alle en P autre monde j upon what 
 account, en Vbonneur de quel saint. 
 
 Dans is always followed by the article, except before possessive 
 pronouns, proper names of authors quoted, and proper names of 
 towns ; as, I have read it in Cicero ; je V a\ lu dans CicSron ; search in 
 my pocket, cbercbcz dans ma fotbe. We indifferently make usecf 
 en or dans before personal pronouns; as, in him, en iui, or dans lui. 
 But we say, petiser en soi-meme, to reflect within ourselves. 
 
 3.. En, before nouns of time, signifies the time employed in doing a 
 
 thing; and dam, the time after expiration of which the thing will be 
 
 done j as, I. could do it in a week, or I would spend no more than a 
 
 In doing it, jt h firth en hu'.t jours j I will do it a week, hence, 
 
 je /cfetai dans buit jours. 
 
 4. Chi-z, followed by a pronoun, or a proper name of a person, 
 .signifies- somebody^ house ; a?, he is at my house, at your house, &c. ;. 
 il est cbiz tnci, cb<.z txus, Sec. It is preceded by de, when it signifies 
 Coming from ; as, I come from your house, je viens de cbez vcus. 
 
 5. Dcdan, dekcrr, desius, dessus, and t.uparat>ant, are always ad- 
 verb., *nd never preposition? j consequently they h*ve no ca*e aftet 
 
 9 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 279 
 
 thett, except when dedans and dehors, dessus and dessou*,. are either 
 joined together, or have the particle dt ox par before them; as,, both 
 within and without the house, dedans et dehors la maison j. both upon 
 and under the chair, dessus et dessous la chaise; from under the 
 bed, de dessous le lit. 
 
 6. When the definite article precedes dedans or dehors, dessus or des- 
 sous, those words are used substantively, and consequently require the 
 following noun in the second case ; as, the inside, or the outside of 
 the house, le dedans, ou le dehors de la maison. 
 
 7. Jusqves, or rather jusque (to, as far as, till) coming before the pre- 
 position a, it's final e ores rs emitted, and an apostrophe is put in it's 
 stead ; as> to death, jusqu'a la mort. This is to be observed even in 
 declamation ; as, how long ? jusqu'a quandf and not jusques a quand ? 
 as likewrse the other conjunction, till, until j as, jusqu'a ce que, which 
 governs the subjunctive, and not jusques a ce que. 
 
 8. Even or iery, in English, is sometimes rendered in French by 
 jusqu'a; as, even the king, jusqu'au roi. In this sense it signifies an 
 emphatic expression of a collection, or universality of objects, either 
 mentioned or understood ; a?, when I say, even kings are mortal^ 
 jusqu'aux rois sont mortels : it signifies all men, even kings are mortal* 
 tcus Us btmmes, jusqu'aux rois, sont mortels. 
 
 9. Sauf, which signifies an exception to something, governs the 
 first case, speaking of things; as, without prejudice of his claim, sauf 
 ton droit* It governs the third case, speaking of persons ; as, sauf 
 au demandeur a se pour voir, but the plaintiff, or petitioner, is at liberty 
 to sue, or make application. A law expression. 
 
 10. When before signifies opposite to, or in the presence of, it must be 
 rendered in French by devant : as, opposite to your house, devant votrs 
 maison; in the presence of the king, devant le roi. The opposite to de- 
 vant is derrihe, behind. When before signifies to have precedency of, it 
 is rendered in French by avoir le pas sur; as, dukes are before earls, 
 les dues ont le pas sur les comtes. In all other cases, before is rendered 
 into French by avant ; as, we were happy before the war, nous etions 
 tcareux avant l-a guerre ; virtue must be preferred to every thing, la 
 vertu doit aller avant tout; it's opposite is apres, after. 
 
 11. Avant followed by que, is a conjunction, which governs the 
 subjunctive : as, before you were born, avant que vous fuisscz ne'$ 
 followed byde, it governs the infinitive; as, before death, avant demourir, 
 
 12. Pres, aupres, near, govern the second case, though we may say,, 
 in common conversation, near St. Paul's, pres l'eglise St. Paul. Pres 
 must always be used instead of aupres, speaking of time or age ; as, it 
 is near twelve o'clock, il est pres de mldi ; she is near thirty year6 old, 
 elle a pres de t rente ans. 
 
 13. As custom will not always suffer aupres to be used, when 
 speaking of places, particularly alter trop, si, assez, plus, bien, I advise 
 the learner to make use of pres; as, he lives near the church, i7 de- 
 meure pres de l'eglise : though aupres may be indifferently used in 
 such a case. 
 
 14. Pres, in the sense of save,'excepting, governs the third cage, and- 
 must be placed after the noun which it governs; as, except one crov*n, 
 a un ecu pres ; excepting that, a cela prh. 
 
 jj. Aupres m\xz\ always be used instead of prh, 1st, when we speak 
 
s8o A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 of somebody placed with anotlvr, as his master, friend, counsellor, or 
 servant j as, j'ai mis mon fi s aupres ae mon f>cre, I have placed my 
 son vv,th ny brother, viz. as bis tutor, master, friend. 
 
 2div. When we mention in what esteem a person is with another, 
 or what interest he lias with him : as, he is in favour with the king, 
 my lord, that lady; il est hien aupres du roi, de monseigneur, de cette 
 dame: he can do what he will with him, il a tout pouvoir aupres de 
 lui. 
 
 3dly. When we mention by whom a person is entertained, shel- 
 tered, &c, as, he is gone to live with him, M i'est retire aupres de lm\ 
 he is quite safe with him, // est en sure,/ aupres de lu'i. 
 
 1 6 The prepositions to and toward, when they signify in regard to, 
 must always be rendered in French by envers: as, he is ungrate- 
 ful to God and men, il est ingrat envers Dieu et envers les bommes. 
 In all other cases, toward must be rendered by vers; as, he went 
 toward Islington, il est alle vers Islington. Vers signifies likewise 
 about: as, about the beginning of the spring, vers le commencement 
 du printemps. 
 
 17. When from and to denote simply the distance from one place 
 to another, they are rendered in French by de and a $ as, it is five 
 miles from London to Greenwich, it y a cinq millet de Londres a 
 Greenwich. When they denote the quality of the distance, they are 
 rendered by depuis an^ j usque; as, he walked from London to Green- 
 wich, il alia a pied depuis Londres jusqu"^ Greenwich. When they 
 denote succession of place, they are rendered by de and en 5 as, he 
 goes from town to town, il va de ville en ville. 
 
 iS. A, each, and every, before a noun denoting distribution of 
 people, time, or place, are rendered tn French by par ; a^, two 
 crowns a piece, aeux ecus par tete : three guineas a week, trois gui- 
 neas par semaine : four shillings a mile, quatre schell'ings par mille. 
 
 19. Vis-a-vis and a V opposite, opposite, govern the second case, 
 though we say in common conversation, vis-a-vis i'hotel de ville, 
 opposite Guildhall. The first is applied both to persons and things, 
 the other to things only. 
 
 20. The participle active in English, preceded by without, is ren- 
 dered in French by sans, sometimes followed by a .substantive with- 
 out an article j as, he spoke to him without fearing, il lui par la sans 
 crainte. Sometimes by an infinitive without a preposition : as, // lui 
 parla sans craindre. Sometimes by que, and the following verb in the 
 Subjunctive mood; as, il lux parla sans qu'il crmgnU : and this last 
 must be used when the active participle in English is preceded either 
 by a pronoun, or any other noun. 
 
 21. ^s, in English, with a verb in the indicative mood, or en and 
 upon with an active participle, ate rendered in French, sometimes by 
 sur followed by ce que, as, as you wrote to me that... sur ce que 
 vous rrfuvtz cent que .... Sometimes by commc, as j as 1 walked 
 into the Park, comme jc me pnmenois au Pare. Sometimes by a fol- 
 lowed by a substantive ; as, on my arriving at London, a mon arriv/e 
 « Londres. 
 
 22. The prepositions a, de, centre, sur, sous, and sans, are commonly 
 repeated in French, though they arc not in Englith 5 as, there were 
 
FRENCH- TONGUE. 281 
 
 many books upon the table and chair} il y avoit beaucoup de jivres 
 sur la table et sur la chaise. 
 
 23. Par, pcur, avec, dans, &c, are commonly repeated when the 
 nouns are not synonymous, or pretty nearly of the same signification, 
 as, by mildness and reason ; par la douceur et par la ra'ison : par is 
 repeated, because douceur and raison are neither synonymous, n«f 
 nearly of the same signification. But in this instance, in luxury and 
 vouptuousness, dans la mollesse et la volupte, the preposition, for the 
 contrary reason, is not repeated. 
 
 Farther Remarks upon the Prepositions a and de. 
 
 N. B. The preposition de, and the article le, are contracted into du, 
 de and les into des: of the father, du pere, of the fathers, de: peres ; 
 instead of de le pere, de Us peres, the same contraction of the article 
 is made with the preposition a : to the father, au pere, to the fathers* 
 aux peres j instead of a le pere, a Us peres. 
 
 The preposition de, of, indicates the second case of the noun or pro- 
 noun following it, a is the sign of the third case, see page 62. 
 
 1. When two nouns substantive in English are joined together, 
 making but one word, the first expressing the manner or form of a 
 thing, or the use for which it is designed, the first must be the second 
 in French, with the preposition a before it, or it must be changed 
 into a verb in the infinitive mood 5 as, a dining room; une saile a 
 manger: a patch-box, une bone a tnoucbes. But, if the first express 
 the matter of which the thing spoken of is made, it requires the pre- 
 position de; as, silk stockings; des bas de sue: a silver pot: un fot 
 tfargent* 
 
 2. A\s sometimes used, 1st. instead of at, or to before names of 
 places, which admit of no article; as, vivre a Paris, aller a Londres, 
 s'arreter a Amsterdam. 
 
 2dly. Instead of with ; as, to paint with oil colours ; peindre a 
 n-uile. 
 
 jdly. Instead of for; as, a coach for six persons: un carosse a six 
 pLces. 
 
 4thly. Instead of after; as, to live after the English fashion « vivre 
 a l^Aigloise. 
 
 5thly. Instead of on; as, on the right hand, a main drcite : on the 
 left hand., a main gauche. 
 
 6thly. Instead of in; as, a suit in fashion, un habit a la mode. 
 
 7thly. Instead of by ; as, step by step, pas a pas. 
 
 8thly. Instead of according to; followed by the substantive avis ; ae, 
 according to my opinion, a mon avis. 
 
 gthly. Instead of to; as, to judge of him by his looks, a juger dt 
 hi par la mine. 
 
2$* A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 lOthly. Instead of at ) as, at two o'clock, a deux beures. 
 
 It is sometimes used without being expressed in English. 
 
 3. De is often put afters substanstive instead of some, expressed or 
 urderstood ; as, a bit of bread, of meat $ un morceau de pain, de 
 <viande> It is sometimes used likewise, 1st, after the indeterminate 
 pronouns, quelqu'un, pesonne, ricn, qu r S\, Sec, before an adjective j 
 as, there is nobody so lucky as he, U rSy a personne de si bcureux que 
 /»;': there is something inexpressibly gracious in his discourse, il y a 
 je ne sals quoi de gracieux dans ses discours. 
 
 2dly. Before the proper names of places having no article, which 
 we are going or coming from ; as, revenir de Pans, part'tr de JLe>»- 
 ires. 
 
 3dly. Instead of in\ as, he went away in the night, il partit de 
 
 Tiuit. 
 
 4thly. Before a past participle in the following and similar expres- 
 sions; as, there were ten thousand of them killed or wounded, il y 
 9n eut aix mille de tugs cu de blesses. 
 
 5thly. Instead of by $ as, he is taller by the whole head, il est plus 
 grand de ttute la tete. 
 
 6thly. Instead of with ; as, he ran with all his might* il courut de 
 toutts ses forces* 
 
 7thly. Instead of in, after, instead c/j as he behaves in, or after, 
 this manner; il u conduit de utU mandrel Witt t in vouf ittad) 
 siffiois de vws 9 
 
 Sthly. Instead of on ; as, to live on fish, vhrc de peisua* 
 
 It is likewise used without being expressed in English. 
 
 There are some other uses of the prepositions de and a ; but it would 
 be too t-edious to relate them here, as they have been sufficiently ex» 
 plained in the foregoing grammatical rules and observations. 
 
 Rules and Observations upon the Prepositions, exem- 
 plified for the Scholars Practice* 
 
 [i.] 1 was here before you. J'etois fci avant vous. 
 
 You are come after me, Vous etes verm aprh moi. 
 
 Get out of my sight. Otez-vous de decant moi. 
 
 I saw it behind the house. Je l'ai vu derriere la maison* 
 
 He went nviih his brother. II est alle avec son frere. 
 
 1 have been at your house. J'ai ete ctm vous. 
 
 Have you been at bis house ? Avez-vous ete cbcz lui ? 
 
 I have not been at her Je n'ai pas ete chez elle* 
 
 house. 
 
 Why did you not come to Pourquoi n'etes-vous pas 
 
 our house ? venu chez nous ? 
 
 He has succeeded against all II a reussi contre toute appa- 
 
 likelihood rence* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 2S3 
 
 Yeu will find my stockings 
 
 in the closet. 
 He is in England. 
 Since his arrival he has al- 
 ways been ill. 
 I foresaw the consequences 
 
 of it, from the begin- 
 
 ning. 
 My knife is over or under 
 
 the table. 
 Let us share between us two. 
 Let us have charity toward 
 
 our neighbours. 
 I have spent about a thou. 
 
 sand guineas. 
 They are all dead, except 
 
 my father. 
 He will do it for a lum of 
 
 money. 
 She likes him notwithstand* 
 
 ing his humour. 
 She would marry him in spite 
 
 cf all her relations. 
 I spend two guineas a week 
 
 beside my lodging. 
 
 We travelled by land. 
 I left it among my papers. 
 
 We take a walk every day 
 during the summer. 
 
 The people suffer a great 
 deal during the war. 
 
 I gave it^or you. 
 
 He is without friends and 
 without money. 
 
 I have acted according to 
 your advice. 
 
 Eight men were buried un- 
 der the rubbish. 
 
 Vous trouverez mes bas dans 
 
 le cabinet. 
 II est en Angleterre. 
 Depuis son arrive il a tou* 
 
 jours ete malade. 
 J'en previs les consequences 
 
 dis le commencement. 
 
 Mon couteau est dessus ou 
 
 dessous la table. 
 Partageon* entre nous deux. 
 Ayons de la charite enters 
 
 notre prochain. 
 J'ai depense environ mille 
 
 guinees. 
 Ih sent tous morts, except/ 
 
 ou hormii mon pere. 
 II le fera moyennemt une 
 
 somme d'argent. 
 Elle l'aime, nonobstant son 
 
 humeur. 
 Elle voulut l'epouser malgri 
 
 tous ses parens. , 
 Je depense deux guinees 
 
 par semaine, outre mon 
 
 logement. 
 Nous voyageames per terre. 
 Je l'ai laisse parmi mes pa. 
 
 piers. 
 Nous nous promenons tous 
 
 les jours /'ete. 
 Le peuple souffre beaucoup 
 
 durant la guerre, 
 Je Pai donne pour vous. 
 11 est sans argent et sanx 
 
 amis. 
 J'ai agi selort y ou suvvant 
 
 votre avis. 
 Huit homines ont et6 en?e«. 
 
 velis sous les decombres* 
 
284 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Leave that dish upon the Laissez ce plat sur la table* 
 
 table. 
 
 He spoke to me concerning II m' a parle touch ant cette 
 
 that affair. affaire. 
 
 I shall come and see you to- J'irai vous voir 'vers le 
 
 ward the evening. soir. 
 
 He has been run through the II a recu un coup d'epee a 
 
 body. tracers le corps. 
 
 [2.] He rambles every night II rode toutes les nuits au- 
 
 about the house. tour de la maison. 
 
 A man starves for want of Faute d'argent, on meurt de 
 
 money. faim. 
 
 He followed me along the II me suivit le long de la 
 
 hedge. haie. 
 
 There are fine buildings II y a de beaux batimens le 
 
 along the Thames. long de la Tamise. 
 
 Let us walk along the river. Promenons-nous le long de 
 
 la riviere. 
 
 I met him near the royal Je Pai rencontre pres du 
 
 palace. palais royal. 
 
 He followed me out of the II me suivit hers de la viile. 
 
 city. 
 
 I am far from my own Je suis loin de mon pays* 
 
 country. 
 
 Come near me. Venez aupres de moi. 
 
 Keep yourself near the fire. Tenez-vous aupres du feu. 
 
 She lives opposite the Ex- Elle demeure <vis-a-<vis de la 
 
 change. Bourse. 
 
 After which there was a Ensuite de quoi il y eut un 
 
 ball. bal. 
 
 I have suffered a great deal J'ai beacoup souffert a cause 
 
 en her account. d 'elle. 
 
 She died, to the great regret Elle mourut an grand regret 
 
 of all her family. de toute sa lamille. 
 
 Cut them close to the Coupez-les of cur de terre. 
 
 ground. 
 
 Sit down near my brother. Asseyez-vous a cote de moa 
 
 frere. 
 
 He made his escape oy fa- 11 s'echappa a la fav.ur de 
 
 nj-ur of tho night. la nuit. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 285 
 
 The bridge was built at the 
 
 expense of the city. 
 He pretends to be in the 
 
 right, in spite of common 
 
 sense, 
 They dress themselves after 
 the French fashion. 
 
 sAs to what you say, I heard 
 no talk about it. 
 
 She has done it without the 
 knowledge of her mo- 
 ther. 
 
 You shall not have it under 
 fifty guineas. 
 
 He has sold all his estate, 
 except a small house. 
 
 We are sheltered here from 
 the rain. 
 
 There has been a battle on 
 this side cf the Alps. 
 
 He went to the other side of 
 the Pyrenees. 
 
 Nobody is secure from slan- 
 der. 
 
 Dukes are above earls. 
 
 I am below you. 
 
 Let us go and me*t him. 
 
 He has remembered all his 
 
 family in his will, his wife 
 
 excepted. 
 We have brought it about 
 
 by strength of arms. 
 I shall defend you at the 
 
 peril of my life. 
 He was stopped in the middle 
 
 of the street. 
 
 Le pont fut bati aux depens 
 de la ville. 
 
 II veut avoir raison, en de- 
 pit du bon sens. 
 
 lis s'habillent a la mode 
 
 de France, on a la Fran- 
 
 coise. 
 A I'egard de ce qtae vous 
 
 dites, je n'en ai pas en- 
 
 tendu parler. 
 Elle l'a fait a I'insu de sa 
 
 mere. 
 
 Vous ne 1'aurez pas a moins 
 de cinquante guinees. 
 
 II a rendu tout son bien, a 
 la reserve d'une petite 
 maison. 
 
 Nous sommes ici a I'abri 
 de la.pluie. 
 
 II y a eu une bata^lle m de~ 
 ,;d des Alpes. 
 
 II est alle aumdela des Pyre- 
 nees. 
 
 Peisonne n'est a convert de 
 la medisance. 
 
 Les dues sont au-dessus des 
 comtes. 
 
 Je suis au-dessous de vous. 
 
 Allons au-de<vant de lui. 
 
 II a favorise toute sa famille 
 par son' testament, a {'ex- 
 clusion de sa femme. 
 
 Nous en sommes venire a 
 bout a force de bras. 
 
 Je vous defendrai, au perri 
 de ma vie. 
 
 II fut arrete au milieu de la 
 ree. 
 
286 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 He lends money at the rate 
 
 of five per cent. 
 [3.] As for my part, I do 
 
 not care for it. 
 They have been pursued as 
 
 far as the wood. 
 1 do not like to remove on 
 
 account of my customers, 
 
 [Rem. 1.] After having 
 talked without knowing 
 any thing of the matter. 
 
 To show you how much I 
 am concerned for all your 
 interests. 
 
 I give you leave to do what- 
 ever you please, except 
 going out. 
 
 Far from disapproving of 
 your conduct, I would 
 have done the sane. 
 
 He. does nothing but prattle, 
 instead of learning his 
 lesson. 
 
 For want of asking it of 
 him, you will lose your 
 money. 
 
 By dint of walking we ar- 
 rived before night. 
 
 He has entered an action 
 against him, at the risk 
 ^losing all his estate. 
 
 I shall tell her my senti. 
 ments at the risk of dis- 
 pleasing her. 
 
 I can only begin again. 
 
 He took so much liberty cs 
 to tell her, that she had 
 told a lie. 
 
 [2 ,] i have read it in Virgil. 
 
 II prete de 1 'argent a raisin 
 de cinq pour cent. 
 
 Quant a fnoi, je ne m'en 
 soucie pas. 
 
 On les a poursuivisy#jf*'au 
 hois. 
 
 Je n'aime point a deloger, 
 par rapport a mes prati- 
 ques. 
 
 Apres avoir parle sans sa- 
 voir ce qu'il disoit. 
 
 Tour vous montrer combien 
 
 je prends part a vos in- 
 
 terets. 
 Je vous permets de faire 
 
 tout ce qu'il vous plaira, 
 
 ho r mis de sortir. 
 Loin de desapprouver votre 
 
 conduite, j'aurois fait la 
 
 meme chose. 
 11 ne fait que causer, au 
 
 lieu </'apprendre sa kcon. 
 
 Faute de le lui demander, 
 vous perdrez votre ar- 
 gent. 
 
 A force de marcher, nous 
 arrivames avant la nuit. 
 
 II lui a intente un proces, 
 au p/ril de perdre tout 
 son bien. 
 
 Je lui dirai mon sentiment, 
 au risque de lui deplaire. 
 
 Saufa recommencer. 
 
 lis s'emancipa jusqu'a lui 
 
 dire qu'elle en avoit 
 
 menti. 
 Je 1'ai lu dans Virgile. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 287 
 
 i am sure that she is now in 
 
 Paris. 
 My father is not in town. 
 
 Je suis sur qu'elle est a* pre- 
 sent dans Paris, 
 Mon pere n'est pas en ville. 
 
 Are you sure, that he is not Etes-vous sur qu'il ne soit 
 
 /* the city ? 
 
 I have left it in the cham- 
 ber. 
 
 I have shut it up in my 
 trunk. 
 
 Put that into my closet. 
 
 pas dans la cite ? 
 Je 1'ai laisse dans la cham- 
 
 bre. 
 Je l'ai enferme dans mon 
 
 coffre. 
 Metrez cela dans mon ca- 
 binet. 
 There is nothing in the II n'y a rien dans la boa- 
 bottle. 
 Reflect well within your, 
 self. 
 
 teille. 
 
 Reflechissez bien'ra vous- 
 meme. 
 
 I see nothing in him, that Je ne vois rien en lui qui me 
 
 deplaise. 
 II n'y a rien en elle que 
 
 vous puissiez blamer. 
 Y a-t-il quelque chose en 
 
 eux qui puisse donner lieu 
 
 a vos soupcons ? 
 Je le ferois en dix jours. 
 
 Vous ne le feriez pas en 
 quinze jours. 
 
 displeases me. 
 There is nothing in her, 
 
 that you can blame. 
 Is there any thing in tiiem, 
 
 that can give occasion to 
 
 your suspicions ? 
 [3.] I could do it in ten 
 
 days. 
 You would spend more 
 
 than a fortnight in doing 
 
 it. 
 I shall have done in four J'aurai fait dans quatre 
 
 days. jours. 
 
 I shall send it you in a Je vous l'enverrai dans huit 
 
 week's time. jours. 
 
 [4.] 1 have come from jour Je viens de cbez vous. 
 
 house. 
 I came from bis or her Je venois de cbez lui, ou de 
 
 house. cbez elle. 
 
 [$.] I have looked for it Je l'ai cherche dedans et de- 
 
 within and without the bors la maison. 
 
 house. 
 There is Spanish leather II y a du marroquin desmt 
 
 both upon and under the et dunus les chaises. 
 
 f hairs. 
 
2 38 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 him from under II le tira de dessous la tabic. 
 
 outside of his 
 house is very 
 
 side of 
 
 He drew 
 
 the table, 
 [6.] The 
 
 country 
 
 pretty. 
 Give me the upper 
 
 the bread. 
 You will oblige me, if you 
 
 give me the under part of 
 • the pie. 
 [y.] I shall love you //// 
 
 death, 
 [g.] All men, even kings 
 
 themselves, are liable to 
 
 sickness. 
 All men despise him, even 
 
 his relations. 
 [9.] Without prejudice to 
 
 my claim. 
 But the plaintiff /V at liberty 
 
 to sue. 
 [10.] Why do you leave 
 
 that heap of dirt before 
 
 your house ? 
 They are not covered in the 
 
 presence of the king. 
 You have the precedency of 
 
 him. 
 We were happy before the 
 
 war. 
 Virtue should be preferred 
 
 to every thing. 
 [12.] It is near two o'clock. 
 She is near twenty years old. 
 He lives near St. Paul's. 
 [23.] Docs he live so near 
 
 you f* 
 You live very near one an- 
 other. 
 
 Le dehors de sa maison de 
 campagne est fort beau. 
 
 Donne z-moi le dessus du 
 
 pain. 
 Vous m'obligerez, si vous 
 
 me donnez le dessous du 
 
 pate. 
 Je vous aimerai jusqu'a la 
 
 mort. 
 Tous les hommes, jusqu'aux 
 
 rois, sont sujets a des ma. 
 
 ladies. 
 Tout le monde le meprise, 
 
 jusqu'a ses parens. 
 Saufmon droit. 
 
 Sauf au demandeur a se 
 
 pourvoir. 
 Fourquoi laissez-vous ce tas 
 
 de boue dtvant votre 
 
 maison ? 
 On ne se couvre pas devant 
 
 le roi. 
 Vous etes devant lui. 
 
 Nous etions heureux avant 
 
 la guerre. 
 La vertu doit aller aVant 
 
 tout. 
 II est pres de deux her.rcs. 
 Elle a pres de vingt ans. 
 II demeure pres de St. Paul. 
 Demeure-t-ii si pres de vous ? 
 
 Vous demeurez 
 Pun de P autre. 
 
 lien pres 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 ?§9 
 
 Corse ncirer me, 
 
 to 
 
 Approchez-votK plus pret 
 de moi. 
 
 Vous n'etes pas ass'z prh 
 
 de moi. 
 Elle conscnti-t a tour, a cela 
 
 prh. 
 
 r ou are not near enough 
 
 me. 
 [i\.] She consented to 
 
 every thing, that ex- 
 
 rctted. 
 He has paUl me ail, except II m'a tout paye, I six gnu 
 
 si* guineas. nets. prh. 
 
 [i- 1 I have put my daugh- J'ai mis ma fi lie an prh.. 
 
 ter and r her care. d'el'e. 
 
 He is in favour with the Ii est bieri an prh du Roi. 
 
 King. 
 ffc can<£j what he will with II a tout pouvoir axtprh de 
 
 him. h*i. 
 
 She is gone to live with Elle est allce auprh de lui. 
 
 him. 
 You *re cafe with him. Vous etes en surete auprh 
 
 de l«i. 
 [16.] He is ungrateful to II est ingrat ewers moi. 
 
 me. 
 I have not been ungrateful Je n'ai pas etc ingrat etwen 
 
 to you* vous. 
 
 I intend to go to France, J'ai dessein d'alier en France 
 
 abiut the beginning of the *ver$ Te commencement -da 
 
 prvnremps. 
 
 Coune about midnight Venez i>cn mimnt* 
 
 She went out avint noon. Elle sortit <ver* midl. 
 
 [17.] How many miles is it Combien de milles y a-t-il 
 
 fr*m London to Windsor? Je Londres-» Windsor t 
 
 Greenwich is five mile* front II y a cinq miiles de Lon- 
 
 L or, don. drts i Greenwich. 
 
 We walked from London to Nous ailames a pud depuit 
 
 Greenwich. 
 
 We came in a coach from 
 
 the Tower to the Pati\ 
 
 ^OCS from town to town. 
 go from house to 
 house. 
 
 Londres jusqu'd Green- 
 wich. 
 
 Notts v{nmes en carrosse 
 depuii la Tour jui^i'au 
 Pare, 
 
 II va <fc ville en vilie. 
 
 lis vont </(? xnaisoo en mai- 
 son, 
 
 O 
 
290 
 
 [i8.] We spent ten shillings 
 
 a piece. 
 They gave him two guineas 
 
 a month. 
 Every mile will cost you a 
 
 shilling. 
 [19.] Sit opposite me. 
 
 I bought my ring opposite 
 
 the Exchange. 
 [20.] He went away, with- 
 out telling me any more. 
 She spoke a long while, 
 
 without my taking any 
 
 notice of it. 
 We went out, without her 
 
 perceiving it. 
 He wrote to you, without 
 
 my knowing any thing of 
 
 it. 
 He cheated us, without our 
 
 suspecting any thing. 
 
 She osed him ill, without 
 his cotnplaining of it. 
 
 [21.] As you wrote to me 
 that 
 
 As 1 walked in the Park. 
 
 On. my arriving at London. 
 [22.] There are many books 
 
 upon the table and the 
 
 cjiair. 
 She has married him against 
 
 your will, and against 
 
 mine. 
 It was not the sentiment of 
 
 her father and mother. 
 He threw some under the 
 
 table and chairs. 
 He came to school without 
 
 books or paper. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Nous depensames deux ecuj 
 par tete. 
 
 lis lui donnent deux gui- 
 nees par mois. 
 
 II vous en coutera un schel- 
 ling/<7r mille. 
 
 Asseyez-vous vis-a-vis de 
 moi. 
 
 J'ai achete ma bague vis-a- 
 vis de la Bourse. 
 
 II par tit, sans m'en dire da- 
 vantage. 
 
 Elle parla long-temps, sans 
 que Yy prisse garde. 
 
 Nous sortimes, sans ^'elle 
 
 s'en aper$ut. 
 II vous ecrivit, sans que 
 
 j'en susse la moindre 
 
 chose. 
 II nous trompa, sans que 
 
 nous ssupconuassions la 
 
 moindre chose. 
 Elle le maltraita, sans qu'il 
 
 Ji'en plaignit. 
 Sur ce que vous m'avez ecrit 
 
 que 
 Comme je ne promenois au 
 
 Pare. 
 A mon arrivee a Londres. 
 11 y a beaucoup de Jivres 
 
 sur la table et sur la 
 
 chaise. 
 Elle l'a epouse contre votre 
 volonte et contre la mienne. 
 
 Cc n'etoit pas le sentiment 
 de son pere et de sa mere. 
 
 II en a jcte sous la table et 
 sous ks chaises. 
 
 II est venu a l'ecole sans li- 
 vres et sans papier. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 
 [23.] He ha 5 succeeded in 
 it by his opulence and 
 riches. 
 
 He makes himself feared by 
 his wealth and violence. 
 
 Go into the dining room ? 
 Where have you put my 
 
 patch-bax ? 
 He has made her a present 
 . of a diamond ring. 
 Bring the vinegar-bottle. 
 
 Where is the powder-box ? 
 
 Give me my gold fringed 
 petticoat. 
 
 I go to Paris. 
 
 It is dear living in London, 
 
 He had been in Amsterdam. 
 
 The wainscot is painted in 
 oil. 
 
 She works <with the needle, 
 
 W T e had a coach for six per- 
 sons. 
 
 Let us take a coach for four 
 persons. 
 
 He has a coach and four. 
 
 1 tike to live after the Eng- 
 lish fashion. 
 
 She is dressed after the 
 French fashion. 
 
 Go to the right hand, after- 
 ward you will go on to 
 the left. 
 . 1 ordered a fashionable suit 
 to be made for me. 
 
 How I you are in the fashion. 
 
 Let us go step by step. 
 Go two and two. 
 
 291 
 
 II y a reussi par son opu- 
 lence et ses richesses. 
 
 II se fait craindre par son 
 opulence et par ses vio= 
 
 knees. 
 Entrez dans la salle a manger. 
 Ou avex-vous mis ma boite 
 
 a mouches ? 
 II lui a fait present d'une 
 
 bague a diamans. 
 Apportez la bouteille a xu * 
 
 naigre. 
 Ou est la boite a poudre ? 
 Donnez-moi ma jupe a 
 
 franges d'ox. 
 je vais a Paris. 
 If fait cher vivre a Londres # 
 II a ete a Amsterdam. 
 Le lambris est peint i 
 
 l'huile. 
 Elle travaille a 1 'aiguille. 
 Nous avions un carrosse a 
 
 six places. 
 Prenons un carrosse a quatre 
 
 places. 
 II a un carrosse a quatre 
 
 chevaux. 
 J'aimea vivre «l'Angloise. 
 
 Elle est vetoe a la Francoise. 
 
 Allez a droite, ensuite vous 
 prendrez a gauche. 
 
 Je me suis fait faire un ha- 
 bit a la mode. 
 
 Comment ! vous voila a la 
 mode. 
 
 Allons pas a pas. 
 
 Allez deux a deux, 
 ) a 
 
202 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 JcordiKg to my opinion, she 
 is not in the wrong. 
 
 To judge of him by his 
 looks, he is an honest 
 
 man. 
 I was here at ten o'clock* 
 He wears silk stockings. 
 He has a fine marble slab in 
 
 his room. 
 Give me my black velvet 
 
 petticoat. 
 Give him a bit of bread. 
 
 Do you choose a bit of 
 meat ? 
 
 A bit o/" cheese will be suffi- 
 cient. 
 
 There is something inex- 
 pressibly gracious in his 
 discourse. 
 
 Somebody will be punished. 
 
 Is there any tiling more beau- 
 tiful than the sky ? 
 
 I shall leave London next 
 year. 
 
 I come from Pari?. 
 
 lie went away in the night. 
 
 We shall arrive there in the 
 da} timv. 
 
 I shall set out to morrow 
 early in the morning. 
 
 She is taller by the whole 
 head. 
 
 She is beloved fy every 
 body. 
 
 Jlr ran with all his might. 
 
 1 love you with all my heart. 
 
 he behave in that man- 
 net r 
 
 V. t it 1 in ymir stcaJ. 
 VYc live on fish. 
 
 A mon avis, cl!e n'a Ml 
 
 tort. 
 A juget de lui par la mine, 
 
 ll est honnete hommc. 
 
 J'etcis ici a dix hevres. 
 
 II parte des bas de soie. 
 
 II a dans sa chambrc: une 
 belle table de marbre. 
 
 Donnez-rr.oi ma jupe de ve- 
 lours noir. 
 
 Donne 2. lui un morceau de 
 pain. 
 
 Souhaitez- vous un morceau 
 de via nde r 
 
 Un morceau de fromage 
 suffira. 
 
 11 y a je ne sais quoi de gra- 
 tieux dans se^ discours. 
 
 II y aura quelqu'un de puni. 
 Y a.t-ii rien de plus beau 
 
 que le firmament ? 
 Je partirai de Londres l'an- 
 
 nee prochaine. 
 Je viens de Paris. 
 Jl panic de nuit. 
 Nous y arrivcrons de jour. 
 
 Je partirai demain it grand 
 matin. 
 
 Elle est plus grande d toute 
 la tcte. 
 
 Elle est aimee de tout le 
 monde. 
 
 II courut de tout*s sea forces. 
 
 Je vous airne de tout mon 
 cccur. 
 
 Se conduit-;'/ de cctte ma- 
 nic re ? 
 
 Si j'etots de vous. 
 
 J\ous vivoos de poisson. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE 
 They live on nothing but 
 
 reatcst follv in 
 
 mear. 
 It is . the 
 
 the world. 
 My rascally servant told 
 
 him every thing. 
 I shall not come back these 
 
 four months. 
 There is no such thing. 
 He goes on better and better. 
 She soes on worse and worse. 
 1 learn music tverjn otlier 
 
 clay. 
 They meet emerj third year, 
 
 I shall be married a year 
 hence. 
 
 *9$ 
 
 Us ne se nourrissent que de 
 
 viande. 
 C'est de la derniere folic. 
 
 Mon eoquin dr valet lui a 
 
 tout die 
 Je ne reviendrai de qua: re 
 
 mois. 
 II n'y a rien de tef„ 
 II va de rnieux en mieux. 
 Kile va de pis en pis. 
 J'apprends la musique de 
 
 deux jo r, l.'un. 
 lis s'assem,.*.nt de trois ans 
 
 en trois ans. 
 Je serai marie dans nil an 
 
 d'ici. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 Observations upon the Conjunctions si and que. 
 
 I. PTHHE verb following the conditional si, when it signifies if, h 
 J. never put in the subjunctive mood; and it is put in any terise 
 of the indicative but the future; consequently the future in English 
 is changed into the present in French; as, you shall be satisfied if you 
 call to morrow; vous sere-z satis/ait fei vous venez demnin. The condi- 
 tional is changed into the imperfect of the indicative; a?, if you 
 would call to morrow, si vous veniez demairt, or si vous vouliez vtnlp 
 dctna'in ; and not si vous r viendiie% t nor si njcus vsuJ>i;z t'er.'ir. 
 
 2. Sometimes, instead of the compound of the imperfect of the in- 
 dicative, we elegantly make use of the compound of the preterit of the 
 subjunctive mood after si ; as, if I had known it sooner, that would 
 not have happened, si je l'eusse su plus tot, cela ne seroit pas arrive, in- 
 stead of ii je havois su, (S?c. 
 
 3. When si signities ivbetber, it may be used i'i the same tense a* 
 when signifying if, or in the future, or conditional; a?, do you not 
 
 know whether he would come, if , ne sovez-vcus pas s'il viendroit, 
 
 v ; I do not know, whether he will come to day, je ru sj\t s'il 
 
 viendra auj:urd*b«i*. 
 
 * See the exception to the 9th observation on the use of the sub. 
 juLCtivc mood, pa^e 232, 
 
294 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 4. From the last observation it follows, that the conjunctions tvhe* 
 tier and or are most commonly rendered in French by si, and ou ; 
 as, ask him whether he have done that or not, demandez-lui s'z/ a fait 
 cela ou non, They are sometimes rendered in French, whether, by 
 que, and or, by ovt que, or que alone; as, you will not be punished, whe* 
 ther you have done that or not: que vous ay e% fait cela) que, ou que 
 ijous ne Vayen pas fait, vous ne serc% pa; punt. It may likewise be 
 rendered this way : <vous ne serex pas puni, soit que *> oui o.ye% fait cela^ 
 soit que, or ou que vms ne Tayt% pas fait. It is better not to repeat 
 fflifi at least in conversation. Take notice, that whether and or, 
 rendered by que, or scit que y govern the subjunctive mood in the 
 French. 
 
 5. We make use cf que, instead of repeating the conjunction si, or 
 some of the other conjunctions, but more particularly those of which! 
 que makes a part. . In the first case qne is followed by the subjunctive 
 mood : as, if he come, and if you speak to him, s'U vier,t, et que 
 vuus hi parliez. 1$ the second case, the verb is put in the subjunctive 
 mood, when que supplies the place of a conjunction which requires 
 this mood: and in the indicative mood, if it supply the place of a 
 
 nction which requires the indicative 1 &.© that It fellows the na- 
 lure ot the conjunction of which it is a pare *. 
 
 Examples where que governs the indicative. When I have told and 
 assured you, quand jc <vous at dit, et que je ijous ai assure \ as h« 
 maintained ir> and I did not believe it, comme il le soutenoit et que je v» 
 le croyois pas. 
 
 Examples of the subjunctive. He is very far from reading and 
 writing well ; il s 'en faut bier, qifil Use et qu'i/ ecrive bien \ provided he 
 comes, and is in good health, pourvu quil n)ienne, et qu'i/ soit en bonr.t 
 same'. Many more instances will be met with in the following ex- 
 amples. 
 
 As the first three observations have been sufficiently exemplified in 
 the tenses^ and moods of the verbs, I shall here exemplify only the 
 fourth observation, and the conjunction que throughout it's different 
 significations and purposes. 
 
 The Conjunction que exemplified for the Scholar's 
 Practice. 
 
 [4.] I do not know whether Je ne sals j'il viendra ou 
 
 he will come or not. non. 
 
 Do you know whether he Savez-vous i'il a fait cela<?» 
 
 have done that or not ? non ? 
 
 Tell me whether he have Dites-moi j'il Pa fait ou 
 
 done it or not. non. 
 
 * This distinction is very nice, yet neglected by all grammarians 5 
 some ot then give inadequate and contradictory rules. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 *95 
 
 I do not know whether it be 
 on the right hand or the 
 left. 
 I do not know whether he 
 
 speak true or not. 
 I doubt whether she will ac- 
 cept the offer they make 
 her or not. 
 [5.] It matters little whether 
 
 he goes away or stays. 
 Whether he win or lose, he 
 is always of a cheerful 
 temper. 
 So that you did see him, and 
 
 speak to him. 
 Jn such a manner ) that you 
 have sold your goods in 
 time, and made a great 
 profit. 
 When I saw him, and told 
 him my reasons, he ap- 
 proved of my behaviour. 
 While you play, and Use 
 your time, he learns his 
 lesson. 
 While I was speaking to 
 him, and showed him he 
 was in the wrong, our 
 discourse was suddenly in- 
 terrupted JDy an unfore- 
 seen accident. 
 Because you would not fol- 
 low my advice, and 
 would listen only to your 
 own whim, you do not 
 deserve, that I should con- 
 cern myself farther about 
 you. 
 As sjou as I have dined, and 
 written a letter, I shall go 
 and speak to him. 
 
 Je ne sais si c'est a droite ou 
 a gauche. 
 
 On ne sait i'il die vrai ou 
 
 non. 
 Je doute si elie acceptera ou 
 
 non Poffre qu'on lui fait. 
 
 II importe pen p'ii parte cu 
 qu*i\ demeure. 
 
 Soit qu'll gagpe on qu'W 
 perde, il est toujours de 
 bonne humeur. 
 
 Si hien que vous l'avez vu, et 
 que vous lui avez parie. 
 
 De mauiere que vous ave* 
 vendu vos marchandise3 
 a temps et que vous avez 
 i\iit OH grand profit. 
 
 Ojmnd je le vis, et que je lui 
 dis mes raisons, il approu- 
 va ma conduite. 
 
 Pendant que vous jouez, et 
 que vous perdcz, votre 
 temps, il apprend sa lecon. 
 
 Tandis que je lui parlois, et 
 que je lui faisois voir le tort 
 qu'il avcit, un accident 
 imprevu interrompit tout 
 a coup notre discours. 
 
 Farce que vous n'avez pas 
 voulu suivre mon avis, et 
 que vous n'wvesc voulu 
 ecouter que votre caprice, 
 vous ne rneritez pas que 
 je m'interesse davantage 
 a vous. 
 
 Des que j'aurai dine, ct que 
 Yaurai ecrit une lettrir, 
 j'iral lui parler. 
 o 4 
 
2<)6 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 As soon as I saw, that I 
 could net make him listen 
 to reason, and that he 
 iju as too much prejudiced 
 against me, 1 went away 
 without saying any thing. 
 
 Why do you not i mi tale 
 your sister, and ////// 
 yourself to the French 
 tongue as she does ? 
 
 Is it not because you are la- 
 zy, and you shun labour 
 and pain ? 
 
 After we had drank tea and 
 played at cards, we went 
 a. waiKii.g. 
 
 Pirbafi* he will come and 
 §ee you to day, and give 
 yon an account Oi" his 
 leaser. s. 
 
 Jkide that her brother docs 
 not study, and that he 
 iu-ws play tco much, he 
 has not so much wit as 
 she. 
 
 jis loi'g as we have wealth, 
 and live expensively, we 
 never want friends. 
 
 In proporiio* as you study, 
 and learn the French 
 tongue, you will find 
 more beauties in it. 
 
 Since we are together, and 
 it is very fine weather, 
 let us go and take a little 
 wall: in the country. 
 
 CJ forbid, that I should 
 
 Ausuiot que je vis que je ne 
 pouvois lui (aire entendre 
 raison, et qu'il etci( irop 
 prevent] centre moi, jc ' 
 sortis sans dire mot. 
 
 D y ou rjietit que vous n'imitez 
 pas voire sceur, et que vous 
 ne vous afpliqutz pas aj 
 Francois comme elle ? 
 
 N'est-ce pas pane que vous 
 etes paresseux, et que vous 
 evittz le travail et la 
 peine ? 
 
 Apres que nous e times pris ie 
 the, et que nous tumes ]OU<8 
 aux cartes, nous al.ames 
 a la promenade. 
 
 Plu -etre qu'il viendra vous. 
 voir aujourd'hui, et qa'\[ 
 vols rettdra lump-te Je ses 
 raisons. 
 
 Outre que son Here rretudie 
 pas, et qu'il uime trop a 
 jouer, il n'a pas tant d'eja- 
 prit qu'elie. 
 
 Tant quov\ a du bien, et qn'on 
 fait de la depense, ou ne 
 manque jamais d'amis. 
 
 A me sure que vous etudierez, 
 et que vous apprendrez le 
 Francois, vous y trouvc- 
 rez plus de beauic*. 
 
 Puisque nous sommes ensem- 
 ble, et qu'W fait fort beau 
 temps, a lions (aire un pe- 
 tit teur de promenade a 
 la campagne, 
 
 A Du u nt plaisi que je 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 m 
 
 blame your behaviour, 
 and reproach you with ir. 
 
 God grant, that you may 
 be in good health, and 
 succeed in all your enter- 
 prises. 
 
 Notwithstanding that you 
 know him, and he has 
 cheated you, you still 
 converse with him. 
 
 He is far from being happy 
 and living contented in the 
 midst of his wealth. 
 
 Go and speak to him, lest 
 he should be angry and 
 reproach you. 
 
 Unless you go and see him, 
 and speak to him, he will 
 not be pleased with you. 
 
 I shall go into the country 
 next week, provided I be 
 well, and it be fair* 
 
 Not that I praise him, and 
 approve of his arrogance. 
 
 In case that he comes, and : 
 asks news of my brother, 
 teil him that he will be 
 here in a week. 
 
 Though he denies it, and de- 
 clares that he has not seen 
 it, I can assure you of the 
 contrary. 
 
 /// order that you may be 
 contented,, and have no 
 occasion to complain of 
 me, I will give you raore. 
 than I promised you r 
 
 blame votre tonduite, et 
 que j'e <veviUe vous en 
 fa ire un reproche. 
 
 Plaise a Dieu que vous vous 1 
 portiez bien, et que vous 
 reussissit % dans toutes voa 
 entreprises. 
 
 Malgre que vous le connois- 
 siez et qu'il vous ait trom~ 
 pe, vous ne cessez de iui 
 parler. 
 
 // s'eu faut bien qu'W soit 
 heureux et qu'W vi-ve con- 
 tent au milieu de ses rip- 
 enesses. 
 
 Allez lui' parler, de crainte 
 qu'W ne foit fache, et qu'W 
 ne yous fasse des re— 
 proches. 
 
 A mcins que vous n'alliez le 
 voir, et que vous ne lui 
 par/iez, il ne sera pas 
 content de vous. 
 
 J'irai a la campagne la se- 
 maine prochaine, pourvu 
 que je me porte bien, et 
 qu'W fasse beau> 
 
 Nan pas que je le loue, ni que 
 ]'approuwe son arrogance. 
 
 Au cas qu'W vienne, et qu'il 
 demand e des nouvelles de 
 mon frere, dites-^ui qu'il' 
 arrivera dans huit jours. 
 
 Quoiqu'W le nie, et qu'W de'-- 
 dare ne l'avoir pas vu, je 
 puis vous assurer du- con*- 
 traire. 
 
 Afin que vous soyez content,, 
 et que vous n\z>v:s. pas sujet 
 de vous plaindre de moi, : 
 je vous donnerai plus que-* 
 je ne vous ai prom-is*. 
 
208 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Though he told me of it, 
 and his brother confirmed 
 it, I believe nothing of it. 
 
 Though he is young and 
 rich, she does not love 
 him. 
 
 before you give your opi- 
 nion, and determine, be 
 without partiality and 
 prejudice. 
 
 Bienqu'W. me l'ait dit, et que 
 6on frere me Vait con- 
 tinue, je n'en crois rien» 
 
 Encore qu'W soit jeune et 
 qu*\\ nit du bien, elle ne 
 l'aime pas. 
 
 Avant que vous disiez votre 
 sentiment, et que vous de- 
 cidiez,, soyez sans partia- 
 lite et sans prevention. 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. zoo 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 Practical Irregularities of the French Tongwe, 
 ALPHABETICALLY DISPOSED, 
 
 WITH THE APPROPRIATE USES OF 
 
 PARTICULAR WORDS AND PHRASES, 
 
 APPROVED BY THE BEST AUTHORS, 
 
 AXV ESPECIALLY 
 
 BY THE DECISION OF THE FRENCH 
 ACADEMY. 
 
 Abandenne'* 
 
 HHHIS word in the masculine gender,, commonly sig- 
 -*- nifies forsaken, given over ; as, un homme abandonn£ y 
 a man who is forsaken ; un malade abandonee, a sick 
 person given over by his physicians. When it is ap- 
 plied in the feminine gender to persons, it always signifies 
 a bad woman* 
 
 Ajfectiomer. 
 
 We say offectiormer une chose, to love, to like a 
 thing ; but we do not say afftct'ionner une personne, to 
 love, to like a person, if the person be of an equal, or 
 higher rank : the genius of the French tongue does not 
 allow it. However, effectmine\ in a passive significa- 
 tion, may be used, speaking of an inferior, with regard 
 to his superior ; as, ce scrviteur est fort affectionne a !*x 
 maUre) this servant is much attached to his master, 
 
 o 6 
 
300 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Bouhours and Corneille observe, that njotre aft&ionni 
 $ernjiteur y your affectionate servant, is used only to per. 
 sons of an inferior rank. 
 
 Aider. 
 
 When the verb aider governs the first case, it is taken 
 in the sense of to assist a person with money, counsel, or 
 some thing ; as, /'/ Va aide dans cette affaire, he assisted 
 him in that affair, miz* with money. But when it go- 
 verns the third case, it is taken in the sense of to help a 
 man overloaded ; as, il 1*1 a aide a porter ta charge y he 
 helped him to carry his burthen. 
 
 Aller, Fenir, 
 
 The first is said of the place where a person is, with 
 relation to the place where he is nor. The second, on the 
 contrary, is said of a place where a person is not, with 
 a relation to the place where he is ; as, supposing the 
 person speaking in London, he will say, un courier est 
 iM§ de Londrcs a Paris en trots j^nrs, et il est <i;e?,u de 
 Paris a Londres dans le meme espace de temps; a courier 
 went from London to Paris in three days, and came from 
 Paris to London in the same space of time. 
 
 This verb is likewise used, when speaking of the place 
 where a person dwells - y a?, meeting somebody, 1 say to 
 him; je voits prie, Monsieur, de <Venir diner dtrnain chiTZ 
 moiy pray, sir, come and dine with me to morrow. 
 
 However, there is a distinction to be made here \ if it 
 be another person's house, aiur must be used ; as, if, 
 meeting somebody ; I say, Monsieur A. <vout prie dialler 
 domain diner chtz, luL But, in this case, when the per, 
 son who speaks is likewise to go to the other person's, 
 house, itnir is used j as, Monsieur A. *vous prie de 
 lenir dtrnain a~ucc moi diner chez lui. 
 
 This verb alltr is likewise used to denote what is> or 
 v ;\s to happen immediately ; it signifies to be going, to 
 be ready ; as, je vais ecrire y I am going to write, il <ia 
 sot/ir, he is just going out; // allcit rendre lame> he 
 was ready to breathe his last, 
 
 fiari*> cn the contrary, signify, a thing just done ; ar, 
 
FRENCH TONGUE- 301 
 
 je viens de lui ecrire, I have just written to him ; je Vinok 
 de diner, quand vcus ... I have just dined, when you . . K 
 
 Ke faire que de may be used instead of venir in the 
 aforesaid sense; as, je ne fais que de lui e'crire ; je ne 
 faisois que de diner quand vous . . • These three verbs are 
 used in this senseonly in the present and imperfect tenses 
 of the indicative mood. 
 
 Vtnir, followed by an infinitive with a, signifies, as I 
 observed elsewhere, Part III, Sect. 3, p. 252, to begin 
 or to set about doing something; as, quand je <vins a lui 
 parler, when I began to speak to him* This verb may 
 be used in all it's tenses. 
 
 Again, though the verb alter is neuter, it seems to be, 
 in some case*, an active one, or, at least, to have an ac- 
 tive signification ; as, aller sou chemin, to go his way ; 
 filler son train, to be the same, to continue in the same 
 way ; aller son meme pas, to go on in the same manner ; 
 but in this case a preposition is understood before the sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 A!ler y joined with the participle ;•, and used imper- 
 sonally, fignifies to. be at stake, to be concerned ; as, 
 your fortune is at stake, il y va de voire fortune ; your 
 life was concerned in it, il y alloit de voire vie^ 
 
 \n this signification, and every other of the verb aller-, 
 y is left out before the future and the conditional ; as, 
 though my fortune should be at stake, quand il trait de 
 via fortune ; though my life should be concerned in ir, 
 quand il iroit de ma vie. When will you go to Windsor I 
 we shall go there to-morrow, quand irez.vous a. Windsor g 
 nous irons demaw* French Academy, 
 
 AklS, L0lSy 
 
 The second is never used without being followed by 
 que, unless it be preceded by these two participles des or 
 four; in these cases, des-krs signifies from that time, and 
 four lorSy then. Lorsqite signifies when ; as, lorsque je 
 le vis, when I saw him. Some say des-lors que je le vis y 
 as soon al I saw him : but this expression is very bad ; 
 we say, dh que je le **//, Ahri sigifies then^ and is sever 
 followed by qm^ 
 
$ oz A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Ancien. Vieux. Antique* 
 
 The second is commonly used in speaking of old per* 
 sons and things worn by use ; as, this man is very old r 
 cette bomme est ttis-*vieux ; this suit of clothes is very"old r 
 cet habit est tres-vieux. The first has a relation to the 
 century a person lived in ; as, Aristotle est plus ancien 
 que Ciciron, Aristotle is more ancient than Tully. It 
 signifies, likewise, an advantage acquired by time; as, 
 t'est une maiso7i atic'mine, or, une famille ancienne, it is 
 an ancient family. But, when we speak of a building, 
 we say, une <viille maison, an old house } and not une 
 maison ancienne. 
 
 Though we equally say, le VieuXy or V A?icien Testa- 
 ment , the Old Testament ; d'anc-ienms, or de weilles 
 htitoires, old histories; de *vieux % or d'anciens manuscrits ; 
 de <vieux y or cV anciens romans, &c. : however, we do not 
 equally say, le jcune y for le Nowveau Testament ; and so 
 for the others ; t hough jeune is the opposite of vieux, which 
 may be used equally with ancien in such cases as above. 
 
 Neither de we equally say, d\anciens y or de <vieux livres ; 
 d*anciens y or de <vieux tableaux. We say, d'anciens linjres^ 
 d'anciens tableaux, of books or pictures which the au. 
 thors and painters of antiquity made ; and <vieux li<vres % 
 *vieux tableaux, of books or pictures grown old and spoiled 
 by time, of whatever age they may be. 
 
 The third is used in speaking of medals, statutes, and 
 pictures, when we speak of them as monuments of anti- 
 quity. It is likewise used in speaking of some pieces of 
 architecture executed in the ancient style. 
 
 When we speak of a collection of the laws of the Visi- 
 goths, Burgundians, &c, we say les lois antiques. But 
 when we speak of other Roman or French law, we say, 
 les lois anciennes. We say likewise, coutumes aucienncs, les 
 ceremonies anciennes. 
 
 Annie fasse'e. Anne qui vient. 
 
 L'anftie fassee is used only with relation to the year 
 which immediately precedes that we live in ; as % je fas ma. 
 lade I'annc'e fassee, I was sick last yeas, L'anuce qui 
 9 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 303 
 
 *oient is used when we speak of the year immediately fol- 
 lowing that we live in ; as, j'trmi a Amsterdam Vannie qui 
 <vieut, I shall go to Amsterdam next year. 
 
 Au cas. 
 
 This word signifying in case, is always followed by 
 que : as, au cas qu'.il meure, in case he should die. We 
 equally say, en cas qu'il meure. If after cas a substantive 
 follow, we make use of en cas, followed by del en cas de 
 mart, in case of death, and not au cas de morU 
 
 Beau coup. 
 
 This word signifying ma?ty, is seldom used alone ; as, 
 we do not say, il dowwit peu a beaucoup, he gave little to 
 many ; we add, a beaucoup de persomies, or a beaucoup de 
 gens. 
 
 When a personal pronoun comes before beaucoup, in 
 such a case it may be used alone ; as, nous sommes beaucoup , 
 *vous etes beaucoup, we are many, you are many - because 
 beaucoup has a relation to the foregoing pronoun. The 
 same is to be said when the indeterminate pronoun en is 
 before beaucoup ; as il y en a beaucoup, there are many. 
 En is in the place of gens, personnes, or any thing men- 
 tioned before ; as in the foregoing example, il y a beaucoup 
 de gens. 
 
 When beaucoup is taken in the sense of much, a great 
 deal, and comes after an adjective, it must always be pre- 
 ceded by the particle de ; as, <votre bouquet est plus beau 
 de beaucoup que celui de <votre frere, your nosegay is much 
 finer than that of yeur brother. But when beaucoup is 
 before the adjective de may be left out. 
 
 We say, il s'enfaut beaucoup, to express, that there is a 
 great difference between persons or things, and it signifies 
 to be far from, to come short of something : as, he comes 
 far short of being so handsome as you, il n'est pas si beau 
 que *vous> il s f en faut beaucoup. The latter gallicism 
 may begin the sentence, and then the first is preceded by 
 que, and the following verb is put in the subjunctive 
 mood) as, // iUn faut bzaucQup qu y il soil aussi beau que 
 
 WQUS. 
 
304 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 We say, tl s'en faut de beaucoup, to express a defici- ' 
 ency in something ; as, you think that you returned me 
 every thing, but there is a great deal wanting, vans crojex 
 m' avoir tout paje, d s'en faut de beaucoup m French 
 Academy, 
 
 * Champ* 
 
 This word, in the singular, signifies a piece of arable 
 ground, commonly not encompassed by walls. But when 
 it is taken in the plural, it is applied to all sorts of ground, 
 such as meadows, woods, &c., taken together : thus we 
 say, to lead the cattle into the fields, mener les bestiaux 
 aux champs. It likewise signifies every other place, 
 which is not in the city or suburbs ; thus we equally say,, 
 une mahon de camp ague, or une maison d.s champs, a country 
 house : however, the first is in most use. 
 
 Cceur* 
 
 When this word is joined to the verb avoir, and pre- 
 ceded by the article, it signifies to have courage ; thus, we 
 say of a man who is not a coward, il a du cceur. When 
 it is preceded by the preposition a, it signifies to espouse 
 an affair ; avoir une affaire a cceur* When it is pre- 
 ceded by the preposition sur, it signifies to resent a thing, 
 avoir une chose sur le cceur* 
 
 When we make use of the word cceur to express gene- 
 rosity or goodness, we join to that word an adjective, or 
 some other word j as, il a U cccur bun fait, il a- le cceur 
 bouy cest un ban cceur, he is a good-natured man. 
 
 Likewise,, though e'est un homme de cceur signifies he 
 is a courageous man ; yet, when we add tout to the word 
 cceur, it signifies a generous man ; as, il est tout cceur, he 
 is a very generous man.. 
 
 Commit 
 
 This word is used in different manners : it is used in- 
 stead of aiusi que, de me me que, dans le temps que, par 
 extmple, a cause que ou pane que, presque. en que/que scrte ; 
 as, like, as it were, in the time tha?> for -example, b«cauic> 
 in some manner, 
 
 i 
 
FRENCH TONGUE/ 305 
 
 // sera puni comme les <;utres t 
 
 Mc shall be punished like others, 
 
 Cda paroit com me <vieux. 
 
 This seems as if it were old. 
 
 Comme il a rriuoit . 
 
 As he was coming. 
 
 Comme // a toujour* aime le bkn public y il n'a jamais 
 1'oulu const ntir y 8c c. 
 
 As he always loved the public good, he never would 
 consent, Sic. 
 
 11 est comme le res sort de tout cette intrigue. 
 
 He is in some measure the spring of this intrigue. 
 
 It is likewise used instead of comment > signifying how, 
 or in what manner, after some other phrase ; as, il uerra 
 comme je lui parlerai, he will see in what manner, I shall 
 speak to him. But when, how, or in what manner, be- 
 gins a phrase, comment must be used ; as, in what man- 
 ner did he succeed ? comment a-t-il reussi f and not 
 comme. 
 
 Davantage. Plus. 
 
 Plus is never used at the end in an affirmative sentence; 
 as, give me some more, donnez m'en davantage, and not 
 plus. Unless it is preceded, by de ; as, 1 wi.l give you 
 something more for it, je <vous en donuerai quelque chose 
 d^ plus. 
 
 Plus and dwantage are used indifferently at the 
 end of a negative sentence ; but plus requires only ne 
 before it, whereas davantage requires ne and pas; as, 
 je n'en <ueux pas davantage y or je nen <veux plus } I will have 
 no more of it. 
 
 Davantage is never put in the middle of a sentence be- 
 fore a substantive, but plus may be; as, the Romans 
 have more plain dealing than the Greeks, les Remains out 
 plus de bonne foi que Its Grec f , and not da-vantage de bonne 
 
 Davantage must never be used in the middle of a sen- 
 tence before que ; thus we say, you are in the wrong to 
 reproach me with being hasty, I am not more so than 
 you ; vous avcz tort de me rep roc her d'etre vij\ je ne le 
 si< is pets plus que vous t and not davautage que vaui* 
 
«o6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Durant. 
 
 This preposition is sometimes indifferently put either 
 before or after it*s regimen ; as, durant deux mors, or 
 deux mois durant, Airing two months ; daring his life, 
 j* <vie durant* But we always say, durant le jour, durant 
 la nuit* 
 
 Enclin* 
 
 This word signifies inclined. It is used in morals, and 
 commonly speaking of something bad ; as, // est cnclirt 
 akjeuy he is inclined to gaming. 
 
 Though we say enclin } yet we say, incline^ inclu 
 natim% 
 
 Ekmfrvw (j')« 
 
 This verb is used only in the third person singular and 
 plural ; as, tout ce qui s'ensuit, all that follows thence ; 
 les accidens qui s'ensuivroient, the accidents which would 
 ensue. 
 
 Evitable. 
 
 Some French authors have made use of this word, and 
 it has been inserted in the last edition of the dictionary of 
 the French academy, but it is very seldom used. How- 
 ever we say ine-vitable, unavoidable. 
 
 We have in the French tongue several compounded 
 words, which are used, though the simple words from 
 which they are formed are not ; as, inexorable y inexora- 
 ble ; infplatable, implacable; irreconcilable, irreconcilable; 
 insatiable, insatiable ; indubitable, unquestionable; ineffable ^ 
 ineffable; immani[uable\ infallible, &c. 
 
 Exceptc, 
 
 When this word comes before a noun, it is a preposi- 
 tion, consequently indeclinable; as, excepts cenxla y ex- 
 cept those ; excipie ?na tour, except ni) sister. But 
 when it comes after the noun, it is a past participle* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 307 
 
 consequently declinable $ as, ma sceur exceptee, my sister 
 excepted, 
 
 Fable. 
 
 When this word is used to signify the fabulous history 
 of the gods and demigods, it has no plural ; as, un poete 
 doit savotr la Fable, a poet ought to know the history 
 of the gods and demigods ; la Fable est fort amusante, , 
 Mythology is very entertaining. 
 
 But if we say in the plural, les fables sont agriables 
 . et utiles, fables are pleasant and useful, we understand the 
 fables of JEsop, Fh&drus, . la Fontaine, Gay, and other 
 authors* 
 
 The word fable is sometimes Used in a figurative sense \ 
 as, le pauvre homme sert de fable et de riste d tout le 
 MQfid?) the poor simpleton makei himself a common talk* 
 and a laughingstock 
 
 Fleurir, 
 
 This verb may be taken in a proper or figurative sense 3 
 in the first, it signifies to blossom ; in the second, it signi- 
 fies to flourish, to be in repute. 
 
 When it is in it's proper sense it has no irregularity 
 . at all ; but when it is used in it's figurative sense, it has an 
 irregularity in all the persons of the imperfect tense, and 
 in the participle of the present ; as, une ar?nee florissante, 
 a flourishing army ; Horace florissoit sous August e, Horace 
 flourished in the time of Augustus, 
 
 In the present tense we say, fleurissent ; as, les arts et 
 les sciences fleurissent dans notre sikle ; arts and sciences 
 flourish in our age, 
 
 Gagiier, 
 
 Though we say gagner une bataille, to gain the victory 
 in a battle, yet we do not say gagner un combat, to ex- 
 press the same thing. We may say eire I'ictorienx dans 
 un combat. 
 
 Gens. 
 
 There is scarce another word to be met with liable to 
 
joS * A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 so many irregularities. See pnge 159, where notice id 
 taken of some oi them. 
 
 Gens is never said, as in English, of a determinate 
 number of people, unless it be attended wilh an adjec- 
 tive; as, two honest people, deux h,nntles gens. How- 
 ever, we say, a thousand people believe it, mille gens le 
 erase srl. In thu case mill* is taken for an indeterminate 
 number, viz. a great many. 
 
 Gens sometimes signifies a person's rerinue; in this 
 case it may be used with a determinate number, but always 
 followed by the preposition de ; as, 1 see but four of my 
 servants, where are the others ? je ne vois que quatre de mes 
 gens, cu sent les autres ? 
 
 Gens sometimes signifies people who are of the same 
 party or club; in this sense it is likewise used with a de- 
 terminate number-; as, four of our club are come, quatre 
 de nos gens sont arrives. 
 
 Gens, in the sense of nation, is only used in this phrase ; 
 the law of nations, le droit des gens. Ic is still used in 
 the same sense, in the singular number, in some pieces of 
 poetry, such as fables ; as, la gent aquetique, to express 
 fishes, and whatever lives in the water. La Fontaine. 
 
 Grace. 
 
 When this word is alone with the verb /aire and an 
 article, it signifies favour, kindness ; as, do me the fa- 
 V O U t , faitts- m 9 i la g rci ce . 
 
 When it is without an article, it signifies to forgive, to 
 remit; as, the king has forgiven him, le roi lui a fait 
 grace; you owe me a hundred guineas, but 1 remit you 
 the half, f-dens me de-vez cent guine'es, mais je tons fais 
 grace de la wAtie. 
 
 When grace is used in the singular with de before ir, 
 it signifies pray, or be so kind as - ... ; as pray tell me, 
 de £ t a c e , dites-moi. 
 
 Grace, used in the singular, alone or with the adjective 
 ignifies gracefulness; as, he salutes with grace- 
 fulness '/ salue at bonne grdce f or a<vec grace: she is very 
 graceful, tile a bonne grace, or elle a de la grace. 
 
 When in the same number it is preceded by the adjec* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 309 
 
 tive mauuaise 9 it signifies quite the contrary ; as, admire 
 his awkwardness, admirez sa mauvaise grace. Sometime?, 
 in this latter sense, it only signifies what is contrary to 
 propriety, to reason : as, there is no reason to complain of 
 me, kfotts a*ve% mawvahe grace de i-ons plain dre de tnii. 
 
 When gfe'ces is used in the plural, it signifies the 
 Graces ('hree goddesses, who, according to the Poets, 
 were the companions of Venus) ; also, the beauties of 
 language ; as, les graces de la langne Francs'se, or the 
 gracefulness of a person ; as, do you not admire the grace- 
 fulness of that lady r n'admirez. ttous pas les graces de cette 
 dame ? 
 
 If, in the same number, the word bsitijfs be added to 
 it, it signifies good will ; as, he has the good will of his 
 master, il a les bonnes graces de son m?ifre. 
 
 Bouhours observes here, that, though we try gergner 
 les bonnes graces de quelqu'un y to gain tht good will of a 
 person ; yet we do not say, to express the contrary, 
 cither gagner or enconrir les mau--vai:es graces de quelqu' un ; 
 custom, says he, allows the one, and not the other ; in 
 such a case we say perdre les bonnes graces de quelquun s to 
 lose the good will of a person. 
 
 Etre en graces apres du Prince ou de qttelquc pcrsonne 
 puissanfc, signifies to be in favour with the King, or some 
 powerful person. 
 
 Etre dans les bonnes graces d'une dame, signifies to be be- 
 loved by a lady. 
 
 Jf'ai ete, je suis alle\ 
 
 We make use of the first expression to signify that we 
 are not, or were not any longer in the place we are 
 speaking of; as, Madam went to the play yesterday, Ma- 
 dame a cic a la ccmeJie hier ; but when somebody is or 
 was still in the place we. are speaking of, then we use the 
 compound of clier ; as, Madam is gone to the play, Ma- 
 dame est dllec a la come die. 
 
 Moreover, if some word denoting motion be added to 
 it, we make ul-c of the compound of al'er y though the 
 person is no longer in the place we are speaking oi ; a?, 
 he went to Paris in two days, il est a lie a Paris en deux 
 jfmru V- c -)kc wise say in conversation, j'aurois cte\ or 
 
3 io A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 je serois allc <vcus voir, I would have gone to see you ; je 
 fus, or j'a/laihier a V opera, I went yesterday to the opera. 
 French Academy. 
 
 Main. 
 
 This word has many curious significations. 
 Downer la main a une chose, to consent to a thing. 
 Tendre la main, to beg alms, also so lend a ..helping 
 hand, to assist a person: as, lend him your assistance, 
 tendez-lui la main. However, donner y or preter la main a 
 quelqu'un is less equivocal. 
 
 t En venir aux mains asvec I'ennemiy to fight with the 
 enemy. 
 
 Faire main bafse sur Vennemiy to put all to the sword. 
 Metire la main sur quelqu'un (le bo tire) to lay hands 
 upon a person, to beat him. 
 
 Tenir la tnain haute, to keep a strict hand over a person, 
 to treat him severely. 
 
 Prendre en main la cause de quelqu'un, to take a person'3 
 part. 
 
 Prendre a ioutes mains, to eaten every way. 
 Donner la mmin a un cbeval, to give a horse the reins. 
 Donner de main en mahiy to hand about. 
 Met t re la main a la plume % to begin to write. 
 Mettre la main au chapeau, a l'epee f to put the hand to 
 the hat, in order to salute somebody ; to put the hand to 
 the sword. 
 
 Mettre le chapeau a la main, to pull ofF the hat. 
 Mettre V epie a la main, to draw a sword ; also to fight 
 with a sword. 
 
 Etre en main pour faire une chose, to be at hand, or in a 
 convenient situation to do a thing. 
 
 Lever la main, to make an oath before a judge, to lay 
 our hand upon the Bible, to lift up our hand. 
 
 Avoir I /; armes bien a la main, to be skilful in bodily 
 exercises with weapons. 
 
 Faire credit de la main £ la bourse 3 to trust no farther 
 than we can see. 
 
 Un coup de main signifies a bold action; in this sense 
 it is joined to the verb faire. When it is joined to the 
 verb donner y it signifies to put our hand to something* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. $ll 
 
 in order to assist a person ; as, dsnnez-nous tin coup de 
 main, 
 
 Un homme de main signifies a man who is fit for a bol4 
 and hazardous enterprise. 
 
 Des coups de main, blows with the hand or fist. 
 
 A pleines maius, largely, plentifully. 
 
 Sous main, underhand, secretly. 
 
 Combat de main, a close fight. 
 
 Sous la main, under a person's nose. 
 
 Cela est fait a la main, that is done in concert. 
 
 Maison, 
 
 Speaking of people of quality, or of gentlemen of an 
 ancient and noble extraction, we say, maison; as, he is 
 of the house of Montmorency, il est de la maison de 
 Montmorenci, But speaking of citizens and people of 
 business, we make use of the word famille. 
 
 Sometimes we make use of the word famille, instead of 
 maison) when some following words heighten the significa- 
 tion ; as, the royal family, la famille rojale. 
 
 Take notice, that when we say, la famille rojale, we 
 mean by this expression, the king, the queen, their chil- 
 dren, and grandchildren. But, when we say la maison 
 rojale, we commonly mean the other princes and princesses 
 ©f the blood. 
 
 La maison du roi signifies the king's household, servants, 
 or troops. 
 
 Take notice, likewise, that, though we say la maison 
 rojale, or la maison du roi, we never say, la famille du 
 roi. 
 
 Famille is used instead of maison, even speaking of 
 ancient nobility, when we mention it with relation to me- 
 dals ; as, the consular medals are distinguished by the Ro- 
 man families, les me dailies cpnsulaires st discing uent par les 
 families Rcmaines, It is for this reason, perhaps, that we 
 say, la famille des Scipions, /<* famille des C tsars, &c, and 
 50 1 la maison des Scipio?is y even when we do not speak of 
 medals. 
 
 The word famille is likewise used, when we speak of 
 a person's nearest relations; as, he has fallen out with 
 his relations, // s 'est brouilti avec so famille. 
 
3 T2 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Mahon and familJe are sometimes, used promiscuously 
 speaking of person's servants and household ; as, she is 
 a woman who takes care of the household, e'ert u*?e femme 
 qui a torn de sa mar son, or famille. J lowcer the first seems 
 to have -a more extensive signification, and to reJa'te more 
 immediately to household affairs. 
 
 We always say, e'tnblir sa martin, and /aire vne birrve 
 maitm t and not familk $ when we would express to grow 
 rich. 
 
 Metier. 
 
 This word is low in its proper, and: elegant ir. it's figu- 
 rative sense. According to Balzac painters are offended 
 at this word, for we do not say, le metier de per'/itre, the 
 profession of a painter. 
 
 However gen, rah of the army boast of their calling ; 
 as, the profession of arms, the profession of war; le me- 
 tier del arm el) le metier de la guerre. 
 
 We likewise say, speaking of works ; there arc only 
 people of that calling, who can be judges of it; il n'j a 
 Cu" let gens du me'tir, qui en sdent bins jnges. 
 
 In this sense it must be used with the definite article, 
 because gent de metier signifies quite another thing, viz, 
 handicraftsmen. 
 
 MotfU 
 
 This verb is never used alone, except when we speak 
 of the mountains that separate France from Italy ; for we 
 say let Afpetx or Is wonts only, after some prepositions, b*T 
 verj seldom ; as, on the side the Alps, en defi des montt. 
 
 In prher circumstances we say, le mont Oljmpe l lejmttt 
 ' : Etna, le mont St. Gothard ; but we say, la 
 vtontagnc du Calvaire. 
 
 is de A aticftt et de Languet* 
 
 There Is, prrhaps-, nothing where variety of custom is 
 more visible, than in the names of some nations and Ian- 
 
 The first is applied to men and 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 313 
 
 women ; as, une Arabe, une femme Arabe. The second 
 is never applied to persons, but to the Arabian charac- 
 ters. Speaking of the language, we say, P Arabe, or la 
 langue Arabe* We say, une figure Arabesque, an Arabic 
 figure. 
 
 Barbarie. We use the word Barbaresque, to express a 
 man of Barbary, or something belonging to that country ; 
 as, un nauire barbaresque, a Barbary vessel. Un Barbare 
 is always taken figuratively, and signifies a barbarous 
 man. Barbe signifies a Barbary horse. 
 
 Chaldean, Chaldaique* The first is said of the persons 
 and their language ; the second of their language only, 
 
 Dorien, Dorique ; Ionien, Ionique. The first is applied 
 only to persons ; as, les Doriens, les hniens ; une D^rienne, 
 une Ionienne. The second is applied to the language. 
 Speaking of the architecture, we say, ordre Dorique, ordre 
 Ionique* 
 
 He'breu, Hebraique. We say, speaking of the people, 
 un Hebreu, les Hebretix* This word is not used in the 
 feminine gender ; thus we must say, la femme d y un He'~ 
 hrcu, la fille d y un He'breu, les femmes et les filles des H^ 
 breux. Speaking of the language, we say, Vffibreu, or 
 la langue Hebraique, Speaking of manuscripts, we only 
 say, des mauuscrits Ilebreux ; but, speaking of Hebrew 
 types, we say, des carac teres Hebraiques* 
 
 Juif, Juda'ique. We say un Juif, une Juive, speaking 
 of the modern Jews. We say <vi<vre a la Juive, to live 
 like the Jews, with relation to their manners ; and <vivre 
 a la Juda'ique, with relation to their ceremonies. 
 
 More, Moresque. We say un More, a Moor; une 
 Moresque, a Moorish woman, and net une More; though 
 we say, une femme More, We say le More, speaking of 
 the language. Moresque signifies a Moorish dance, also 
 Morisco work in painting. 
 
 P-rse, Persan, Persien, Persique. W T e commonly say 
 les Penes, speaking of the ancient people of Persia ; and 
 Persan s, speaking of the modem. 
 
 In the siit^ular we always say un Persan, and not un 
 Perse. Printed cloth of Persia is called de la Perse, and 
 not Persicnne. The latter is applied to Venetian blinds. 
 
 However, when we speak of Persian stuffs, we may 
 say, une e'iiffe de Ptrse, as we say, une e'tojfe de la Chine. 
 
SH A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 We say, la langue Persienne, or le Persien, speaking of 
 the ancient language ; but we say, la langue Per sane, or 
 le Persan, speaking of the modern language. 
 
 We always say, d la Persienne, to signify after the 
 Persian manner. 
 
 Persifue is said of the gulf that separates Persia from 
 Arabia ; as, le golphe Persique. It likewise signifies a 
 species of architecture. 
 
 Speaking of the ancient kings, Cyrus, Darius ', &c, we 
 call them indifferently rot de Perse, or roi des Perses; but 
 o( the moderns we say only le roi de Perse. 
 
 Syrien, Syriaque. The first is used speaking of the 
 people, un Syrien, une Syrienne ; the second speaking of 
 the language, le Syriaque, or la langue Syriaque. 
 
 Teuton, Teutonique, Tudesque* The first is said of the 
 people and of the language ; the second of the language, 
 and when we speak of the order : as I'ordre Teutonique, the 
 Teutonic order. Tudesque is only used speaking of the 
 language of the ancient Germans. 
 
 These are the irregular nouns relating to nations and 
 languages. The rest are equally applied to the people 
 and to their language; as, Us Ethiopiens, VEthiopien; les 
 Moscovites, le Moscovitej les Grecs, le Grec ; les Latins, U 
 Latin, &c 
 
 Des Nombres tardinaux. 
 
 What belongs to the manner of counting them has been 
 said already, see p. 2 3. However, there are many other 
 remarks to be made concerning these numbers. 
 
 It is to be observed, that vingi, when it is multiplied 
 by another preceding number, whether followed by a sub- 
 stantive or not, takes an s after the / : as, quatre-viugts, 
 eighty ; quatre~ e vivgts guinees, eighty guinea- ; but the s 
 is omitted when it is followed by another cardinal number; 
 as, quatre njingt-trois, eighty-three. 
 
 To know in what cases the other numbers are either 
 declinable or indeclinable, see page 30. 
 
 Instead of septante, seventy ; oetante, eighty ; and nc- 
 nante, ninety ; we always say soixante ct dix, quatrc- 
 vingts, nuatre-'vingt-dix. Except when wc 5 peak of the 
 interpreters of the Bible, we say lis scptante^ though 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 3 if 
 
 they were seventy- two ; but when we add inter prctes de 
 la Bible, we say, les soixante et douze interprkes de la. 
 Bible, 
 
 We likewise say les septante surnames de Daniel, th 
 seventy weeks of the prophet Daniel. We may say six- 
 *vingts, one hundred and twenty ; and sometimes sept- 
 *vingt, one hundred and forty ; huit-vingts, one hundred 
 and sixty ; but we never say deux-<i>ingts, forty ; trois* 
 vingts, sixty ; cinq-<vingts, a hundred ; dix-<vingts, two 
 hundred. After six-vingtsf we say cent <vingt et un, cent 
 *vifigt deux, &c. 
 
 After mille we say onze cent, ahuze cent . • . to deux 
 mille. When we speak of the year of our Lord, we 
 write mil, and not mille: after mil we say I* an ouze 
 eeufi, one thousand one hundred ; Van mil deux cent, one 
 thousand two hundred; Van mil trois cent, one thousand 
 three hundred, &c. However we say douze cents hommes, 
 twelve hundred men ; trieze cents hommes, thirteen hundred 
 men, &c. 
 
 When we speak of the place endowed at Paris by 
 Lewis IX, king of France, for three hundred blind, or, 
 when we speak of the blind themselves, we say, les 
 quinze.<vingts, and not les trois cents. 
 
 Sometimes we make use of couple and paire instead of 
 deux, but not indifferently ; couple arad paire are said of 
 things of the same kind which may be separated ; as, a 
 brace of partridges, a couple of chickens ; une couple^ oc 
 une paire de perdrix, une couple, or une paire 'de poulets m 
 Couple is never said of things which are considered as in- 
 separable ; as, a pair of gloves, a pair of ruffles, a pair of 
 stockings, &c, une poire de gants, une paire de manchettes % 
 une paire de has, Sec, and not une couple de- gants, &c. 
 Couple is likewise said of persons united together by love 
 or marriage ; in this sense it is always in the masculine 
 gender ; as, beau couple, couple fidele. 
 
 We make use of the word qudrteron, when we are 
 speaking of things which are reckoned per cent. It sig- 
 nifies the fourth part of a hundred ; as, a quarter of a 
 hundred pins, un quarteron d*epingles. The word is like* 
 wise said of things which are weighed; it then signifies 
 the fourth part of a pound ; as, a quarter of a pound of 
 butter, un quartern de beurre. 
 
 F 2 
 
3 i 6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 We make use of the word quintal, to express a hun- 
 •dred weight ; it is used only when we are speaking of 
 some commodities that are weighed. 
 
 Millier is -said of a thousand weight ; as, a thousand 
 weight of iron, brass, Sec. un millier de fer^ de cuivre, &c. 
 
 When we speak of time, we say kuit jours, or wie se- 
 maine, for a week ; quinze jours, or deux semaines, for a 
 fortnight. However, we always say trois semaines, three 
 Weeks; un mois, a month; cinq, six, sept semaines, five, 
 six, seven weeks ; deux mots, two months ; ne if semaines, 
 nine weeks ; deux mois et demi, ten weeks ; trois miis, 
 *hree months, and not nn quart d'an ; quatre, cinq, six 
 mois, four, five, six months, and so on to un an. Thence 
 we commonly reckon by months, as treize mois, qua- 
 tcrze, quinzt mois, See. to deux ans ; though we may say, 
 «t.Ms child is one year and one month, or eighteen months 
 •Id ; cet enfant a un on it un mois, or un an et demi in these 
 two cases only. 
 
 We never say il est douze heures, it is twelve o , clock > 
 •bat il est midi, il est vtinuit. 
 
 Des Nombres collect if s. 
 
 The numbers which grammarians call collective, are 
 iuitainc, newvaine, dizaine, douzaine, quinzainc, *ving- 
 9aine, trentaine, quarautaine^ cin quanta i fie, soixantaine 3 
 sentaine* 
 
 Huitaine signifies eight days ; it is used in law ; a la 
 buitaine, eight days hence. 
 
 Neuvaine signifies a nine days devotion ; it is now 
 never used in poetry, as it was formerly, to signify the 
 nine Muses. 
 
 Dizaine and douzaine signify a collection of ten and 
 twelve ; as, une dizaine ou une douzaine de pommes y 
 half a score, or a dozen apples ; douzaine signifies a dozen, 
 and demLdauzainc, half a dozen ; but we never say demi- 
 huitainr, demi-dizawt, to signify four or five. 
 
 Qjiu?zaiiiCy <vingUwie, tren taint. Sec. a collection of 
 .fifteen, twenty, thirty, Sec. 
 
 Quarantainc is likwise said of the forty days, which 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 3r* 
 
 persons, coming from a place where the plague is, are 
 obliged to spend, before they are admitted into the town,. 
 to which they intend to go, in English quarantine. 
 
 There are some other collective numbers; as, u*cet y 
 quatrain, sixain, huitain, dizai?*, quinzain, trentain* 
 
 The first five are osed only in speaking of some pieces 
 of poetry. The first signifies a triplet, the second a 
 stanza of four verses, the third a stanza of six verses, &c 
 
 Quinzain and trentain* are used, at tennis. Quinzain' 
 is said when both players have fifteen, and tre?itain whea. 
 they have thirty. In this sense they are indeclinable - tl as*, 
 they are fifteen all, ils sont quinzain.. 
 
 Des Nombres crdinaux^ 
 
 The ordinal numbers are premier, second, trokih&e,. 
 qua trie me, cinquisme, six i erne, &c. 
 
 Though we do not say unieme alone, it is, however-^ 
 used after other numbers; instead of premier; as, we do 
 not say vingt et premier twenty-first ; trente et premier y 
 &C. ; but we say <vingt et unieme^ trente et unieme* 
 
 Neither do we say viitgi et second, trente et second; but 
 we say vingt-deuxieme, trente. dcuxieme. 
 
 Speaking of a sovereign, we make use of the cardinal 
 numbers ; as, Guillaume trois, George trois, Louis qutnze %s 
 and not Guillaume troisieme, &c, as in Bojer's Grammar. 
 However, for the first and second we make use of the ordi- 
 nal numbers; as, George premier, Frederic second. Speak- 
 ing of the emperor Charles V, and of the pope Sixte V* 
 we say, G h arte s- Quint y Sixte-Quint. 
 
 We commonly say livre trois, chapitre cuatre, article- 
 cinq, -uerset huit, nombre dix, paragraphe ci>/f> page 
 soixante ; however, speaking regularly, we make use of the 
 ordinal numbers in such cases; as, Irore troisieme, chapitre 
 quatrieme, &c. 
 
 When two uncertain numbers follow one another; the 
 rust is a cardinal, the second an ordinal number;, as, this 
 
 * The words quinzain and trentain are formed by corruption from. 
 quinzs-a,. trente^a, to signify quitize~a-quwze, tremca-trente* 
 
 * 3 
 
51 8 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 is in the third or fourth chapter, cela est dans le trois ou 
 quatriime chapitre ; he is the seventh or eighth earl if* 
 the kingdom, /*/ est le sept ou huitieme Comte du rqyaume. 
 Except premier et second \ which are always to be used in 
 such cases. 
 
 After moitte', half, tiers, third, quart, fourth, we use 
 the ordinal numbers cinquitme, sixieme, &c. 
 
 When cinquieme y sixieme, &c. are preceded by the in- 
 definite article un, they signify the fifth, sixth, &c. part 
 of a thing; as, I took a sixteenth in the lottery, j'ai pris 
 un seizieme d la loterie ; but when they are preceded by 
 the definite article /<?, they must be followed by the pre- 
 position de ; as, le cinquieme, le sixiime, the twelfth part 
 of sixty is five, le douzieme de soixante est cinq. When 
 speaking of the divisions of an ell, we say un demi-tiers 
 or un siXy un de mi- quart or un huit y un douxe, un seize , 
 un vingt-quatre, un trente-deux* 
 
 When we ask for the day of the month, we commonly 
 say quel quant ie^ me a*vons-nous du mois ? or quel jour avons* 
 nous du mois? We likewise say, le quantieme etes-ivus de 
 <votre classe P what place, have you in your school? Wh^n 
 we speak of the day of the month, we always make use 
 of the cardinal numbers ; as, it is the fourth day of the 
 month ; c'est le quatre du mois 3 except fo| the first day of 
 the month ; c'est le premier du mois. 
 
 Des Noms propnu 
 
 It would be too tedious, and to no purpose, to relate 
 all the proper names that undergo an alteration in French. 
 
 Vnugclasy and particularly Menage % have made a com- 
 plete list of them, "fhey who are desirous to know such 
 irregularities may consult these two authors. I will lay 
 down here some general rules concerning this matter. 
 
 ist. Proper names of kingdoms, empires, provinces, &c. 
 commonly take the French appellation ; thus, England is 
 called l % Anghterre ; Wales, la province de Galles ; Ireland, 
 V lrelande ; Scotland, I'Ecosse. 
 
 idly* Proper names of cities and towns have commonly 
 no variation, though sometimes pronounced in a different 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 319 
 
 manner ; as, Bristol, Sec. Except a few of the most re. 
 nowned places ; as, London, Londres. 
 
 Neither are foreign proper names of men ever subject 
 to any alteration of the whole word ; thus, Mr. White, 
 in English, is Monsieur White in French ; Mr. Black is 
 Monsieur Blacky &c. ; and not Monsieur le Blanc , Monsieur 
 le Noir, Sec. 
 
 3diy. Such ancient foreign names as are much cele* 
 brated are commonly adapted to the genius of the French 
 language; as, Homire, Pindare, Virgile, Horace, &c. 
 
 4th)y. A compound name commonly does not change 
 it's termination ; as, Petronius Priscus; Marcur Varro y &c. 
 But if one or other of the two names be much celebrated, 
 it commonly follows the genius of the French tongue ; as, 
 Jults-Qes«r y Marc-dnf$ine f Quinte*Curce y &c. If the name 
 be composed of three, the two first never change their 
 termination; as, Marcus Tull/us Cicero;; ; Caius-Julius- 
 C$sar> &c # 
 
 Nuage^ Nue'e> Nue* 
 
 These Words, taken in a proper" sense, signify nearly 
 the same thing ; but, when they are taken in a figurative 
 sense, they are not used ii differently, and as synonymous 
 expressions; for we say, to extol somebody to the skies, 
 either quelqu'un jusqu'aux nttes, and not, nuages ; and we 
 say, truth dissipates the clouds of error, la write dissipe 
 Ins nuages de l y erreur y and not nues ; the clouds which 
 darken the understanding, les magnes qui qffusquent Ventende* 
 ment ; a cloud of dust, un nuage de poussiire. 
 
 We say, figuratively, he has a mist before his eyes t il a 
 un nuage devant lesjeux y and not nue. 
 
 To wear out a man's patience, to put him into a pas* 
 sion, faire sauter quelqu y un aux nuts, and not nuages. 
 
 To be extremely surprised and astonished, tomber da 
 vues, and not nuages. 
 
 We say of a person who is out of countenance, not 
 knowing to whom he is to address himself in a company* 
 il semble tomber det nues, and not nuages ; and of a man 
 who is not known to, or owned by any body, il est tombc 
 
 des ;MCS % 
 
3*o A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 We likewise say, in a bad sense, of a man who, rn his 
 writings or discourse, soars in such a manner as to lose 
 himself, and make others lose the main subject of his 
 writings or speech, il se ferd dans les nues, and not 
 vuages. 
 
 We say, in a figurative sense, une nuee se forme, la 
 nuee crcvera, and not nuage, nor nue, to express that an 
 enterprise, a plot, a conspiracy, a punishment, or a war, 
 &c, is ready, and near breaking out. 
 
 We likewise make use of the word nuee, to express a 
 multitude of persons, birds, or animals, that are supposed 
 to be in flocks ; as, there came a cloud of barbarians, who 
 laid waste the country ; il <vint une nuee de harbares qui 
 desoltrent tout le fays ; a multitude of witnesses, une nuee 
 de temzinsy and not un vuage or nue. 
 
 Generally speaking, we make use of the word nuage, 
 when speaking of what dims the sight, and hinders it 
 from seeing objects distinctly. It is likewise used to ex- 
 press the doubt, the uncertainty, or ignorance of the 
 mind* 
 
 This word, used ndjectively, is said of something new, 
 not done after a model ; as, an original picture, un tableau 
 original; that is not a copy, it is original; cela n 9 est fas 
 ir/tite'y a la est original. 
 
 We likewise say peniee originate, a new thought, a 
 tLoi'ght not taken from any aiu. r. 
 
 When this vxrei is -used substantively, it is said, of 
 things which are the first in their kincfj and are not copied 
 after others ; such are master* pieces of art, ancient ma- 
 nuscript, or loiters written or signed by those who are 
 tM authors of theov; as, this picture is an original; ee 
 fabliau tit uu original $ V original Hebreu; ."original d* une 
 Litre. 
 
 We likewise say, f peaking in mockery, of a ninny and 
 lidiculous fellow, c'mst un original, 
 
 This word is likewise used in a good sense, speaking 
 seriou'iy; As, it is alter so great an original, than Plato 
 become a philosopher; e'est sur m si grand original, que 
 
FRENCH TONGUE, 32V 
 
 Flaton est devenu philosophe. In this sense it is always- 
 attended by an adjective expressing the meaning of it. 
 
 This word is likewise used in speaking of languages, of: 
 texts, or of writings; as, les langues originates, les textes 
 %riginaux, les pieces originate*. 
 
 Original is sometimes applied to a person, whose pic- 
 ture has been drawn ; thus, on seeing a picture, you may- 
 say : I like the original better than the copy yj'aime 
 meux. I* original que la copie» 
 
 Part, Partie. 
 
 These two words,, signifying a part, a share, a portion; 
 of a whole, have several odd constructions, and are not to* 
 be used indifferently the one for the other. We say une 
 partie d'tm livre, une partie du corps humain, a part of a* 
 book, a part of the human body ; une part d i enfant dans la 
 succession, a child's portion in the succession* 
 
 As these. words are used several ways in a proper sense^ 
 it will not be amiss to set the most part dow-n, without ihe 
 English annexed to them, as these words are easily, un- 
 derstood, when a. learner comes so far. as to learn this- 
 parr. 
 
 We say: on a fait trois parts de tout le 6 /en de la 
 succession. Qjiand il y a tant d i heritiers y les parts sont' 
 fet lies. Voila votre party et void la mienne, &c. CV- 
 der sa part Prendre sa part. 11 a eu tant pour sa 
 part et portion. Donnez-mci ma part. Prendre sa part* 
 Le plus fit fait la part au plus foible. II en a eu tant 
 a sa pari, tant pour sa part. Entrer en part a<vec quel^u ) un > , 
 tire de part a-jec lui. S'ily a du profit, fen aurai- ma part P , 
 &e. and not partie. 
 
 We say: partie d'nn corps politique. Le tout est plus; 
 grand que sa partie. Les partit s subtiles, grossicres, homogenes 3 
 hite'rogenes, &c. L' union des parties, I 'arrangement des parties^ 
 Les quatre parties du monde. Ce priu.ee perdit une partie de 
 sou royanume. Cette grammaire est en. quatre parties j Une- 
 partit de I'armee etoit encore campet,. I* autre efoit trt; 
 marche. II n'anjoit quune partie de ses troupes.. II avail tant* 
 d* argent y mat's il en a donni une partie* II a *vendu une par lie - 
 de,ses Irvres. II a employe une partie de sa <vie a cel« $ &£.. 
 and HQX partm. 
 
 * 5; 
 
jai A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 We 6ay indifferently la plupart, la plus grande part, la 
 plus grande par tie, to express the greatest n«mber, the most 
 part. 
 
 Beside the foregoing irregularities, part and partie arc 
 used, both in a proper and figurative sense, in several 
 other expressions, the chief of which are to be met with *n 
 dictionaries. 
 
 Parti, 
 
 This word joined to the verb prendre has many signifi- 
 cations. 
 
 Prend%e parti signifies to turn soldier ; in this sense it 
 is commonly followed by the verb regiment; as, il a pris 
 parti dans un tel regiment. It likewise signifies to engage 
 in a person's service ; but then we express with whom ; as, 
 ke has engaged himself in the service of my Lord N., il a 
 pris parti avec milord N. 
 
 Pnndre son parti signifies to resolve, to take a final 
 resolution ; as, j'ai pris mon parti, I am resolved upon 
 it. When it is used in this sense, it is followed by no- 
 thing else, and the verb prendre and the possessive pro- 
 noun which follows miist relate to the same person ; but 
 when they relate to different persons, it signifies to defend, 
 to take a person's part ; as, 1 took his part, J'ai pris son 
 pari. 
 
 Prendre un parti likewise signifies to take a resold 
 tion, with this difference, that it requires always after 
 it either an adjective or a personal pronoun, to make a 
 complete sense ; as, H a pris un parti avantageux, or un 
 
 })arti qui est avantagcux, he took an advantageous reso- 
 ution. 
 
 Prendre h parti signifies to take a resolution, to choose, 
 and is commonly followed either by a verb in the infini- 
 tive mood preceded by de, or by a relative pronoun : as, I 
 I choose to be silent ; fai pris k parti de me taire* 
 
 When prendre le parti is followed by a noun in the 
 second case, it signifies to defend, to protect ; as, we 
 ought to protect oppressed innocence; il faut pundr* 
 parti de I ' n:ncc*n<e oppr'rne'e. 
 
 Prmdre le parti, followed by a noun in the second 
 1 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 325 
 
 ease, likewise signifies to embrace a calling, profession, 
 &c. ; thus we say prendre le parti de Veglise, le parti det 
 armesy le parti de la robe, to turn clergyman soldier^ 
 lawyer. 
 
 Passer: 
 
 This verb is liable to several irregularities. We say 
 sometimes indifferently /#;x^r and se passer; le temps passe % 
 or le temps se passe , time passes away ; la beaute passe, or 
 la beaute se passe bien wite, beauty fades very soon. In 
 this sense it is conjugated in its compound tenses by the 
 auxiliary etre; as, le temps est passe. 
 
 However, the one is sometimes better used than the 
 other. When we speak of beauty in general, we lay la 
 beaute passe ; but, when we speak of a handsome person, 
 whose beauty decays, it is better to say, sa beaute st 
 passe. 
 
 We say des couleurs qui se passent, preferably to des 
 couleurs qui passent y colours that fade. 
 
 When we speak of time, merely to express the rapidity 
 with which it flies away, and without mentioning in what 
 manner we spend it, we say le temps passe; les jours pas* 
 sent \ les annees*passent. 
 
 But when we speak of time with relation to-the use we 
 make of it, we say se passer ; one part of our life flies 
 away in desiring the future, and the other part in lament- 
 ing the past ; une par tie de not re vie se passe a des ire r I'ave* 
 nir y V autre, a regretter le passe. 
 
 We do not say indifferently il est passe' and // a passe, ht 
 is gone by. 
 
 When passer has either a case governed, or relation t» 
 places or persons, we say // a passe y either in a proper or 
 figurative- sense ; as, he passed this way, il a passe* par ici ; 
 the troops have passed through Germany ; les troupes ent 
 passe par V Allemagne. 
 
 Passer is conjugated in it's compound tenses, by the help 
 of the verb avoir, when it is used in the figurative sense, 
 and has a relation to something ; as, after his second part 
 he passed to his conclusion ; apris son second point il a paslf 
 a sa conclusion* 
 
 p 6 
 
a 
 
 324 A GRAMMAR OF TOE 
 
 When passer his neither a ease governed, nor relation, 
 it is conjugated by die help of etre\ as, the troops have 
 passed by ; les troupes sont fas sees. 
 
 The two following expressions, a pas:e> est passe 
 speaking of words or expressions used in a language, have 
 a quite contrary signification ; as, for example, ce mot a 
 fat$e\ signifies that this word took, or was received into 
 use ; whereas the other expression, ce mot est passe, Slgnu 
 fies, that this word is obsolete, and quite out of use. 
 
 Generally the word passer is conjugated in it's com- 
 pound tenses with the verb criwr, when it is used actively. 
 
 Likewise, when it signifies to be reputed, accounted 
 for, though in this serise it is not used actively ; as 
 Cromwell was reputed the greatest politician of his age; 
 Cromivell a passe pour le plus grand politique de son siecle. 
 
 Passionner* 
 
 ?auhn?ie> used adjectively, is said both of persons, 
 and things which have relation to persons ; as, une homme 
 fasSionne ; dts sthtimens passhnnts ; des expressions passiountes : 
 un air passion ne. 
 
 When this word is said of things, it never has a case 
 governed atrer it ; as des se?ithncns passionnes, & c. But 
 U it be said of persons, sometimes it has a case* sometimes 
 not ; when it has no case, it is commonly taken in a bad. 
 sense ; as, un homme passipnne\ a passionate rnan ; when 
 it has a case after it, it signifies fond of a thing, and theru 
 it has a good or bad sense according to its case; as, un 
 to mme passion ne pour la <volupte y pour la gloire, pour I* hotim 
 y*ur> &c. a, man fond of pleasure, of glory, of honour*. 
 
 fersonnage* 
 
 This word is applied only to men, not to women ; 
 aft, the greatest rren of antiquity, les plus g%a?ids per— 
 tennages de V (nitiquite ; he is one of the most illustrious 
 iiicn oi this age, <\st un da plus illuttres penounages d< (ft 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 32 j 
 
 We say, in familiar discourse, in ridicule of a person, 
 <*eit un sot personnage, e'est un ridicule persounage, he is a 
 silly fellow, a ridiculous man. 
 
 When personnage is preceded by the definite article, 
 without some modifying word before or after it, it is 
 commonly taken in a bad sense ; as, 1 know the fellow, 
 je c QnnQis le per tonnage* 
 
 Peinture, Portrait, Tableau. 
 
 These three words, when they are taken figuratively, 
 have the same sense, and signify a description, a picture 
 of some person or thing ; but when they are taken in a. 
 proper sense, they signify different things. 
 
 The first is said, 1st, of what is painted upon a wall, 
 wainscot, &c. ; 2dly, of the art of painting ; 3.diy, of the 
 colour in general which is made use of in painting. 
 
 The second is said of a picture, which is drawn to re- 
 present any thing after life. 
 
 The third is said of any picture upon wood, cloth, 
 brass, &c, representing a history, landscape, building, 
 hunting, storm, shipwreck, Sex:. Even what is drawn 
 after a statue, bust, medal, &c, is called tableau, and. 
 not portrait, the latter always signify ing^ a picture drawn 
 after life. 
 
 Persuader. 
 
 When this verb signifies to convince, it commonly 
 governs the first case of the person, and the second case 
 of the thing ; as, I have convinced him of this truth; je 
 I *ai persuade de cette *verite ; he convinced me of the sin- 
 ceri.y of his intention*, il m* a persuade de la sinceriie de set 
 intentions. 
 
 But when this verb signifies to advise, it governs the 
 third ca^e of the person, and is always followed by a 
 verb in the infinitive mood, preceded by the preposition 
 de\ as, I will advice him to go thither ^ je lui persuade- 
 rai dj idler ; I have advised him to study ; je lui ai ptr-: 
 made d'e'tudkr* 
 
3i6 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Perturbateur, 
 
 This word is not joined with all sorts of substantives. 
 We say tin perturbateur du repos public, de I'e'tat, de Peglise; 
 a disturber of public repose, of the state, of the church ; 
 but we do not say un perturbateur du peuple, a disturber of 
 the people. 
 
 Likewise we say troubler le repos public, lordre, Vetat, 
 Veglise, un royaume, to disturb public repose, order, the 
 state, the church, a kingdom ; but we do not say troubler 
 le peuple, un e'taty une province, to disturb the people, a 
 state, a province ; though we say exciter des troubles parmi 
 le peuple, to excite disturbances among the people; exciter 
 des troubles dans un e'taty dans une province, &c. 
 
 According to the French Academy, perturbateur is 
 scarcely used but in this phrase, perturbateur du repos 
 public, 
 
 Piquer (se). 
 
 This verb signifies, rst, to be offended, to be angry 
 at ; as, he is offended at the least thing, il se pique^ de 
 la moindre chose. 
 
 ' 2dly. It signifies to pretend to, to set up for ; as, a 
 truly learned man knows every thing, and pretends to 
 nothing ; un homme veritablement savant sait tout, et ?:e se 
 pique de rien ; he pretends to write and speak well, il se 
 pique de bien ecrire et de bien parler. 
 
 We say of a man, who has displayed his generosity in 
 emulation of another; il s'est pique d'bonncur. This verb, 
 in the three foregoing cases, is always followed by the 
 preposition de, 
 
 Politesse, 
 
 Thjs word is used in a figuratiye sense only ; for we 
 say : the politeness of the court ; la polite sse de la ccur; and 
 we do not say, la politesse des perles, la politesse du ntarbre % 
 Jjut le poli ; though we say, du marbie pcli, polished marble. 
 
 What we have said of the word politesse may be ap* 
 ylicd to many other substantives, which are used only 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 327 
 
 in a figurative sense, though the adjective from which 
 they are derived is used both in a proper and figurative 
 sense; such are, among others, tendresse> droiture. Thougu 
 we say, du pain tendre> new bread, and colonne droite, a 
 straight column ; yet we do*not say, la tendresse du pain, 
 la droit ure d*une colonne. 
 
 Precis. 
 
 When this word is used adjectively, it signifies precise, 
 fixed; as, a fixed time, temps precis ; a fixed day ', jour 
 precis; a fixed hour, heure precise. 
 
 We say of a man who is concise and exact in his dis- 
 courses : il est fort precis dans ses discourse what you say is 
 very plain, ce que <vous ditts la est fort precis. 
 
 But when it is used substantively, it signifies the sub- 
 stance, the summary, of what is the main, the chief, the 
 most important thing in an affair, science, book, Sec. ; as, ' 
 there is the whole substance of this book; 'voila tout le 
 precis de ce livre. 
 
 Pres de, Pret a. 
 
 These two expressions followed by a verb are very 
 often mistaken one for the other, even by authors of repute. 
 
 Pres de signifies near, at the point of: he is at the point 
 of death, il est pres de mourir. 
 
 Pret a signifies prepared, disposed ; as, he is prepared to 
 die, il est pret a mourir* 
 
 Propre. 
 
 When this word signifies fit, good, apt, it is followed 
 either by the preposition a or pour; as, a man fit for war, 
 un homme propre a la guerre ; or, pour la guerre; an herb 
 good for healing wounds, un her be propre a guerir des 
 plaies; or, pour guerir des plaies. 
 
 However, when it is followed by an active verb having 
 a passive signification, it is always followed by a; as, a 
 truth fit to be preached, une <verite propre a frecher; fruit 
 good to be preserved, du fruit propre d coxfre, or, a fare 
 conft* 
 
328 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 When propre is taken substantively, it signifies a par- 
 ticular quality, which distinguishes a thing from al! 
 others; as, the property of birds is to rly ; U propre dej 
 oistaux est de <voler. 
 
 Raillcrie. 
 
 When this word is used with the verb entendre, and 
 without any article, as, entendre raillerie, it signifies to 
 give a good interpretation to raillery, not to be offended 
 at any thing. 
 
 When it is used with the same verb entendre, and with 
 the definite article, as, entendre la raillerte, it signifies 
 to be acquainted with the art of raillery ; as, il entend la- 
 rail I trie. 
 
 W^e sometimes say, railhrie a part, seriously, in earnest.. 
 
 Recherche. 
 
 This word is not equally applied to all things ; for we. 
 do not say, fa ire la recherche d'une chose perdu, d'une chose 
 egaree, to inquire after a thing that is lo>t or mislaid; 
 though we say, faire la recherche de la <vie de quelqu*uu, to 
 make an inquiry into the life ard actions of a person ; 
 faire la recherche d'une file, to court a girl for a wife. In, 
 this sense we likewise say, reckercher une file en manage, 
 or only recbercker. 
 
 We do not say, in a proper sense, the seeking after 
 the treasures which the sea encloses in its depths, La r-44 
 chcrche des tresors que la mer renferme dans ses abin.es* 
 However, we say, in a figurative sense, la recherche des 
 bifui.de la terre et des tresors, the pursuit after wealth and 
 treasures. 
 
 We likewise say let recherche* de Vantiquite, the 
 inquiry into antiquity; il faut toujeur* trouvaille r a la re~ 
 ehetche de la ve'rite, we should always be occupied in the. 
 search of truth. 
 
 It is applied likewise to curious researches; as, this 
 book is full of curious inquiries; ce Iwr* est plein de re» 
 (hi rehes cur u uses. 
 
 Though we do not say of a thing lost or mislaitV, faire 
 la reejjtnht ; yet wc may make use of recherch*r>. to 
 
TRENCH TONGUE. 329 
 
 seek again, to look for a second time ; as, you did not seek 
 well every where, you must seek again ; <vous ri&vez pas 
 bign cherche partout, il faut rechercher* 
 
 Regie, Regulier. 
 
 These two words have many odd constructions. They 
 are both said of persons and things, but with different 
 •significations. 
 
 We say for a man regular in his study and conduct ; un 
 bomme regie dans $es etudes, et dans sa conduite. 
 
 We likewise say des mceurs reglees, good manners ; une 
 *vie regie's, a pure and innocent lite ; une horloge bien reglee, 
 a clock that goes well ; uh re pas regie, a repast not too 
 expensive ; des beures reglees, stated hours, &c. 
 
 We say, une femme tres-picuse et ires-reguliere ; sa cor." 
 duite a toujour* ele fort reguliete ; to express, r 'iat a woman 
 is very pious and regular in h^r conduct. We do not say, 
 in this sense, c 1 est une femme re glee ; th : s woid has qu;t2 
 a different meaning ; however, we say, c'est un homme 
 regie, he is a sober man. 
 
 We say regulier of things done : n an uniform and re- 
 gular manner, particularly of those which are done accord- 
 ing to the rules of art. Thus we say, uhe procedure re'gu- 
 litre, a regular proceeding ; une beaute re\: utiere 3 'a regular 
 beauty ; un mswvement regulier, a great and uniform 
 morion; <verbes rcguliers ; batiment regulier, Us mou'vemens 
 rtguliers des corps celestes, &c. 
 
 De regie is the contrary of regie; it is applied, tit, to 
 matters of morality; as, un bomme d ere glee, a disorderly 
 man ; dis mceurs dereglecs, uhe <vie de'riglee, disorderly man. 
 ners, or life ; 2dly, to things which are not according to 
 the ordinary course of nature and art ; thus we say, ;/;/ 
 temps de regie, avoir le pmls de regie, une horloge de regie e y 
 une montre dereglee* 
 
 Irregulier is the contrary of regulier* It is scarcely 
 applied to persons, but in ecclesiastical matters. It sig- 
 nifies one who, by reason of some misdemeanor, some na- 
 tural defect, or some ecclesiastical law, cannot be admitted 
 into orders, or officiate if he be in orders. 
 
 However, irregulier is frequently used in speaking of 
 
330 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 things; as, ttne pro: t Jure irreguliere, un hatiment irregul/er, 
 Tin discours irregu/ier, des manieres irregulicrer, fortification 
 inegul/ere, pec me irregulier, &c. 
 
 Rendre* 
 
 Rendre justice a quelqu'nn signifies to do a man justice, 
 to give him his due. Rendre la justice signifies to exercise 
 or to administer justice. 
 
 This verb is never followed by a participle passive; as, 
 for these are the means to make you known, we must nor 
 say, e'est le moyen de vcus rendi'e connu ; but, de ^ous fain 
 coriTJOitre* 
 
 Some French anthors have put a participle after this 
 verb, as, for example, one of them says r la mertu rend 
 chtri de Die//, virtue makes you beloved by God. 
 
 Such expressions are very faulty. The verb rendre y in 
 this sense, is to be joined only with pure adjectives ; as, 
 bon f amiable y illustre, ridicule ', odieux, celebre, &c. or with 
 substantives. 
 
 Neither do we say, with a certain French author, rendre 
 la guerison, to cure a person ; because people had no cure 
 before they were sick; and we use, in this sense, the verb 
 rendre, only speaking of things which are lost, or of 
 which we have been deprived. 
 
 Hence it follows, that we may say rendre la sante, t* 
 restore health; rendre la <vie, to restore life, because 
 we enjoy health and life before we are deprived of them. 
 Thus too we say, rtndre la inty les forces, la libcrte, 
 lappctit. 
 
 Richesse. 
 
 This word, used in the singular, signifies sometimes 
 opulence, richea j as, commerce makes all the riches of 
 that country, le commerce fait loute la richesse de ce pajs-la. 
 Sometimes it signifies, in poetry, the exactness and just- 
 ness of the rhyme* j as, the exactness of rhyme contributes 
 a great deal to the beauty of poetry ; la richesse de la 
 rime conttibue bcaucoup a la beaut e de la poesie. 
 
 bometimes it signifies the copiousness of a language, 
 as the copiousness of the English language ; la richesse dt 
 la langue Angloise* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. x 3 i 
 
 Rfchesses^ in the plural, and in a proper sense, always 
 signifies great riehes. 
 
 Satisfaire* 
 
 This verb sometimes governs the first case, and some- 
 times the third. There are some occasions, on which 
 it governs the first case, and not the third; as, all the 
 wealth in the world is not able to satisfy the human heart, 
 tous les biens du ?nonde ne sont pas capable s dt sat is/a ire le 
 coeur humain m 
 
 We likewise say, satisfaire ses passions, sa colere, son 
 ambition, sa <vanite', sa curiosite, &c* ; and not satisfaire a 
 ses passions, &c. ; to satisfy, to content our passions, anger, 
 ambition, &c. 
 
 There are some others, on which it governs the third, 
 and not the first case ; as, satisfaire a son devoir, to dis- 
 charge our duty ; satisfaire a une obligation, to acquit an 
 obligation ; satisfaire aux personnel quon a offense'es f 
 to make reparation to persons we have offended. 
 
 However, we say, in the first case, satisfaire les per* 
 sonne s a qui on doit, to pay people to whom we are in* 
 debted. 
 
 The general rule to know whether satisfaire govern the 
 first or the third case, is this; when it is used in the sense 
 of to pay or content, it governs the first case ; and when 
 it is used in the sense of make reparation, or discbarge a 
 duty, it governs the third case. 
 
 Supplier. 
 
 Though this word be more respectful and submissive 
 than prier, yet we do not say supplier Die//, to beseech 
 God ; we say prier Dieu. However, speaking to God, 
 we say with propriety, je te supplie, 6 mou Dku! nous te 
 tupplions, 6 Dieu de misericorde ! 
 
 Such is the caprice of custom in the use of this word, 
 that we dare not employ the word prier, speaking of a 
 king, or of persons of a much higher station than ours ; 
 though we use it speaking of God j for we do not say, 
 prier le rei 9 but supplier /e*ro/\ 
 
23* A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 Tel. 
 
 Some persons say j'aime fous les bins litres , tels quih 
 soient ; I like all good books, whatever they may be. 
 Bat this is wrong: we ought to say quels qu'ils soient; 
 for tels qu'ih soient would signify such as they are. 
 Moreover it governs the indicative, and not the subjunc 
 tive mood •> consequently, it should be, tels qu'ils sont. 
 
 Vaillant. Valant. 
 
 These two words are subject to the caprice of custom. 
 There are some cases where we make use of the first, and 
 others where we m::ke use of the second; as, for exam- 
 ple, we bay : /'/ a cent mille ecus <vaillant y he is worth a 
 hundred thousand crowns; il a en menbles dix mille ecus 
 <vniUa,;t % his personal estate is worth ten thousand crowns. 
 But we say, je lui ai dowie dix tableaux <valant deux 
 g'ii'.t 'j -La pie\ .., and not radiant; I have given him ten 
 pictures \\ ^ah two guineas a piece. 
 
 • "V\ her, it signifies what a man is worth, either in his 
 real or personal estate, we make use of vaillant ; but, 
 when it implies what a thing is worth, we make use of 
 <ua/ant. I his reflection may easily be applied to the fore* 
 going examples. 
 
 VeilleYn 
 
 VeilUr une personne, to watch a person, has two differ* 
 cut significations : it signifies to spend a night with a 
 sick person to take care of him : it likewise signifies to 
 watch, to observe, to have a watchful eye upon a person. 
 
 In this sc:it>e we likewise say veiller sur une persomic , sur 
 les actions, sur la conduite de quc/qu'uu, 
 
 Veillcr governs sometimes the third case ; it then sig- 
 nifies to take care, and is properly applied only to things : 
 as,yV vallerai a vos affaires , 1 will take care 01 your afTaus, 
 
 Veuir a bout* 
 
 When this verb is applied to thing?; It, t ~vir a bout 
 d y un chose, it signifies to bring a thing about, to succeeds 
 as, il est n/etm a bout de sou dentin* 
 
FRENCH TONGUE. 3S3 
 
 When it is applied to persons > it signifies sometimes to 
 reclaim a person ; as, this child cannot be reclaimed, on 
 ne saursit venir a bout de cet enfant. 
 
 Sometimes it signifies to overcome a man's enemies; as, 
 ilviendra a bout de torn ses emu mis* 
 
 Vent. 
 
 Though we say, with the article, vent du 'fiord, north 
 wind ; vent du sud, south wind ; yet we say, with the 
 preposition de only, vent d*est, east wind; vent d' Quest, 
 west wind. 
 
 Ville. 
 
 We say in familiar discourse of a person, il est a la 
 ville, to express that he is not in the country ; and il est 
 en ville, that he is not at home, when we are speaking. 
 
 Vin. 
 
 We say vin de Bourgogne, de Champagne, d'Espagne, 
 de Portugal, de Pie'mout, Sec ; and we say, vin du Rhin, 
 afid not v in de R/:in. 
 
 Foulo'ir* 
 
 This word, which commonly signifies to be willing, to 
 Tiave a mind to, has several other significations : it signi- 
 fies first, to command ; .as, the king commands you to 
 obey, le roi veut que vous obe'issiez. 
 
 Secondly, to desire, to wish ; as, they will gijre you 
 whatever you desire; on vous dormer a tiut ce que vous 
 voudrez. 
 
 Thirdly, to consent, to agree; as, yes, I cor-sent to 
 it, oui, je le veux bieu ; if you agree to it, he w.ll like- 
 wise ; si vous le voulvz, il le voudra aussi. 
 
 Fourthly, a necessity ; as, this affair must be conduct^ 1 
 with prudence ; cette affaire veut ttre conduite avec / rUm 
 deuce; this picture must be seen in its proper li/^t, ce 
 tableau veut ttre vu dans so//Jcur. 
 
 When the word bien, preceded by the article is added 
 to it, it signifies to have a regard for somebody* to wish 
 him well ; as, il vous veut du bien, When the word 
 
334 A GRAMMAR, Sec. 
 
 mil is added to it, it signifies the contrary; as, il votu 
 <veut du maU 
 
 We say en vouloir a quelqu'un, to express a desire of 
 hurting somebody ; as, I know that he seeks to injure 
 you, je sais qu'il vous en veut. 
 
 We say a qui en vouLz-vcus ? Whom do you ask, 
 whom do you look for ? A qui en veut.il f What ails him ? 
 What does he complain of? 
 
 Que veut dire cet homme signifies, what means this 
 man ? What does he want ? And, to express mere sur- 
 prise, we sometimes say que veut dire cela ? What is 
 that ? In the same manner, we say, of words or things 
 which we do not understand, que *veut dire ce mot ? Que 
 *veut dire ce procedc* 
 
 Vue. 
 
 This word, besides it's various significations, which are 
 to be met with in dictionaries, has several others. Per* 
 dre tine chose de vue> signifies to cease to see a thing ; as, 
 le vaisseau s'eloigna en pcu de temps , et nous le per dimes 
 de vue. We likewise say of an affair, on Va perdue de 
 *vue, to express that we do not know how it has gone on. 
 
 Avoir vue sur quelqu'un signifies, in a figurative sense, 
 to have a right to observe somebody, in order to rule and 
 conduct him ; and avoir la vue sur quelqu'un signifies to 
 liave a watchful eye upon somebody, to watch his con- 
 duct. We say, avoir des vues pour quelqu'un, to have 
 a design to procure somebody an advantage ; avoir des 
 wues sur quelqu'un, to have a design to employ him to do 
 something ; and avoir des vues sur que/que chose, to have 
 a design to obtain a thing. 
 
 There are some other practical irregularities ; the 
 trcater part of which have been noticed in the third part 
 °**his Grammar. 
 
 THE END, 
 
 Law and vWnlbert, Primers, St. Johns Square, London. 
 
^Ofthe Publishers of this Grammar 
 
 MAY BE HAD THE FOLLOWING 
 
 BOOKS, 
 
 BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 
 
 I. EXERCISES, Entertaining and Instructive, with the 
 Rules of the French Syntax. The Twelfth Edition, revised and 
 corrected agreeably to the Thirteenth Edition of the Author's 
 Grammar, by C. Gkos. Price 3s. Gd. bound. 
 
 This Edition is improved, by adding some Cards and familiar 
 Letters ; likewise an Index to assist the Pupil in learning his 
 Exercises. 
 
 «. A NEW METHOD of learning the Spelling and Pro- 
 nunciation of the French Language. In Two Parts.— Part I. 
 Containing French Words arranged in Alphabetical Order, with 
 their Significations in English, &c — Part II. A clear and con- 
 cise Introduction to the Grammar, a Vocabulary of Words most 
 generally used in both Languages, some familiar Phrases and 
 short Dialogues, serving as an Introduction to the Elements of 
 Conversation, and a New Dialogue upon Geography. A New 
 Edition, revised and corrected, by C. Gros. Price 2s. bound. 
 
 3. ELEMENTS OF FRENCH CONVERSATION, with 
 Familiar tnd Easy Dialogues, each preceded by a suitable Vo- 
 cabulary »n English and French. The Seventeenth Edition, 
 revised and corrected, by C. Gros. Price Is. 6 i. bound. 
 
 4. THE FRENCH VERBS, Regular and Irregular, alpha- 
 betically conjugated, with Figures and preliminary Observations, 
 in a new, pi? in, and easy Manner. Principally designed for 
 those who are taught privately, to a?/oid the tedious learning tff 
 
 ; the Verbs. Price Is. 6d. 
 
 5. Likewise the particular and common Terminations tf all 
 the French Verbs, engraved on an Octavo-page. Price $d. 
 
 6\ FABLES AMUSANTES ; avec un Table generale et 
 particuliere des Mots, et de leur Signification en Anglois, selon 
 rordre des jPables, pour en rendre la Traduction plus facile 
 a TEcolier. Quinzieme Edition. Price fcs, 6d. bound. 
 
BOOKSjmbUihedktfLAW and WUITTAKER, NoA3, Ave-Maria pme. 
 
 7. FRENCH PRONUNCIATION, alphabetically exhibited, 
 with Spelling Vocabularies, and new Fables. French and 
 h. By C. Gnos. Price 2s. 
 
 B. FRENCH DELECTUS; consisting of a Variety of short 
 
 Sentences, Historical Anecdotes, Geographical Descriptions, 
 and Passages from Natural History and Philosophy, intermixed 
 with Pieces of Poetry; en a Plan similar to that of Dr. Valpy's 
 Latin Delectus. By James Foley, of the University of Paris, 
 Classical Master, and, during seme Years past, Teacher of the 
 French Language at Reading School. Price 2s. bound. 
 
 0. INTRODUCTION a la CONNOISSANCE de la 
 NATURE; et a la Lecture de PEcriture Sainte. Par Mrs, 
 Tbimmer. Traduite de la Treizieme Edition. Par C. Guos. 
 Price 2s. bound. 
 
 10. VISITE D'UNE SEMAINE. Ouvrage Traduit de 
 P Anglofs. Par J. E. Le Febvre. Prix 4s. 6d. relie. 
 
 11. LETTRES DE MADAME DU MONTIER, re- 
 cueillies par Madame le Prince de Beaumont, Auteur du 
 Magasin des Enfans, des Adolescentes, &c. Nouvelle Edition, 
 Soigneusement revue et coixigee d'apres les Meilleures Editions 
 de France. Prix 5s. reUe. 
 
 12. AN IN PRODUCTION to the EPISTOLARY STYLE 
 of the FRENCH ; or a Selection of Familiar Notes and Letters 
 in French ; for the \he of Schools. With an alphabetical Index 
 
 matory of the Words and idiomatical Expressions. By 
 Saulez, D. F. I.M. Farnham, Surry; Author of. 
 Theory and Practice of the French Language, and several other 
 School Books. Price gs. bound. 
 
 13. FIRST STEP TO FRENCH CONVERSATION; in 
 two Paris* 1. New methodical Vocabulary of the most useful 
 Words. 2; A Series of Lessons, containing the most common 
 Phrases. By C. Gros. Price 2s. (id. bound. 
 
 14. NEW ELEMENTS OF CONVERSATION; in two 
 
 Parts. 1. The several ways of saluting, addressing, enquiring, 
 &c. g. Familiar Dialogues, on the most interesting Subjects, 
 By C. GR03, Price 2s.6d. bound. 
 
 15. A FRENCH DICTIONARY, on a Plan entirely new ; 
 whnein all the Words are so arranged and divided as to render 
 their Pronunciation both easy and accurate. With an Index 
 pointing out the Place of each : producing what in the Authors 
 opinion was necessary and wanting toward the perfect Know. 
 ledijc of this Language, By Willxam Smitu, A.M. Price 
 <js. u*d. boards. 
 
 LBJs'12 
 
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
 
 nOA\ 77Q.9111 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS